Home

Welcome User Manual and Reference

1. lt Back Cancel Help Figure 27 The final steps Please set the options as shown in Figure 27 and click on FINISH to finish this wizard IMatch will now create the database and all associated files in the selected folder After a few seconds IMatch will open the workspace window for your new database The default options for this step of the wizard have been chosen carefully to fit the needs of new users The only two options you may ever want to change here are the category schema initially loaded into your database and the property database schema loaded initially to populate your database Additional Information Create categories based on this schema This option allows you to use one of the predefined category schemas delivered with IMatch If you do so you start your new database with a set of categories targeted at specific user groups Keywords This schema contains a list of keywords that are used by many of the online image companies and stock photography sites Universal Catalog This schema contains categories from all fields of photography and is targeted at professional collectors and photographers IPTC4 A standard used by most of the press agencies broadcasters and newspapers worldwide Contains numerous categories from all facets of human life politics and sports Private Catalog Default A category schema targeted at private users and semi professionals 363 Categories for IPTC Import This cate
2. Description This method closes the Wait Dialog opened with WaitDialogOpen WaitDialogSetPercentage Arguments NewPos The new percentage value Must be within the range given by Min and Max in WaitDialogOpen Description Sets a new percentage value for a Wait Dialog Call this method from within your lengthy operation to update the progress control in the Wait Dialog WaitDialogSetText 218 Arguments Text The new text for the Wait Dialog Description This method sets a new text for the Wait Dialog WaitDialoglsCanceled Return Value This method returns True if the user has pressed the Cancel button in the Wait Dialog Description Call this method regularly from within your lengthy operation to check if the user has canceled the operation If these method returns false proceed with your operation else abort OpenimageEditor Arguments FileName The fully qualified name of the file to open Must be in one of the supported image file formats Return Value This method returns True if the image document has been successfully opened Description Opens the given image file in an Image Editor Window OpenImageEditorBitmap Arguments Bitmap An IMBitmap object that contains the bitmap to be opened in the image editor Return Value This method returns True if the image has been successfully opened Description This method creates a new Image Editor Document from an IMBitmap object JPEGTranstorm Arguments FileNa
3. IMatch comes with a set of predefined category setups These category schemas allow you to start quickly But you can create your new categories when you need them rename existing categories or move categories within the category view See Category Setup Examples for some sample setups 90 See Categories for general information about categories Working with EXIF Data If you want to work with the EXIF data contained in your images Match has all the tools you need See EXIF Quick Display for information on how to view EXIF information in IMatch To edit the date and time information in your EXIF records you can use the EXIF Editor To import EXIF information into your property database use the EXIF Metadata Support and the EXIF Import Filter Working with IPTC Data If you are a photo professional IPTC support is one of the key features you can expect from an image management system Match contains a full fledged IPTC editor and also allows you to work with IPTC data in numerous ways See the sections below for more information The IPTC Import feature allows you to import selected IPTC contents into your property database Once the data is in the database you can use it for sorting and searching Running Selections for IPTC Data explains how you can search for IPTC information Working with removable media CD ROM DVD Digital Cameras and IMatch Smart Rename The smart rename module enables to you rename any number
4. Note These advanced features allow you to implement a workflow If you add new images to your database on a regular basis it may be useful to assign these images to categories or the bookmark collection if you plan to review the images later If you receive images over a wire service or the Internet additional information about images is often stored in ACDSee description IPTC fields or EXIF fields IMatch can transfer this information into your database automatically while adding or updating images Press NEXT to move to the final step If you are ready to go press FINISH to start the Scan operation The wizard has collected all required information for the selected task Please press Finish to start or Cancel to abort IMatch will now scan all specified folder s and add all images found to the database If one or more of the folders are already indexed by the database IMatch will add all new files found and update all modified files Depending on the number of images to scan and the image file format and size this process can take several minutes or even longer If you save the current settings as the default you will be able to use the Quick Rescan option to do rescans with a single mouse click in the future Figure 33 The final step of the database wizard Tip On this final dialog of the wizard you can check the SAVE THESE SETTINGS AS DEFAULT check box and safe these settings as the One cli
5. This method returns a PropertySetProperty object if this property is a reference property Type imptReference else it returns nothing The PropertyRecord class The PropertyRecord class This class represents one record from a property set It contains exactly as many elements as there are properties in the property set Each element is of type Variant and can easily be converted into any suitable format Properties Property Variant Gets or sets the property with the given name or index 1 based This is the default method Methods Update Updates the record in the database Call this method after you have made modifications on the record contents Update writes the current record contents back into the database and makes them persistent The ImageSorter class The ImageSorter class This class enables you to sort the contents of an ImageBucket or an Images collection object Using this object you can realize any thinkable sort order An ImageSorter object is always associated with a specific Database object You cannot sort objects from different databases with the same ImageSorter object If you try to add images from a different database to an ImageSorter object an error will be raised 246 To create an ImageSorter object use the ImageSorter method of the database class dim sorter as ImageSorter set sorter SomeDatabase ImageSorter Sort by file name and size sorter AddSortDefintion imisaFilename true
6. oooononnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnccconccnnnnccnnnnnrrrnccnnnnccnnnnns 329 TAQ Blocked EEA EEE EE E EEE 329 List BlOCk E E E AE E EE E A E A E E E tenets 330 QUOUNO uta 331 Modifying the IMIPTCUSR IPT configuration fil8 oonnnononcnnnndnnnnnooccnnnnn 332 Adding application specific fields ooo nmonninnnnnnnnnn noconnnnnnnncccrcccnnno 332 Adding new list blocks and list elementS oooooonnninnnnncnnnnninnnnccocacccnnnccnannns 332 EXIF Metadata Support 334 Advanced Features 334 IMatch Folder WatcCh ooooconnnnconccccnnnciconcnonnccnnnnconannnn ocn cnnnncn nana non cnn cnn ccnnnnns 334 IMatch Folder Watch oooococnnnccnccccnnncccononooncccnnnccnnnnnn ocn ccnnncnnnnnnn nn cnc cnn cnn 334 The Review Module oocccocccccncccnncccnncccnncccnnanonncnnnncncnnannnncnonncnnnnanonininns 335 The Review MoQul8 oocccconnoccnccncccccononncnncccnnncnnnnnnn cnn cc nnncnnnnnn nn nncnnnns 335 Sending Images via EMail oooonconnninocccccnnnccconananonccnnnncnnnnnnn nro cnnnncnnnnnn nn 337 HTML and World Wide Web with IMatch 337 Creating Web Pages with IMatch oooooccconnccnininicoccconnnconananannnccnnncnnnnnnnn nono 337 Configuring IMatch 337 OPIO Ssisassctorahenetahanihidohencscnvsencnenchenenenehenehenehenesenehenchenchonehonehonehonehenshens 337 Monitor Gamma sates vt cece veces vernetenetvestesvernetvavtvesteasbenetenchinehesetunetets 337 Slide SHOW Settings ssccecbs tes ctenesvavgentes ptenesyasenvtnn stones vestensteneteneheseheasteted
7. 15 76 MB 16 11 2002 11 53 06 DDatalClipart and Photos Tempitest a 2 672MB 02 11 2002 10 46 59 DDatalClipart and Photos Templtest ib 13 11 93 MB 30 09 2002 08 28 53 DOsta Clipat and Photos Tempitestl c 2 2 61 MB 1510 2002 08 50 32 OWeatarClipaet and Photos Tempitest WNigel 0 0 00 KB 26 09 2002 0027 35 DiDataiClipart and Photos Tempitest1Wigela 2 266 41 K8 01 10 2002 0017 18 123 Figure 211 The Database Report Importing Data from other applications Optimal Category Setups Categories Many of today s image management applications use keywords to allow you to structure your image collections These keywords are a more or less static and inflexible approach Usually no relations exist between the categories that allow you to model the database after your requirements You are forced to adjust your needs to the inflexible schema of these databases IMatch uses a new and exiting concept called dynamic categorizing or simple Categories Categories allow you to group your images and to create relations between the categories in your database Categories form a natural hierarchy like most things in your daily life By setting up categories and sub categories you can recreate the natural relations between your images There is no need anymore for thinking in Folders Drives and Image Files But Match does not stop here Category Formulas allow you to create even the most complex dependencies between your categories thus allowing you to m
8. 57 Configure Figure 45 The One Click window with the Configure button at the bottom and thee Move shortcuts visible colored Note Some panels in the One click bar have context menus right mouse button with additional options Configuring the One Click Dialog Bar When you open the OC bar for the first time it will be empty You need to add the folders categories splashers and scripts you want to use from this bar by clicking the CONFIGURE button at the bottom of the dialog bar The OC bar maintains two separate lists of folders one for copying files and one for moving files When you click on the CONFIGURE button Match will open the CONFIGURE dialog box for the currently selected list set by the tab control at the top of the window In the CONFIGURE dialog box you can ADD EDIT REMOVE and REARRANGE folders for the One Click window The operation is straightforward and should be no problem for you Start by adding a couple of folders to the Copy list by using the ADD button Folder List Add new folder One Click Configuration Add E photos D le ipte and NEWSML D Q Q DNQ130ENUO 38612 Click on an item to change its name WB Test Color HZ Background Color Allows you to color your entries for easier identification List of folders in current database Figure 46 The One Click Configuration Dialog As you can see after adding a folder to the list IMatch auto
9. Example Dim folder as IMFolder set folder db AddFolder c temp RemoveFolder Arguments Folder Folder object This object will be invalid after the folder has been removed DeleteFromDiskBoolean Set to true to remove the folder from disk WARNING THIS WILL DELETE THE FOLDER AND ALL FILES Set this to false if you only want to remove the folder from your database Return Values Returns an IMFileOperationResult to indicate success or error Description This method allows you to remove a folder from your database including all image references You can also physically delete the folder from your hard disk 231 RemoveCategory Arguments Category The category to be removed from your database This object will be invalid after the category has been removed Return Values Throws an exception if the operation fails Description Deletes the given category including all sub categories from your database ApplyTransforms Arguments Bitmap IMBitmap instance with a loaded image Image The image object corresponding to the bitmap Return Values Raises an exception in case of an error Description This method applies the thumbnail transformations associated with the given image to the given Bitmap object Example Set img Any method that returns an Image Dim bitmap as new IMBitmap bitmap Load img FileName db ApplyTransforms bitmap img GetOffLineCachelmage Arguments Image The image object for whi
10. Match will rescan all images in the selected folder s even if they already are indexed by the current database and have not changed since the last scan If Match scans a folder it checks whether an image is already indexed by the current database or not If there already is an entry for the image Match uses the date time of the image file on disk to check whether the image needs to be updated in the database or not This check can be irritated by some applications that modify the contents of an image but without changing the time stamp of the image file on disk In these cases you may want to enable this option to ensure a full update of all modified files Tip If you run a rescan with enforced update of all files this will also update all images in the off line cache Step 3 Choose which file formats to process If you want to add only images with a specific file format select the option ADD ONLY FILES IN ONE OF THESE FORMATS and choose the file formats from the list Take over the default options to add all supported image types to your database Usually you want to add all supported file formats Tip If you work with CRW files you usually don t want to add the THM files that come with each CRW file to your database Adding these files will give you duplicate images one CRW and one THM file Uncheck the EXIF Thumbnail THM file 85 format in this dialog box IMatch will still recognize THM files in the folders in your d
11. Opens the standard Windows folder properties dialog Opens the Windows Explorer for the selected folder Opens the Smart Rename dialog and allows you to rename all images in that folder in batch See section Smart Rename for more information about Smart Renaming Opens the Review dialog box This dialog allows you to quickly review all images in a folder See section The Review Module for more information Allows you to control the off line caching settings for the selected folder Removes the folder from the database Only the folder in the database is removed not the folder on your hard disk Physically deletes the folder and all sub folders Warning This will also delete all physical contents files and sub folders on your DISK Runs a slide show on all files in the folder See the section 29 Slide Show for more information about the Slide Show feature Toggle Friendly Switches between physical folder name mode and Friendly Names Name mode Hint You can control the display options and size of the folder thumbnails from the OPTIONS PREFERENCES menu You may want to turn off the folder thumbnails or use a different size to see more folders at a time Moving and Copying Folders You can move or copy folders within the database view by just dragging the folder you want to move copy and drop it at the folder you want to use as the target folder IMatch will bring up a dialog box asking you what operation you want to perfo
12. Working with EXIF Datassist Ea aiaa 94 EXIF Metadata SUpPOlt ccccnonncoccccccnnccconancnnnccnnnncnnnnnnnnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnns 94 Windows XP EXIF InformatiON oooocccnnnccnnnnccconcccnnnconananannncnnancnnnnnns 94 EXIF Quick DISPl Ay trail 94 The EXIF o O TETE 95 EXEIMPO atada 96 Preparing your Image Property SMt ooooccconncccincccccccccnnnccnanaaannncnnnnnos 97 Configuring the EXIF Importer ccccseeceeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeteeeeaaaes 97 Supported EXIF FieldS oooooocconnncccccccnnnccononcnccncccnnncnnnnnrn nn cnn nn cnn anar rn nc 98 Using EXIF Variables oooooooccccnnnncnnncccccccccnncconannnrn cnc narco nannnr nn cnn 98 EXIF and IPTC varlables ooooocooccccnnncconoconcccncnnconnnnannncccnnn conan nono ccnnn cnn 102 RAW File Formats oooooooccccnnccconococoncccnnnonnnnnnn nn ccnnnnconnnnn nn nn cnn nn cnnnnnnnnnno 104 Canon CRW Options coccccccncnccoccccnnncconananannncnnnncnnnnnnn nn nccanancnnnnnns 104 Kodak DCR Options oocccoonnccccccnoncconananonncccnnnccnnnnn ocn cnnnncnanannnnnnnos 105 Working with IPTC Data oooonooocccnnnnccnnnccoocnccnnncconannnnnnccnnnncnnnnnnnn nn cnn nnncnnnnnns 105 IPTG SUPDOMN fancies 105 Describing Digital IMages oooonnnnccnnccnnnnnnnnnnccocnccnnncnananarn nc cnn 106 RT IM POM es ans O 106 Running Selections for IPTC Data oooocnnnnnncnccccnnncconananancnnnnncnnnnnnn once 107 The IPTC Configuration files cecececceeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeteeenaeee
13. if a Child both belongs to Paul and Mary you put the child s photos into the Children sub categories of Paul and Mary But what if you have a photo that shows both Mary and Paul You can add the photo to both categories Or you create a new category named Mary and Paul and put the images there Or both Categories are very flexible and allow you to do almost everything you want Category Formulas Powerful But Match does not stop here It even allows you to create category formulas to specify complex dependencies between categories For example you may create a category named Animals but not fish by combining the contents of the category Animals with the contents of the category Fish using a formula like this Animals NOT Fish When you click on the category Animals but not fish Match will automatically evaluate the formula and will show only the images that are in the category Animals including its sub categories but which are not in the category Fish Category formulas can also refer to categories from totally different segments of your virtual image view Consider the following categories Location Beach City Mountain People Female Male Cars Porsche BMW Audi GM Ford If you would like to create a category People at the beach you could combine the contents of Beach all images related to the topic Beach with the contents of People all images showing people by defining a formula like this P
14. imforFilelsReadOnly File is read only imforFileOperationFailed File operation failed Windows error imforDatabaseFailure Database error imforFileExists File already exists Description This method allows you to remove a file from the database and optionally also from disk Movelmage Arguments Image The image to be moved TargetFolder The target folder for the move operation NewName The new name for the file ReplacelfExist If a file with the same name already exists in the target folder this flag controls if it will be overwritten deleted or not If you set this to False and a file with the same name exist in the target folder the Move operation will fail with the result imforFileExists KeepProperties Set this to True to keep the properties of the original file during the Move Return Values This method returns an IMFileOperationResult to indicate the outcome of the 224 operation imforSuccess Successful completion imforGeneralFailure General unknown error imforFileDoesNotExist File does not exist imforFilelsReadOnly File is read only imforFileOperationFailed File operation failed Windows error imforDatabaseFailure Database error imforFileExists File already exists Description This method allows you to move a file on disk and at the same time in your database Copylmage Arguments Image The image to be copied TargetFolder The target folder for the copy operation NewName The new name for the file R
15. 10px Right 10px and Bottom 100px This results in an output image like Figure 153 Adding Shadows You may add a shadow to your bitmap by selecting one of the shadow alignment options The DEPTH parameter controls the depth or size of the shadow With the OPACITY control you can adjust how dark the shadow is rendered on the canvas bitmap If you enable the BLUR effect IMatch will also soften the shadow edges Figure 153 A target image with a solid colored canvas The canvas has a solid white color and there are 10 pixel margins around the image The lower border has a height of 100 pixels to leave us some room for adding text and a logo 293 Figure 154 The same image but with a shadow effect Next we add a one pixel border in some shade of red to the original image and use a background bitmap to replace the white canvas mi fi 4 MA Color IV Background Bitmap fpplication Bitmaps tlestBcktxI5 jpg ES Tie y As you can see the background bitmap has been loaded from the folder referenced by the global variable Application Bitmaps You may use a hard coded folder name here or a folder that is relative to any of your variables If you use a variable you can easily change the location of your background images and tiles without changing the Batch Processor presets The background image used here is a 100 x 100 bitmap that can be seamlessly tiled to fill a canvas of any size Make sure that you s
16. Application Version User variables always start with the prefix User as in User MyVar Local variables also start with a prefix depending on the variable set The Contact Sheet Builder publishes the variable sets Sheet and Image The Batch Exporter module publishes the variable set Image The Variables Selector IMatch provides a convenient Variables Selector dialog You can access this dialog wherever variables can be used Variables Eg EG Globals Y Application Bitmaps Application DateLong Y Application DateShort Y Application 4 Long representation of the current date Y Application N Montag 25 September 2000 Y Application OutputFolder Y Application Templates Y Application Time Y Application TimeNoSec Y Application Version User Contact Sheets E Image Y Image BPP xl Cancel Figure 96 The Variables Selector showing the CONTACT SHEET BUILDER context Most dialog boxes and property sheets contain a special Variables button next to the edit control where you can use variables By clicking this button you open the Variables Selector dialog see Figure 96 200 To select a variable click on it and then press the SELECT button to close the dialog and insert the variable into the current edit field Alternatively you can simply double click on a variable name The variable name is inserted at the current cursor location If there is a selection in the edit field
17. For each image that is contained in the schema and the database the Image property record will be added to the target database Importing a Property Schema Use the IMPORT EXPORT MANAGER to start the IMPORT PROPERTY DATABASE FROM XML SCHEMA import module Import Property Database Schema from XML x Schema Filename EStemp my schema imps Se Cancel Schema Format IMatch Category Schema Standard Format Help Options C Import Schema only Image File Mapping Map image files via CRC checksum C Map image files via URI Available Property Sets Y Image MLocation MCamera Scanner MA Photanranher H Please note This module will only import property sets that do not already exist in your database If a property set exits it will only be overwritten if it is empty You may want to check your property database in advance for these constraints Figure 171 The Import dialog for XML schemas Select the file you want to import Select the format of the XML document you want to import Currently there is only one schema supported After selecting a file the list box at the bottom of the dialog will show you the property set schemas contained in the document If you want to import only specific property set schemas remove the check mark before the ones that should be skipped Several options give you further control about the import process 305 Import Schema only Enable this option if
18. However here are detailed explanations what these options do Also add sub folders recursively This options controls whether or not Match includes sub folders of the selected folder during a scan In most cases you should leave this checked Don t add empty folders If you check this Match will skip folders without images during a scan If a folder does not contain images it will not show up in your database This option is checked by default Skip hidden or system folders If you want to skip folders marked as hidden or system during the scan process leave this option checked Create Off line cache for this folder automatically This option allows you to create off line cache images for all images in the scanned folder This option is useful if you re working with images on removable media and if you want to save some time by creating the off line cache images on the fly during the scan See section The Off line Cache for more information about the Off Line Caching in IMatch Note IMatch will only add cache entries for new or updated files If you do a rescan on a folder that already exists in your database unmodified files will not be added to your off line cache To add these images open the OFF LINE CACHE PROPERTIES DIALOG from the context menu of the folder and refresh the cache manually See section The Off line Cache for more information Force update of all files This option is seldom used If you check this box
19. IMatch will open the Run Selection dialog box presenting you all predefined selection types From this dialog box you can either directly run a selection create a new selection or edit an existing selection You run an Ad hoc selection from the SEARCH menu Ad hoc selections allow you to execute the most frequently used selections file name image properties 129 You run a selection from within the SELECTION VIEW You normally run selections from this view only when you create new selection templates User starts selection using Run Selection command User starts an Ad hoc selection Selection Dialog Run from list Edit Existing Selection New Interactive Selection Selection gets executed Result Set window opens Figure 47 The Selection Process The result of a query in IMatch is called a result set A result set contains 1 to many images depending on your search criteria Result sets are displayed in a special window the Result Window Hint Many of the selections available in IMatch work with a set of original images These selectors use specific attributes of these original images color shape file format and search for similar images You can only run these queries when you select one or more images before a set of thumbnails a folder a category or images in your bookmark collection Regular Expressions Regular Expressions This section cove
20. Note The EXIF Importer is very robust Even if your EXIF information does not conform to the standard IMatch will load as much information as it can In the worst case IMatch will skip the EXIF information for an invalid file and continue with the next file automatically You can check the IMatch logfile imatchlog log in your temporary folder for more information in these cases IMatch automatically stores the settings you define together with your database The next time you run the EXIF importer all mappings will be in place and you only need to click on OK to start the import process Important If you modify your Image property set you need to update the mapping to be able to run a successful EXIF import Supported EXIF Fields The following table contains a list of EXIF fields Standard EXIF 2 1 2 2 supported by most cameras and scanners Depending on your camera model and camera producer your camera may record additional fields Please contact your camera vendor for a list of proprietary non standard maker note fields and additional fields supported by your camera model For more information about the EXIF Standard see the home page of the Japan Electronic Industry Development Association JEIDA at http www jeida or jp For the full standard document see http www pima net standards itl0 PIMA 15740 exif htm EXIF information can also be found at http www exif org These documents also contain a description of al
21. Sp oa cd 121 External Applications he LoS ME e ee 375 External BT EA tddi deta 45 SS A paias 161 External Open dis deids 38 external storace Ml rte casio rieteds soteestup eno 26 E AA E E E sted otatoce setae devesutats EEA EE E 185 373 F RaceNaMe tao too EE T TAOS 268 270 Family CALEBOLY SETUP sis ie aeaa Teea AEE TE a EAE EEST EEA AT AEE EARE 60 l Va ORIEN EAA AET AE E E ES 378 Faster with the One click Bar iirinn eere e a o a EEan Te EEE Enes 57 Feedback Scriptni hiiu nia a a a a a e idol a a E EnS 281 Field WOCKING IN the NE 21 EEEIEE E ENEN E NENE 270 File date and time and IPTC onnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnonononnnononnnonononnnononononononononinoninininos 341 Fil POrMat x22snchipee skit a T E E PRL ER ER ERR RR 183 ANC SElECTIONS A di iia 145 Batch Procesado 289 OptlOns scesckiasdi dink itiavein kh eliaiwin E S hill ainda E EE inant 183 File Format Setting Simonina minh o ish ainn cin hanna cine 339 PIE FOTIMALS es sh AN 145 Pile Forma Saas eed Re Saw OE NR RS 93 File Name and Selections E 146 Pile Name Selector aia 126 E Ca a 127 PINGING taa ila ol Rai eal Salil Saal 126 Searching JOT soris ine e EEE A A Sk 127 File Operations cintas io ita A ad 52 Elle Properties iia acacia ani 36 41 File Size MECA Ac 145 ordatabaisesur ia ade 19 FileExtension Or ora a a a e e e 265 Hime a e E a O reto 221 227 238 FileNameNoExXt ooccccccccncnnnonononononononononnnononononononononononononononononono
22. TIFF 16 Bit RLE TIFF 16 Bit Lossless JPEG TIFF 24 Bit Uncompressed TIFF 24 Bit Uncompressed CYMK TIFF 24 Bit Uncompressed YCC TIFF 24 Bit RLE TIFF 24 Bit RLE CYMK TIFF 24 Bit RLE YCC TIFF 24 Bit JPEG YCC 444 TIFF 24 Bit JPEG YCC 422 TIFF 24 Bit JPEG YCC 411 TIFF 24 Bit Lossless JPEG TIFF 32 Bit Uncompressed 253 254 d imbfTIFF32_Uncompresse d_CYMK imbfTIFF32_RLE imbfTIFF32_RLE_CYMK imbfBMP1 imbfBMP4 imbfBMP4_RLE imbfBMP8 imbfBMP8_RLE imbfBMP16 imbfBMP24 imbfBMP32 imbfWFX_G31D imbfWFX_G4 imbfWMF8 imbfWMF24 imbfEMF8 imbfEMF24 imbfWPG1 imbfWPG4 imbfWPG8 imbfICO1 imbfICO4 imbflCO8 imbfICO24 imbfCUR1 imbfCUR4 imbfCUR8 imbfCUR24 imbfCUT imbfPPM_ASCII imbfPPM_Binary TIFF 32 Bit Uncompressed CYMK TIFF 32 Bit RLE TIFF 32 Bit RLE CYMK BMP 1 Bit BMP 4 Bit BMP 4 Bit RLE BMP 8 Bit BMP 8 Bit RLE BMP 16 Bit BMP 24 Bit BMP 32 Bit WFX G31D WFX G4 WMF 8 Bit WMF 24 Bit EMF 8 Bit EMF 24 Bit WPG 1 Bit WPG 4 Bit WPG 8 Bit ICO 1 Bit ICO 4 Bit ICO 8 Bit ICO 24 Bit CUR 1 Bit CUR 4 Bit CUR 8 Bit CUR 24 Bit CUT PPM ASCII PPM Binary imbfPGM_ASCII imbfPGM_Binary imbfPBM_ASCIl imbfPBM_Binary imbflFF1_ILBMRLE imbflFF1_CATRLE imbflFF2_ILBMRLE imbflFF2_CATRLE imbflFF3_ILBMRLE imbflFF3_CATRLE imbflFF4_ILBMRLE imbflFF4_CATRLE imbflFF5_ILBMRLE imbflFF5_CATRLE imbflFF6_ILBMRLE imbflFF6_CATRLE imbflFF7_ILBMRLE imbflFF7_CATRLE imbflFF8_ILBMRLE imbflFF8_CATRLE imbflFF24_IL
23. The Database Busy indicator flashes when the database is busy The Memory Status indicator allows you to control the available system resources It this indicator turns red or even light red you ll need to free some system resources by closing other applications If the indicator is red Match will suffer from the resource shortage of your system To get the best possible performance try to keep this indicator blue Note The memory indicator reflects the amount of available memory that is reported by Windows Depending on your Windows version and your configuration the indictor may not reflect the real amount of memory available The Script indicator flashes when a script is executed The key indicators show the state of various system keys Some Notes on Memory Usage On a machine with 128 MB of RAM an IMatch database can handle about 100 000 images if no other applications are running On a 512 MB system Match can handle about 500 000 to 750 000 images per database If the memory indicator is always red on your system disable the database full caching option Run the Database Wizard choose the third option MODIFY DATABASE OPTIONS and disable the ENABLE IN MEMORY CACHING OF DATABASE OBJECTS Database Options x Here you can modify various aspects of your database Get better performance or fine tune other settings that affect your daily work Change Database Password lt Back Cancel Help Fig
24. This code sequence checks the database object for the special value nothing If the active database is nothing or NULL a message box is displayed to inform the user and then the current subroutine is exited Accessing Folders There are several methods to get access to the folders indexed by an Match database The first method is the access by name as shown in the following code fragment Dim f As IMFolder Set f db Folders i photos villa If Not Is Nothing Then Debug Print f Name End If Here we query the active database for a folder with the fully qualified name i photos villa If the database contains such a folder the returned object will be not nothing and we can use the Debug method to dump the name of the folder to the scripting output window To iterate over each folder in a database use the Folders method of the Database class Dim f As IMFolder For Each f In db Folders Debug Print f Path Next f 274 This code fragment dumps the full path of each folder in the database specified by db to the scripting output window To get the child folders sub folders of a given folder use the Children method of the IMFolder class Dim f As IMFolder Dim cf As IMFolder For Each f In db Folders Debug Print f Path Now the child folders if any For Each cf In f Children Debug Print cf Name Next cf Next f To get the number of images contained in a folder use the Images method of the IMFold
25. category Beach and in the category People To create a category that contains all images from Beach and all images from the category People you would use the Boolean OR operator People or beach Beach OR People Consider an image with two persons male and female and a car at the beach This images is assigned to the categories People Female People Male Location Beach and Cars Ford Category formulas allow you to create powerful combinations of the images contained in several even remote categories By combining several categories using formulas you will get the maximum out of your dynamic categories You should definitely play with this exiting feature Remember the example from the introduction of this section Birds in North America How to create a category that contains all photos of Birds taken in North America Animals Birds Location Afrika America North South Australia Pacific Europe Birds_In_North_America Animals Birds AND Location America North Note If a category has a formula it first evaluates the images assigned directly to it then evaluates the formula and combines the result with the images in the sub categories All three results are combined via OR so no images are duplicated in this process Category Properties You can control many features for a category using the categories properties dialog To open this dialog select a category and then press lt Alt gt lt Return gt or choose
26. color resolution of 24 Bits Per Pixel 16 Million colors Resize Arguments Width The new width for the bitmap object Height The new height for the bitmap object Options Optional This argument allows you to control the quality and behavior of this operation Use one of the following values imroNormal Normal Resize Fastest but may result in a decreased overall quality imroResample Resample Results in better quality when you enlarge a bitmap imroBicubic Bicubic Resample Results in better quality when you shrink bitmaps Description This method allows you to change the size of a bitmap object If you want to keep the correct aspect ration during the resize use the CaculateSizeWithAspect method to calculate the correct measurements See also the Scale method Grayscale Converts the image to grayscale 256 different shades of gray CopyToClipboard Copies the bitmap to the Windows clipboard using a device independent DIB format CopyFromClipboard Copies the Windows clipboard contents into this bitmap Copy Creates a copy from the given bitmap CopyRect Arguments pBitmap The source bitmap to copy from 257 X Column to copy from Y Row to copy from Width Number of pixels to copy in horizontal direction Height Number of pixels to copy in vertical direction Description Copies the given rectangle from the other bitmap This method enables you to create composings from multiple images or to combine the contents
27. for example all images on two different CD ROM s or images contained in folders on different drives 165 Properties for FOOTBALL eae 21xl Description OR AND NOT amp EY Expression Folder file D Data photos lt DELTA 1008886567 gt J Enable Color Coding normal categories only Figure 69 Folder Formulas You create a folder formula the same way as other formula categories but instead of combining other category names you combine folder names In Figure 18 you see the category properties dialog with a folder formula It starts with Folder file followed by the name of the folder the media label and media serial number This is an URI unique resource identifier as it is used by Match internally to uniquely identify an resource like a file or folder Folder file c photos lt Label Serial gt If you close this dialog with OK Match will store this formula with the category Whenever the contents of the category need to be calculated for example if you want to view them IMatch will query the database for all files in that folder and use the result of this query as the contents of the category If the folder uses in this example has sub folders the images in these folders are not considered as part of the result set To include the sub folders of a given folder recursively in a formula use RFolder instead of Folder in the expression RFolder file
28. hi Aves besoin aa a a k 121 The Database Wizard Adding folders and files ooonnnccnnonccnonccnoncccnncnononccnonccnoncccnnaconnnn no 83 The Help Mentir nina tapa inhalation S 374 The ImageMagick Library eee eesecceseecesneeesscecssceceeecesceecsseecssceceseecesaeecsseecsseeceneeeesaes 357 The IMatch Photo Gall Vitara paper 122 The IPTC Editor User Interface onzas dada hai el dali canis 323 The memory Indicators A I A E 34 The Tools Meninas 375 Thesaurus PIE a a E a a a tN 326 A a ee a a 323 326 327 328 PTC taa A ii 323 TOM cad 341 Keeping WA CRW cuota a 341 OPtONS caida ita cados 341 Thumb Lens oooccccncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononininininons 35 37 38 ON 22 23 Resetting Transformations 20 0 0 cecceseceseeceseeceseeeesseecsscecseecesaeecsaeecsseessneeeesaeessaeers 56 404 Thumbnail Properties AN categories irnos ea rE E e EE S E necuvadae cous ceanccevachnceauacee ceaveceaceancede 174 Thumbnail Property Window essseseseseseseseressrresiessirertssreseressressreseresereseresteestrestrssressresete 321 Chub ath S176 ved ccses ica 362 365 thumbnail transformations ccecsecceeesscceeeeeceeeceeneeeeeeeaeeeceeeneeeseeneeeesseaeeeeeenaeeeseeneeeeeeeas 112 Thumbnail View sais csiesesccsgecenccesscan cons scancevsccaa cuesecdaces veda cus ucdevevsuecaaevsncesdevatscseeverecavevenecsesvanes 25 o AEE E E 35 Thumbnail Viewer enee A A A 35 36 Thumbnai
29. imreference REQUIRED POID ID REQUIRED PropertySetRef IDREF IMPLIED PropertyRef IDREF IMPLIED gt lt ELEMENT Default PCDATA gt lt ATTLIST Default Z CDATA IMPLIED OID CDATA IMPLIED gt lt EL NT CodePage PCDATA gt lt EL NT CurrencySymbol PCDATA gt lt EL NT Data Set gt lt EL NT Set SName Row gt lt ATTLIST Set PSOID IDREF REQUIRED gt lt EL NT SName PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT Row URI CRC MID MSER Val gt lt ELEMENT URI PCDATA gt lt EL NT CRC PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT MID PCDATA gt lt EL NT MSER PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT Val PCDATA gt lt ATTLIST Val CID CDATA REQUIRED gt Note The schema presented here may be outdated Please check the impropertydb dtd document type definition in your Match program folder for the latest version of this DTD The IMatch Logfile IMatch creates and maintains a detailed logfile in your TEMP folder This logfile contains information about each action executed the internal states of the application during execution and all other type of useful information Whenever Match recognizes an error or unexpected condition it logs information to the logfile This information is extremely useful for me to diagnose problems
30. normal functionality like resizing color conversion or format conversion you can add all the information contained in your database and your property sets to the target image You can even add company logos or watermarks with very little effort If you want to do more complex stuff you can run the Batch Processor multiple times each time processing the output of the previous run to form new target images This way you can add company logos watermarks and any other imaginable type of information Using pre built Canvas Bitmaps If you want all your images to have the same background you can use a pre built canvas bitmap and arrange all other Batch Processor output onto this background image For example take this 400 x 400 pixels bitmap 298 Sample Image Only for demonstration purposes IMATCH Figure 165 The empty pre built canvas bitmap This is a normal bitmap that has been prepared in a paint application It can be of any color depth 24 bit preferred and size Now we need to fill in all remaining information to produce a result like the one shown in Figure 166 Sample Image Only for demonstration purposes IMATCH Aloha Hawaii Great beach shoot shortly after sunrise A couple of palms at the beach nice shadows HIGOS JPG 540 x 480 Y 71 226 PO sa lo Figure 166 The finished target image Start by making the canvas the same size as the canvas bitmap 400 x 400 pixels Make sure that the RELATIVE
31. screen size preview of your images and the embedded IPTC and EXIF information even if the media is not in the drive Read section The Off line Cache about the Off line Cache to learn how to enable off line caching How Match links images and media When you add images to your database Match keeps track of the drive from which you ve scanned the image the media in that drive if it is a removable media and some other information required to access that image later This information is stored in so called media nodes within the object oriented Match database repository Whenever IMatch needs access to a physical file if verifies that the correct media is in the correct drive If this is not the case Match handles this situation in one of two ways a If the offline image is visible in the thumbnail viewer IMatch disables commands like Move Copy RENAME or DELETE and marks the file as offline You can only use commands of this group when the affected images are online a If IMatch needs access to physical file because you want to open it in the IMAGE EDITOR or it is needed during a BATCH PROCESSOR or a CONTACT SHEET BUILDER operation IMatch will bring up the Offline File Handler dialog box and prompt you to insert the correct media in the correct drive Note If you index file from a media and you insert that media into a different drive later you need to relocate the corresponding folder node in the Database View Use the REL
32. sorter AddSortDefintion imisaSize true Run the sort sorter SortImages imgcollection Sort using a sort profile dim sorter as ImageSorter set sorter SomeDatabase ImageSorter sorter SortProfile By Date and Time sorter SortImages imgcollection Properties SortProfile String R W The sort profile name to be used for sorting an image collection or image bucket The profile must be one of the profiles in the current database Methods Clear Removes the contents of the sorter resetting all sort definitions AddSortDefinition Arguments Attribute Specifies the sort criteria Use one of the following values imisaDistance Sort by distance result sets only imisaFilename Sort by file name imisaFilenameSmart Sort by file name smart file name sorting imisaFoldername Sort by folder imisaSize Sort by file size imisaWidth Sort by width imisaHeight Sort by height imisaDateTime Sort by date and time imisaFileFormat Sort by file format imisaProperty Sort by image property Use the PropertyName argument to specify the property field Ascending Set this to True to sort in ascending order of False to sort in descending order PropertyName Optional If you want to sort using property set fields this argument contains the property field name 247 Description You can use any number of sort definitions with a single ImageSorter object Use AddSortDefintion multiple times to add more than one criterion to the
33. 95 Usage of variables in the Contact Sheet Builder The variable concept even extends to multiple property sets If your Image property set contains a reference property to another property set this property set is also accessible as a variable Say you added a property Location to your Image property set that links to the property set Location in your database Image Property Set Title Description Location gt Links to the Location property set Location Property Set 199 Name State ZIP Description If you want to display or print this information somewhere in IMatch you can simply use the variables Image Properties Title to refer to the title of the image or Image Properties Location ZIP to refer to the ZIP code of the location property associated with the image The name of the property Location always comes first followed by the property name ZIP Context The Image variable set is only available within the context of specific modules and only when there is a selection of images Read the documentation for the CONTACT SHEET BUILDER and the BATCH EXPORT module for more information about their published variable sets Remember Always use and when you enter variables instead of normal text IMatch only recognizes variables when they are contained in these parentheses Variable names are case sensitive Image is different to image Global variables always start with the prefix Application as in
34. A workflow hierarchy It is obvious that you want to have your images in only one of these categories at a given time You can enforce this rule by setting the Un assign the image from all categories with the same parent option in the category properties dialog If you assign an image to one of the categories below the States category it will be removed from all other categories below that category first You need to enable this option for all categories below the State category Tip You can automatically assign images to a category in this case the category New during a rescan by setting the corresponding option in the Database Wizard IPTC Special Tools On the first pane of the IPTC editor you have access to some special tools These tools allow you to Add one or more keywords to all selected files Remove one or more keywords for all selected files Import keywords and categories from your existing images to initially fill your thesaurus To use any of these tools just press the Run button and follow the instructions given on screen The Description Pane On the first pane of the IPTC Editor you can enter general image information and captions The meaning of the different fields is specified in the IPTC standard but may also depend on your work situation or in house standards Match makes no assumptions about the contents of these fields 368 Some of the fields on this pane have a length limit according to the IPTC sp
35. CUSTOMER The IMatch Home Page and Forum If you find a problem have an idea or need information about IMatch visiting the Match home page at http www photools com is always a first choice Here you find up to date information about IMatch news the Match Frequently Asked Questions document and much more To register Match and to become a registered customer please click on the Register Now link at the top of the entry page The Match User Forum is a place to ask questions and to share information about Match related issues ideas and suggestions with hundreds of other users Please see the photools com home page for the link to the user forum If you need help with IMatch or you have any other question regarding Match or another photools com product send an email to support photools com Restrictions in the 30 day trial version The unregistered version may be used for a 30 day trial period only After this period you must either register Match and pay the shareware fee or remove Match completely from your computer system Note Please see http www photools com for more information about registration benefits and the registration process After the 30 day trial period Match will open your databases only in read only mode No modifications can be made to such databases but you can still use all non mutating commands Additionally in the trial version some of the features may be disabled work differentl
36. DB Select Categories Dialog Box Demo Ej Select Folders Dialog Box Demo B Wait Dialog Demo V Develop imatch3 scripts Script Tree Info Pane Calculate Total File Size Written by Mario M Westphal Copyright 1999 2001 Mario M Westphal This macro calculates the total file size for all files in the currently selected folder category or result set Please activate a folder category or result set before running this macro Good demonstration on the active object metaphor used in IMatch scripting Please note that IMatch only considers files currently indexed by the database Non image files in the same folder are not included in the calculation Calculate Total File Size 2 bas Last modified on 27 12 2000 993 Bytes css Heb Figure 185 The IMatch Script Manager Note An IMatch script always consists of two files The script file with the source code has the file extension bas and the file that contains the script information has the same file name but the extension bai Always keep these two files together Running your first script Now we ll give it a try Open the DATABASE VIEW and select a folder Then open the Script Manager via the Match toolbar or the SCRIPTING menu Locate and select the Script labeled Calculate Total File Size in the Script Tree on the left In the local toolbar of the Script Manager click on the button with the little green Run Icon Alternatively you can do
37. Date R O Date and time of the last update IsOnline Boolean R O Returns True if the associated media is online FolderThumbnail Image R O Returns the folder thumbnail image for this folder or nothing if the folder is image or has no folder thumbnail Methods Children Description Returns a collection with all child folders sub folders of this folder If the folder has no children this method returns nothing Images Description Returns a collection with all images in this folder If the folder contains no images this method returns nothing Parent Description Returns the parent folder of this folder If the folder has no parent folder this method returns nothing TotallmageFileSize Description Calculates the size of all image files in the given folder This method only counts the images that are indexed by the current database Other files in the same folder or images not currently indexed are ignored The Category class The Category class The class Category represents a category in your database This class gives you access to all category attributes the formula the children and parent categories and the images contained in the category 234 Properties Name String Gets and sets the name of the category Description String Gets and sets the category description FullName String R O Returns the full name for this category including all parent categories Formula
38. Display options for EXIF neisuna nh dine a aE E dink al E EE E 347 options for IP TOv senna aed Rian ib whic E E E E E E ee ive 347 Quick Moyse eran are E E i 38 R rag pedN ESS rta eds labor data 187 RAW O aii awe be 104 105 RDBMS wrssietsyisrsva teste egbsscsachuieees eiii ita 303 Read File cisne 270 ReadOnly isis o diia di 221 A TR 245 Rectangle ZOOM LO citar TE ETATE tune dees odiada casadas dada des data dias dades des 181 Rectangular LO isa aa 181 Recycle BI ro cae bata oaks Let recat eal eh meee eats 53 342 BOO EEE Ste Bes Seek att eee E ht Ne else Ma de Gets Gel ete a ule elt at 373 REGIE yess ete os et cee ae eet se et eat A ana see eas anes eect ae ae eee os 184 RedraWi cor ot tieso 221 RETO iia de 245 246 data Pecuaria 76 ReferenceProperty ocer oiie aea E a ET a decias 246 References between properties 0 A ah A 77 Refreshlmag io enea tn Bai Reelin seh eee etn 227 Refreshlimage s citas Scien Rese ios Se ee kh Se ee 227 Reister nEs ieren iin a tano o apta 378 Registration benetits ci ia 14 Regular backups ula na a tias 20 File Names Searching for Searching for File Names Power Search ooooocccnnnoncccnococccnnnnnos 127 Regular Express A A oer eae ie eee 127 Regular Expression ads ai 130 Re 1m stall TMiatchies A A dad 20 Relational Database Systems oooonnononoonononaononornnnononnonononnrno non nn nono a nan nena nr nono EEN rones 303 relations ATI formulas ti di dt did 169 AI NN 124 Relocating Folder
39. E E E E EE eine 334 Lora 195 OAMI adi EEE 350 Formulas obli 234 235 236 238 Formulas EEEE E 65 Categories doi ida 124 category PEPE Aas AL eA AU ASIN AA Ai ae ais 366 Special Catepory formulas sihrini hed slsbeesugissadsaisboevehs losdeablsbooesthsbaAagiesomstdseedeaplibs 359 A cdvatsssodeadesceesdscaosuanceegcveTa ahs RE ASEE AEE ERAEN RENASTE EEE ESIE 184 Frames ad E E EEATT E A ae cs 186 Friendly Names ninia ideada iaa 27 28 RN 30 FriendlyName coincida 233 FullName circa od alas 235 A NN 194 FEUZZIMESS GAN cad 148 149 G Gall vita in ia iii 123 337 CARLOS A A A A EI E 60 61 62 63 G aMmM aaae e ka E EA a EA E E E E A EE E EE 189 Gamma COHEN ed A et 337 Monitor Gamma cuicos a do 337 Gamma valles iii SH a hd Eh eh 190 GamMMaC orrec asiitoe Bi A A eR al a ee 249 Gaussian Burs 3 fics A a ed A E 185 GaissiamB liar ci cnans oss ole Soak ek oad cack ia dd eee HEELS ecu oed EONS ap eed aa oe ds 258 General Matching tinc ee ahead 150 151 General Settings a nt isis 341 391 GetApplication Variable 0 ce eea ean areena E E EEES TE SEE EE ESS 212 GetBounding Boksin e e a E en ea aie E eae E AN aN aa Sa 269 GetMedia nfo i E EEA A E ae a a ENE E ae Ta 216 GetOffLine Cachelimage 0 eee eesecsseeceseecssseeesseecsacecseecesaeeesaeecseecseessseeeesaeessaeers 232 Gettin amp Heliconia 357 GetUserVariableuiioia ariadna a 212 Global variable Application BItMApS ooooocccoocccnooncnonccnonaconnnnonon
40. E aise einai ne ein 368 Editing single and multiple files 00 0 0 lee eeeceeeseeeesneecseecseecseecesaeeesaeecsaeecsseeesseeessaeessaes 324 Editor and Slide Show ci c4s ss mania 340 Emaileen n diana 92 93 sending IMACES oie chien wink E ah ain ain AE nh alan ain a NES 92 Embedded color profiles diccionarios 345 Embedded IP TC aid 46 EDO isa 185 262 EnableUserAbort aim naaa 212 Enter Keyan iones 341 Entries iia 243 EqualiZer iaa ada daba aia 189 Histost m pna e E A EE 189 190 Errata E E E E E E EE 16 EOTS i eno Sauk A EEA E E EE E A EES 274 Ad CUP E ee A 274 Exchanging Category CAMS iii a fetiecks EEE EE EE sieteevbeeetebens 315 XECUtION planes i451 his iiss a A A E ia 154 EXIF Batch Pro cessof isis ccsisenccss seed sevssoes cost swede ceveces ctevouebesuvetenceus ccebesvbeteneduacosbe sbeeubocubeevberutecuoenst 300 hist of supported Helden ieee ye a ee RE RE I ES Ea 98 Maker MOLES oi a cia 102 389 renamino HES coa ay AN ae ees ieee 318 Write Support NN 94 EXIF and IPTC variables iercssccscsecidecs veces a vetaveee vesa ocasion 102 EXIF Editor enen EERE EEE E EE E A OE ONE 95 96 EXIF Import srn a E E EE EE E sesion dues 87 94 97 98 PXIP Md ie a hel 348 EXTPsMaker Notes 20 200 ei Se ee eG tas 380 EXIF Quick Display ci een een ee 321 347 EXIF Rotations 555i ek et ee le 339 EXE dada do 94 IPTC Quick Display sd 95 Explorer ica ias aa aa 41 Explorer Context Men ules ui a 38 Exporta dis 24 286 Extending
41. Finds all file names containing the words beach and not car The Sketch and Color selector With the SKETCH AND COLOR selector you are able to find images that contain specific colors or images that match a sketch you draw Selections like Show me all images which are mostly red or Show me all images which are blue on the top and green at the bottom are very easy to do with this powerful selector type The OVERALL COLOR mode allows you to define the colors that you are looking for in an image and also the overall percentage of these colors For example see Figure 54 for a selector definition that selects images that contain large amounts of blue and yellow 147 IMatch demo imd Database Edit Image View Options Window Help IA EA Gas wm My Bookmarks El Selection Templates E Duplicate Images amp Files lt 100 KB E Shape and Color Same Orientation E Similar Colors sE dE Persistent Results E 9 Selection History Results for Sketch 2 Results for Sketch 1 Eby Pre Selectors amp Categories E Folders H Q Basic Selectors Result Set Options File Format File Size Dimensions He ae ee AA ew Sort Bae and Time newest first al Sketch and Color E Date and Time File Name EY Image Matchers Sketch and Color Y General Matching E User defined Properties he Plug In Selectors es ml Overall Color Fe Categories Fo
42. Hawaii Aloha Hawaii Beautiful Flowers Hawaiian nature is more than impressive Hawaiian Ancient Art Some wooden sculptures in front of palms Photo by Mario Westphal Using a Nicon Photo by Mario Westphal Using a Nicon Created with IMatch Go to www photools com 1 of 1 Figure 145 Contact Sheet with vertical text and user defined properties Title Photographer Camera and Description from the Image property set and additional property sets Note These photos are not actually taken by me I just used my name here All credits to the original photographer Great job 287 The Batch Processor Source Images and Output Options The Batch Processor operates as a wizard or assistant and leads you through the process of creating contact sheets in several steps In Step 1 you select the source images for the batch conversion process You can either use the current selection or select files and folders manually The Batch Processor can even operate on external images images not indexed by the current database Source Images and Output Options x Presets MAA M 500 x SOD White mih verlay Logo Input Images Load yl Reset Current Selection Folders and files from the list below IV Process folders recursively Adakolder ies Files Remove Write output images to this folder Bppiication DutputFolder gt El IV Abort process in case of errors cora
43. Hee Figure 147 Step 1 The Source Images and Output Options Note You cannot use variables with external images IMatch does not calculate or store image attributes like Image Size or Image Width for external images If you want to get the max out of your image collection you should manage all your images with IMatch Input Images Current Selection Folders and files from the list below IATAPHOTOSMALOHA A15PHOTOS Amerika Eh C WINNT SProfiles Mario Personal IMatch HIO01 jpg By C AWINNT Profiles M ario Personal IMatch HIO02 jpg By C WINNT Profiles Mario Personal IMatch HI003 ipa Eh C WINNT Profiles Mario Personal IMatch HI004 ipa IV Process folders recursively Add Folder Add Files Figure 148 The Batch Processor operating on external files and folders If your current selection is based on a folder you can use the PROCESS FOLDERS RECURSIVELY option to process the folder and all it s sub folders at once IMatch writes all processed files to the target folder specified at the bottom of the dialog box You can use a fixed path here or use one of the variables supplied by the IMatch system In the example above I ve used the Application OutputFolder variable This assures that the preset will work with the output folder set under GENERAL OPTIONS in PRESETS 288 Since errors may happen during a conversion process for example if the source image is unreadable or in
44. IMAGE Match will position your overlay image within the original image else within the entire canvas IMATCH Figure 162 Overlay bitmap alignment align to image or align to canvas The left overlay bitmap is used as a watermark bitmap The right shows the IMatch text logo in its full beauty 382 MAI adds di Sa eh da Ea 31 SHOWIN SF IMAGES ci Relies Recs laca Raceline aa N as 66 Unassisned sss os Stith oan nana acd ie cb cha 170 360 A A NN 98 3 30 dayitrial VES il ts 14 4 ADOS tati E E lidia cias 311 A ACDS titi ooo ao odio 311 312 Descriptions MA dis drid 44 ACDSee Description Files ii iii dai 87 Action category assignment oei ainda bldg sind inna kas 366 Active Selection Scriptin Biss dalteershe ates hide antag a a raa a nip 277 Active Database enin a e vadaa des vedas ceseadaadsancdunesibadevdvanedspesandcaeeses 212 ACtiveS election iii iii 228 230 Active WindowT y pe iia idol 221 YaNa pai addition 126 Add Border oncccccicceestesenacveetesdeatudesceveidendevesdanccvecdeadevscdancesscdaa des vedaneesucdasdeauddevesabcdevivansdsuerancdeeaet 184 Add NOI18 i s scc2cienicvester sev ecaen ces ester deveidencescdanetevedindes vedandes vedas a e aas e eroien 184 AddBookmark nse esedilo rdar Saniat 229 Sample NOS 280 AddBookmarks coins ui ido ENE AEE E En ia 229 A GOB Or ders necete e Boys cons sued Ans Pees coed Pans fay R EE ibe bps us E ETEN EAN favs EEE E 264 AddEFolder cuido aiii bdo e
45. IMATCHLOG LOG 352 Reporting errors or bugs At any time there is a current logfile from the last program run and a backup copy of the last logfile Whenever IMatch noticed a problem a message box will open at program end to inform you that important information has been written to the logfile In this situation please copy the logfile IMATCHLOG LOG to a save place and then open it with your favorite text editor Search for the type tag E gt to find all lines with error messages Copy these lines plus about 20 lines before and after that error line to a separate text file and keep this information together with your error reports This information will help me to identify the exact position in Match where the error occurred and also the exact conditions under which the error can be reproduced If you find an error or Match crashes on your machine please include the related portion of the logfile with your email Logfiles can become rather large so please make sure that you have at least 10 or 20 MB of free space on the drive where your temporary folder resides A logfile with 10 or 20 MB is usual when you use IMatch for a longer period or perform many actions like adding new images to your database Please DO NOT send in complete logfiles if they are larger than about zipped 100 KB Please extract the portions of the file related to the error your want to report and send in only that smaller file Database Sizes An Ma
46. IMBitmap idilio 250 257 IMEI ill std seed ietesene ai Aanters 270 IPTEBI du di 272 IPT CFieldCollection Dai 271 IPT CStream ins tise al ehh A eis Ma Abel a ce SA cin 270 PropertyRecord isis rein aaa seas corola po hapisss neablsbsd apiassnesblassseaplasinsidsbsAieissinet ish Auman 246 Propertysets asirio bobo isa 244 SL O 246 ResultSet a E E nilehiianiitaninianintaninianigieninidnan 243 ResultSetEntry class onnios E E 243 SA AAA E 244 Cl a ii 240 247 Clients ua dida ed 61 165 177 179 Category SetUP rra strain 60 Clipboards inacabada bdo 40 AS ev eets ces eden ces ecdenccee cdnndesucdanses ecdaa a e a r eee 184 CMY K channels iia andadas 189 Collection Classes a is 272 Object Model cicle aiii dba del tds ios does has holes hola dcha 211 Collecti ns iii id ds cia 273 Color civic is oi lid elo sto id 37 235 269 270 345 user interface iii id ii baii 345 Color and Shape cic luis oil id eto tdo di tdi uke duvide 152 Color Change escocia arto cousdted vevs cnet caus loteo av EEES didas cb dies EEES dro EESE SEENEN costes 191 SR Foy seuss Fis Peas Hoss Su us doy hive Seg tubs Lov bsion Stns ous davon flan dube tun taves EEE 179 Color Codigo ido iia dd sad dido cai 124 176 343 386 ANC IPT Costes hee AAR RA a ees ee a ie eee 309 Category properties 366 Color Coding and IP TCorerriaa ais 310 Color Contribution ssns n EE EAE senda Uta Isa Saa Added idoneidad 152 Color Depto i 189 Color Distribution i ccseccccseserieveccanc
47. If ColorDialog Arguments DefaultColor The initial color for the dialog pColor Contains the selected color on successful return Return Value The method returns True if the user has aborted the dialog Description Displays a Windows common color selector dialog box This method enables you to present a color chooser dialog to the user Example dim color as Long dim newcolor as Long Set color to white 217 color RGB 255 255 255 if Application ColorDialog color newcolor then end if UpdateDatabase Arguments ImageFileName The fully qualified file name UpdateOnly If this is True Match will update the image only if it already indexed by one of the currently open databases If False the image will be added if is not indexed or updated otherwise Description This method informs the application about modifications made to an image file If you manipulate an image from scripting and save the modified image call this method to update your databases You can also call this method to add new images to all open databases WaitDialogOpen Arguments Message The message to be shown in the dialog Min The minimum percentage value Max The maximum percentage value ShowCancelButton If set to True the wait dialog will show a Cancel button Description This method opens and displays a Wait Dialog with a percentage bar You can show this dialog during lengthy operations to give some user feedback WaitDialogClose
48. If the category is empty this method returns nothing Directlmages Description Returns a collection of all images directly assigned to this category excluding child categories If the category is empty this method returns nothing This method does not calculate the result of formulas Addlmage Arguments Image The image to add Description Adds the given image to this category If the image is already in the category nothing is done Addimages Arguments Images The images to add Description Adds images to this category AddimagesBucket Arguments Bucket The bucket containing the images to add Description Adds all images from the bucket to this category Removelmage Arguments Image The image to be removed from the category 236 Return Values The method returns False if the image was not contained in the category and True if it has been successfully removed Description Removes the given image from this category Removelmages Arguments Images The images to be removed from the category Description Removes all images given in Images from this category RemovelmagesBucket Arguments Bucket The images to be removed from the category Description Removes all images given in Bucket from this category RemoveAlllmages Arguments None Description Removes all images from this category Haslmage Arguments Image The image under consideration Return Values False if the image is not conta
49. JPEG interchange format length Transfer function White point Primary chromaticities YCbCr coefficients Reference black white Date and time Image description Make 99 Model Software Artist Copyright Exif Version FlashPix Version Colorspace Components Configuration Compressed bits per pixel Pixel X Dimension Pixel Y Dimension Maker Note User Comment Related Soundfile Date and time Original Date and time Digitized Subsec time Subsec time Original Subsec time Digitized Exposure time F Number Exposure program Spectral sensitivity ISO speed ratings OECF Shutter speed value Aperture value Brightness value Exposure bias value Max Aperture value Subject distance Metering mode 100 Light source Flash Focal length Flash energy Spatial frequency response Focal plane X resolution Focal plane Y resolution Focal plane resolution unit Subject location Exposure index Sensing method File source Scene type CFA pattern GPS Fields GPS Version ID GPS Latitude ref GPS Latitude GPS Longitude ref GPS Longitude GPS Altitude ref GPS Altitude GPS Time stamp GPS Satellites GPS Status GPS Measure mode GPS DOP GPS Speed ref GPS Speed GPS Track ref GPS Track GPS ImgDirection ref 101 GPS ImgDirection GPS Map datum GPS Dest latitude ref GPS Dest latitude GPS Dest longitude ref GPS Dest longitude GPS Dest bearing ref GPS Dest bearing GPS Dest distance ref GPS Des
50. Lash PableSortPolden incre eee eeaeee n e See eE E enee eE EEA eE seep PSE oea E 246 A E ETO EE EEE E OEE E Sy cssatinive tat t 191 DOA DEVE AE T E E E E E E EEE 242 Load last database at Startup ipere eonan ea e step EENE Reay SERE ENERE SEa SEES 342 Boal Variables erk ne e pean setute csaetunedegututaccentensdegviata cceudavedepedete vserdeneterviatarensdteetes 198 TOD ridade a ee Ce eee 343 394 Lost ise Sie AL LL IS 16 351 Tone Dates ote ena eet au eave ere eat 194 TOSSIESS eceiesd dese cedswsse vetia coat atve 56 LOCAL OMe sche eset wes Sosa ceca Seka ees anes Seda ea ea ean Sas Sena a ea USA Wa SR RN Se USE 38 Trossless Rotation oasis a hee 57 low res preview images SHAE SHOW N 338 339 l 7A ar Sa Heli wane Gat ee elo en eee en elon en Relies 349 M Macintosh Ae Era 323 MITA Ci td ii bios 368 Character Sets and IPTC Apple and IPTC ooooococnnonccccnnoocccnononcnononnncnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnos 370 Main toolbar ii ad EE ETATE 34 Mak EN OE A ta te tee 380 EXE AA ES E ees a E TA cess Bed Mee eee A 98 99 100 102 Manual SOLE OLder toe A A A ATA AO AA a aa 43 44 Manual SOM A a ds OR eee ae at ee et 44 Matches at da e cents OS eat haat o Reach Tevet a a EAS eees A Make aed 243 Matching external AMA GES cc rie aes IR st On eta ents elm ae erm ttt ae aa 161 Maximize Compatibility 22 00 scest sis eek eet see a eee ea eee 341 Meda A A Oh OM cents Mla he sees ead TOM cones Mla hae eee aad oe 46 47 MOVING Mare tai A
51. M Y PHOTOS 2 Detect duplicates using this Selection Template a O Y A Flowers CG Blumen 1 Na Binary Duplicates O UY Blumen 2 Miri ar 3 inimum similarity for duplicates O amp Blumen 3 i ard O a Wilde Pflanzen What to do with duplicate images O E Aktion Bookmark files considered as duplicates O YU ALOHA yl y N pS SN Assign duplicates to this category I Assign new or updated files to these categories C Delete files considered as duplicates 2 04 My Categories 2 04 Events TF Keep intermediate result sets for later inspection amp Birthday Busi Communiy Check for updates every fio 3 Minutes NA Family El Status Monitoring Shak Match to Windows TeskGer cue o Figure 112 The IMatch FolderWatch configuration dialog box The tree control on the upper left shows all folders indexed by the current database You can select any number of folders to watch To include sub folders of the selected folder in the monitor check the INCLUDE SUB FOLDERS WHEN check box All folders selected in this tree control will be monitored for changes If another application adds updates or deletes files in such a folder IMatch will automatically update the current database to reflect these changes To ASSIGN NEW OR UPDATES IMAGES TO A CATEGORY in you database enable the feature and select the category or categories to add the images to 334 If you enable the DUPLI
52. Match see Table 1 and all property sets defined in your database are exported as variables in the Image variable set Other examples for Image variables are Image Size which returns the file size of the image or Image Folder which returns the name of the folder that contains the image Property Sets If your Image property set see Image Property Sets contains the two properties Title and Description Match will export these properties as variables named Image Properties Title and Image Properties Description respectively To specify a property you must use the prefix Properties before the actual name of the property Image Properties lt Name of the property gt This way Match can identify that this is a reference to a property set and not a reference to an image attribute like Image Size Note Image Size is the attribute Size from the Image variable set Image Properties Size is some property named Size from your image property set Contact Sheets Test 1 x Presets Output Thumbs Style Data Header and Footer Preview F Process folders recursively Sort images using this sort preset fe y Folder and File Name Ez Define which information items should be displayed for each image You can type text or select variables from the local or global scope You can enter any number of lines or properties here Image Name Image Width x Image Height Image Size Cancel Figure
53. Moving and copying images via Drag and Drop You can also move and copy images from one category to another by dragging the images from a source category to a target category Hold down the lt Ctrl gt key to copy the images to the target category If you don t press lt Ctrl gt the images will be moved un assigned from the source category and then assigned to the target category Custom sort orders for categories Per default all your categories are sorted in alphabetical order on each level If you want a custom sort order that is not alphabetical you can use drag and drop to reorder your categories The process is the same as for moving and copying categories but you use a different option in the dialog Using Category Formulas The most powerful feature of the categories metaphor is the ability to built relations between categories based on formulas With category formulas you are able to combine categories using the Boolean expressions AND OR NOT amp al Animals 3 Formulas Animals but no fish please If a category is based on a formula it is often referenced as a calculated category Match uses a different icon in the CATEGORY VIEW to mark calculated formulas To create a calculated category first create a category by pressing lt Ins gt on the parent category of your new category Then select the new category and open the CATEGORY PROPERTIES dialog from context menu via the right m
54. Napbssineablsbsd EESE EN E AN as seas EO Ea ten Gaetan 168 NS 28 A NN 57 Copying Sanidad BR 53 Copying Files arta siii 35 53 Copying images dir g and PRA AA 57 CopyRecticiuiainnida naaa isc 257 Copyright Noticiosa ainia sintiendo dadas 16 Comtat diario ies 240 271 A NN 194 239 Md iii nai a e codi N E E E e e er ireen 300 CRE Fl daa 312 MatChin Teeraa adidas 313 Creates NA RN 189 Creating a databasbusiamii bd ii dav dive iada daadaa des con belive Hing do deidad edo 360 Creating and Managing SelectiONS ooocnooccnonncnnonncnonncnonanonnnconanccnonccnonnnnonnnonnncnanccnanccnnnnss 138 Creatina Selections eins siii uve toi cave davies ins eds bid 69 Creating Web Pages with Match ooooccnonccnonocononccnonncnonacconanonnnnononccnonannonanonnnncnanccrnacinnass 337 E RN 184 CRW 5 couse sdug aiii ias idea las died sue bd 112 387 OPONE ee ee 341 ES 300 Matic 313 CSV Piles vai tastes avai if 312 CUITEN CY nan aa 76 CurrencyS yola a 246 CULTO A A A a a 243 Custom Sort Orden rs cite aaa 44 fOr Cate S Ores is Scie on Aes eb ohh Sere ee om ee 168 Us e pecs eek eee eos a nec gees eee ete 62 165 177 Customers Category SCLUP eun aaa cla aa ici 60 Customize E RSO ete EE E A et tee cae cea eee E E EE EE RA EEEE 375 376 Cyclic Redundancy Check Mitin a e 194 ODAV idas o A 189 D Data IPs a R ai ad 76 Database ES A RRA A E E A 225 23 CLEAUNG saath da ables Jt Goal et et Den tos Oe Gl oot oe Re ate tds E el o 72 73 CEA
55. PROPERTIES from the context menu of the category 366 Properties for Edited Description category contains edited images Category formulas allow you define the contents of a category using an expression language Using expressions you can combine the contents of two or more categories via the Boolean operators AND NOT and OR Examples PO Images contained in category 4 or in B A AND B Images contained in 4 and in B A NOT B Images contained in category 4 but not in B x Expression OR AND NOT g EY TJ Only return images assigned to this category don t include images from child categories IV Enable Color Coding categories without expressions only Color Code If an image is assigned to this category Un assign the image from all categories with the same parent as this category y coca 10 Figure 72 The Category Properties dialog The field DESCRIPTION allows you to enter a descriptive text for the category This description is displayed in the caption bar above the thumbnail window you can edit the description there also In the Expression field you can type category formulas If you enable the option ONLY RETURN IMAGES ASSIGNED TO THIS CATEGORY the category will only show images assigned directly to it and will not include images from it s child categories This may be useful if you use categories to export data from IMatch or when you create web sites from your
56. Press OK to close the dialog box The script will become active in the Script Manager IMatch automatically creates sub menus for each group in the SCRIPT MENU If there are too many scripts in one of the groups you can move a script to another category easily Select the Script in the Script Manager Open the SCRIPT PROPERTIES dialog by pressing the associated button in the toolbar Enter a different group name in the CATEGORY field If you enter the name of an existing group here Match will assign the script to that group If you enter a new name IMatch automatically creates that group for you a faea E My Scripts My First Script Type your name here if you like Type here some copyright information if you like om E Samples DB Active Elements Demo E Add Text Demo D Application Variables Demo Bookmark all files with a similarity of 99 2 Calculate Total File Size Category Demo Create Text File from Images Create Thumbnails Delete all files in the current result set with How to browse for a folder Image Buckets Demo Image Transformation Demo Select Categories Dialog Box Demo Select Folders Dialog Box Demo B Wait Dialog Demo This is my first script 0000000000 My First Scriptbas Last modified on 04 02 2001 69 Bytes V Develop imatch3 scripts Help Figure 189 The new script in the Script Manager Now we need to add some code to create something useful To do so please select your new script
57. Preview If the image in the preview does not fit to the screen you can scroll it with the scroll bars or with the mouse Just point into the window press the left mouse button and pan the image as you wish With the buttons in the local toolbar of the Preview Window you can select the zoom mode and toggle the preview display on and off The blue arrow button allows you to resize the preview to fit into the available space in the current database window This allows you to view the image in its full size You can toggle the size of the preview with this button at any time The Selection View Selections are the core of the Match query process By running selections you can find images based on a variety of criteria including file format size date and time location dimension IPTC and EXIF data color shape texture and much more The central point of management for selections is the Selection View Here you can create new selections manage existing selections and access the selection history 32 Pece My Bookmarks amp Selection Templates Binary Duplicates Raf Duplicate Images Y Files lt 100 KB Fuzzy Match orientation insensitive Ly Mask E Shape and Color Same Orientation Similar Colors Smart File Name iy Persistent Results Selection History L Database EZ Categories Selections Figure 7 The Selection View Here you create edit and delete selections This window also contains y
58. ResultSetMatche ResultSetMatch objects s Holds temporary variables of type Variant VarCollection PropertySets PropertySet objects PropertyRecord objects PropertyRecords PropertySetPrope PropertySetProperty objects rties Contains a collection of IPTC fields IPTCFieldCollect ion 273 Errors and Messages If an error occurs in any of the scripting classes Match uses the standard way of communicating the error to your scripts It raises an error If you don t use any precautions against such errors in your script your script will be stopped To enable your script to react in case of errors and to continue normally you must use the Basic On Error mechanism See the explanation on the On Error statement in the Language Help accessible from the Scripting Editor Scripting Building Blocks Scripting Building Blocks This section contains numerous samples that demonstrate the Match object model in real situations Please refer to the reference information above for more information The Active Database The active database is the database that is in front of all other databases and that has the current input focus The Application object returns the active database dim db as Database set db Application ActiveDatabase Please note that the user may run a script when no database is open You should always check for this situation if db is nothing then MsgBox Please open a database before you run this script exit sub end if
59. TO IMAGE option is unchecked Then adjust the canvas left and top margins to leave room for the logo and copyright notice on top of the canvas bitmap Use CENTER HORIZONTAL as the alignment option for the original image Apply any effect and mask to your original image and resize it to about 300 x 300 pixels to match the size of the canvas bitmap Select the pre built canvas bitmap as the Background Image in Step 3 of the wizard Make sure that the alignment is set to CENTER to align the canvas bitmap correctly Use variables or normal text to add some information Adjust the text margins to match the dimensions of the canvas and the positions of the logo in the lower right corner It can take some experiments to find the optimal settings for a given canvas bitmap Take your time After you ve determined the best settings for your original images and canvas bitmap save these settings to a Batch Converter preset for later reuse Watermarking Images If you re licensing images to others you probably provide low resolution images via your web site for downloading With IMatch it s now extremely easy to create such preview images even if you want to add copyright notices pricing and licensing information or watermarks 299 ht Figure 167 A watermarked image Watermark images are added using the OVERLAY IMAGE option of the Batch Processor Center it within the original image and use a pre built bitmap that contains tran
60. The IPTC Editor supports several thesauri which allows you to save typing by selecting comments annotations keywords categories and the like directly from a thesaurus without the need to re enter information Via IPTC presets you can save frequently used IPTC comments for later retrieval Such a preset contains values for all or selected IPTC fields Loading a preset and thus updating all IPTC fields of one or more fields is a matter of seconds You can then enter information which is unique to the current image and press the Save button One of the unique features in the Match IPTC Editor are synonyms With the help of synonyms you can add keywords for multiple languages with a single mouse click or add variations of the same keyword by selecting the root keyword For example adding the keywords Woman Female Girl and the German translations Frau Weiblich and M dchen can be done with a single mouse click Tip Take your time Check out all the options available in the IPTC Editor Learn how to fill and use the thesauri and the synonym lists You will soon see that you can add and edit IPTC information even for hundreds of images easier than ever The IPTC Editor User Interface The Match IPTC Editor is accessible from all thumbnail windows via the context menu the IPTC button or the keyboard shortcut lt Ctrl gt lt F11 gt Select one or more images you want to edit and then open the IPTC Editor IMatch IPTC Editor
61. Tip IMatch needs to access your hard disk frequently It is a good idea to save IMatch databases on your fastest hard disk As any other application dealing with huge data volumes Match will become slower when the database size increases It is no problem to manage up to 50 000 images in a single database on a normal computer When you want to manage 50 000 to 150 000 images in a single database you should plan to add some extra RAM to your system I would say that 256 MB of RAM is good for databases with up to 200 000 images The more RAM you have the better Match can use RAM to cache database contents This reduces disk access and hence results in much better performance I have redesigned the internal multidimensional data structures to hold data in compressed form thus saving disk space and memory when cached However Match is a high end image database application with complex algorithms Strictly speaking it is a database server combined with a user interface target at managing large and huge image collections If you have several 100 000 images you should split your collection into some smaller segments and manage each of these segments separately This approach will also aid the matching process since it is very difficult to filter out similar images in databases with several 100 000 images There are simply too many similar images in such large databases 19 Note Create backup copies of your IMatch databases and all the ot
62. Woman in one of your files IMatch automatically adds the synonyms Girl Female and the translations Frau and Weiblich for you Once you have defined your synonyms you can automatically translate your keywords into other languages and you can add all synonyms for better indexing and searching How to take over information from your images If you want to add the contents of one or more fields currently visible in the IPTC editor to your thesaurus just open the thesaurus The contents of the current field are automatically selected in the edit field at the bottom of the dialog Just press ADD to add it to the list For the SUPPLEMENTAL CATEGORIES and KEYWORDS lists you can add the currently selected entry to the thesaurus using the ADD TO THESAURUS button or by double clicking on an entry in the list This makes it very easy to fill your thesaurus from the keywords and categories already contained in your images To add all keywords from the current file to the thesaurus click the corresponding button next to the keyword list To take over a single keyword or category just double click the item in the keyword or category list Tip To initially fill your thesauri from existing IPTC information in your images you can use the special tool on the first pane of the IPTC editor This tool scans your images for keywords and categories and fills the corresponding thesauri in IMatch General Information Standard What Standard After analyzi
63. WordPerfect Format WPG Bitmap formats only No vector support 93 Macintosh Pict Format PCT Windows AVI Format AVI Many sub formats but not all TIFF CCITT and Other FAX Formats Without LZW compression only LEAD 1 Bit Format CMP XBitMap XBM IntergraphRLE ITG Miscellaneous 1 Bit Formats MAC IMG and MSP Working with EXIF Data EXIF Metadata Support Image files created with digital cameras store metadata along with the raw image data This metadata may be a valuable information resource for your image database For more information about the EXIF Standard see the home page of the Japan Electronic Industry Development Association JEIDA at http www jeida or jp For the full standard document see http www pima net standards itl0 PIMA 15740 exif htm These documents also contain a description of all available fields in the EXIF metadata stream IMatch fully supports the EXIF metadata standard as defined in the above mentioned documents Match displays the metadata fields contained in EXIF fields below the thumbnail window in a property window Just click on the tab labeled EXIF to switch to the EXIF Quick Display Note Not all camera vendors support all possible EXIF fields The availability of specific EXIF fields may also depend on your actual camera model Windows XP EXIF Information IMatch also supports the special Windows XP specific EXIF fields Title Comments Author Keyw
64. a lace sareds a E a e R E E T R E E E RR 319 Viewing IMA SES ctas a E T E E T ERR RARA 68 Viewing your IMAGES recien a aE a e a E E O AA T A RA EA a 31 Vignette io reine es een eh ae ee eh a eG ae a eee 292 Virtual Image Spactwainiicdcive aea web aici cap hl einai save ei 124 Virtual Image View sivschiaiic its 61 Virtual AAA dcsesdanccseseatcevescates 56 VisualBroWSe svseisascveeiersouecenccvsccaicceuecteccesccteceveccdacesecddaces vedda cova cduaccuecddaceas U EE E 212 W WatDialosGl s noen a a a a cava d a a a ds dt 212 WaitDialosIsCanceled inn iaa E E O dd S 212 283 Sample mesi E S EEE EEEE EEE E S E E EE K e ik 281 AETA DIENE E E E TT TA T dein E A EEN 212 283 NOS 280 WaltDialogSetPercentade ion tripa dadas ds 212 283 SaMMPle coos deszess aseevscedsduescces devs ceys E T ETE che eces dena Copa GUNS Does dono seve ghbs seve chasdeys qeda decis 280 WaitDialosSetT exti ipi nina dviiu nets dusiiielsie ais dirt e 212 283 Watermark iii ta ts td says cuusievachusdova elisa did tdci 300 Batch NN 120 NS O NN 189 Web Galliani i died deca 337 Web Pages and Mare sy aor a R a Le meat oaks Le meu NO ered Ne eld ed 183 Web Publi At Woe eee cent Gelb AEE 122 WED A eeca Wal eae A AT ston tebe eons 187 406 creating images fricciones 120 Web Site sive scciccesscaderesciabecavacad evan cia becanccavevanceabecantea devas cepnevaaceauevas E E E cessecaadennecaacens 123 Welcome to Mathias 379 Width inane e T E E E EE ae 194 195 239 249 2
65. a new PC Windows installation cceeeeee 349 The Category Schema Format iIMCS ceeeeeeeeeeeee eset ee eeeeetaeeeeeeeeeeteee 350 Sampletil A O Ea 350 The XML Property Database Schema ooocccccncccnnccccoccccnnnccnnnanannncncnnncnnnnnns 350 The Match Logia ee ne thai ae 351 kogte Formatx s ai A ie a A A A EEE 351 Controlling the Logfile ooonnnnincnnnnnnnnnicnnonocccccnnnnnnnannrrnnccnnnncnnnnnnnnno 352 Reporting errors or DUYS ccoooococcccccnnccnonononnncnnnnncnnnnnnnnncnnnncnnnnnnn nn cnc cnn cnnnnnns 353 Database Size a ae 353 Performance OptiMiZatiON ooooooocccnnnconnnicococcnnnncnnnnnannnccnnnn cnn nnnnn nn ncnnnn cnn 354 How to get the maximum performance ccnonccccnnonccnnononnnononannnononnoncnnnnnnnos 354 Tips and Tricks ss deere chee EE EEE EEO EENE OOE NEEE 354 AcknNowledgeMentS ooccooonoccccccccnnccononanonnnnnnnnconannnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnn nn nnncnnncnnnnnns 356 AcknNnowledgeMentS oooocccconoccccncccnnccnnnnncnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnn cnn nn cn nana n nn nncannn 356 im3manual 357 IMatch Online Help OvervieW oooooocccccccococcccnnnccnnnnannncccnnncnnnnnn non ncnnnncnnnnnns 357 Find Folder oocccooonoccccccccccccnnnnonnncnnnnnnnnnnnrnnncnn nn nn nnnnn non n nn cnn nn nnnnn nn nn cnn nan cnnnns 359 Category History ooocoonnncccoccccnnncccnnnnannncnnnnccnnnnnnn nn cnn nn n cn naar o nn n cnn nn r ra nnnnn rra 359 Special Formulas ooooonnncococcccnnnccnnnnnnonncnnnnnnonnnnn non n cnn nn
66. a start date of January the Ist to January the 31st Match will only consider images for your result set that have been created or modified within this period Note Some file systems e g FAT store date and time of files with a localized time relative to the system time on the computer Other file systems like NTFS under Windows NT and Windows 2000 store file date and times in UTC IMatch cannot decide whether or not the files on your disk have been stored with time light saving or other local time settings and hence may fail to find some files based on an absolute date To avoid problems always select a time range at least one day larger than the required range Also make sure that your end date is always at least one day after the start date The File Name selector One of the most frequently used selectors is the file name selector This selector supports three different modes to handle all usual requirements 146 Smart File Name The most intelligent type is the SMART FILE NAME mode This mode is able to identify all the usual file name deviations e g numbered series like image01 image02 or similarity between file names like Kawasaki Kawasky or Kawa001 This mode is best for finding images with similar names relative to some original images This selector works with a set of original images your current selection Partial File Name The smart file name match is not intended to find file names
67. added or updated images to one or more of your categories just select the appropriate categories from the list If you want to assign only images that have been added to the database make sure that the NEW IMAGES ONLY check box is checked Bookmarks If you want to bookmark new or updated images check the corresponding check boxes BOOKMARK NEW IMAGES and or BOOKMARK UPDATED IMAGES 86 ACDSee Description Files IMatch supports ACDSee description files see also section EXIF Import If your folders contain compatible files Match can automatically update your Image Property Set see section Image Property Sets starting from the descriptions contained in these files Check the IMPORT ACDSEE DESCRIPTION FILES option and select the Image Property string type to update from the list box in the dialog IPTC Import If you check the option IMPORT IPTC FIELDS FOR NEW AND UPDATED FILES Match will apply your IPTC Import Preset and scan all files for embedded IPTC information See section IPTC Support for more information on IPTC support in IMatch This option is unavailable until you have defined an IPTC preset for your database EXIF Import If you check the option IMPORT EXIF METADATA IMatch will apply your EXIF Import Preset and scan all files for embedded EXIF information See section EXIF Metadata Support for more information on EXIF support in IMatch This option is unavailable until you have defined an EXIF preset for your database
68. all images contained in Beaches or Mountains Then it will AND this intermediate result with the images contained in Persons to form the final result The final result will contain only images that have been assigned to the categories Beaches or Mountains and which are also contained in the category Persons or one of its sub categories Location Beaches OR Location Mountains AND People Race Asian OR People Race Black This formula will show only Black and Asian persons at the Beach or in the Mountains 173 Linking other objects Of course you also can combine the contents of a folder with the contents of a category or a persistent selection Folder file c photos animals OR Location RainForest This formula will contain all images from the folder f photos animals and from the category Location RainForest RFolder file c photos animals NOT Folder file c photos animals insects This category formula returns all images contained in the folder c photos animals except the images contained in the folder c photos animals insects RFolder file c photos animals NOT PersSel My Persistent Selection This formula returns all images from c photos animals but only if these images are not contained in the persistent selection My Persistent Selection Note Take your time to get used to these fascinating concepts and the powerful queries that can be performed using calculated formulas Editing Category Assignment
69. also enable or disable the Color Coding display Image Dimension Units IMatch allows you to display the dimensions width and height of your images in several units You can choose which unit you prefer Centimer Inches Millimeter via the Options menu Automatic width adjustment IMatch will adjust the width of image panels automatically based on the font used and the amount of information displayed Under normal circumstances this works pretty well However if you have images with very long file names Match will display only the beginning of the file name followed by an ellipse indicating that the file name has been shortened If you want to adjust the image panels so that all file names are shown in full length you must disable the Auto Fit mode by activating the tel button in the local toolbar IMatch will expand all image panels to the width required to display all file names in full length This automatic adjustment will not hinder you to rename the file When you click on the file name IMatch will allow you to scroll within the file name to see it completely This button also controls the Thumb Lens settings Thumb Lens a aaa B 50 75 v 100 125 150 175 200 300 400 The size of the thumbnails stored by your database is set once during the creation of the database and cannot be changed later This allows IMatch to create optimal access strategies for thumbnail images IMatch can handle databa
70. and a resolution of 200 DPI and the unit Inch Match will display the image as 5 x 5 inch If you set the unit to centimeters Match will display the image as 12 7 x 12 7 cm Note These DPI settings are only used to calculate the dimensions of your image on a device with that resolution Your images are not modified Folder Auto Refresh This setting allows you to control if and how IMatch scans the currently selected folder for modifications If you modify or delete images from an external program IMatch will normally only update the database when you do an explicit rescan operation If you enable one of the Auto Refresh options you can allow Match to automatically update modified images or remove deleted images from the folder If you enable the AUTOMATIC RESCAN option IMatch will automatically rescan the folder with your One click rescan options If this interrupts your workflow you can choose one of the lesser options which only checks for modified or updated files Note If you store your images on a network and the folder monitoring is too slow in your environment you can limit the automatic folder monitoring to your local disk drives by choosing the appropriate option In version 3 3 and above IMatch also monitors the events generated by Windows Explorer When you move copy rename files in Windows Explorer while IMatch is running IMatch will automatically update the database accordingly IMatch will not add new folders as you
71. and to get some information about the inner workings of Match during program execution Tip You can access the IMatch logfile via the Help Menu TECHNICAL SUPPORT OPTIONS VIEW APPLICATION LOGFILE Logfile Format I gt The logfile is a simple human readable text file You can open it with Windows Notepad or some other editor of your choice Each line in the logfile has the following structure Date and Time Level Message Sun Apr 30 19 35 08 2000 000 I gt Logfile opened Each line has a date and timestamp and a 3 digit level number The various levels allow fitting the logfile to various needs The final version of Match will only log hard errors in the logfile Level 0 the beta version logs all levels 0 4 Information on level 3 and 4 is for performance statistics and function call profiles Warnings and errors are always on levels 0 and 1 Next comes the type tab which can be one of the following Information This is only for informal purposes 351 Warning Some unexpected condition occurred For example when Match is unable to load an image due to a file format problem a warning message is logged Some error occurred Match writes out as much information as possible about the error It is very important that you extract these error messages from the logfile when you report an error See below for details However not everything logged as an error is a real program error If you enter a wrong formula for
72. automatically assign scanned images to a category or bookmark the images for easier review Note Before you can use the scanner module you have to select a TWAIN source IMatch Online This page contains several useful online links for you 378 The photools com home page serves as the entry page for all Match related topics For Match support send an email to support photools com For more information about how to register IMatch go to this page To download the latest Match version or updates go to the photools com download page Welcome to IMatch MATCH The Digital Image Management Solution for Windows photools com All information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Copyright O 1998 2003 Mario M Westphal All rights reserved Welcome to Match If you see this help screen you have launched IMatch for the first time Before you can start using IMatch to manage your digital image collection you need to create an Match database A database contains an index of all the images on your hard disk and removable media CD ROM DVD To create your database now select the first option in the dialog and click on Let s go IMatch will launch the database wizard and guides you through the few steps needed to setup a database for all your digital images If you want to read the tutorial before you start choose the second option and click on Let s go IMatch opens the
73. available space If the folder name is too long to fit Match will shorten it in an intelligent way showing you the maximum information possible Show Color Coding Using color coding allows you to associate categories with specific colors See also Color Coding Categories Set this switch to on to see color codings in your thumbnail windows Show AI group images Set this switch to on if you want to see all your images when you click on the All category in the category view This switch is off by default because depending on the number of images in your database it can take some time to retrieve and display all images If you have only a couple of thousand images Match takes only a second or so to display all your images so you can turn this option on Image Dimension Units Allows you to control the unit used to display the width and height of your images in thumbnail panels You can use either pixel inch centimeter or millimeter to display the dimensions of your images in thumbnail windows 343 1MG_1554 psd IMG_1554 psd 19 24 x 14 43 cm x 24 2 272 x 1 704 x 24 42 525 61 KB 42 525 61 KB Figure 200 Display Units For all units except pixel the DPI setting controls how many pixels per inch are assumed for your images Tip Use values of 96 DPI to match the average monitor Use 150 200 or 300 DPI to match the resolution used in magazines papers or your printer Example For an image with 1000 x 1000 pixels
74. based on the date time settings for the current user 103 Image EXIF Date and time 01 01 2002 12 00 00 Original Original Image EXIF lt Date and Time Returns the date part of the EXIF Field gt ShortDate timestamp in short format Image EXIF lt Date and Time Returns the date part of the EXIF Field gt LongDate timestamp in long format Image EXIF lt Date and Time Returns the date part of the EXIF Field gt DefaultDate timestamp in default format Image EXIF lt Date and Time Returns the time part of the EXIF Field gt Time timestamp in default format You can use these fields like using the following syntax Image EXIF Date and Time Long Click here for more information on maker notes and EXIF variables RAW File Formats Canon CRW Options This dialog allows you to control the processing of Canon CRW images in IMatch Program Preferences Display Slide Show File Format Preferences General Thumb View Colors IPTC EXIF Of limeCache CanonCRW NikonNEF KodakDCR Here you can control how Match imports Canon CRW images These options will be applied anytime IMatch loads a CRW image into the image editor the preview window or the slide show IMatch will also use these options when you use one of the built in processing modules like the contact sheet builder or the batch processor When CRW images are opened in the image editor Use defaults from below Prompt for options De
75. box This dialog box allows you to modify the selection template used to create the current result set It has the same functionality as the selection template edit in the SELECTION VIEW When you close this dialog box with OK Match will rerun the selection now using the modified selection template The results of the selection will be shown in the same result window thus replacing the current result set By using this feature you can interactively work with your result set until you re satisfied If you want to make the modifications to the selection template persistent click on the SAVE SELECTION TEMPLATE button SF in the local toolbar This will open the SAVE SELECTION TEMPLATE dialog box shown in Figure 66 Save Selection Template 2 x Save template as Images Cancel Help Figure 66 The Save Selection Template dialog box You can select an existing template to update it or enter a new name to save the current selection template under a new name The new template will immediately appear in the SELECTIONS VIEW under the SELECTION TEMPLATES folder 159 The Result Set History e esw A My Bookmarks 3 E Vv Selection Templates E Duplicate Images Y Files lt 100KB E Shape and Color Same Orientation Similar Colors Sketch ia Persistent Results B 9 Selection History EMOS y Same Orientation 4 Results for Shape and Color Same Orientation 3 Results for Shape and Color Sam
76. by hand it could easily takes days or weeks With IMatch you can do the same in a couple of hours automatically without your intervention Perhaps you are creating some web pages and you need images that match in color and tone to the overall color set of your web pages Again IMatch can do most of the work for you Run a selection based on a color set and define the colors you want to see in the images Finally IMatch can also find images with similar colors or shape given a set of original images For each original image IMatch will show you the best matching images from your image collection within seconds Compare this with trying the same action by browsing your image collections manually The process of scanning your image collection for images that match specific criteria is called query or selection The result of such a query is a result set A result set contains zero or more images IMatch displays result sets in a special window called the Result Window To run a query you need a Selection Template that contains the rules and criteria that define the selection Match interprets the contents of the selection template and applies the selectors defined in the template to your image database to produce the result set The Selection Process There are three general ways to run a selection in IMatch You choose RUN SELECTION lt Ctrl gt lt M gt from the context menu of a folder a category or your bookmark collection
77. by side press the VIEW IMAGES button File already exists in the target folder 21x Source D Data photos_Rain Forest TROO1 JPG Target D Data photos Temp TROO1 JPG f Source 3 SSA me DEA Target ETA Dimensions Dimensions 640x480 640x480 23 47 KB 23 47 KB A Last modified Last modified 23 09 1998 23 09 1998 Difference Indicators Difference Indicators Enter new file name here Enter new file name here TROO1JPG pp TROO1 JPG Apply RAS Delete Move all Skip View Images J Keep properties of existing image 7 Delete binary identical source images Cancel Help Figure 42 A binary duplicate file has been identified The red box at the top of the dialog box indicates that both files are binary identical so you can overwrite or delete one of the files 54 File already exists in the target folder i Se 2 x Source D Data photos _Rain Forest TR001 JPG Target D Data photos Temp TRO01 JPG Source r Target Dimensions Dimensions 640x480 320x240 23 47 KB 26 68 KB Last modified Last modified 23 09 1998 22 09 2000 Difference Indicators E o Difference Indicators Enter new file name here Enter new file name here TROO1 JPG Apply TROO1 JPG Apply Delete f Move all Skip View Images I Keep properties of existing image 7 Delete binary identical source images Cancel Help Figure
78. c photos lt Label Serial gt The toolbar in the category properties dialog box allows you to select folders to be included in your expression see Figure 18 It also contains a checkbox that allows you to make the expression recursive Of course you can combine folder expressions with normal category expressions for example to get all images in a folder which are not already contained in the category BEACH Folder file c photos lt Label Serial gt AND NOT BEACH Formulas using Persistent Result Sets You can even include persistent result sets in formulas see section Persistent Result Sets for more information about Persistent Result Sets This allows you to use the actual result of a selection as the content of a category Whenever IMatch needs to calculate the contents of the category it will query the persistent result set for the set of images to use 166 For example you may create a selection that finds all images containing the phrase beach in the file name You make the result of this query persistent safe it and then you can use this result as the content of a category When you add rename images in your database Match will take care that the content of the result set are updates automatically or manually and hence your category will always show all images in your database with the phrase beach in the file name More Formula Examples How to create a category that contains and shows all my images
79. categories The option ENABLE COLOR CODING controls color coding for this category Assignment Actions Here you can control what action Match performs when you assign one or more images to this category Per default Match performs no special action when images are assigned to a category The images are just added to the category and that s it You can tell Match to remove the image from all other categories or categories below the same parent category using the assignment actions Un assign the image from all categories with the same parent as this category This action will remove the images from all categories with the same parent category as the category to which the image is assigned 367 Un assign the image from all other categories Before assigning the images to this category they are removed from all other categories in the database These actions allow you to control exactly what happens during an assignment Example for a Workflow Setup Image you want to impose a workflow on your images When images are added to your database during a rescan you want to assign these images to a category named New When you have reviewed or edited the image you want to assign it into a category Edited When the image is finished you want to assign it into a Final category A possible category setup for such a workflow or edit state may look like this E im rk Flow El Y States g g G 4 Web ready Figure 73
80. categories on the fly Other Settings There are some advanced settings that control various aspects of the import process 310 Update only empty properties If you check this option Match will only import IPTC into empty properties in your Image Property set Convert text from Mac to Windows When you check this option Windows NT Windows 2000 and newer versions only Match will automatically convert all textual content of your IPTC data sets into the Windows ANSI character set It depends on the source of your images if you need to check this option If you view the IPTC information in the IPTC Editor or the IPTC Quick Display and it looks somewhat strange especially if you use Umlauts you should enable this option Important There is no way for IMatch to tell whether or not the IPTC fields are in Macintosh or Windows character set Be careful with this option since converting text already in Windows ANSI will result in unwanted results If you have converted Windows ANSI text by accident just run the IPTC Import wizard again this time with unchecked CONVERT TEXT FROM MAC TO WINDOWS Also uncheck the UPDATE ONLY EMPTY PROPERTIES option This will restore the correct contents in your property database EXIF Import Importing ACDSee TM and JPSoft s 4DOS 4NT TM Description Files Importing ACDSee TM and JPSoft s 4DOS 4NT TM Description Files If you use ACDSee you probably also used the description feature of this
81. click Cancel to abort the whole process Drive Pat Media ID 221215922 Media Label 9912272203 Folders on this drive media Folder Comment MACorPhoto 4NCIENT1030024B JPG Images of Ancient Buildings from the E gy MACorPhototANCIENT4030022B JPG Images of Ancient Buildings from the E gy M CorPhoto ANCIENT030020B JPG Images of Ancient Buildings from the E gy M CorPhoto 4NCIENTS030012B JPG Images of Ancient Buildings from the E gy Skip Cancel Help Figure 13 The correct media has been inserted To load the images press the LOAD NOW button If you want to skip all images from that media press SKIP To abort the whole process press CANCEL at any time Selections which span multiple drives and or media If your selection contains files from multiple media from the same drive the Offline File Handler will prompt you once for each media Say for example your selection contains files from three CD ROMs which have been scanned from the same CD ROM drive If you perform an action that needs access to all images the Offline File Handler will prompt you up to three times once for each media Note If you skip one media in the Offline File Handler IMatch will continue with the files on the remaining media So if you can t find a specific media at the moment you nevertheless can continue with the images from the available media The Off line Cache The Off line Cache The Off line ca
82. cnnnnccnanns 34 TOODA Seena a Coe erererte ss cont soteectsnsts A OEEO nant ete 34 The Thumbnail Window ooooccccnnnccccnncononcncnnnonanano no ncnn cnn conan nro ncnn anna nnnnn nn 35 The Thumbnail Window ooooooccccnncnccnncononcncnnnonannnan nn cnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnn cnn cnnnnnnnnnno 35 image Pl o o o o Oo 35 Automatic width adjUStIMBNE ooooccccnncccnnniccnaccccnnnonananrrn cnn cnn cra nan nr nc 37 CERIMINIDS ROMS rt a o oectne acct ear 37 Image File COMMANAG cccccccnnncccccccnnnccnnnnannnnnnnnncnonnnn non n cnn nan rnnnnn nn nn cana ncnnnnnes 38 How to select mages citas 41 Smart Sorting with Sort Presets ooooocccnnnccnnnnccccccccnnccnnnnanonn cnn nn cnn anar nn n cnn 42 Smart Sorting with Sort Presets oooonnconcccnnnncccnnoncoccccnnnccnnnnnrn cnc nnnccnannns 42 Some Tips about Sorting oooocconncnnnncccoccccnnnccnnnnnaannccnnncna naar non cnnnncnnannns 44 Light Table Sort Manual Sort orders ooooocccccnccoccccccnnccnnnnaaannccnnnnnanannno 44 Light Fable Sta tok athe eet ater 44 Handling Off line Media Removable Media ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeennteeeeees 45 Handling Off line Media Removable Media ooocoonniccnccccnnnncicnnccccnccnnnnnns 45 Removable Media oocccoccccnncccnncccnncnnnncconanononcnnnncnnnanonnncnnnanonnnnnnnanannnnas 46 How to identify the Correct Media ooooooccccnnccconccccoccccncncnonanananncnnnnconannns 47 The Offline File Handler ooonooocccnnnnnininncccccccnnnnonananccnn
83. contents of the current selection depend on the current context If you set the focus to a folder in the DATABASE VIEW the current selection contains all images from that folder optional recursively If you highlight a category and then open the Batch Processor it will operate on all images in that category To convert only a couple of files select them in a Thumbnail Viewer and then run the Batch Processor Like the CONTACT SHEET BUILDER the BATCH PROCESSOR module is powerful and flexible but easy to use Figure 146 gives you an impression what results you can achieve with this module 120 Side Title rotated Image Title from property variables Hawaiian Beach Colored Mask HIO01 JPG 640 x 480 47 287 bytes Sonntag 15 Dezember 1996 Image Attributes from variables Canvas Resized original image Figure 146 Sample for a batch processed and enhanced image The Text Export Filter IMatch has a powerful text file export filter that allows you to export selected database contents into text files Since text files can be processed imported by many other applications this feature is a convenient way to export data from IMatch to other applications Text Export Elan File Format Options 7 Extemprimaten tt os Windows ANSI pa Generator Type Field delimeter Record delimeter Image Information and Properties y Tabulator fine Feed y Sort output using this sort preset I White first line as
84. create them in Windows Explorer To add new folders to your IMatch database use the Database Wizard and perform a normal rescan on that new folder File System Events IMatch will also monitor file system events generated by Windows This technology allows IMatch to get information about most changes in your file system e g when an image is added to a folder controlled by IMatch or if an image is changed by another application This of course works only if Match is running at that time and if the folder is current selected 344 You need to enable the option Automatically rescan local and remote folders on demand under Options Preferences Thumb View to use this special feature Colors This dialog allows you to customize the colors used throughout the Match user interface To change a color select the associated entry in the dialog box and double click to open a color selector dialog box To see the changes you ve made close the dialog with OK Match saves the last color set and restores it on every program start To reset all colors back to the default values press the RESET button on the bottom left of this dialog box This will restore the factory defaults for all colors Program Preferences x Monitor Gamma Slide Show File Format Preferences General Colors From here you can change the appearance of IMatch and the colors that are used to draw various aspects of the user interface Double click on a color below t
85. created IMatch demo imd oy x Database Edit Image View Options Window Help 18 x G ow 2 Fe Gla ae EEE ee 4a aw Sort Standard a Database Information Database version 03 00 Last structural update 04 05 00 08 34 39 IMatch ImageCube database size 1 078 KB Thumbnail database size OKB Total size of all images indexed OKB Database ratio n a Number of folders oo Number of images Number of categories Number of properties o Selections 4 gt m Figure 28 The database workspace window showing some statistical information about your fresh database This database does not yet contain image references The Database Wizard is a convenient helper for performing the most common database maintenance tasks It allows you to add new images to your database perform diagnosis and optimization procedures and to set various database options Step 1 Choosing the Add folders and files operation Database Maintenance Wizard Welcome to the Database Maintenance Wizard This wizard will assist you with the most common tasks in database maintenance Please select what you want to do and press Next to proceed Run database diagnosis and optimize the database for minimal space requirements and maximum performance Modify database options coca to Figure 29 The Database Wizard start page 83 For now we wi
86. creating new files Don t recreate image when they are current check time stamps Use this only if the image selection and the sort order is unchanged Please read the help file for this script for instructions on how to customize the available templates for your own designs Cancel Figure 210 The Photo Gallery Creator script in action Customizing The photo gallery creator is a powerful tool If you have some experience with HTML you can customize the templates and presets to create any type of online gallery The photo gallery script comes with an extra help file which explains you how you can customize existing templates and how you can create new templates to match the look and feel of your web site Just press the SHOW SCRIPT HELP button on the dialog Other Scripts The scripting menu also contains several other scripts to create HTML output in the WEB Scripting Group 3 database Report Micrasoft Internet Explorer von T Or ne i z Ble gd yew Favortes gods ep seats KE ero gt DD Debra Guo J D DE SD ls B phootoots com EN lagesa E citeretescrttim z e IMatch Folder Report ae www photools com fi Report For Database F limdbi4 imd This database contains 180 folders and 1752 files Report crested 02 12 2002 012429 A EAS DiDataClipart and Photos ME BMTEF Ej 31 04 MB 31 08 2002 18 49 28 0 0 00 KB 0311 2002 0234 37 15 549 MB 26 11 2002 01 05 46 23 84 27 MB 03 11 2002 00 57 54 13
87. each of your user tools Per default this is the first character in the name of the shortcut you create For example if you add a shortcut named Photoshop Match will use the P as the shortcut of that tool within the User Tools menu If you want to control the hotkey just insert an Ampersand amp into the name of your shortcut right before the character you want to use as the hotkey within the menu Relocating Folders The Relocate command Database View allows you to tell Match that a folder has been moved to another media or drive on your computer system This may happen if you move a folder in Windows Explorer Or when you move your images to another disk or another computer But the most common case for using RELOCATE is when you move images to a CD ROM or DVD to save space on your hard disk 376 Relocate Folders y x When you move a folder to a different media drive or folder on your hard disk you need to tell Match that new location so the database can be updated accordingly With the Relocate command you have the possibility to tell lMatch that the selected folder is now on a different drive or media and that the references to this folder in the current database need to be updated Note IMatch makes no assumptions about the new target It simply relocates all references of the old folder to the new folder you select Old Location D Datasincomings News 20024095 New Location R 12002_09 a Canc
88. escaped with a piping symbol ASCII code 0x7c Sample file Categories The root of my personal categories FF0O000 My Categories Peopl My Categories A My Categories Animals 00FF00 My Categories Animals Bears 0000FF My Categories Vehicles My Categories Combined Test My Categories Animals OR My Categories A The first line contains a comment but no formula Since there is a comment we must emit a for the empty formula to allow the parser to find the comment field The last line contains a formula in the native Match format all other lines simply contain category names The best thing is to emit always all four fields with the appropriate number of semicolons The XML Property Database Schema IMatch XML property schemas are stored in XML format based on the following DTD lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt ELEMENT IMatchPropertyDB Version Description Schema Data gt lt ELEMENT Version PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT Description PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT Schema PropertySet gt lt ELEMENT PropertySet Name Description Property gt lt ATTLIST PropertySet PSOID ID REQUIRED gt lt ELEMENT Name PCDATA gt 350 lt ELEMENT Property Name CurrencySymbol Default gt lt ATTLIST Property dt null string int ui4 i8 ui8 float date iso8601 time iso8601 bit imcurrency uri
89. external storage media like Iomega JAZ or ZIP drives IMatch can index and manage the images on these media Note Match makes it very easy to work with off line or removable media Match always knows where your image files are located and if you perform an action that requires the physical image file Match will prompt you to insert the media 45 Drive Media Definitions A physical disk CD ROM DVD Network drive or another external storage device You can have any number of physical storage devices or network drives connected to your computer If it works for Windows it works for IMatch A disk CD ROM DVD Iomega JAZ or ZIP drive or any other suitable storage media Match uses the Window standard Media Identifier Media Label and Media Serial Number information to keep track of the media in each drive indexed by your current database Physical File An image file on physical media e g a TIFF file on one of your hard disks The techniques used to handle external or temporarily unavailable media are proprietary to IMatch No other application available today allows you to treat offline media this easy Since image collections grow larger and larger today and storage media like DVD allows collecting huge amounts of images the comfortable handling of offline media becomes more and more important for image management applications Match is really a step ahead here Tip The Off line cache allows you to view a
90. family beach birthday allows you to lookup the image under all these categories Assigning images to categories is like adding a link or reference to the image to the category The physical location of the images plays no role here By assigning images to categories you can create a virtual hierarchy of all the images in your database without ever moving the images around on your disk Even if all images are in a single folder or located on 20 different CD ROM s you can move the images around in your categories as you like Categories are independent from the actual storage location of the images and they work equally well with images stored on your disk or on your bookshelf For example you may create a category Animals in your database Below this category you add several sub categories Fish Insects and Mammals The category Mammals has a sub category Bears The resulting structure will then look like this Animals Birds Fish Insects Mammals Bears There is obviously a natural hierarchy within these categories we model the real world so to speak The category Animals contains the contents of all its sub categories For example if you click on the Animals category Match will display all images from the categories Birds Fish Insects and Mammals Since Mammals also contains the contents of the category Bears the images assigned to this category will also be shown If you click on the category Birds IMatch will display
91. fill the entire target bitmap If you use the tile mode this method works as the desktop wallpaper in Windows The entire target bitmap is filled with repeating copies of the source bitmap If the source bitmap is larger than the target bitmap you can either center it thus cropping the source bitmap on the target bitmap or stretch it to make it the same size as the target bitmap Scale Arguments Percentage The percentage to scale to Use values lt 100 to shrink the bitmap and values gt 100 to enlarge the bitmap Options Controls the resize operation Use one of the following values imroNormal Normal Resize Fastest but may result in a decreased overall quality imroResample Resample Results in better quality when you enlarge a bitmap imroBicubic Bicubic Resample Results in better quality when you shrink bitmaps Description Scales the bitmap by the given percentage This is a shorthand version of Resize making things a bit easier AddMask 266 Arguments Mask The bitmap to use as the mask This bitmap must be a 32 BPP bitmap with an alpha channel InvertMask True to invert the mask depends on your mask bitmap FillType Controls how the mask bitmap is filled Use one of the following values imbmfNone No fill imbmfSolid Fill with FillColor imbmfBitmap Fill with Bitmap FillColor The fill color to use if FillType is imbmfSolid FillBitmap The bitmap to be used as the fill bitmap is Fill Type is imbmfBitmap Mode
92. fit your needs at any time To create new sort presets or to modify existing presets open the SORT PRESET DIALOG via the OPTIONS menu You can also create manual sort orders using the Light Table sort 42 Sort Presets for demo imd x Available sort fields Sort sequence definition Smart file Name Y gt gt Similarity El E Result Sets Folder lt lt File name El mj Result Sets and Categories File size Image width n height Date and time li Presets Double click in the left box to add a field to the sort sequence on the right New fields are always added below the currently selected field To remove a sort field double click on it in the right box The little arrow button toggles between ascending and descending sort order Save Cancel Help Figure 39 The Sort Presets dialog In this dialog box you can see all the AVAILABLE SORT FIELDS sort criteria on the left side The right side contains the criteria used for the current sort preset selected in the PRESETS combo box on the lower left Each sort preset can contain any number of sort criteria the effective sort order is defined by the sequence of the criteria in the SORT SEQUENCE DEFINITION list on the right Figure 39 displays the default profile named Standard This sort preset is always in place and is used whenever no other sort presets are defined You cannot delete this profile but you can
93. for image management However as any other database server in the world IMatch requires more resources disk memory and processor than simple applications like word processors spreadsheets or charting tools You won t run ORACLE or SQL SERVER on a normal laptop at least not with real databases that hold millions of records 154 TIP Match optimizes disk access as much as possible even on computers with less memory If you want to speed up your matches for medium to large sized databases 50 000 to 200 000 images add more memory and enable database caching Something like 512 or 1 GB of RAM gives a great performance boost for larger databases The Result Window The Result Window Whenever you run a selection Match will open a result window to display the result set IMatch can open any number of result set windows at the same time thus allowing you to visually compare the results of different matches IMatch Results for Find images with similar colors 1 J Database Edit Image Search View Result Window Scripting Options Window Help DB y ad Ha ja N E a QOFIB REIS oOOCoOS te gt Result Window Toolbar 200 images 1 42 35 KB Bi copy a Results for Find images wit comme Big4Aa Veiaa B a Maer 3 Splash Move Sort DWOS9JPG 91 59 Comparison Original Current Match 640 x 480 64 67 KB 09 1998 18 02 800 x 584 4235KB 05 05 2000 14 57 Originals vesamipg
94. for opening images in the image editor In single edit mode each selected image will be opened in a single editor window In multi edit mode all images will be opened in a single editor window You can then use the navigate buttons in the image editor toolbar to jump forwards and backwards between all currently selected images You can control which mode you use renames the current image You can also click on the file name in the image panel see below to rename a file allows you to rename groups of images with many options See section Smart Rename for an explanation of the Smart Rename feature Opens the Review dialog box This dialog allows you to quickly review all images in a folder See section The Review Module for more information this command will delete all currently selected files Match will display a warning message before it actually performs the delete If you hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while you select this command Match will immediately delete the selected files without further warnings See also section General Settings for further info about deleting files 39 IPTC Editor EXIF Editor Read Only toggle Invert Selection Select All Slide Show Copy to Clipboard Copy Name Copy Attributes Paste Attributes Set as folder thumbnail Transform 40 Opens the IPTC Editor for the selected files Opens the EXIF Editor for the selected files is a convenient way to add or remove the
95. header By Folder and File Name E M Wrap textin Mata File Name Process folders recursive Full File Name File URI Folder Name Folder URI ip sl Image Properties to include Title M Description Figure 168 The Text Export filter options dialog box To run the text export filter choose the IMPORT AND EXPORT command from the DATABASE menu and then select EXPORT TO TEXT FORMAT Note IMatch will interpret the current selection when the text export filter is run If you want to export the contents of a folder or a category make sure that you select the folder or category before you issue this command If you want to export only a group of images select these images in the thumbnail viewer and then execute the text export filter Programming IMatch 121 One of the core features of the Match system is its programmability The built in scripting language allows you to automate frequent tasks and to extend the build in functionality to meet your requirements Match contains an Integrated Development Environment IDE for creating editing and debugging IMatch scripts The complete object model of the application is accessible via the scripting engine It is nearly impossible to create an Image Database Application or another application that matches the requirements of all potential users To enable as many users as possible to do what they need with IMatch I have decided to add a s
96. id A 376 Media Identifier tica dalla 45 47 Media abel deis td td dd std liado 0d 0 Md da 45 47 A AAA A A 233 MediaSerial 0 ts dns dd a eS 233 A SS 34 Memory indicator socias riada cial daci n 34 EA cospsiaasaad aust cota assteasdagstessanetes 33 Memory Usages cisiissccsiscssagaidsioaastssteadaitscesaauaaceadsvaacenasgaaceadashe canna AT A ATE EErEE ETE EENT 34 Saving MENIOLY oaii aE E E asa 34 A LEE T DEET E AR AEE E E E T E Pod T S E E 73 80 Mea R 285 Microsoft O e aaa A AR 303 Millimeters SENES E ENTE A E TO T N ATR 343 344 Minolta Ma NO ET aii 380 MITO TEE VEEE EEE TUNE AE EE ORE 56 184 Mi aiii 151 Mobile O 21 Mobile Match 00 iia 21 Modeling a Client and Project HiStOLY oooconnncccnonccnonncnonanonnnnononccnonccnonanonnanonon non nccnanccinnnss 177 Monitor folders aiid disk aaa ee 334 Monitor Gamma aia el hs 337 338 MORI cada aa da 22 26 Montoto A as 26 MA a E a a tanta AR NE 196 MIA a E a a A 196 Mos a e ot aa do nad 185 Motion Bl a aa 185 Motion a a o a eta cee ey 258 A o Ta 39 52 53 Cates Orie sii sie yl A EE eh Pee Saa 168 169 PONG Tit e e e St ce ci do 29 30 395 One ChCK Bate sisecss se seiec ales eld isk a de dd 58 Move copy favorites list cee eeseecsseecsseccesseecsseecsseeceseeeesaeeesseecsseeceeecesaeecsseecsseeceeeeenaes 374 Copy Pold tinocina sett alltel ities dl raat alee aa ee 30 IM OVelMag eis o O seat antes gears eae Neuen vet 224 Moving and copying images Within cat
97. images from the currently active category during the selection This enables you to limit your search to the files in the category you re currently viewing FILES IN SELECTED CATEGORIES This option allows you to select a set of categories from your database Match considers only the images contained or referenced by these categories during the match If you choose this option you can combine the selected categories using the Boolean operations OR or AND If you OR the categories the resulting image set will contain all images from the selected categories If you AND the selection the resulting image set will contain only the images contained in all selected categories SAME CATEGORIES AS ORIGINAL IMAGE S Check this option if you only want to consider the categories of the selected original images during the match The Result Set Options selector A good way to begin is to enable the Result Set Options selector It allows you to control the size and contents of your result set with various options Note Unless you change the Result Set Options all selections in IMatch return a maximum of 200 matches per original or in total 141 You can set the minimum number or images to show or enter a minimum similarity in percent between 1 and 100 If you choose to show a minimum number of images Match will display this number of images regardless of their actual similarity ranking If you choose to specify a minimum similarity Match
98. in Match have at least two methods Count Returns the number of elements in the collection Item Returns the item at the given position 1 based 272 Using this methods or an enumerator you can access each object in the collection Example The following script declares a loop variable i and an Images collection object named imgcol After initializing the imgcol collection with all images in the current database a loop is used to access each image in the collection dim i as Integer dim imgcol as Images set imgcol Application ActiveDatabase Images for i 1 to imgcol Count Debug Print imgcol Item i Name next i This code fragment can be rewritten to use an enumerator object instead dim img as Integer dim imgs as Images set imgcol Application ActiveDatabase Images for each img in imgcol Debug Print img Name next img Note All collections in IMatch are read only meaning you cannot add or remove objects from or to the collections Collection Description Databases This collection contains Database objects The Databases method of the Application class returns this type of collection IMFolders IMFolder objects Also contains methods to Add and Remove individual folders from the collection Images Image objects Category objects This collection also contains the Add and Categories Remove method that allow you to create and remove categories ResultSets ResultSet objects ResultSetEntries ResultSetEntries objects
99. installation and Setup vasta ia A A tots 18 Installing Updates iia eer ee ree 18 Folders used by lMatcCh oooooococcccnnnnccccoccccccccnnnccnnnnnnnnnconnnnnnnnnnn nn ncnnnnnnnnnnns 18 Planning your Databases inma 19 Make Backupstiunarici osa iaa 20 Restoring IMatch on a new PC Windows installation oonnnon cnn 20 Mobile Maei cono eed eee 21 Overview 22 SEI E 22 SEI se ccceveeeussaeneteseeusesus seeeet es shesesus seeeet es shesees veetstesebege 24 The IMatch Workspace oooooooccccncccconoonconccccnnnconannnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnn nn nan cnnnnnnn nn 25 The IMatch Workspace WindOW oooooicooccccnnncccnnocooonccnnncconannn non ccnnnncnnnnnnn nacos 25 The Database View ooooocccnononcccccccnnncnnanncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnn cnn cnn nn n rn nnnnn rn cnn 26 Ernendly Nam CS a4 cess N EN EE 27 PUNO SCAM see ths EO NE OE 28 Automatic Folder Refresh ooooonncinnnicoccccnnnnconcnncccncnnnnncnnnnnnr nc ncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnno 28 Folder Command S s Asstercccssreessensvace sseeesseutvacestedpeepeuetneaneretPeeneeuenecnet cae 28 The Category View ooocooonncocccccnnncccnnnnonnncnnnnnnonnnnn non cnn cnn rn nnnnnn nn n cnn nn ra nnnn nano 31 The Preview ViIeW cceeccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeesegaaaaeeeeeeeeeeesaaaaes 31 The Selection VieW oooononninnnccnccinnnconnnnncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnn cnn cnn nn n rana nn n nc 32 The Status Baruta aan nun Ena 33 Some Notes on Memory Usage ccooonccoccccccnccoconanoonnccnnnccnnnnn non
100. ipt file with Windows Notepad or a similar application 2 Create a new tag block You may copy a tag block from the standard configuration file and modify it This is the easiest and safest way to create new tag blocks 3 Get information about the field numbers your digital camera uses This is the trickiest part Contact your camera vendor or search the Internet for this information 4 For each field your camera uses create a tag block in the user configuration file 5 Start IMatch select an image and open the IPTC Editor Switch to the Other Fields tab You should now be able to view and edit your fields If the fields don t show up check the Match logfile see The Match Logfile for error messages and make sure your tag blocks are formatted properly Adding new list blocks and list elements You can add predefined list elements to nearly all IPTC fields This not only includes fields like Keywords or Category but also Caption Transmission Reference or By line To add new list elements you need to modify the imiptcusr dat file This file is read and updated by the Match thesauri manager If you add new elements to any of the list blocks in this file the thesauri manager will use these list elements automatically 332 IMatch makes no difference whether list elements have been added using the IPTC Editor thesaurus manager or have been manually added to the configuration file directly This allows you to provide a set of
101. is a folder name All images in that folder and all sub folders of that folder recursively PersSel This object identifies a persistent selection When the category is calculated the images in the persistent selection are linked Unassigned Returns all images not assigned to any category See also Special Formulas All This category represents all images in your database Category Splashers Category Splashers If you deal with a large number of images on a frequent basis it can get cumbersome to use the category assignment dialog to assign each individual image For your convenience Match allows you to assign images to several categories with a couple of keystrokes using the Category Splasher Before you can use the category splasher you need to set up the individual splasher Switch to the CATEGORY VIEW by pressing lt Ctrl 2 gt or by choosing the CATEGORY tab in your workspace window Open the category splasher dialog from the local toolbar by pressing the icon Available Splashers Select categories to set with this splasher H 6 Location a 2 08 People 6 04 Age Group M Adults 049 Babies oA Children OG Seniors amp Teens 2 04 Gender ME Female xl Shortcode Add Delete Cancel Help Figure 76 The category splasher dialog box To add a new splasher press the ADD button Rename the item and give it a more meaningful name Then select in the category tree on the right all ca
102. is very fast since only images that are new or modified are added during that process While 88 rescanning a database Match can check about 20 000 images per minute The speed only drops if images need to be added or updated Note The size of your images has an impact on the speed at which IMatch can add images to a database If you have small image files about 100 or 200 KB the update frequency is very high up to 1000 or more images per minute on a current PC However if you re images are large TIFF or PSD files with a size of 10 50 MB or even more MB IMatch will need much more time to load the image from disk and hence the update frequency will drop 89 Best Practices Best Practices This section contains instructions tips and tricks which allow you to use Match in the most efficient way Tip The IMatch FAQ contains answers to frequently asked questions This FAQ is updated frequently so make sure you visit it from time to time You can reach the FAQ online via the support section at www photools com Database Creation and Location Each of your databases if you need more than one should be stored in a new folder Match creates several files for a database for performance and security reasons If you keep these files together in a folder it is easier to move the database to another disk and to create backups of your database If your database will be large 50 000 or more images you should use a hard disk with ple
103. italia rested ees Meg ed 377 Removable Media usos rider dida 45 46 48 Fi ndly Name a tetitas 27 O OI 241 242 Remove NOISE cette 185 LEA sso sdccssecdcesteusiuy rivene iese eeen Eae ineen i stue ie eerie riek tan doeet 237 Rem veBookma kK sesse nen aseene radiata ltda 221 RemoveBookmiark renoneer oregon eioen prea ESEK E EEEN uedee stenoses suepedebenes 229 Remoye Cate its 232 RemMovelMage 3 225353 sscstsss oetisssduesissssvegis ssduspisascvsabassdvapiabesrapians coapiuasceabdsssdesadsesnesa lies 236 279 RemovelMages 25 5 isis ista reene es OEE Aad lassevadl as Aablasseesbl she adlsssmeabiiesmeas tare 237 RemovelmavesBucket is 5 aesi 5 scesisssscenisssdeaptssscesasssscraplasscvans she cuabionscesb sive cose duassasadsoatesa lies 237 Removing Categories SEPIA cide A Oks AeA Ais 276 A A TA 39 Renamelimage ss oi 221 REM ANS i ass h A O 91 PCS dees wa eae Ace o e hts 91 Renaming A ds shines teablasshapbaisoesblss sd A sara has EEE ia aE OER PoE ETTE 35 55 Resample consti iio bobo bau aii 184 A A 28 A O wilakinianiniahinniianinianintahinianiaes 44 Light Table Sort aaa 44 Resetting Light Table sortord r ui 45 Resetting Move Copy favorites ocooccnonccconccconanononncnonacnonaconna conan ncnnncnnn cnica arco cnc nnncnanannnnnss 374 Resetting the Light Table sort OrdeT ooooooococnnonococnnoncccnononcnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnncnn non n nn conan nnnnnnnnnno 44 Resetting Transformations ccsccesseccessecesseessseecsscece
104. ivan etree 233 Ne IMPOlderClass sec ain een 233 The Gategory Clasica eta ete yates 234 The Category clasica en 234 The Image das iia entireties 238 The Image classis aaaea aaan eed eerie 238 The ImageBucket class ei eee 240 The ImageBucket CASS r aree rrara raana aaan raaa hai Ean haia iE EAEE HOETA 240 The Resi ei dla S raar r a aaa E a P sti ei HEAR EEEES 243 The ResultSet classa arraren ppan i i ee EEA EEEO EEEEh 243 The ResultSetEntry Classy ae r raaa ieee eee es 243 The ResultSetEntry class ooononococcccnnnnciconcconccnnnnconannrnnncnnnnnnannns 243 The ResultSetOriginal ClaSS ooonnnnnnnininnccnnnnnnonnnncccnnccnnn co nnnarnnncnnnn 244 The ResultSetOriginal ClaSS oonnonicccnnnnnnnnnccocccnnnccnnnnnanancnnnn nana 244 The ResultSetMatch Class oooooccccnnccinncocccccccnnnccnnana cnn cnn nn conan no nnncnnnnos 244 The ResultSetMatch ClaSS ooonncninnnnccccccnnnnconanancnnnccnnnnconnnnnn cnn na nnncnnnnnns 244 The Property Set Class visits rae reene EEEE annar ENEON estee 244 The PropertySet class ooonconnnnncccccccnnnconannnannccnnnnnonannnnnnccnnnncnnnnns 244 The PropertySetProperty class ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeees 245 The PropertySetProperty ClaSS cccceeceeeeeeeeeecenneeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeetee 245 The PropertyRecord class oooooocccccncccocccococcccnncccnnnnannn cnn nn nnn naar ona ncnnnns 246 The PropertyRecord ClaSS ooooccocncccnncccccoccccnncconnn
105. just select the images and drag them to the other application s icon on the Windows task bar You can also drag images from IMatch to other running applications and drop them Please note that this feature only works if the other application is itself drag and drop enabled which is true for most Windows applications Tip You can also move or copy images by dragging them to the folder tree in the Database Viewer If you hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while dragging IMatch will create a copy of the image in the target folder else the image file is moved The One Click Dialog Bar If you add large batches of images to your database or you have a large number of files that needs to be categorized and distributed the One Click dialog bar will be a great time saver for you With the One Click dialog bar OC you can arrange any number of target folders for Move and Copy operations for quick access next to the thumbnail viewer It also allows you to access your most frequently used categories and category splashers with only one single mouse click Showing and Hiding the One Click Dialog Bar To open the One Click dialog bar click on the associated toolbar button in the local toolbar of the Thumbnail Viewer window It is the button with the 1 on it next to the QUICK MOVE and QUICK Copy toolbar buttons oy Toolbar Button for the One Click dialog bar The dialog bar will automatically dock itself to the right side of the thumbnail window
106. k 133 vr oo OK n onse oara m o B s amp s Sh i tee er nogom so 2 7 0 Ch gg ss Eee PO E aos 134 Any control character Any digit 0 9 Any graphical character Any lower case character a z Other characters may also be included depending upon the locale Any printable character Any punctuation character Any whitespace character Any upper case character A Z Other characters may also be included depending upon the locale Any hexadecimal digit character 0 9 a f and A F Any word character all alphanumeric characters plus the underscore Any character whose code is greater than 255 this applies to the wide character traits classes only onoos There are some shortcuts that can be used in place of the character classes w in place of word s in place of space d in place of digit M in place of lower u in place of upper Collating elements take the general form tagname inside a set declaration where tagname is either a single character or a name of a collating element for example a is equivalent to a and comma is equivalent to The library supports all the standard POSIX collating element names and in addition the following digraphs ae ch 11 ss nj dz lj each in lower upper and title case variations Multi character collating elements can result in the set matching more than one character for example ae would match t
107. like photographer theme quality camera equipment and licensing information needs to be associated with each image If you would add all the required fields to your Image property set it would not only grow very large but also would be very inconvenient to use In addition to that you would also need to type in the same information over and over again e g the name and address of a photographer or the camera equipment used With IMatch you can separate these properties into separate property sets which are then referenced by the central Image property set Instead of typing the same information over and over again you simply select the photographer from a list and IMatch will link the image with the selected photographer 77 Photographer Location Quality To set up such a model you only need to separate the information you want to associate with each image into some additional property sets one set for each type of information you want to store with your images The demo database used for this tutorial has three additional property sets page URLs Stores information about photographers including the addresses and the home A property set describing locations A simple property set with only a single property describing the overall quality of an image Try it for yourself Create a new empty database just for playing around with property sets see section Creating an Match Database Then open the DATABASE PRO
108. metadata along with the raw image data This metadata contains information about the camera settings at the time of the shot Depending on your work environment this metadata may be important to protect your copyright or to manage your images based on these criteria In a similar manner as the IPTC import the EXIF importer allows you to extract this information from your images and to add it to your Property Database After importing the metadata into your image property set it is immediately available for searching using Match selectors You can also use it from the Contact Sheet Builder the Batch Converter or the scripting language For more information about the EXIF Standard see the home page of the Japan Electronic Industry Development Association JEIDA at http www jeida or jp For the full standard document see http www pima net standards itl0 PIMA 15740 exif htm These documents also contain a description of all available fields in the EXIF metadata stream 96 Preparing your Image Property Set Before you run the import for EXIF metadata you first need to add one or more properties to your image property set These properties will be filled during the import with the information extracted from the EXIF images For example if you want to import the date the image was taken the camera model string and the F Number create need to created three properties One DATE property and two STRING properties Of cou
109. needed in most cases This is preliminary More options to come in future versions Cancel Apply Help Figure 212 ICC Color Management Options To enable a display profile for your Monitor check the corresponding option and select a monitor profile using the Browse button in the dialog The option USE THE EMBEDDED PROFILES IN YOUR IMAGE FILES tells IMatch to extract and apply the embedded ICC color profiles in your images Embedded profiles are supported in a variety of file formats like JPEG TIFF PSD and NEF Some cameras and scanners embed color profiles in images to ensure correct color management Combined with a display or monitor profile you will get optimal colors for a given combination of image and display If you want to display thumbnails with color management you can enable the corresponding option in this dialog Note Using color management for thumbnails is only rarely of use IMatch will become much slower when you enable color management support for thumbnails But it may be useful under some conditions to display color management thumbnails 346 Where do you find monitor profiles Depending on your Windows version you can find color profiles in Windows System32 Spool Drivers Color or in Windows System32 Color If you use applications from Adobe or other software vendors or you use cameras from Nikon Canon or another vendor you may have additional profiles somewhere on your hard
110. object to obtain a list of all images currently in the database ANDing this collection with the images contained in the bucket will remove all images from the bucket that are not in the database 242 The ResultSet class The ResultSet class This class encapsulates either a temporary or a persistent result set You can access all original files and the matches within the result set If the result set is created by a selection type that without an original file e g the file size selector the result set will contain one fake original image Properties Name String R O Returns the name of the result set This method returns the name that is displayed in the Selection View Description String R O Returns the description of the result set Current Boolean R O Returns True if the result set is current This property has only a meaning if used for persistent result sets Persistent Boolean R O Returns True if this is a persistent result set Methods Entries Return value This method returns a ResultSetEntries collection containing all entries in this result set The ResultSetEntry class The ResultSetEntry class This class represents one entry in the result set For each original image in the result set the result set contains one ResultSetEntry element If the result set has no original images there will be a fake original entry representing the matches in the result set Methods Original This meth
111. of multiple images together CaculateSizeWithAspect Arguments Width The requested width of the image On return this variable will hold the final width of the image Height The requested height of the image On return this variable will hold the final height of the image Description Takes the given width and height and calculates the correct sizes based on the image aspect ratio This method is useful when you resize bitmaps Flip Flips the bitmap from top to bottom Mirror Mirrors the bitmap GaussianBlur Arguments Radius The radius to blur in pixels Description Performs a Gaussian blur on the image MotionBlur Arguments Strength Amount of blur Angle The angle in 1 100 degrees Unidirectional Boolean True means the blur works only in one direction Description Performs a motion blur on the image 258 UnsharpMasking Arguments Amount Strength of the effect Radius The number of neighbor pixels to consider for the unsharp masking Threshold Value that indicates the threshold for modifying the original value of the pixel If the difference in the original pixel value and the blurred pixel value is greater than the threshold value the original pixel value will be modified Description Performs an unsharp masking effect on the image This effect allows you to make the image sharper or crisper without introduction to many artifacts SetDPlResolution Arguments XRres Horizontal resolution in dots pe
112. of the folder on your CD ROM or DVD You now can safely delete the folder on your disk 377 Scanning Images IMatch contains a TWAIN based scan module which allows you to process images directly from your scanner and into your database Tip IMatch cannot support all special features of your scanner or digital camera If your Scanner or camera comes with an scan download utility you probably get better results using this specialized application Note The TWAIN standard does not support EXIF information If you want to keep your EXIF information the meta data in your images you have to use the specialized download application that ships with your camera Scan Action Save to disk v Save to folder D Data Incoming New 2002409 ys File Format TIF 24 bit y Options File Name Mask Scan HHH Sequence starts at jo a Step fi 2 Use to indicate auto numbering IV Keep existing files don t overwrite JW Add images to current database Add image to these categories IV Bookmark images A CopyTest Formula A My Categories amp Test List of scanned images Scan next image set Figure 207 Scanning Images This dialog allows you to choose the target of the scan into the image editor or on your disk the file format for the images 48 Bit scanning is not supported via TWAIN and to use a mask to name the scanned images You can also
113. output size of an image using a percentage of the original image size You can also change the DPI resolution of an image to prepare images for printing or for other applications If you enable Allow images to grow Match will enlarge your image if the defined width and height are larger than your source image Note There is no real DPI resolution with images Images only consist of pixels and it depends on your output medium printer or screen how these pixels are rendered The DPI setting is merely a hint for some devices or applications how you intent to scale the image Also only some file formats TIFF PSD support DPI settings Resizing To resize the original image to a new size enable the RESIZE functionality The new dimensions of the image are defined by a fixed width and height in pixels or as a percentage of the original image size To adjust the aspect ratio of the result image enable the MAINTAIN ASPECT RATIO check box The resample method determines how IMatch handles the image resize operation RESIZE is the fasted method but may result in some raggedness of the output image For the best quality choose BICUBIC RESAMPLE If you want to apply some sharpening to your image during the resize process use one of the Bicubic methods with Sharpening Match will automatically apply an Unsharp mask operation during the processing of the images Tip If you resize images for web usage you should always apply a light or me
114. root folder per disk Never put your database into the same folder as your images You should better create a new folder outside of your image folder hierarchy A good place is for example a folder like C JMDB or something like that Never store images in that folder If you add folders to your database Match becomes responsible for managing these folders For this reason Match constantly monitors the folders in your database for modifications made by other external applications If IMatch recognizes that a folder or its contents have been changed it will rescan the folder Since the files of an Match database are always modified while you work with the database it would cause continuous updates when the folder with the database is added to an Match database itself Use your fastest hard disk IMatch needs to access the database files on disk frequently and the faster the hard disk is the faster Match will be 72 Use a disk with plenty of free space An IMatch databases will grow to about 5 to 10 of the size of all the images you manage with that database If you add GB of images to a database the total size of all the database files will be about 50 MB to 100MB depending on the size of your thumbnails and some other factors Tip You usually will have only a single IMatch database for all your images now and in the future Only in very specific cases you need more than one IMatch database If you are unsure about
115. side of the dialog box is occupied by a tree control that displays the names of all scripts contained in the IMatch Script Folder The IMatch Script folder normally is located below the IMatch program folder and is named Scripts You may change the location of this folder via the OPTION PRESETS dialog If you create your own scripts via the Script Manager they are saved to this folder automatically If you get some scripts from another source just copy them into that folder The Script Manager takes care for the rest Scripts can be ordered into groups for easier handling In Figure 185 the group labeled Samples is visible in the script tree The Script with the name Calculate Total File Size is selected On the right hand you see the information about this script The SCRIPT INFO PANE displays information about the currently selected script The script author you or another IMatch user enters this information when he creates a new script 204 Edit Script Info Edit Script Create Script Run Script Delete Script Script Mar ager rabo gt B Macro1 D Macro2 O property sets Samples B Active Elements Demo D Add Text Demo B Application Variables Demo O Bookmark all files with a similarity of 994 Calculate Total File Size E Category Demo D Create Text File from Images D Create Thumbnails O Delete all files in the current result set w B How to browse for a folder O Image Buckets Demo O Image Transformation Demo
116. sort The order in which you call AddSortDefintion controls the sort precedence SortBucket Arguments Bucket The bucket to sort Description This method sorts the given image bucket Sortimages Arguments Images The image collection to sort Description This method sorts the contents of the given Images collection object LighTableSortFolder Arguments Images The image collection to sort Folder The folder that contains these images The ImageSorter will use the light table sort profile associated with this folder to sort the images Description This method sorts the contents of the given Images collection object LighTableSortCategory Arguments Images The image collection to sort Category The category that contains these images The ImageSorter will use the light table associated with this category sort profile to sort the images Description This method sorts the contents of the given Images collection object LighTableSortBookmarks Arguments Images The image collection to sort 248 Description This method sorts the contents of the given Images collection object using the light table sort preset for the bookmarks collection The IMBitmap class The IMBitmap class This class allows you to perform a variety of image manipulation tasks directly from your scripts In fact this class enables you to perform most of the tasks the user can perform using the Image Editor in IMatch Properties Width Integ
117. the bottom of the slide show window This information also serves as a hyperlink into your current database If you click on it Match will end the slide show and jump to the image shown when you activated the hyperlink You can control what information is displayed by using image variables See section Variables for more information on variables Colors With BACKGROUND COLOR and TEXT COLOR you can control which colors Match will use for the background of the slide show and for the image information display Off line Cache Usage The slide show allows you to use either the original images or the images stored in the off line cache If your images are large you can use this option to use the smaller off line cache images even if the original images are on line The slide show performance will be much better for large files since Match needs to load only the smaller images from the cache instead of the big files from your disk or removable media Slide Show Preview Images Some file formats especially RAW formats like NEF or CRW or JPEG2000 take a long time to decode and display You can set this option to tell Match to use a smaller or low res preview image for the slide show if the image format supports such a feature Use low res preview images for suitable formats This option is useful when you work with RAW image files like Canon CRW If this option is set Match will use the preview images contained in the image file for the s
118. the figure is a binary duplicate of the original image The image on the right is not only a match for the current original but also an original image itself The middle image is a normal match with a similarity of 88 44 The Result Window Toolbar The local toolbar of the result window givens you direct access to the most frequently used commands All image related commands are accessible via the context menu of the thumbnail viewer or the IMAGE menu in the main menu bar Expand window Switch to Database View Level of Detail selectors Auto Fit l Show Property Editor ye Persistent Result Set CREES Goto folder Save Selection Template Category Assignments Edit current Selection Category Splasher Run Selection Figure 64 Important buttons on the Result Window toolbar Expand Window allows expanding the size of the thumbnail viewer to occupy the available space within the result window Switch to Database View brings the database workspace window into the foreground Level of Detail selectors allow you to choose how much information is displayed about each image Auto Fit toggles the Auto Fit mode for the image panels If you enable Auto Fit IMatch will resize the image panels in a way that even very long file names are displayed without being truncated 157 Show Property Editor Category Assignments Category Splasher Run Selection Edit Current Selection Save Selection Template Make Persistent Result S
119. the tree control or execute a category splasher The AUTO FORWARD option forces IMatch to move to the next image in the sequence when you move images If this option is disabled the Reviewer will stay on the current image after the Move operation If the SORT FOLDER LISTS ALPHABETICALLY option is checked IMatch will sort the folder lists for FILE OPERATIONS alphabetically else a most recently used sort order is used The FOLLOW SELECTION option will automatically position the category list to the first category of the first image Uncheck it if you don t want the category list to scroll when you move between the images in the selection The USE LOW RESOLUTION IMAGES option tells Match to use preview images for suitable file formats e g Canon RAW for faster image display 336 Sending Images via Email HTML and World Wide Web with IMatch Creating Web Pages with IMatch IMatch contains a very powerful script that allows you to create web pages from your images Using this script you can create simple slide shows category based image galleries and even galleries where your users can use IPTC keywords for navigation To start the script go to the SCRIPTING menu choose PUBLISH YOUR IMAGES TO THE WEB and then PHOTO GALLERY CREATOR Besides the wide variety of presets that come with the script you are able to create your own HTML templates to customize the look and style of your web galleries The photo gallery scripts ships w
120. then by date and time With the arrow buttons on the right you can move the selected field up and down to modify the sort sequence To save your preset enter a new name in the PRESETS combo box on the lower left and press SAVE to make it persistent 43 Tip 1 For displaying result sets it is often useful to have a Similarity and Smart File Name preset This will sort all images that are considered similar to your original and within images with the same similarity the images will be sorted by file name Tip 2 It may also be very useful to create a sort preset based on one or more of your Image Property Set properties Modifying existing presets Select the preset you want to modify in the Preset combo box Then add or remove fields in the right list or change the sort order between ascending and descending Finally press SAVE to make the changes persistent Changes in the sort preset definitions become current as soon as you close this dialog box with OK Match will automatically update the user interface to adjust to the new sort presets Some Tips about Sorting You should create at least sort presets for Date and Time Smart File Name and File Size Besides these basic presets you can create presets that fit your needs by combining any number of sort criteria If you often need to catalog files that have been downloaded from the Internet it is useful to have a Smart File Name sort preset This preset ignores the usual numb
121. to a friend 314 Importing and Exporting Category Schemas Importing and Exporting Category Schemas A category schema contains all information about category definitions of an Match database including the comments and the formulas used for dynamic categories IMatch allows you to import and export your categories via the IMPORT EXPORT menu Two specialized modules are available for importing and exporting category schemas Importing a Category Schema To import an existing category schema use the IMPORT CATEGORY DEFINITIONS filter from the DATABASE IMPORT AND EXPORT menu In the dialog box select the name of the file to import and the format of that file Currently there is only one format supported for category schemas Note Category schema files have the file extension imes for IMatch Category Schema Import Category Schema File Format ox JiMatch Category Schema Standard Format T Cancel File name Help v Develop imatch3 Presets IPTC4 imcs Parent category for imported catgories Al eI Figure 181 Importing a category schema Per default new category schemas are imported below the special AII category If you want a different category to become the parent category of the imported categories select one by clicking the browse button on the left of the PARENT CATEGORY control To start the process press the OK button After a couple of seconds depending on the size of the schema the
122. to present textual information to the user while a script is running Most often the output window is used for debugging purposes While you re developing a script you can use the output window to display status information to verify that your script is doing what you expect it to do To print text to the output window use the Debug object and it s Print method Sub Main Debug Print Hello World End Sub This program writes the text Hello World into the Scripting Output Window Depending on your scripts you may also use the output window to display additional information to your users The IMatch Object Model All classes The IMatch Object Model Figure 194 shows the complete Match 3 Object Model Use this chart as a reference when you begin to write scripts with the Match scripting language Class Overview To root of all classes in Match is the Application class This class represents the entire Match application Using the Application class you can control parts of the Match user interface access the currently open databases and perform some other basic operations The Application class contains a collection named Databases This collection contains all currently open databases Each element in this collection is of type Database Definition A collection is a set of objects of the same type Each collection supports a number of methods such as Count which returns the number of objects in the collection and tem
123. which returns the object at the given position 210 Imatch 3 Object Model Version 3 3 mii E aaa gt N a CT RA O gt mam crecio gt i EXI ARA ET gt mamma METE gt AAAA SS ma mu IMActiveWindowTypes IMBitmapAlignmentFlags IMBitmapChannels IMBitmapColorRe sOptions IMBitmapCombineFlags IMBitmapEmbossDirections IMBitmapFillModes IMBitmapFormats IMBitmapResizeOptions IMBitmapMaskFills IMBitmapSave Options IMBitmapSpatialFilters IMBoolOps IMFileOperationResults IMFontAlignments IMimageSorterAttributes IMPropertyTypes ImageSorter IMatchADT Helper Library memes pe Copyright 1998 2003 Mario M Westphal Figure 194 The IMatch Object Model The Database class represents a single database and allows you to access and manipulate the contents of the database The Database class contains a number of collections for Categories IMFolders Images Property Sets and Result Sets The class MFolder represents a folder in your database It contains an Images collection that gives you access to all image files in a folder 211 The class Category represents a category in you database It contains an Images collection that gives you access to all image files in that category The Images collection contains elements of type Image Image objects allow you to access all properties of a single image in your database The PropertySet cla
124. will return only images with the same orientation portrait or landscape as the original images With ONLY LANDSCAPE or ONLY PORTRAIT you can restrict the result set to contain only images of a specific orientation Tip By setting this selector to SAME AS ORIGINAL IMAGE you can increase the performance of your selections since Match will only need to consider images with the same orientation as your original image Also this setting usually results in a better match quality since images with the same motive often have the same orientation The Date and Time Selector With the date and time selector you can restrict your result set to contain only files with a specific date range As usual there is an absolute and a relative mode With the relative mode you can restrict your result set to contain only images that have a file date before or after your original images You even can restrict the result set to contain only newer or older images with respect to your originals This selector can be used to find files that have been modified within a specific time period before or after some original image For example if you have identified an image in your collection you can easily select all other files that have been modified in the same week the same month or two days before or after The absolute mode allows you to restrict your result set to a specific date range For example if you want to see all images modified in January just select
125. with the Location property because the Photographer property set contains a reference to the Location set When you add records to that property set first you will be able to select records from that set when you add records to the Photographer property set 81 Property Database Editor x Metadata Designer Property Browser Property Set Photographer z m Number of records 3 Name Max Mur Los Angeles 600 00 USD Specializing in macro photography Hennar Bj rk New York 700 00 USD Fashion 3 PENNETTA A 900 00 USD Architectural Photography Cancel for Heb Figure 89 The Photographer property set with some records added After you filled in some data in your tables you can switch back to the thumbnail viewer and check out the results of your work Lick on the button next to each reference property to see all the properties of the selected property lt A Title World Trade Center fo Description Total of the world trade center in New York Great sun reflections and mirrored buildings Excellent lighting and shadow composing ER Photographer lyoshi Nakamura Location Tokio Charge 900 00 USD Comments Architectural Photography Home_Page Email Location New York Duality High Quality la X Figure 90 The Image property set with a completely filled in record The H button next to each reference property unfolds all properties of the referenced property set This allo
126. write protection for your images inverts the current selection by removing the selection from all selected images and selecting all unselected images If you hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while you select this command IMatch will select all images in the thumbnail viewer Selects all images in the thumbnail window Starts the Slide Show for all selected images If you want to run a slide show for all images in a folder or category use the SLIDE SHOW command from the context menu of the folder or category instead Note If you have selected only a single image when you choose this command the slide show works as follows All images are in the slide show but the slide show will start with the currently selected image copies the current image to the Windows clipboard This also copies image attributes like file name IPTC fields and the categories of the image to the clipboard You can use Paste Attributes to copy these attributes to another image copies the name and full path of the current image to the Windows clipboard This command copies all image attributes name IPTC information categories properties to the Windows clipboard Use it with Paste Attributes below The bitmap data is not copied which makes this command faster than the regular Copy command Use this command to apply all the attributes from the IMatch image currently in the clipboard to all images in the current selection If this command is di
127. you change the file format IMatch will use these settings for all future Save operations 182 File Format Options Sub Type The sub type depends on the major image format selected For example the Windows Bitmap format has two sub types Uncompressed and RLE compressed The JPEG format has seven sub types dealing with various compression options and color models If you are unsure keep the Match defaults which have been chosen carefully to match the common formats in use today Progressive If the current image formats supports a progressive Options option you can enable the use of progressive mode here Images saved in a progressive format are often used on web pages During transmission of the image over the Internet the browser is able do display a rough impression of the image When more data is transmitted the image quality gets better and better Quality If the file formats supports a variable quality factor you can choose the quality factor used to save the image here There s always a trade off between file size and image quality The larger the resulting file is the better is the overall quality of the image When you want to create images to be used in web pages it s often better to create smaller files to save some download time and bandwidth MultiPage If you ve chosen an image format that can store more Options than one image into a single file e g TIFF or FPX you can select a page number here Also if
128. you save to an existing file you also can choose to replace an existing page or add a new page at the end of the file Imaging Functions IMatch provides a large set of general imaging features All these functions are accessible via the IMAGE menu from within an Image Editor window The focus of these functions is the management and cleanup of images in your digital image library The functions available in Match split into two major categories Image and Color These function groups are accessible in the Image Editor using the menus IMAGE and COLOR If you ve ever worked with an imaging application like Adobe Photoshop or JASC PaintShop Pro you will immediately be able to utilize the functionality built into the Image Editor Undo Match provides a virtually unlimited number of Undo steps per Image Editor window Depending on the functions you use the information needed for performing the Undo operation is stored in the main memory of your computer or on your hard disk in the TEMP directory The number of undo steps is only restricted by the available RAM and disk space 183 The Image Group This group contains all functions that directly or indirectly manipulate the image contents The following table describes each command feature accessible via the IMAGE menu Following the table are some in depth explanations of the more complex features Function Flip Mirror Transform Rotate Transform Shear Rotate 90 left R
129. your source image In most cases you will use the canvas to make some room to apply one or more of the advanced effects to the image or to add image attributes and user defined properties The dimensions of the original image determine the size of the canvas if you check the RELATIVE TO IMAGE check box If you uncheck this option the controls in the dialog change to allow you to enter a width and a height in pixels Alignment Align z ben fio z Fe 10 g MM Canvas Color Width 640 Height ssd 3 I Relative to Image M Use Canvas Figure 150 Absolute dimensions for the canvas These two modes allow you to create a canvas that automatically adjusts to the size of the target image or a canvas that has fixed dimensions independent from the dimensions of the target image 291 Relative Canvas Fixed Canvas 8 E A Width i A i 2 Figure 151 Relative and absolute canvases Image Alignment The alignment of the target image within the canvas can be controlled with the ALIGNMENT control If you set this to ALIGN Match will align the target image at the Top and Left border of the canvas All other settings center the target image within the canvas vertically horizontally or both Note If you use an absolute canvas size RELATIVE TO IMAGE is unchecked the Top and LEFT canvas margins are used to align the target image on the canvas w
130. 00 or larger is advisable Note The thumbnail size cannot be changed once the database has been created Next Cancel Help Figure 26 Database location and thumbnail options Note Especially if you choose a larger thumbnail size 120 or more pixels the thumbnail database often becomes larger than the IMatch database itself It s a good idea to make some experiments with this setting to find a quality size ratio that fits to 362 your needs without using up too much disk space Use test databases that you can throw away later for this purpose Step 4 Setting Database Options and Finish With a click on NEXT you proceed to the final dialog box for the New Database Wizard New Database Options xi e These options control the initial content of your new database and the actions taken after a the new database has been created If you are unsure leave all settings untouched m Initial Database contents Tl Enable Plug In Modules IV Run Database Wizard IV Create categories based on this schema fi Private Catalog y IV Initialize Property Database from this schema fi Title and Description y This simple schema contains the properties Title and Description in the Image property set IV Load data records from property database schema m Database Options J Enable on disk and in memory compression For most databases this option should be off See the manual for details
131. 2 BMP 24 Bit Version 1 OS 2 BMP 24 Bit Version 2 PCX 1 Bit PCX 4 Bit PCX 8 Bit PCX 24 Bit PSD 1 Bit PSD 8 Bit PSD 24 Bit RAS 1 Bit RAS 4 Bit RAS 8 Bit RAS 24 Bit RAS 32 Bit TGA 8 Bit TGA 16 Bit TGA 24 Bit TGA 32 Bit TIFF 1 Bit CCITT TIFF 1 Bit CCITT G31D TIFF 1 Bit CCITT G32D TIFF 1 Bit CCITT G4 TIFF 1 Bit Uncompressed TIFF 1 Bit RLE TIFF 2 Bit Uncompressed TIFF 2 Bit RLE TIFF 3 Bit Uncompressed TIFF 3 Bit RLE TIFF 4 Bit Uncompressed TIFF 4 Bit RLE imbfTIFF5_Uncompressed imbfTIFF5_RLE imbfTIFF6_Uncompressed imbfTIFF6_RLE imbfTIFF7_Uncompressed imbfTIFF7_RLE imbfTIFF8_Uncompressed imbfTIFF8_RLE imbfTIFF8_GrayscaleYCC imbfTIFF8_LosslessJPEG imbfTIFF12_Uncompresse d imbfTIFF12_GrayscaleYC C imbfTIFF12_LosslessJPE G imbfTIFF16_Uncompresse d imbfTIFF16_RLE imbfTIFF16_LosslessJPE G imbfTIFF24_Uncompresse d imbfTIFF24_Uncompresse d_CYMK imbfTIFF24_Uncompresse d_YCC imbfTIFF24_RLE imbfTIFF24_RLE_CYMK imbfTIFF24_RLE_YCC imbfTIFF24_JPEG_YCC4 44 imbfTIFF24_JPEG_YCC4 22 imbfTIFF24_JPEG_YCC4 11 imbfTIFF24 LosslessJPG imbfTIFF32_Uncompresse d TIFF 5 Bit Uncompressed TIFF 5 Bit RLE TIFF 6 Bit Uncompressed TIFF 6 Bit RLE TIFF 7 Bit Uncompressed TIFF 7 Bit RLE TIFF 8 Bit Uncompressed TIFF 8 Bit RLE TIFF 8 Bit Grayscale YCC TIFF 8 Bit Lossless JPEG TIFF 12 Bit Uncompressed TIFF 12 Bit Grayscale YCC TIFF 12 Bit Lossless JPEG TIFF 16 Bit Uncompressed
132. 22 Note Under Windows whenever a media is formatted or a CD is burned a unique number the media serial number is assigned by the operating system This number combined with the media Id the label you entered while formatting the media 47 creates a fairly unique identifier for Match As you can see in Figure 11 the first media is currently marked offline because the second media is in the drive You now can work with the images from the second media If you want to work with the images on the first media you must first change the CD ROM in drive M The Offline File Handler This schema works fine as long as you can change the media in your drives before you actually access the images in IMatch But what happens if you want to open an offline image in the built in Image Editor Or if you want to create Contact Sheets Index Prints for all images in a category and this category contains references to images from different media some of them currently offline In these situations the Match Offline File Handler comes into play Figure 12 shows the dialog box that pops up whenever the Offline File Handler is triggered by one of your actions Media Changer x Some of the files in your selection are either offline or the wrong media is in the drive Please insert the media specified below and click Load now to process all files from that media Click on Skip to skip all files from that media or click Can
133. 43 A file with the same name exists in the target folder The file in the target folder right is smaller and newer red S and blue N The source file is bigger in either width height or both dimensions In the above figure IMatch indicates that the two files are binary identical These indicators together with the difference indicators shown next to each image are in place to help you making a quicker decision The image with the larger file size The bigger image width or height or both The newer image date time stamp on disk Renaming Files To rename a file simply click on its name in the thumbnail viewer IMatch works exactly the way as the Windows Explorer does You may also choose the rename command from the context menu If there is more than one file selected IMatch will rename only the file that has the focus To rename more than one file use the Smart Rename feature See section Smart Rename for more information about this powerful feature Tip Don t enter a file extension when you rename a file Just enter the new name and IMatch will automatically append the original file extension for you Faster Moving and Copying IMatch keeps the last 50 folders for move and copy operations in the move and copy history From the context menu you can access the last 20 of these history folders using the QUICK Copy and QUICK MOVE commands From the FILE MOVE and FILE Copy dialog boxes accessible v
134. 57 258 263 Width adjustment AULOMALI Coe E a E EEE edici 37 Width Min ci A Se a E 195 WidthIN tacita eh 195 Wid MM erise a o aa 195 Wildcards naci ar Ea 147 WindoWs installation 2 20 Seek ek ted eh eo eh es sh ee 18 Windows Notepad cutis laicos Rebs on aca 351 Windows XP EXIF feld list s sss Sl ities e ene E E T EEEa EE EEEE a EEE EA EEA ESE EEE 98 SpeciabEXTE tags tes iii Satie hk E hte Se 94 Workflow Category SOPA ta ta idas is 60 while scan esta oda stands Dada 83 Worklow Setup seee ote ee oae asus step scenes sate sik eves dedo eh TERENE EDE Ih SASRA EARE ESNE sitiada 368 CALE COPIES sins sakes A EEE EEE E EEEE AEE EE A A A 366 A NR 374 A A goths eSEE ERRE ay 57 withthe One Chek Baron ice atleti SaNa EEE ita ted 57 WOKS aCe ast NA 25 Write He dd treat e e aeaee de LD e al O 271 WWW AEE A S E E E A A A EE EE E ENA 122 Creating images A NN 298 X XCopy Deployment sii ssssssssssecisssssasaisecassassevessavsesesesseaugaissneeiaiasousdsissetasuazouaayaess 18 349 A A O O 80 Document Type Definitions ctricos iaa pia 304 O 304 explained nenin conil alcala ia 303 XMLBdtOr tiene ntc acia aca coaide da cal ce cal cgis 302 AME Schema Formats sssisc sss ssssesecasteesacasssshecastessacass syeasastoveagabeadesanssotgaisesetddestetasuasentaanss 350 Y A NS 196 Z MP A on ee a hs el ad 45 46 Zooming mthe side sho Wil takai aes eo eh A ic 319 407
135. 70 Preset Folders racen A eh ee A AE 342 Preview o ccccccccccccccccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeenes 31 32 Image mi shde Show siii AA SE O N A 319 Preview Vile Wer enteric a a ene 31 397 SCI 283 Professional Digital Camera Kodakcormiatosni odas 105 Profiles Colorao ee 345 346 347 Ti Bal an Se Ban ws a al on Ee N aia 345 PLOS TANT e a ata 210 Programmins TMathii a A Aaa 121 Progressive filesformat ss cs A A a 183 Customer Clients Sau 64 Skee aaa 61 165 Modeling a Client and Project History Clients Custometr ccoocononccnonccononcnnoncnonccnonacnonacinnoos 177 Proein aaa 61 62 165 177 Properties A a 73 74 238 240 244 245 Batch Processor uc ad e ei 297 CAL o Eta en ts el ae 366 367 368 Md cin tin anta iia paa 126 TS A A NS 128 RO 246 NO 73 74 NE 22 A NS 73 Property WINDOW ie Ii Li ica Ee Ee eS ER petttatvesteg ete cit 321 322 PropertyRecord AMPS seceded NN 279 PropertyRecord Classis tit 246 PropertySet class Sample sire RAN 279 Property set Class O O ENEI VES 244 PropertySetProperty Class ria tdi iii td 245 PropertySets ocio di diia 223 PSD tile formatspecialti iii tii tii iodo ips 374 o e tae oei e E deg sssousbidss EEE EEn aaa E TEE TE Eee IEEE IE EESE 378 Q Quality SAVING eea E E E EE E ara E TNE NTN T ANTT ETA S 183 Quality Preview for COMPrESSIO costras ia 181 QUES ii 126 Quick COPY an a a EE EEE E EE E AE n 39 Quick
136. 82 474 32 913 A IMATCE Created with IMatch Go to www photools com Figure 135 Contact Sheet with Overlay Bitmap IMatch Logo There are three solutions for creating overlay bitmaps with transparent areas a Use a bitmap with a single color background and choose the same color as the TRANSPARENT COLOR for the background bitmap a Use a bitmap that contains a mask in the alpha channel This mask then controls the transparent areas of the bitmap You can easily create such bitmaps with your favorite imaging application e g JASC PaintShop Pro or Adobe PhotoShop If you want to use the alpha information make sure the UsE ALPHA CHANNEL checkbox is checked a Use a 8 Bit per channel grayscale image and check the Use Alpha Channel check box IMatch detects that this is only a single channel bitmap and will create an alpha channel from the bitmap for you The position of the overlay bitmap can be controlled with the POSITION setting You can choose one of the predefined settings to position your bitmap relative to the canvas If you use the FREE positioning option you can position your overlay bitmap using an explicit horizontal and vertical position measured in pixels and relative to the canvas Data On this sheet you can define what type of information you want to be displayed in the contact sheet for each thumbnail You can also define a sort order for your thumbnails by using one of your Sort Presets See section Smart Sorting with
137. AND EXPORT command in the DATABASE MENU Creating Contact Sheets Some Sample Contact Sheets I PHOTOS Regenwald fa fo TROO1 small jpg TRO01 JPG TRO02 JPG TROO3 JPG TROD4 JPG TR005 JPG TROO6 JPG TROO07 JPG TROD8 JPG TROO9 JPG TR010 JPG TR011 JPG TR012 JPG TR013 JPG TR014 JPG TR015 JPG TRO16 JPG TRO17 JPG y TRO18 JPG TRO19 JPG TRO20 JPG TRO21 JPG TRO22 JPG TRO23 JPG Created with IMatch Go to www photools com 1of5 Figure 143 A simple contact sheet with only the Image name a header and footer 286 I PHOTOS Majest tische Orte MPO01 JPG y s MPDOS JPG B40x 480 g y 640x480 49 373 y K A i N 24 972 Whigs WRG g mPO08 JPG Mg 08 IPO 640 460 6 640 640 480 41 452 57 69820 52423 MPO1 Figure 144 Contact Sheet with a background bitmap header footer and some image attributes INPHOTOS HAWAII Collection of photos from my trip to Hawaii HI001 JPG HI002 JPG 640x480 640x480 47 287 49 865 Sonntag 15 Dezember 1996 Sonntag 15 Dezember 1996 Aloha Hawaii Aloha Hawaii Hawaiian Beach Small beach great sea view Some shallow mountains in the center ofthe image Impressive Nature Rough sea with breaking waves Photo by Mario Westphal Using a Nicon Photo by Mario Westphal Using a Nicon HIDO3 JPG HI004 JPG 640 x 480 640 x480 82 474 32 913 Sonntag 15 Dezember 1996 Sonntag 15 Dezember 1996 Aloha
138. AND car Find all file names or properties containing the word beach but NOT car If you want to use more complex patterns for example to find all file names starting with a or a number you need a way to tell Match exactly what to search for In these cases you use regular expressions to specify the pattern Regular expressions are powerful and flexible but may be a bit confusing at first This section gives you some examples of regular expressions to show you what can be achieved The following section explains everything in detail Examples a beach Jpg 0 9 a c a c Note Find all matches starting with a or A If you use this pattern in the file name search it will return all file names starting with a Find all matches starting with beach Find all patterns containing jpg Use patterns like this to find files of a specific type You may also use the file format selector for the same purpose Note The dot Has a special meaning in regular expressions Use instead Find all matches starting with a number n_n Find all matches starting with one of the letters a b or c no Find all matches ending with one of the letters a b or c In IMatch all regular expressions are case insensitive Regular Expression Syntax Note The following section contains the in depth documentation for the regular expression engine used in IMatch Reading this section for the firs
139. ATABASE VIEW Ff or the DATABASE menu When you first open the editor for a newly created database it contains only one predefined property set named Image This property set is automatically created and associated with each image in your database For a fresh database the Image Property Set does not contain any properties Property Name OK Cancel Data type Help Sting y Mhe To get started let s add two properties to the Image property Set Title and Description Click on the Image property set in the left part of the dialog box and press lt Ins gt A dialog box will show up where you can enter the name of the new property and also select a data type Enter Title in the PROPERTY NAME field and press ENTER We will use the predefined data type String for this property Each property set can contain up to 1 000 properties so there is plenty of room for you to store any type of information with your images Note The names for property sets and propertys may only contain alphanumeric characters digits and characters Since the property database is based on XML there are some restrictions on what type of names can be used To be safe avoid any special characters including blanks or tabs Valid names are Description or Object_Status Invalid names are for example Object Status note the blank or My Stuff private the parentheses are not allowed 74 To add the second property click lt Ins gt again Enter Descri
140. BMRLE imbflFF24_CATRLE imbfXBM imbfXPM8 imbfXPM16 imbfXPM24 imbfXPM32 imbfITG imbfxXWD10_1 imbfXWD10_4 imbfXWD10_8 imbfXWD11_ 1 PGM ASCII PGM Binary PBM ASCII PBM Binary IFF 1 Bit LBM RLE IFF 1 Bit CAT RLE IFF 2 Bit I LBM RLE IFF 2 Bit CAT RLE IFF 3 Bit I LBM RLE IFF 3 Bit CAT RLE IFF 4 Bit I LBM RLE IFF 4 Bit CAT RLE IFF 5 Bit I LBM RLE IFF 5 Bit CAT RLE IFF 6 Bit ILBM RLE IFF 6 Bit CAT RLE IFF 7 Bit ILBM RLE IFF 7 Bit CAT RLE IFF 8 Bit I LBM RLE IFF 8 Bit CAT RLE IFF 24 Bit ILBM RLE IFF 24 Bit CAT RLE XBM XPM 8 Bit XPM 16 Bit XPM 24 Bit XPM 32 Bit ITG XWD 10_1 XWD 10_4 XWD 10_8 XWD 11_1 255 imbfXWD11_4 XWD 11_4 imbfXWD11_8 XWD 11 8 imbfXWD11_16 XWD 11_16 imbfXWD11_ 24 XWD 11_24 imbfXWD11_ 32 XWD 11_32 Quality Optional For formats that allow for variable compression factors e g JPEG you can use this parameter to define a compression factor A factor of 2 the default gives the best quality 255 gives the best compression The following formats allow for variable compression factors imbfJPEG24Standard imbfJPEG24_YUV411 imbfUPEG24_YUV444 imbfJPEG24_YUV422 imbfUPEG24_YUV444 Progressive imbfJPEG24_YUV422 Progressive imbfJPEG24_YUV411_Progressive imbfJPEG8_YUV400 imbfJPEG8_YUV400_Progressive PageNo Optional If you want to write a multi page file you can specify here the page number to write and in SaveOption the append and overwrite options SaveOption Optional Used in co
141. Bal oooocccnnnccnnniccccccccnnccnnnnnannncnnnncnnnnnn non ncnnnn cnn 282 Using the IMatch Status Ba oooocccnnncinnnicococcccnnconannnrnnncnnnncnnnnnnn nn cnn nn nnnannnns 282 Using the IMatch Status Ba ooooccocnnccinnccccccccnnncconanannnccnnnncnnnnnnn non cnnnnnnannnns 282 Using the Wait Dialog ccoooincccccccnnncninnccocccccnnnccnnnnann nn cn nnn cn nana n ocn cnnnncnannnns 282 Using the Wait Dialog ooooccooonnccnncccnnnnnnnnncconnccnnnnccnnnnrn nn cnn narco nnnnnnnnno 282 Working with Fles aana iaa aaa E A AEA ARLE OTEA EER 283 Working with Files oooooncnnnnncnncccnnnnconannncnnccnnnncnnnnnan nn cnn nn ncnnnnnn rra cnn 283 Importing and Exporting your Data 285 Importing and Exporting your Data oooonncocccccnnncccnnnooonncnnnnconnnnnnn nn cn nnncnannns 285 Creating Contact Sheets ooococcnncinnnocococcccnncconanannnnnnnnnncnn anna nn nn cnn nn cra nnnnnn nano 286 Some Sample Contact Sheets ooooncococccnncccccnncoonnncnnnnnonannnnn nn cnnnncnnnnnnnnn nn 286 The Batch Processori dari inimica aa a a a cnn 288 Source Images and Output Options ooooooccccnnccnonococancccnnncnananana nc ccnnnno 288 Image Processing Options ccoooncccccccnnncccnnnnononcnnnnncnnnnnn nn cnn cnn cn nnnnnnnnno 289 RESIZING A a iio ee 290 FAS Calva ti a at telat at te 291 Background Mask and Text ODtiOns cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 292 Using Text Image Attributes and Properties cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 297 SOME T
142. Bitmaps Brushed and other files common to all users are located below the IMatch program folder a The Preset folder contains pre build Batch Converter Settings Contact Sheet Builder templates and other presets for various modules in IMatch a The Bitmap folder contains bitmaps and textures to be used with the Contact Sheet Builder the Batch Converter and the Frame Builder If you want to use your own backgrounds copy these into this folder a The Scripts folder contains all your Basic Scripts a The Plugins folder contains all plug ins Valid plug ins in this folder are automatically registered during program startup If you receive a new plug in just copy it into this folder XCopy Deployment During installation these folders are created automatically and filled with pre build files contained in the IMatch distribution The location of these folders on your hard disk can be adjusted via the OPTIONS PREFERENCES menu from within IMatch IMatch stores your personal preferences IPTC presets and other configuration files in your personal folder Under older versions this folder is located below Windows Profiles lt User Name gt For newer Windows versions this folder is located under Documents and Settings lt User Name gt My Documents In both cases the folder is named photools com IMatch Restoring IMatch on a new PC Windows installation If you need to re install Match or if you buy a new PC you can re install Ma
143. Bucket Class atari O a pa 240 MAS adas 233 234 235 236 237 240 241 242 addins to your database icc sn Sus ia a aljibe dos eee 83 Rot ws bss is a a ai lia 57 Images collection A O EAT 276 TASES OPER NEEE O OEE sduvouet eabotepsuspedeteuspedes E SE 221 Tage otter Class vii iv svscetvsstateesorshsetevesehsvevodtessesodsseaveodessansotateavnodepsdspedebeusbedeesiupedebermpeconstyy 246 WM atch A E 357 TMatch Og File yc EEE EEE EEEE E EEE 351 Match Onlin eeren lo dad 378 IMatchi Workspace WIOOW cvestounoreiite certero eitten eiere vagtsvesodes sate sigterseoteestrerteterersdesseeed 25 IMB itimapr Class cise diessestivseste ds o too 257 IMBitimapPorinat da 249 IMPrleOperationR sults terror 279 a 274 275 IpOrtiisii ill hig T dat dasseesdl bi Aus lasseasises Avie lassnasionees 24 286 Vid cp id 202 o A habises as aa sossenasdlsuchaeleseonstdpsdpaeteseonstd phan cebies 310 ImportIPT icici kaise A chung nd SEa a SEa Sebi OO a eE cue 232 WAGER PEIN ia clio iio A A pee aotars 108 dex Prints 3s 4ih ais aie haiti A thunk E Ea a Ea E Ea TES E cil Ai 110 NT A TE A 157 Info TN 375 Info Tips display NT 341 Installation s dni Laie aa a e a tin Gk dia A S EAS E aR oa EES EAER Ea 18 A E E E E 349 Titse a NR 76 Integrated Development Environment esssessseesseesrresrsrissressressressreseresereseresteestresressresete 204 A A NON 189 190 Intensity Detectisninanaa tia aida 185 INlern ets iia ra bil 189 MV ere 189 260 267 Inve
144. CATES DETECTION feature on the right hand of the dialog Match will also perform duplicate similar file detection when new files are added or existing files are updated First you need to choose a match method If you are only interested in finding binary identical images use the CRC based match method If you want to find similar images select on of your selection presets After choosing the appropriate method you need to define what to do with duplicate images There are several options available Bookmark files This operation will bookmark all files considered as duplicates The files will be added to the bookmark collection of the current database After stopping the monitor you can easily review move copy or delete the files from the SELECTION VIEW Assigning to a category This operation will assign the duplicates to a category you choose Again after stopping the monitor you can review the files by selection this category in the CATEGORY VIEWER Delete files If you automatically want to delete files considered as duplicates choose this option However have a close look at the selector you choose since you may delete files that are not real duplicates A good idea is to combine this option with a CRC based selector To find duplicate images IMatch internally performs a normal selection operation The intermediate result sets are normally thrown away automatically to save memory and disk space If you want to review the result
145. Controls how the mask bitmap is aligned to the original bitmap Use one of the following values imbfmTile Tile imbfmStretch Stretch imbfmCenter Center Description Applies the given mask bitmap to this bitmap using either none a solid color fill or a bitmap fill This method allows you to mimic the mask bitmaps used with the ADD FRAME BORDER MAsk feature of the Image Editor DrawText Arguments Str The text to draw Font The font to use This is an IMFont object See there for more information HorzAlign Controls the horizontal alignment of the font Use one of the following values imfaLeftLeft imfaCenter Center imfaRight Right VertAlign Controls the vertical alignment of the font Use one of the following values imfaTop Top imfaMiddle Middle imfaBottom Bottom Top Top margin Left Left margin Right Right margin Bottom Bottom margin Description Enables you to draw text directly onto the bitmap object You can control the 267 alignment of the text within the image and the margins that are used when aligning the text object Using the IMFont object you can control the font size and special effects of the resulting text The Top Left and Bottom Right parameters form the bounding rectangle for the text With this bounding rectangle you control the area where the text is displayed GetPixel Returns the pixel at the given X Y position SetPixel Sets the pixel at the given X Y position to a new color GetHistog
146. Custom Field 5 Custom Field 6 Custom Field 7 Custom Field 8 xl ps Onion oko alto These options allow you to control how the information in the editor is combined with the information in the image file c ES If you choose to replace the existing information IMatch will overwrite Update only modified fields all IPTC fields in the image with the information in the editor Always keep existing information in non empty fields The second option will only update the information that is different in the editor compared to the information contained in the image All other information remains unchanged Merge items from template image The third option always keeps existing information in the image Only empty fields will be overwritten What to do with keywords and categories These options are also available on the toolbar below Rl gt Ba B low om ou Figure 100 Other Fields and Options These options are only valid for the multi image mode When you edit an individual image the information is written back into the image as displayed in the editor Replace existing IPTC information This mode will replace existing information in the IPTC record of your images with the information from the IPTC editor What you see in the editor will be written back to all currently selected images Update only modified fields This mode will update only modified fields Only fields modified in the editor will be written bac
147. D MAPPINGS list contains two columns The left column contains all properties in your Image property set The right column allows you to choose from a list of available EXIF metadata field To import an EXIF field into one of your properties just select the EXIF field in the right column of the appropriate property Tip The EXIF metadata format supports several data types like String and Number IMatch only shows Image Property gt Exif Field combinations that are compatible For example a numeric property can only be filled from a numeric EXIF field All EXIF fields can be assigned to String property fields IMatch automatically converts the EXIF metadata fields to strings in these cases Finally you should uncheck the UPDATE ONLY EMPTY PROPERTIES in most cases If you check this the EXIF import will only update image properties that are empty when new EXIF data is 97 loaded This means that properties that already contain values are not updated in the future This makes only sense in special cases so you should leave this option unchecked By clicking on OK Match starts to import the EXIF metadata into your property database This operation is usually very fast and should only take seconds or minutes if you have thousands of images After the import is completed you will see the imported information in your Image Property Set You now can use the normal IMatch selection procedure to search for images with specific EXIF attributes
148. Ds BB ELE ma num Z For Help press F1 Figure 22 The image preview in full screen mode The Selection View The feature that differentiates Match most from thumbnailing applications is the ability to perform selections queries based on various criteria including image analysis and image matching operations IMatch demo imd loll Database Edit Image View Options Window Help la x a 5418 31 VEK Shape and Color Same Orientation My Bookmarks E Selection Templates E 7 E Duplicate Images EE ae a A a oY SY Files lt 100 KB Ely Pre Selectors z A E Shape and Color Same Orientation amp Categories Dimensions Y Similar Colors Y Folders a Persistent Results E Y Basic Selectors Relative to the original image Selection History Result Sat Options Concider deviation for E File Size Horizontal and vertical dimensions 1 000 2 O Dimensions E Date and Time Absolute Dimensions El File Name Horizontal Vettical EY Image Matchers amp Sketch and Color From 1 From Y General Matching 6 User defined Properties To 10000 3 a Plug In Selectors Consider Orientation Portrait and Landscape Same as original image Only landscape C Only portrait Categories For Help press F1 LJ Figure 23 The Selection View with a highlighted selection A selection is basically a sub set o
149. E EEEO EOE le nateds tet teats alse 57 ASSISNA COLO rtf EE 235 AS id dl E O e e a a 162 Assignment A E O Motes alive teat E ds oaetlated 367 A SSI Orient A CLOTS oe aeee Eeee E aeS gotes stay SEEE r DE i eE EEEE EEN ea Sapi 367 ASOC OTIS AASA EE EEEE EEE EEE EE E T 73 AO RT 193 AMD ei iii bibi 73 Author Split dat 204 O 37 184 186 O RR 104 AutoCalConiid oi his aA ch sla anaes 235 PUMA Os O cestode ted A E N 122 Auto Refreshs siii cial 28 AUtO Cali E dotados 28 ALO TEA A ia 186 187 Autor Prim Edesa iodo 184 AverageP ilter acond idilio 261 B Backup outside 17 20 backup copy Of lonas assi 353 Backup Procedures uma 128 Basic Selectors iia aia a aia 139 Batch Convert a canbe cvcdes E EEAS 290 Batch Converting Images loas odas ta 57 Batch PROCESS a e a a A NS 57 120 289 CRW files uu iia ts dl 105 DER files ciutat aa ia aia 105 Batch RENAME ica a 35 Best Practices a osito ica ainia 90 BiGubies 3 aici caida 187 290 Batimap vn ci sen coed cnet evs hen cees coed TE 185 RN 195 and Cp O Dd 249 384 Bl oia ii tatiana 185 Blur etica 185 Bliss 184 185 Bold Boolean aia 269 Born MaS eos 23 132 221 229 Bol Mii re ere eee 132 Selections View Bookmarks a a 137 Boolean expressions and CALE SOLIES is sado cai 169 Border M s A eh eh lets 294 295 296 BPP a paca da 194 239 OID Universal Resource Identifier URI Cyclic Redundancy Checksum CRC Bits Per Precio shoes evicted beh aed ies ed ed ne 193 Brighttiess cani Si S
150. E USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF MMW HAS BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY FURTHER IN NO EVENT SHALL MMW S LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT EXCEED THE LICENSE FEE PAID TO MMW FOR THE SOFTWARE BECAUSE SOME STATES JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU IN ANY SUCH CASES OR COUNTRIES WHERE ANY OF THE ABOVE TERMS AND CONDITIONS IS ILLEGAL YOU ARE NOT ALLOWED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE 6 INDEMNIFICATION You agree to hold harmless indemnify and defend MMW its officers directors and employees from and against any losses damages fines and expenses including attorneys fees and costs arising out of or relating to any claims of improper use 7 TERMINATION This License Agreement will automatically terminate if you fail to comply with any term hereof No notice shall be required from MMW to effect such termination Upon termination you agree to destroy all copies of the Software and its documentation 8 MISCELLANEOUS Neither this License Agreement nor any part or portion hereof shall be assigned or sublicensed by you MMW may assign its rights under this License Agreement in MMW s sole discretion Should any provision of this License Agreement be held to be void invalid unenforceable or illegal by a court the validity and enforceability o
151. E gt key will allow you to pan your image Right mouse button lt ESC gt key lt X gt Mouse Wheel lt Ctrl gt lt Mouse Wheel gt lt gt And lt gt keys lt Ctrl gt and lt gt or lt gt lt Cursor left gt lt Cursor right gt lt Numpad 4 gt lt Numpad 6 gt lt Home gt lt End gt lt Numpad 8 gt Open the context menu Abort the slide show Abort the slide show Proceed to the next or previous image in the sequence Depending on the scroll direction the next or previous image in the sequence will be shown Zoom in and out Use lt Ctrl gt lt Left Mouse button gt to go back to 100 You may also use lt Z gt to toggle back to original size or fit to screen mode Previous or next image in the sequence Zoom the current image in and out Previous or next image in the sequence Previous or next image in the sequence First image Last image First image 319 lt Numpad 2 gt lt Numpad 5 gt lt P gt lt Pause gt Last image Pause an automatic slide show Pause an automatic slide show lt G gt Go to folder lt B gt Bookmark image lt Del gt Delete the current image with prompt lt Shift gt lt Del gt Delete the current image no prompt lt Z gt Toggles between original image size 100 view and fit to screen mode lt R gt Toggle rectangular zoom mode If rectangular zoom mode is on you can select a rectangular area of the image to zoom in If you press lt
152. EQUALIZE procedure allows you to bring out details in dark areas of your image WITH HISTOGRAM STRETCH you can increase the contrast in the bitmap by centering maximizing and proportioning the range of intensity values Posterize Applies a Posterize effect on your image Solarize Applies a Solarize effect on your image Adjust BRIGHTNESS CONTRAST GAMMA allows you to modify the brightness contrast and gamma values of your image With HUE SATURATION VALUE you can modify the overall color temperature and appearance of your image CHANGE COLORS allows you to interactively modify the Red Green and Blue channels of your image Modifying Brightness Contrast and Gamma If your image is to dark has no contrast or needs Gamma correction use this function to change any of these settings The Dual Preview on the left of the dialog box displays the original image on the top and the resulting image at the bottom When you modify the B C G values in the dialog box the result image is automatically updated when you rest the mouse for half a second Brightness Contrast Gamma x Brightness Contrast j 2 al l l Cancel Help Figure 124 The Brightness Contrast Gamma dialog Tip With the Zoom Controls on the bottom left you can view your original image at different zoom factors To pan an image use the mouse click on either the original 190 or the result preview and move your mouse while holding down th
153. EWER choose EDIT from the thumbnail context menu or choose OPEN IMAGE from the FILE menu To set the layout options to be used for the print open the PAGE LAYOUT dialog box from the FILE MENU Margins and Positioning gt r Colors Color Print Y T Negative Left 20 aj Top 20 4 Right o Bottom 0 Units Millimeter e Printer Figure 127 The Page Layout dialog box From this dialog box you can adjust the printed size of your image the position of the image on the page the page margins and define whether you want to create a color grayscale or negative print Tip If you want to make modifications on the image to create better quality prints you can copy your original into the clipboard and then paste it as a new image You may also duplicate the image directly with the DUPLICATE command from the WINDOW menu This way you can apply any type of corrections without touching your original 192 image Variables Variables This section describes the unique Variables concept built into IMatch This concept allows you to utilize the information content of your database with various Match modules The networked and hyperlinked structure of all objects in your database forms much more than a simple collection of thumbnails Each image in your database is implicitly or explicitly linked with other objects attributes and properties IMatch maintains these associations in efficient intern
154. GB value Use the RGB function in Basic to define the font color DropShadow Boolean True if the font is drawn with a drop shadow ShadowColor OLE_COLOR The color for the drop shadow ShadowOffsetHorz Integer Horizontal offset of the drop shadow in pixel ShadowOffsetVert Integer Vertical offset of the drop shadow in pixel Methods GetBoundingBox Arguments String A text string Width Contains the width of the bounding box on return Set this to a specific value lt gt 0 to limit the bounding box in the horizontal dimension Height Contains the height of the bounding box on return Set this to a specific value 269 lt gt 0 to limit the bounding box in the vertical dimension Description Calculates the bounding box surrounding rectangle for a given text for this IMFont object This method can be used to calculate the space required to draw a specific text for easier positioning You must set either Width or Height to a value lt gt 0 to limit the bounding box in one dimension Example Create a font object Dim font As IMFont Set font New IMFont Setup a larger times font with drop shadow font FaceName Times New Roman font Size 32 font Color RGB 255 255 255 font DropShadow True font ShadowColor RGB 64 0 0 font ShadowOffsetHorz 2 font ShadowOffsetVert 2 Draw some text on to a IMBitmap object bm DrawText This is a text font imfaCenter imfaMiddle _ 0 0 bm Wi
155. GO1 JPG HI002 JPG HI003 JPG 640 x 480 640 x 480 640 x 480 47 287 49 865 82 474 Hawaiian Beach Impressive Nature Ancient Arts l MATCH a Figure 140 The contact sheet with image attributes and image properties added Note the use of the blank line to separate the image attributes from the title Again you are completely free in how your format your variables Just make some experiments to find the optimal settings for your needs Headers and Footers IMatch also allows you add headers and footers to your contact sheets Just switch to the HEADER AND FOOTER sheet in the Contact Sheet Builder You can enter free text or use variables to provide the content for your headers and footers Usually you will use some variables of the Sheet variable set here To produce the headers shown in Figure 142 I ve used these definitions Contact Sheets Test 2 x Presets Output Thumbs Style Data Header and Footer Preview m Header A A Center 0o O Right O b m Footer Left ld Font Center O M Right peene ae Cancel Apply Help Figure 141 The Header and Footer sheet 119 T PHOTOS HAIAI IMATCH HI001 JPG HI002 JPG HI003 JPG 640 x 480 640 x 480 640 x 480 47 287 49 865 82 474 Hawaiian Beach Impressive Nature Ancient Arts Copyright 2000 Mario M Westphal and phootols com l 1of1 Figure 142 Contact Sheet with headers and footers The Contact Sheet Builder is an ex
156. IMG_0906 2 psd 1 of 2 modified i E Description Image Information Other Fields and Options Presets F Special Tools Delete specific keyword s from all selected files Run File D Data incoming New 2002 09 IMG_0906 2 psd Current Image Caption z Alte Briicke in Weilmiinster Hessen a Special Instructions T Object Name ale Br cke Headline ale Br cke Byline Alte Br cke in Weilmiinster Hessen Byline Title TE Ersan aa o Bl Jara ou Navigation Credit Mario M Westphal 0 Copyright Mario M Westphal 0 Caption Writer Mario M Westphal 0 Source A 4 s o oa a a Write Modes Open Thesaurus Multi Singe Edit Paste Mac Conversion Copy Figure 99 The IPTC Editor 323 The IPTC Editor consists of three panes The first tab is entitled Description and contains the more general information items from IPTC The second tab Image Information contains captions keywords date and time values and location information The third pane contains custom non standard IPTC fields and allows you to control the operation of the IPTC editor when you handle multiple files at once Editing single and multiple files The IPTC editor allows you to edit individual images In this scenario you simply select the image you want to edit in a thumbnail window e
157. IMatch Categories JIPTC Supplemental Categories a Import IPTC keywords into IMatch Categories PTE Keywords El M Convert IPTC Urgency Field 10 into IMatch Categories IPTC Urgency El Figure 175 Categorizing Images based on IPTC fields You can directly import these fields into categories below the All category Perhaps you prefer to create a new top level category for easier handling In the sample above we have first created a category named IPTC in the CATEGORY VIEW Below this category we have created four categories for each of the four IPTC fields We use these categories as the parent categories for the imported IPTC fields After the IPTC import has finished your images will be contained in one or more categories However this all works if your images do contain valid information in at least one of these fields After analyzing several thousand images with IPTC information it has shown that most images at least contain some keywords which is perfectly enough for Match to categorize them Un assign images from all categories before import This option allows you to remove imported images from all categories before they are assigned to categories based on the IPTC record in the image file If you remove a IPTC keyword from an image that has already been imported into your database this image will not be removed from the category that corresponds with the keyword You will have a mismatch between the keywords
158. IMatch can only map Image records to files in your database that have the same checksum or files that are stored at the same location as the files that have been used to build the schema If you move files around on your disks or you manipulate files you will not be able to import the image property set from a XML schema There is no way for Match to map files when they have been manipulated or moved This only applies to Image property set records All other property sets can be imported successfully into any other IMatch database Importing Schemas into non empty databases 1 2 If you import a schema into a non empty database Match will import only property sets that are not already in the database or that are empty have no properties Match will not update existing property sets to match the XML schema nor will it add remove properties from existing property sets If you want to replace the property sets in your database remove them before trying to load a new property schema from an external file If you import a property schema that contains data records Match will import the data from the schema file into your database under two conditions The property sets do not exist IMatch will create them automatically The existing property sets exactly match the property sets in the schema file 306 IMatch does not check for duplicate records during schema import If your existing database already contains records th
159. ImageBucket object and store the images considered as hits in this bucket while you re scanning the database After the database scan is completed you can update the bookmark collection of the database with a single call to AddBookmarks which is by an order of magnitude faster Create an image bucket for this database Dim bookmarks As ImageBucket Set bookmarks db CreateImageBucket Dim i As Image For Each i In db GetImages If UCase Left i Name 1 A Then Add this image to the bucket bookmarks CombineImage i End If Next i Update the bookmark collection from the image bucket db AddBookmarks bookmarks Images Note The wait dialog code has been left out for clarity Providing User Feedback Providing User Feedback The IMatch scripting language contains three mechanisms that allow you to provide user feedback 281 Using the Scripting Output Window Using the Scripting Output Window The scripting output window allows you to print or dump textual data To dump a string to the output window use the built in Debug Print method Debug Print Script running This message will show up in the output window and when you execute your script from within the scripting IDE also in the Intermediate window More information about the Debug object can be found in the online help of the scripting IDE Using the IMatch Status Bar Using the IMatch Status Bar Using the IMatch Status Bar The Application ob
160. Just create a category with this formula All However please note that this category really links to all your images and if you click on it it can take a while for Match to retrieve and load the images I have tested this up to 50 000 images without problems How to create a category that shows me all uncategorized images To create a category that shows you all images not yet categorized requires one additional step You need to create a single root category for all your images like in the following sample A1L My Images Below this root category you create all your other categories If you already have created categories below the All category you can create the root category at any time and then move your existing categories below this category using your mouse and drag and drop Then create a category on the same level as your common root category and name it Uncategorized eAll My Images Uncategorized The formula for this category is A11 NOT My Images This means All images not assigned to My Images or on of its sub categories Since all your categorized images are assigned to this category or one of its sub categories this formula returns all images not yet in another category Adding renaming and deleting categories Categories are managed in the CATEGORIES VIEW Press lt Ctrl gt lt 2 gt or choose the CATEGORY VIEW command from the VIEW menu Or click on the CATEGORIES tab in you
161. LN Ga databases osc57 sec E sakes AR ed aan aaa ee eee eth eae 360 Database Backup iii rs 17 Database Password Chan in anen kes catty sek he Be tas ok tet a ON seh an Ree meta ae tes eh oa 360 Password chan Mccain dolida cicle i ici 361 Database Vic Worst licita toda ll eolica 25 Database Wizard EEES TS 83 84 87 Database OU se cotas iii da leads lec teats tha canasladaatiies adalhcliteaeteaeal ahaha de andalst 240 Databases tomate eta altillo led ae 212 Ditto aii lleida 76 194 195 Date aiid Time ta ti ed ca 341 and selections tallada leia cl T 146 A USO 341 DateAdded 0c comisionada liarla tanaslchstiss cala llal dalla RES 239 DA OA 196 DAS eieaa RT 196 Date YYY Ya iii 195 Dat YY Y YMM 33sec eich ete in cala 195 Date YY YYMMDD meann ansia ei 195 Dia Rio vous iii 196 Day NUM escindida 196 Debus Print 43 sven iin aran bird 282 Default iani eens A ain hala E T inde ravines 246 Delete li 39 52 53 54 DeleteChildren coordine 238 Dependencies between catesOries ocasionar 64 365 Description gt ie a i et ete E 235 236 237 238 243 244 245 Diablethe Ort line Cache 55 cose e 49 Slide Show and off line caching Off line cache and the Slide ShOW oocononccnoncccnocccnonccnnno 50 Disita Cameras sisi stan tind lel hah inn eel eA aed 94 96 and TPT Coss ohh eesti Sete thei A al SU SR A 329 Disital Imasiis Groups iisi ias 79 Dimensions aNd SelectlOns dio ia 145 Chania taa ia a iS 289 Directimages comicios ii
162. Magick WWW page is http www imagemagick org im3manual IMatch Online Help Overview This section contains an overview about the IMatch online help If no specific help exists for the current situation you can click on any of the topics below to get more information You can also use the help index on the left to find additional help for the current situation or feature Help Sections Installation and Setup How to install Match on your computer Getting support Planning your Database Backing up and data security Overview The Match workspace Creating and managing databases Removable media handling CD ROM DVD The Thumbnail Window View the contents of your database Perform file operations like move copy rename and delete Use the Smart Renamer to rename series of images Work with IPTC and EXIF information Work with off line images on removable media The Category System Create a virtual view on all the images in your database independent from their actual physical storage location Group your images by topic theme projects customers family locations Use categories like simple keywords or create a hierarchical view on top of your images Create dynamic relations between your images using category formulas 357 Running Selections Searching Images Learn how to search for images using a variety of criteria Create result sets and use the drill down to find and order you
163. Match It is not only preserved but also can be edited and updated This capability sets IMatch ahead of other products on the marked today which not only ignore this information but also often remove it when IPTC information is written back to the file The IPTC Configuration files Tag Block A tab block describes an IPTC field tag It has the following format ID IPTC Field Number Field Set 2 329 Standa 1 for standard fields 0 for non standard rd ExtVe If this is a non standard field this element can contain the name of the ndor vendor or some other identification string Currently not used Name The name of the field as it is displayed in the user interface Desc A description of the field currently not used Type The field data type Match currently supports only fields of type String except for field 0 Record Version MinLe The minimum length for the field Use the IPTC standard limits n MaxLe The maximum length for the field Use the IPTC standard limits n Manda 1 if this field is mandatory O for optional fields Currently not tory enforced Displa The number of lines to display for this field in the Other Fields pane yHeigh of the IPTC Editor This field has only a meaning for non standard t fields Minimum here is one maximum is 20 Within the configuration file tag blocks must be enclosed in and parentheses The element name and the element content must be separated with a blank or tab c
164. Match object model The IMatch Workspace The IMatch Workspace Window Figure 2 shows the Match workspace window with the different views On the left side you see the database view with all folders currently indexed by the Match database On the right side you have the thumbnail viewer with the thumbnails for the highlighted folder on the left Main Toolbar Thumbnail Pane Caption Window Sort Selector IMatch demo imd Database Edit Image View Scripting Options Window Help Local Toolbar Ml elu A Has ave CEELI Ex d photos Rainforest A iras Database Root Y Database E 2 photos d Rain Forest Ee A Flowers Blumen 1 Folder l Blumen 2 TROO3JPG TROO4 JPG U Blumen 3 0 Wilde Pflanzen 0 JETS U Meer TROOZJPG TROIOJPG TRO11 JPG TROW2JPG 0 Menschen Q Lf Mikrofone Musik es all Muster TROISJPG TROI7JPG TROISJPG TROISJPG TRO2OJPG Nahrung Title ue E Description Nice bird with an orange bill e Natur E seige al Landschaften New York E Dalabase E view EIE ERE di photod Rain Forest TROO1 small ipd YQRIVE_V 3204240 24 26 68 KB Poa 07 1252 mes NN Z Database View View Selectors Property Window Busy Indicator Key Indicators Script Running Ind
165. ND Edit State 1 Scanned This category returns all images assigned to Client A and which are also in the Edit State 1 Scanned Splashers It is also a good idea to create category splashers for the most frequently used category combinations This way you can easily assign multiple images to multiple categories by selected a single splasher from the toolbar of the thumbnail window A good splasher setup also allows you to categorize images by edit state or priority urgency and to facilitate the use of color coding Tip You can add your most frequently used categories and splashers to the One Click dialog bar This allows you to assign images with only a single mouse click to any number of categories The Image Editor The Image Editor This section describes the capabilities of the built in Image Editor This editor allows you to view your images at different zoom levels and to perform a variety of image manipulation functions on your image What the Image Editor is not The Image Editor of Match has been build to provide the most frequently used image manipulation functions in an easy to user manner It is a very valuable tool more than sufficient for the normal user It contains all required image manipulation routines and also some specialized functions not found in other applications 179 It is not a replacement for full fledged imaging suites like Adobe PhotoShop PaintShop Pro or Eclipse These are fine applica
166. NT Set SName Row gt lt ATTLIST Set PSOID IDREF REQUIRED gt lt EL NT SName PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT Row URI CRC MID MSER Val gt lt ELEMENT URI PCDATA gt lt EL NT CRC PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT MID PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT MSER PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT Val PCDATA gt lt ATTLIST Val CID CDATA REQUIRED gt Note This DTD is subject to change as soon as the XML Schema standard is approved by the WC3 committee IPTC Import Field Mappings With Field Mappings you control which IPTC fields are imported into which properties in the Image Property Set of the current database There are no fixed rules on what to import and where to store it You can import all standard or user defined IPTC fields or only selected fields that are of interest for you 307 IPTC Import i aS x This import module allows you to import IPTC information from image files into your property database Once in the property database the information is immediately available for selections and accessible via the scripting engine and all import and export filters 9 mp Temp D C Import files from selected folders E A ipte and NEWSML D 7 Process folders recursively iid et it ada zl Field Mappings control which IPTC fields are imported into which property of your Image property set By ine gt Title Add Caption Abstract gt Description Date Create
167. OCATE command from the context menu of that folder and select the new drive for that folder This tells IMatch that the media is now in a new drive and updates the database accordingly Removable Media To copy move delete rename or preview an image that is currently offline insert the media and wait for a few seconds Match will automatically recognize that you ve changed the media in that drive and will reload the drive information You can also press the lt F5 gt after you have activated the DATABASE VIEWER click somewhere on the window to force an immediate update IMatch will verify that the correct media is in the drive and will reset the state of all images on that media back to online 46 If you switch to the preview for an image that is currently offline the preview will display a message like the following The image media is offline Media 9912272203 with Media ID 3221215922 M Cor Photos ANCIENTS Folder comment Images of Ancient Buildings from the E gypt CD ROM Figure 10 Trying to preview an image that is offline Using the information given here you should be able to find and insert the right media quite easily After you have inserted the media press lt F5 gt or click on the image again to open it in the preview window Even if you have added several CD ROMs to your database and you have only a single CD ROM drive this schema works fine Match always is able to identify which media is in the dr
168. PEG JFIF and TIFF files imiptcWriteFailed Failure to update file Write File only imiptcReadOnly The file is read only WriteFile only Description This method opens the given file and populates the field collection of the IPTC stream with the IPTC information contained in the file WriteFile Arguments FileName Fully qualified file name of the file to write the IPTC info to Return Values See above Description This method writes the contents of the field collection into the given file The field collection must have been populated before by calling LoadFile or via scripting The IPTCFieldCollection Cass The IPTCFieldCollection Cass This class represents a collection of fields read from a file with embedded IPTC information Individual fields are accessible via the official IPTC field number or by the field name The name of a field must match the name of the field as given in the IPTC configuration files Properties Count Returns the number of fields in the collection For a fresh PTCStream object this method will return 0 Item Default Method This method returns the item at the given position or with the given name 271 The IPTCField Cass The IPTCField Cass This class represents one filed within an IPTCFields collection Properties ID Returns the IPTC field number for this field Name Returns the name of this field Contents Returns the contents of this field Some IPTC fields may appea
169. PERTY EDITOR and add the property sets and properties as described in the table below Property Property Set Image Title Descriptio n Photograp her Location Quality Photograp Name her Location Charge Comment s Home_Pa ge Email Location Name Descriptio n Quality Quality Descriptio n Data Type String String Reference to property set Photographer Link property is Name Reference to property set Location Link property is Name Reference to property set Quality Link property is Description String Reference to property set Location Link property is Name Currency String Hyperlink Hyperlink String String String String If you set up your database properties as described in this table the final property set layout will look like shown in Figure 85 and Figure 86 78 Meta Figure 85 The property set schema for the demo database Property Database Editor This property is a measure for the image quality It is a reference to the Quality property sel oy ont Figure 86 The same schema in the Database Property Editor Setting up the data model for your database may take some amount of thinking since the structure of the Match database is flexible to adapt to every possible requirement If you have ever worked with other databases you should feel quite comfortable with the property set concept of IMatch I
170. PNG8 imbfPNG24 imbfPNG32 imbfFAX_G31D imbfFAX_G32D imbfFAX_G4 imbfEPS imbfEXIF_RGB imbfEXIF_YCC imbfEXIF_JPEG411 imbfEXIF_JPEG422 imbfFPX24_Uncompresse d imbfFPX24_DefaultQuality imbfFPX8_Uncompressed imbfFPX8_DefaultQuality imbfIMG imbflOCA_G32D imbfMODCA_G31D imbfMODCA_G32D imbfMODCA_G4 imbfPCT1 imbfPCT4 imbfPCT8 imbfPCT24 imbfMAC imbfAWD imbfMSP imbfOS21_V1 imbfOS21_V2 imbfOS24_V1 imbfOS24_V2 PNG 4 Bit PNG 8 Bit PNG 24 Bit PNG 32 Bit FAX G31D FAX G32D FAX G4 EPS EXIF Uncompressed RGB EXIF Uncompressed YCC EXIF JPEG 411 EXIF JPEG 422 FPX 24 Bit Uncompressed FPX 24 Bit Default Quality FPX 8 Bit Uncompressed FPX 8 Bit Default Quality IMG IOCA G32D MODCA G31D MODCA G32D MODCA G32D PCT 1 Bit PCT 4 Bit PCT 8 Bit PCT 24 Bit MAG AWD MSP OS 2 BMP 1 Bit Version 1 OS 2 BMP 1 Bit Version 2 OS 2 BMP 4 Bit Version 1 OS 2 BMP 4 Bit Version 2 251 252 imbfOS28_V1 imbfOS28_V2 imbfOS224_V1 imbfOS224 V2 imbfPCX1 imbfPCX4 imbfPCX8 imbfPCX24 imbfPSD1 imbfPSD8 imbfPSD24 imbfRAS1 imbfRAS4 imbfRAS8 imbfRAS24 imbfRAS32 imbfTGA8 imbfTGA16 imbfTGA24 imbfTGA32 imbfTIFF1_CCITT imbfTIFF1_CCITT_G31D imbfTIFF1_CCITT_G32D imbfTIFF1_CCITT_G4 imbfTIFF1_Uncompressed imbfTIFF1_RLE imbfTIFF2_Uncompressed imbfTIFF2_RLE imbfTIFF3_Uncompressed imbfTIFF3_RLE imbfTIFF4_Uncompressed imbfTIFF4_RLE OS 2 BMP 8 Bit Version 1 OS 2 BMP 8 Bit Version 2 OS
171. PS amp CKS cesos 298 EXIF and IPTG Data ET A E EEA 300 DEO A aE S D i rs AERAN AAEN ANONTSAS NINE ANEREN VIEI IN PARIR AN IREN TE 300 The Text EXporti laa 300 The Text Export Fillers nen 300 mall 2149 0 ola tardor a a 300 Exporting to Microsoft Office Applications 303 Relational Database Systems oooooccccnnccconococoncccnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnannnnn nn 303 AMESUPPO ca dia 303 XM SUPPO iawn oa 303 Exporting the Schema only ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeenaaaes 304 Export property set with content ooooocccnnnnccnnnnocaccnonarn nono nnonncn nora n cnn 305 Export Image property Sltd oonoooccccnnnccconocooncccnnnconannnnnnnccnnn conan non cnn cnn cnnnnnns 305 Importing a Property ScheMa cooooccccnncccoccccnnnccnnnnannnononnnconannnnn nn cnnnncnnnnnns 305 Image File Mapping cooocccccnccccnocononcninnncnannnnnnncnnnnncnnnnnn nn ncnnnnncnnnnnnn nano 306 Importing Schemas into non empty databases eee 306 Match DTD Version duiiecoaonendaa ne ai 307 PTE AMP tia hee Oe at A et oe AOO EE 307 Field Mappings not ae tie ee is A is PS es e de 307 Automatic CategoriziNQ cooonncocnccnnnncinnncccccccnnncconnnnn nn ncnn nn ra nannn nn nc 309 OMS setings ses ae Ss SEI E A Os ee 310 EXIF IMPONE a Eaa AARS AREE tats lancet eel ieee ee dad ld ek 311 Importing ACDSee TM and JPSoft s 4DOS 4NT TM Description Files 311 Importing ACDSee TM and JPSoft s 4DOS 4NT TM Description Files 311 Matching an
172. R gt while the image is in fit to screen mode Match will automatically switch into the 100 view lt I gt Toggle the information window and toolbar on and off If you don t enable the automatic loop feature for the slide show the slide show will end with the last image in the sequence To run the slide show forever enable the loop settings under the OPTIONS menu Slide Show Preferences The slide show will use the file format preferences set in OPTIONS see section File Format Preferences to determine the file size to load for PhotoCD FlashPix and JBIG files The slide show preferences also control whether or not the slide show uses off line cache images or preview images for certain file formats If you select a folder or a category for your slide show the sort preset Standard will be used If you select some images in a thumbnail viewer the sort preset of the thumbnail viewer will also be used for the Slide Show Tip If you want a full screen preview in the slide show go to Options Preferences Slide Show and enable USE ORIGINAL IMAGE SIZE Then disable the info window display Remove the check mark before SHOW IMAGE INFORMATION This leaves the slide show maximum room for the image and displays the image in full size If the image is larger than the available screen space you can move the image on screen by holding down the left mouse button Hyperlinks The slide show also supports hyperlinks which means that you can alw
173. REENER 57 Rotation A NR 339 S Saad ao eal a 189 190 191 NN 242 Save you datan ii A E T E N R aain 128 Save Filenin er aE E RR A E ERAS 250 Savine Databases ricos a a aa ea a EAE E A A ears 17 Sax e RA T E E 122 SEa R aa E O O 249 Scales Ro 266 Scanner and IPTCi iain a aa a E E E a A a AE dais 329 Scanning adding images to youtdat bases ni nininini a a A A E ENA 83 NEIRA IR 378 Script One Click Bari ais 57 Script indicator aa 33 Script indicator flashes cuisine 33 Script Manager soneron ire en aaa 204 205 Scripting LoadFile Scripting SaveFile Scripting ChangeColorResolution Scripting Resize Scripting Grayscale Scripting CopyToClipboard Scripting CopyFromClipboard Scripting Copy Scripting CopyRect Scripting CaculateSizeWithAspect Scripting Flip Scripting Mirror Scripting Rotate Scripting ChangelIntensity Scripting GammaCorrect Scripting ChangeContrast Scripting HistogramEqualize Scripting HistogramStretch Scripting ChangeHue Scripting ChangeSaturation Scripting Invert Scripting DetectIntensity Scripting AddNoise Scripting AverageFilter Scripting RemoveNoise Scripting Mosaic Scripting Oilify Scripting Posterize Scripting Sharpen Scripting Emboss Scripting SpatialFilter Scripting Combine Scripting AddBorder Scripting RemoveBorder Scripting AddOverlay Scripting FileExtensionForFormat Scripting Fill Scripting FillBitmap Scripting Scale Scripting AddMask Scripting DrawText Scripting GetPixel Scr
174. Race Asian or in People Race Black Now we add some other categories to our virtual database Location Beaches Cities Mountains Villages Further assume that all images in the database have been assigned to these categories For example a female adult Caucasian person at the beach will be contained in the People Race Caucasian People Age Group Adult People Gender Female and in the Location Beaches categories If you now click on the Beaches category you will see this image since it is has been assigned to this category If you want to create a category showing only images of persons at the beach you would enter the following formula Location Beaches AND People IMatch will combine all images contained in the People category or any of its sub categories with the images contained in the Location Beaches The result set of this calculation will contain only the images that are contained in both categories If you want a category showing people at the beach or in the mountains this formula will do the trick Location Beaches OR Location Mountains AND People Note the use of parentheses in this expression Parentheses control the order of evaluation in an expression The usual order of evaluation is from left to right If you want to be sure which part of your expression gets evaluated first use parentheses IMatch will first calculate the contents of the expression within the parentheses which results in
175. S A O 76 Property Dala TPO icccevvsceveesueese cveeeevyecueenstcvesvesssaseeestevespeesesstenstsseseretevess 76 Display Fei tis cents E O O EEEE ES 77 Reference PropertieS ooooccccononococccccnnnccnnannnnnccnnnncnnannn nn nn cnn anna nana nn nnno 77 Multiple Property Sets uci sc5sccteecdevcrerscveseeesvayens cs seesvanseasgoees i esvavevensveesseesvevss 77 Meta Data Standards and XML ccccceecceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeetees 79 Adding data to your property Sets oooonnnccocccccnnncccnnncaoncconnncnonnnnn ocn cnnnnnns 80 First Steps Creating a new Database 83 The Database Wizard Adding folders and files ecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 83 Best Practices 90 Best Practices icc iaa 90 Database Creation and LOCAation cccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetneeeeeees 90 Database Backup aaeeea aseo vie ait ees 90 Updating Images or adding NEW images cccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 90 Cate gorizing IMages oocoooonnccccccnnnncinnnoncnnncnnnnccnnnnnr cnn cana nnrnnannnnnno 90 Workingwith EXIE Dalaiooncnsnon adan 91 Working with IPTC Datta oooconnnnccnccccnnnccconanannncnnnnncnnanann nn nnnnnn nana 91 Working with removable media CD ROM DVD 91 Digital Cameras and IMatCh ooooccccnnnccncncccoancccnnccnnnnnn on cnnnnncnnnnn non ncnnnncnnnnnns 91 Smart RENAMC ari 91 Sending Images via Email ooooonncnnnncocicccnnnconananannncnnnnnnnnnann non cnnnnnnannnns 92 supported File Rormals 0 a a ba oa oa 93
176. Scripting AddBoomark Scripting AddBookmarks Scripting RemoveBookmarks Scripting RemoveBookmark Scripting SelectCategoriesDialog Scripting SelectFoldersDialog Scripting Parse Variables Scripting SetFileDateTime eeee eee 221 JN 247 AN A ha vesepsuudeees Augesessaudeesssaeyevassuts odatetegevate dedesenstegyssenegeiucety 181 SOARED A NL 33 O E E 126 Searchin efor File Names rseson epiese reverie tee EEn ESAE Nee EEE N EERE frita 126 Searchin efor FOSS A O NN 53 Searching for TMmagses reien ass an a ee Eear e a EOE aS E A RAE EE ROR 126 Searching for Properties eri neeese Aisa SA Abs Aaa Ain 127 Security Backine up your databases dins 17 RN 298 A o td e de 41 42 A E E 41 Select files IES 41 Sel ctimares idea Acta 41 SelectCatesoriesDialos riais aips N eenean e aE EER TeSa ENSERES 229 SelectCat gory diosa 228 STANA ao Ka C EET E 221 Sel ctFoldersDidlOB vertiente 221 Sel ctlmage iii rada al ici 221 Sel cting tiles ua ici iia iaa dica e 42 Sel clo mirada tana Rito 23 Selection View caridad 70 Selections as nt nt ata Hin ranean is a int A 69 70 126 working Willis iia ii ree e e ladies 126 Selections Vi in Rise in Buena 132 138 139 Selector Categories iii ici ici iia iii 139 Sel Si its 71 139 combining ninia do iii 153 NN 38 Sending IMASes VIA CMI iii oie iaa debo desees ld de dsd 92 Separate color chamdelS eiccccoicnissdorn ito sessist ees r ESES EEE covacnnssevecnussevsceussvasdaveseecdes 190 A NN 185 S
177. See description files If such a file is found IMatch opens it and imports the descriptions contained in the file into the database If you select specific folders IMatch will only consider these folders during the scan In the combo box below the tree control you can select which property you want to update IMatch will only update text String properties of your IMAGE PROPERTY SET with ACDSee comments If you want to make sure that Match does not overwrite existing content of the selected property check the UPDATE EMPTY PROPERTIES ONLY check box If you don t check this box Match will replace existing content in your image property set with the comments from the ACDSee description file If the ACDSee description file contains no comments for a given file Match leaves the current contents of the image property set untouched Matching and Creating CSV CRC files Matching and Creating CSV CRC files CSV and CRC files are text files that describe an image series or a group of images For each file in the series there is one line of text in the file Each line contains the file name of the image a 32 Bit CRC checksum and optionally additional information If you share your image collection with others these files are very handsome to describe all contents of an image series so others can check if they re missing some of the images in the series On the other hand if you re looking for images from a series you can produce a missing
178. Sheet Builder it will operate on all images in that category To convert only a couple of files select them in a Thumbnail Viewer and then run the Contact Sheet Builder The Contact Sheet Builder user interface is a wizard that guides you through the steps required to create great looking and functional context sheets When you set up a contact sheet you can preview the final results online and save the current settings as a preset for later reuse 108 Presets The first sheet you see when you run the Contact Sheet Builder is the PRESETS Sheet On this sheet you can save your current settings as a preset for later reuse Since building a contact sheet for the first time can take some time and you probably want to have several contact sheet layouts for different types of images Match allows you to save any number of presets If you later want to reuse a preset for your current selection of images just select it in the list and click on the LOAD button Contact Sheets Much info Ea Presets Output Thumbs Data Style Header and Footer Preview To load an existing preset press Load The preset will automatically adjust to your current selection To create a new preset from the current settings click on New To save the current settings under the selected name press Save To modify the contact sheet preset use the other tabs in this property sheet 1024 x 768 Plain fine 800 x 600 Plain bend Default M
179. Sort Presets for more information about Sort Presets Contact Sheets Test 1 Ea Presets Output Thumbs Style Data Header and Footer Preview Process folders recursively Sort images using this sort preset MAME Define which information items should be displayed for each image You can type text or select variables from the local or global scope You can enter any number of lines or properties here Image Name Image Width x Image Height Image Size Figure 136 The Data sheet 115 The edit control contains the text that should be shown next to each thumbnail You can use plain text or variables to design what you want to see on your contact sheets Read more about variables in the section Variables for more informationError Bookmark not defined The Contact Sheet Builder publishes two variable sets Sheet and Image In addition to these local variable sets you can use variables from the global Application and User variable sets The Sheet Variable Set The Sheet variable set is only valid in the Contact Sheet Builder context and contains the following variables Variable Name Description Page The current page sheet number starting at 1 TotalPages The total number of pages Images The number of images in the selection used to create the contact sheets OutputFileName The name of the current sheet as it is named on disk e g Sheet 001 jpg CurrentFolder The name of the folder of the f
180. String R O Returns the formula for this category or an empty string if the category has no formula ColorCoded Boolean This property returns True if the category is Color Coding enabled Use this property to enable or disable Color Coding for this category Color OLE_COLOR Use this property to get or set the color value used for the Color Coding of this category AutoCalc Boolean R O Gets or sets the AutoCalc property If this is true the category contains or returns all images assigned to the category itself and all sub categories recursively AssignAction IMCategoryAssignAction R O Gets or sets the AssignAction property This property allows you to control which action is taken if images are assigned to this category SortSequence Long Gets or sets the sort sequence number for this category The sort sequence number controls how the category is sorted relatively to other categories on the same level of the hierarchy Methods Parent Description Returns the parent category for this category If this category has no parent this method returns nothing Children Description 235 Returns a collection of all children contained in this category If this category has no child categories this method returns nothing Images Description Returns a collection of all images in this category This includes the images of all child categories and all images returned by evaluation the category formula
181. This is much faster and since the thumbnails in the contact sheet are usually small will not lead to a decrease in image quality The option ROTATE LANDSCAPE IMAGES tells the contact sheet builder to rotate landscape images automatically This allows you to align your images in the same orientation in the contact sheet whether they are portrait or landscape oriented The number of rows and the number of thumbnails per row is controlled using the Rows and COLUMNS setting Depending on the size of your canvas and the size of your thumbnails you can vary the number of thumbnails per row and the number of rows you want to fit per contact sheet Note Match will not attempt to automatically reduce the number of rows or columns you define here if there is not enough room on the contact sheet If there are more rows or columns as there can fit onto the sheet the remaining rows and columns will be clipped automatically With the BELOW and RIGHT option you control the position of text on the contact sheet If you add textual information to the thumbnail on the sheet the text can be displayed below or at the right side of each thumbnail See also section Data for more information Each thumbnail can have a background color a frame and frame color and a shadow All these settings are controlled with a set of controls at the bottom of the Thumbs sheet Thumbnail with no frame no background and no shadows The BACKGROUND is set to Transparent SHADO
182. To open the review dialog choose SPECIAL TOOLS REVIEW from the context menu of a thumbnail window or press lt F11 gt Image Reviewer File Operations D Data incoming New2002 09 IMG_1468 psd D Data incoming New 2002 11 Move EN D Data Ciipart and Phatos Temp test a y Copy of Delete Bookmark MG_1468 Rename J Auto Forward I Sort folder lists alphabetically Previous First Last Image 1 of 1 Categories Splasher Al a Finished Splasher 3 1 s Work in Progress Splasher 2 2272 x 1704 30 340 07 KB 5s 21 10 2002 23 27 56 T Follow selection auto positioning Double click or Execute Fit to Window IV Use low resolution images Close Figure 113 The Review dialog box This dialog presents all images in the current selection folder images or categories in sequence and gives you quick one key access to all relevant operations With a single keystroke you can move copy or delete images All recently used folders for move or copy operations are accessible via combo boxes right next to your image To rename an image just type the new name and press Alt R You can scroll through all images using the NEXT PREVIOUS FIRST and LAST buttons You can also random access an image by moving the slider control with the mouse To categorize an image select the category or categories in
183. V Best Color Accuracy a O 0 50 IMatch will always use the option set here to display and process Kodak DCR images Working with IPTC Data IPTC Support 105 This section describes the support for IPTC International Press Telecommunications Council and NAA Newspaper Association of America image information The IPTC NAA standard is a metadata model for associating additional information with all types of digital media The IPTC standard has been widely adopted by the Digital Image Industry and within the Publishing and Printing Business In the context of IMatch we deal here only with the IPTC NAA structures that are directly related to digital images If you want more information about the IPTC in general check out the organization s home page at http www iptc org Describing Digital Images A digital image basically is no more than a representation of the bits and bytes that make up the image Applications like IMatch see the digital image only as a byte stream and have no clue at all about what is actually shown in the image The IPTC standard is one way to associate information with a digital image Thus an image becomes an object containing not only the image data itself but also information about the image source the photographer or artist a title and description copyright statements usage information and much more This associated information can then be utilized by image management applications like IMatch to categ
184. W is off Adding a gray background with the setting FILLED You can choose any color of your liking with the INTERIOR color button 112 Adding a red single border The border color can be controlled with the BORDER COLOR button The same thumbnail with a black background black single border and a bottom right SHADOW setting Try the various settings to find the combinations that you like If you use a background bitmap for your contact sheet it s a good idea you can either use transparent thumbnails or use a background color that matches or contrasts the background bitmap Tip At any time you can switch to the PREVIEW sheet to control the results of your settings If you find a good preset that you want to save for later reuse save it as a preset on disk on the PRESETS sheet Style The style sheet controls the sheet margins the canvas color the font used to display information in the thumbnail area the background bitmap and the overlay bitmap The SHEET MARGINS are the outer margins Compare to Figure 131 on page 355 These margins are used to adjust the header and footer areas The SHEET COLORS AND FONTS control the background color of the contact sheet and the font used for the thumbnail text 113 Contact Sheets Test Eg Presets Output Thumbs Style Data Header and Footer Preview Sheet Margins Sheet Colors and Fonts Left E Top 4 3 Font Bight j4 Bottom j4 Background C
185. WARRANTY THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW MMW FURTHER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE RISK ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY REPAIR OR CORRECTION MMW SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DEFECT THAT RESULTS FROM YOUR ABUSE MISUSE OR OTHER CONDUCT OR CONDITIONS OUTSIDE THE CONTROL OF MMW MMW MAKES NO REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY THAT THE INFORMATION OR FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED ERROR FREE OR THAT ANY SOFTWARE DEFECTS ARE CORRECTABLE OR WILL BE CORRECTED 5 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY WHETHER IN TORT CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE SHALL MMW OR ITS SUPPLIERS OR RESELLERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF 12 ANY CHARACTER ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE THE DOCUMENTATION OR ANY OTHER ACCOMPANYING MATERIALS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL WORK STOPPAGE COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF TH
186. Welcome i M AIC gt l l photools com User Manual and Reference Version 3 4 All information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Copyright 1998 2003 Mario M Westphal All rights reserved Look at http www photools com for the latest information about IMatch Table of Contents Welcome 1 INTTOUCTION occoconocononcconanonanananoncnonnncnnnnnnr non cn cnn cnnnnnn nn nn cnn nn n rana rn nn ncnnnncnnnnnes 11 Software License Agreement cooonccocccccnncccnnnnonnncnnnnncnnnnnn ono cnnnnnnnnnnn nana ccnnn 11 The IMatch Home Page and Forum oocoocccccccccconanonnncnnnnncnnnnnn nn ncnnnncnnnnnnnnnnos 14 Restrictions in the 30 day trial version oooooocccnnnncnonacococcccnnncnnnnnanrrncnnnncnnnnnn 14 Registration BenefitS oooononnnicnnnccnnnncnnnccoonnccnnnccnnnnnon nn cnn cnn conan nn nn cn nn ncnnnnns 15 Provide Feedba Ok Fives cers sats seeeddee Geiveravivarssedearsesesvasslicsadeseteandtie annie 15 How to report bugs and ideaS oooooccccnnncccnnccococccnnncconnnnannnccnnnn conan nn nn cnn 15 Errorsand Problem Ssnan ecto eviaeses veins ses sree ee 16 Typos and strange language oooccccnncoccccncnnccnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnn non cnn nn ncnnnnnnnn nn 16 ASP Ombudsman Statement oooccccnnnccccccccnncccnnanannncnnnnnnonannn cnn ncnnnnnannnnnn nano 16 GOpyrgntNollCO arce ori reer 16 IMatch Database BackUpP ccccocnnccoccccnnncconannnonnncnnnnconnnnnnnnncnnnnncnnnnnnnn nos 17 Installation and Setup 18
187. Y analyzes your original images and finds images with similar colors in your database It does not consider the shape of the objects in an image If your original image contains a red balloon in front of a blue sky this filter will also find blue balloons in front of a red sky and images with walls painted in red and blue The position of colors within images is irrelevant for this filter it only analyzes the overall color distribution This filter type has no additional properties or settings Color and Shape The COLOR AND SHAPE mode considers the position of colors and objects in an image With this filter you are able to find images similar in shape and color based on some original images The SHAPE IMPORTANCE slider controls how sensitive Match reacts on different shapes in your image Match tries it s best to identify disjoint objects in your original image and compare it to all other images in the database The COLOR IMPORTANCE slider controls how sensitive Match reacts on different colors in your original image The higher the value of this slider is the more close the colors in the target image must match the colors in the original image These both sliders have a great impact on the final result set Often it is better to use a lower color importance value to add more tolerance for different shades of the same color The shape importance controls how tolerant Match reacts on different shapes in the original and target images Us
188. a category Match will also log this as an error Before you send in the errors have a quick look and verify that these are real errors If you are in doubt send them in Controlling the Logfile The generation and level of detail of IMatch logfiles can be controlled via the Windows System Registry Warning BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU MANIPULATE THE REGISTRY IF YOU DO SOMETHING WRONG YOU SYSTEM CAN BECOME UNSTABLE OR UNBOOTABLE All logfile related entries are contained in the key HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software photools IMatch 3 Settings Within this category you can use the following keys to control the logfile operation LogEnable Controls the creation of a log file If you set this to 0 no log file will be generated Iwo LogFolder The path for the log file If this is empty IMatch uses the Windows TEMP folder to store the log file LogLevel Controls the level of detail of the log file Valid values are from 1 to 999 On level 1 only errors and warnings are logged All levels above 1 log different levels of information messages To see all messages use 999 or delete this key in the registry UACSZU Maa TN The IMatch logfile is saved to the file IMATCHLOG LOG in your TEMP directory see the Windows Control Panel for the exact location on your computer At every program start IMatch creates a backup copy of the last logfile into a file named IMATCHLOG LO_ in the same directory and then creates a new empty
189. a dde daba dolce doaie s irsi 226 Resize isis ta 249 AO A NN 243 ResultSetEntry A A 243 ResultSetMatch clas cito dd ds ds td ii tata 244 ResultSetOrigmal clas miii dido cda 244 SAMPLES enoii isoiset iun eieae dls die tues Cov a beds Cuvtcubs en sade aano Sevsdaussevdceusduascauscevades 274 AVEPILG uc iii ie titi labia 249 401 SelectCategori sDialog s satan ic 221 SelectCate tony in e eaten wate weit aia 221 SelectFolder ociosa di 228 SelectFoldersDialoS ccouccorniia aaa 230 Sharp 249 SortBucketsiis tate ven tatiana 246 NS 246 Widiliiuacis siii os 247 Scriptime Environment 0 so Se ciio pasala o dia od je dd 203 204 Scripts IDE Wan dows ssc its bocatas eb his ded bore aia Raco Seabees ae dai 203 Scripting ActiveWindowT ype ninien enii eE k 221 Scripting Width Scripting Height Scripting BPP Scripting IsClipboardA vailable 249 Scripting Folders Scripting RootFolders Scripting Categories Scripting GetImages Scripting CreatelmageBucket Scripting ActiveFolders Scripting ActiveCategory Scripting ActiveThumbWindowSelection Scripting ResultHistory Scripting PersistentResultSets Scripting ActiveResultSet Scripting PropertySets IsFolderOnline IsFileOnline IsFileMutable Scripting DeleteFile Scripting Movelmage Scripting Removelmage Scripting Renamelmage Scripting AddImage Scripting ImageSorter Scripting SelectFolder Scripting SelectCategory Scripting SelectImage Scripting ActiveSelection Scripting Bookmarks
190. ad that this variable contains the output folder specified in the GENERAL SETTINGS dialog See Figure 94 below 197 Program Preferences x Monitor Gamma Slide Show File Format Preferences General Thumb View Colors m Directories E a Preset folder Eolder Size 1 2 1 3 C 1 4 C 176 ADevelop imatch3 Presets a gt IV Load last database at startup Bitmaps and Textures M Use recycle bin for delete operations yo evelop imatch3 back grounds es Caption bar text height General output folder 3 form o Standard action for double click Script folder Edit Image z V Developtimatch3 scripts When Ctrl key is pressed Run Selection Figure 94 The OUTPUT FOLDER definition in the General Settings dialog If you run this contact sheet Match will identify this variable and replace it with the current contents of the GENERAL OUTPUT FOLDER setting In our example the variable Application OutputFolder will resolve to the folder name c temp If you want to change the output folder for all your contact sheets at once all you have to do is to change the global setting Match will automatically update the associated variable with the new folder name and all future contact sheets will be created in the this new folder You can of course create a user variable that points to a folder and use this variable instead The principles are the same Match will identify the variable resol
191. adjusts to the new height of the thumbnail HI001 JPG HI002 JPG HI003 JPG IMATCH Figure 139 The same contact sheet with the Image Name variable If you want more information displayed just extend the variable mask For example try the following Image Name Image Width x Image Height Image Size The resulting contact sheet looks like this HI001 JPG HI002 JPG HI003 JPG 640 x 480 640 x 480 640 x 480 47 287 49 865 82 474 IMATCI I As you can see IMatch has replaced all variable names by their value The rest of the text you entered has been copied to the contact sheet without modifications Note IMatch only replaces the content of the variables in parentheses All other text in the edit field remains untouched and is copied as is to the final contact sheet For example the x between mage Width and Image Height in the sample above remains unchanged when the contents of the variable are expanded If your database has an Image Property Set you can use these properties also as variables when you create contact sheets The sample database used for this manual has an Image property named Title that contains the title of the image To add the image title to each thumbnail just add the name of the property Image Name Image Width x Image Height Image Size Image Properties Title The results for your own database may differ but for the sample database this leads 118 to HI
192. ages based on date and time name size and many other criteria By choosing an appropriate level of detail you can either view as many thumbnails as possible at once or show more information about each image See Image Panels for more details With the thumb lens you can shrink or enlarge your thumbnails With the thumbnail property window allows you to view Property EXIF and IPTC data for the selected image You can also perform various file operations from the thumbnail window like Copy Move Rename and Smart Rename Batch Rename To edit or convert your images open images in the image editor right from the thumbnail window To open your files with other applications use the Open command or one of the commands from the Tools menu or the Shell menu You can also run a slide show on all currently selected images Image Panels The thumbnail viewer represents each image with an image panel An image panel contains a thumbnail of your images and optionally additional information items The amount of information displayed next to each thumbnail depends on the current level of detail LOD selected in the thumbnail viewer toolbar OS eae i A dE TROO1 JPG 640x480 23 47 KB 23 09 98 18 02 05 35 Figure 35 Image Panels in the Thumbnail Viewer window By changing the level of detail you can choose between a maximum of information displayed for each image and the maximum number of visible thumbnails I
193. aining only files with a specific format e g only TIFF or BMP files You can choose any number of formats Match will return all files that match one of the file types selected The Color Format setting allows you to control how the SKETCH AND COLOR match algorithms work Normally the match algorithm handles grayscale and color images the same thus returning gray scale images and color images in the result set If you want to make a difference between color and gray scale use the DIFFERENTIATE BETWEEN option here Depending on the type of your original images color or grayscale Match will put different weights on the images in the result set If your original image is gray scale Match will favor gray scale images in the result set or vise versa If you choose the SAME AS ORIGINAL IMAGE option Match will return only color or gray scale images depending on the type of the original image The File Size selector This selector allows you to add a restriction based on file size on disk to your result set There is a mode relative to some original images and an absolute mode where you can enter a specific file size range If you use the relative mode you can restrict the result set to contain only images with sizes within a specific percentage of the original image For example if your original image is 200 KB and you use a 10 filter Match will only consider files between 180 KB and 220 KB for the result set You may also use
194. al image view that mimic the real world or your specific requirements Then while browsing your images within IMatch you add images to one or more categories with a couple of mouse clicks or by using the Category Splasher explained in section Category Splashers IMatch automatically keeps track of all category assignments and updates the links and relations between your categories whenever needed Tip If you want to create your own categories now switch to the category view in IMatch with lt Ctrl gt lt 2 gt and press the lt INS gt key See the section The Category View for more information Example Modeling a Client and Project History Good examples for category hierarchies are customers or clients You may want to create categories based on your customers clients or projects Client House of Images Projects Stocks Old Houses Feb 2001 Foster Projects Mill Photos Initiative Mullik Imaging Projects Stocks Brewery Images Caribian Impressions 2001 Photo Netzwerk Projects Samples Autumn 200 61 This hierarchy contains the top level Customer For each customer all projects are added as sub categories Within each project you arrange your images Using such a hierarchy makes it very easy to track your work for a specific customer or project Of course you can combine such a hierarchy with a theme based hierarchy or other hierarchies The possibilities are endless By clicking on Foster for example you get all images f
195. al data structures and allows you to access this information in a variety of ways Additional sources of information are the user defined property sets you can create in your database Together with the image attributes automatically created by IMatch a database contains a network of information about each image in your collection All the information in an IMatch database is active and adapts to changes in the structure of the database while you work with it When you move images to different folders change category assignments or create new persistent result sets Match automatically updates the hyperlinks between the various objects in your database This network of objects and information can be used together with many of the filters and export modules that form the IMatch system For example you can use the information contained in your database for Contact Sheets the Batch Export module and the ATML Export module to refer to each attribute and property contained in your database This section will show you how the variable concept of IMatch works and what you can do with it to add some extra value to your image collection Image Attributes IMatch stores a number of attributes together with each of your images These attributes are automatically maintained by the core system The following table contains a list of all attributes that are exported as variables from the IMatch core system Use these names together with the Image prefi
196. all speed The optimizer also makes sure your database is intact and removes unused space thus leading to smaller databases To run the Database Optimizer use the Database Wizard and choose the Option RUN DATABASE DIAGNOSIS AND OPTIMIZE Optimizing a database can take a couple of minutes even hours for very large databases However the result of such a procedure is a much faster database and less disk space Run the Optimizer from time to time or after you have added a couple of thousand images If you use only small databases you will never notice degradation in performance but for databases containing 100 000 or more images it makes a difference How to get the maximum performance The technology of the multidimensional spatial cube index automatically results in optimal query performance even for large databases However you can help IMatch to stay on top speed with some simple tricks Please don t forget that Match is strictly speaking a database server with a user interface You can handle several 100 000 images per database but don t try this on rather slow machines with little RAM and slow hard disks IMatch databases can handle 100 000 s of images per database Usually image databases of this size run on large scale hardware such as SUN HP or IBM servers These machines have gigabytes of RAM and very fast hard disk subsystems and they cost a fortune IMatch is probably the only application that allows you to handle la
197. an Unknown Further assume that you have already categorized all images in your database All images with persons have been properly added to these categories An image showing a female adult Caucasian is contained in the categories People Age Group Adults People Gender Female and People Race Caucasian An image showing a male and female Asian senior sitting on a bench in a park will be contained in People Race Asian People Age Group Senior and in People Gender Female and People Gender Male since the image shows both a female and a male person If you know click on the Female category you will see two images since these two images show a female person If you click on the Male category you will see only the second image since only this image shows a male person 172 If you click on the Asian category Match will also show only the second image since only this image contains Asian persons To combine the contents of several of these groups you use calculated categories For example if you want a category showing all female adults enter this expression People Gender Female AND People Age Group Adults This formula will return all images that are in People Gender Female and also in People Age Group Adults To create a group showing only Asian and Black people create a category based on this formula People Race Asian OR People Race Black This formula will return only images that are in People
198. an apply various Boolean operations like AND OR XOR and NOT to control the exact contents of the bucket A bucket cannot contain an image twice at each time an image is either in the bucket or it is not This is a special property of buckets that is especially useful when you combine images from categories or several Images collections Properties Count Long R O Returns the number of images in the bucket DatabaseOID String R O Returns the unique identifier of the associated database This is the same identifier as the Database Oid method returns Methods Clear Removes all images from the bucket The bucket is empty afterwards Set Arguments plmages A collection of images to add to the bucket 240 Description Removes all images from the bucket at then adds the given images Remove Arguments plmage An Image object Description Removes the given image from the bucket Find Arguments plmage The mage object to search for Description Returns True if the bucket contains the given image Combinelmage Arguments plmage A Image object BoolOp The Boolean operation to use when combining the current contents of the bucket with the plmage Description Combines the given image with the current contents of the bucket using the Boolean operation BoolOp Combinelmages Arguments plmages A collection of images to add to the bucket BoolOp The Boolean operation to use when combining the current conten
199. an unsupported file format you have the option to stop the conversion process after such errors If you check the ABORT PROCESS IN CASE OF ERRORS option Match will stop after the first error occurred Otherwise Match will skip only the image in error and continue with the remaining images of the selection Image Processing Options The second step in the Batch Processor allows you to define various conversion filters and pre processing steps Image Processing Options Convert files to this image file format TIF 24 bit al Options IV Apply thumbnail transformations roo _ T Color Conversion Optimize for Internet use Browser Palette I Gamma Correction A A AX L T Histogram Functions Equalize Stretch kNone gt y gt Resize Pixel Size Percentage IV Resolution DPI foo 3 Width Height Height 600 Width ff pr 00 3 roo 3 Resize Method Bicubic Resample M Maintain aspect ratio T Allow images to grow EZ SS ES r T Use Canvas Alignment Jatin y Left jo To jo ey Canvas Color Fight jo Zi Bottom E IM Relative to Image Figure 149 Step 2 Image Processing If you want to convert the source images to a different file format enable the corresponding option and select the desired output file format from the list over 40 formats supported with many sub formats If you want to convert your i
200. and then click on the EDIT SCRIPT button in the local toolbar compare to Figure 183 on page 434 This will open the Scripting IDE window If the window is too small resize it to match your screen resolution The IDE window will save its size and position so you have to do this only once 207 my first script macro Sax Basic design olx File Edit View Macro Debug Sheet Help Aska S BAJO CS us Oe e ee aw Object Genera y Proc dectarations y 1 Option Explicit a Sub Main TODO Enter your code here End Sub Figure 190 The IMatch Scripting IDE window This IDE window allows you to load edit compile test and debug scripts Following an old programmer s tradition our first script will be a simple Hello World program Tip The IDE contains a comprehensive online help To get help to your current situation press lt F1 gt or choose EDITOR HELP from the HELP menu of the IDE window To get help about a specific command or the Basic language itself choose LANGUAGE HELP from the HELP menu In the SOURCE WINDOW of the IDE you should see a line with the text TODO Enter your code here The line should be displayed in green indicating that this is a comment Note A commentis a non executable part of a program and allows you to put hints or descriptions into your program code You will see many comments in the IMatch scripting samples contained in the distribution package These comment
201. ansformations on images shown in the slide show optional or the image preview You can also enable transformations in the Contact Sheet Builder and the Batch Processor Without ever actually changing your original images Match can display and process your images using virtual transformations To rotate mirror or flip your original images use the Transform Image command Resetting Transformations You can undo reset all transformations with the RESET TRANSFORMATIONS command This command removes all the transformations from the image 56 Rotating Images IMatch allows you rotate mirror and flip all images in your current selection except read only images using the TRANSFORM IMAGES command from the context menu of the thumbnail window Note For JPEG images the rotation is lossless The image will not be recompressed during the rotation so the quality of the image will be the same after the rotation as before In addition for JPEG files the width height fields of the EXIF metadata record will be updated accordingly Batch Converting Images From the TRANSFORM menu you have also access to the BATCH PROCESSOR see also section The Batch Processor This allows you to process the currently selected image s using any of your batch processor presets without actually running the batch processor Drag and Drop Support The thumbnail viewer is fully Drag and Drop enabled To open one or more images with another application
202. any of the options mentioned in the following section of this document you can try them out by creating some Test Databases These databases allow you to try everything out without damaging your important main database Test databases can be easily deleted at any time just delete their folder Image Property Sets Image Property Sets This section introduces the Match image Property Sets and the metadata concept used in IMatch to associate information with individual images You will learn how to setup a property database and how to add edit and delete image properties and property sets In IMatch each image has a number of stock properties or image attributes which are automatically extracted from the image file These attributes are displayed next to each image in the thumbnail viewer You also can use them as sort criteria or to find images in your database Examples for stock properties are file name dimension orientation and file size See also Variables for more information on image attributes In addition to that IMatch allows you to create additional properties and link or associate these properties with the images in your database For example you may want to add a title and a description to each of your images In Match terms these properties are called user defined properties The property concept implemented in IMatch is of course very powerful and fully integrated in the user interface Figure 82 gives you an impression
203. arget image Only used if Alignment is set to imbalPositioned UseAlphaChannel Set this to True if the overlay bitmap has an alpha channel Note The original image must have a BPP of 32 Bits to contain an alpha channel TransparentColor If you don t use the alpha channel for transparence you can specify a transparent color with this argument Tolerance Use the Tolerance parameter to control the tolerance of the transparent color Use higher values for more tolerance Description Overlays the given source bitmap with the overlay bitmap to create a watermark effect FileExtensionForFormat Arguments Format The format for which the file extension is requested Description Returns the standard file extension for the given format as a formatted string 265 Fill Arguments Color The color for the fill operation Description Fills the bitmap with the given color FillBitmap Arguments FillBitmap The source bitmap to be used for the fill operation Mode The fill and alignment mode Use one of the following values imbfmTile Tile imbfmStretch Stretch imbfmCenter Center Description This method can be used to fill one bitmap with another bitmap An example for a similar functionality is the background bitmap of the CONTACT SHEET BUILDER Using the Mode argument you can control how the source bitmap is fitted to the target bitmap If the source bitmap is smaller than the target bitmap you can tile or stretch the source bitmap to
204. art of the result set To include the sub folders of a given folder recursively in a formula use RFolder instead of Folder in the expression RFolder file c photos lt Label Serial gt The toolbar in the category properties dialog box allows you to select folders to be included in your expression see Figure 18 It also contains a checkbox that allows you to make the expression recursive Of course you can combine folder expressions with normal category expressions for example to get all images in a folder which are not already contained in the category BEACH Folder file c photos lt Label Serial gt AND NOT BEACH Formulas using Persistent Result Sets More You can even include persistent result sets in formulas see section Persistent Result Sets for more information about Persistent Result Sets This allows you to use the actual result of a selection as the content of a category Whenever IMatch needs to calculate the contents of the category it will query the persistent result set for the set of images to use For example you may create a selection that finds all images containing the phrase beach in the file name You make the result of this query persistent save it and then you can use this result as the content of a category When you add rename images in your database Match will take care that the content of the result set are updates automatically or manually and hence your category w
205. at are also in the schema file these records will be duplicated Keep that in mind before you import a schema file IMatch DTD Version 3 The current IMatch DTD is described below For the most recent version of this DTD please refer to the IMPROPERTYDB DTD file in your IMatch installation folder lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 16 gt lt ELEMENT IMatchPropertyDB Version Description Schema Data gt lt ELEMENT Version PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT Description PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT Schema PropertySet gt lt ELEMENT PropertySet Name Description Property gt lt ATTLIST PropertySet PSOID ID REQUIRED gt lt ELEMENT Name PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT Property Name CurrencySymbol Default gt lt ATTLIST Property dt null string int ui4 18 ui8 float date iso8601 time iso8601 bit imcurrency uri imreference REQUIRED POID ID FREQUIRED PropertySetRef IDREF IMPLIED PropertyRef IDREF IMPLIED gt lt ELEMENT Default PCDATA gt lt ATTLIST Default Z CDATA IMPLIED OID CDATA IMPLIED gt lt EL NT CodePage PCDATA gt lt EL NT CurrencySymbol PCDATA gt lt EL NT Data Set gt lt EL
206. at can match any single character that is a member of the set Sets are delimited by and and can contain literals character ranges character classes collating elements and equivalence classes Set declarations that start with contain the compliment of the elements that follow Examples Character literals abc will match either of a b or c abc will match any character other than a b or c Character ranges a z will match any character in the range a to z NA Z will match any character other than those in the range A to Z Note that character ranges are highly locale dependent they match any character that collates between the endpoints of the range ranges will only behave according to ASCII rules when the default C locale is in effect For example in IMatch a z will match the ASCII characters a z and also A B etc but not Z which collates just after z Character classes Character classes are denoted using the syntax classname within a set declaration for example space is the set of all whitespace characters Character classes are only available if the flag regbase char_classes is set The available character classes are A Any alpha numeric character 1 n u m a Any alphabetical character a z and A Z Other characters may also be 1 included depending upon the locale P h a b Any blank character either a space or a tab 1 a n
207. at is contained in your property database If you want to export your Image property set check the corresponding option EA C temp my schema E Cancel F Use external DTD aj T Link with Stylesheet Options Export Schema only Export ty sets with contents Figure 170 The Export dialog Exporting the Schema only This option will only export the database schema into the XML document This allows you to load the schema into a new or existing Match database No data property set contents is exported All property sets in the target database will be empty 304 Export property set with contents IMatch will also export the data records contained in your property sets If you load this schema into a new or existing database the database will contain filled property sets Use this option if you want to transfer a schema from one database to another including the data records in the property sets Export Image property set Since an Match database can contain a huge number of Image records this option has been separated from the export of the other property sets If you enable this option Match will export the Image property set schema and the contents of the Image property set into the XML document This allows you to re import the schema and the image property set into a new or existing database Match will use the file CRC or file name to match Image records in the XML document to your database
208. atabase Backup your database at least daily Use different folders to keep multiple backups Also backup the IMatch program folder and your entire Windows installation to make sure that you can recover from accidents and hardware failures See the Windows user manual for more information on how to backup your system Backup Progress Current Total Cose Her Figure 208 The IMatch Database Backup Tool The backup wizard is rather simple It just copies all the files of the selected database your presets templates workspace and IPTC tag files into a new folder The files are verified using a checksum algorithms to ensure that the copies are binary identical The output folder created during the backup process looks similar to the folder shown in the next image Ele Edit view Favorites Tools Help a Back gt 27 Qsearch Gyrolders 9 5 BE X w Er address ja E Backup IMatchDB 4 G0 Ni File Folder 22 11 2002 08 07 Gp Is com IMatch File Folder 22 11 2002 08 07 Cipresets File Folder 22 11 2002 08 07 scripts File Folder 22 11 2002 08 07 ro ma e a cement Figure 209 The backup folder There is one folder for the database one folder that holds the contents of your personal folder one folder for presets and one folder for scripts This structure allows you to restore your database and other IMatch files in case of a bad error or hard disk crash Note There is no bu
209. atabase For each image the file name is checked If the first character is an A the image is bookmarked for later inspection Dim i As Image For Each i In db GetImages Check if the first character is A Use the UCase function to convert the file to upper case so we detect a and A If UCase Left i Name 1 A Then Bookmark this image db AddBookmark i End If Next i 280 If you want to beautify this sample add a wait dialog to provide some user feedback This may be important when your database contains several thousands of images since this script may take a while to run Application WaitDialogOpen Scanning 0 db GetImages Count True Dim perc As Integer perc 0 Dim i As Image For Each i In db GetImages If UCase Left i Name 1 A Then db AddBookmark i End If Update the percentage and check whether the user has aborted the script perc perc 1 Application WaitDialogSetPercentage perc If Application WaitDialogIsCanceled Then Exit For End If Next i Application WaitDialogClose For more information about the wait dialog methods see the examples below Better Performance When you run this script you may notice heavy activity on your disks This activity is triggered by the AddBookmark method because for each call to this method Match needs to update the bookmark collection in your database To speed up the processing you may create an
210. atabase and use them for EXIF and IPTC data IMatch will also take care that your CRW and THM files stay together when you copy move rename the CRW file You need to enable the corresponding option under OPTIONS PREFERENCES FILE FORMAT PREFERENCES see Keep the THM file with the CRW Select image file types to add x If you only want to add files with a specific file format choose the corresponding option and select the file formats from the list below tafile cgm ge Format dxf ai ps pt eps Ju nimation fli fc GEM Image ima xl lt Back Cancel Hep Figure 31 Select the image file formats you want to process Click NEXT to proceed to the next step Step 4 Setting Advanced Options o xl This step allows you to define some advanced options and operations Category assignments I New images only A My Categories amp Events amp Locations amp People y I Bookmark new images J Bookmark updated images AV Import ACDSee TM Description files gt Popen A T Update only empty properties V Ignore quotes coco ca F Import IPTC fields for new and updated images No IPTC preset F Import EXIF metadata No EXIF preset ek uo ca Figure 32 The category assignment dialog Automatic Category Assignments If you want to assign newly
211. ate Cancel Help Figure 67 Matching external files and folders Before you press RUN to start your selection you may select a selection template you want to use If you leave this to New Interactive Selection Match will bring up the SELECTION BUILDER DIALOG to allow you to create a selection from scratch Tip Match allows you to add new images to categories as soon as they have been indexed so you can collect new images in an Incoming category to separate them from older images 161 Dynamic Categories Assigning images to categories You can assign images to categories wherever you see them in the thumbnail viewer Just press lt Ctrl A gt or choose CATEGORIES from the context menu You may also click on the A icon in the local toolbar Note When you assign images to a category the physical image file is not moved You only add a reference to the image to the category You can add images to any number of categories If you want to remove an image from a category just un assign it Removing an image from a category does not remove the image from your disk it just removes the reference to the image from the category IMatch will bring up the CATEGORY ASSIGNMENTS dialog box showing all available categories To assign an image to one of the categories just click on the check box in front of that category To remove an image from a category clear the check box Category assignments will happen immediately and the IMatc
212. ate under a new or an existing name to keep it for the future Now that you ve got an impression on how a query in IMatch works let s continue with the other selector types Note If you rerun a selection IMatch will use the current set of originals as the 143 original set for the refined selection If you have used the HIDE ORIGINALS WITHOUT MATCHES option for the current selector Match will consider only the remaining originals and not all initially selected files The Area of Interest Selector This selector allows you to specify the area of interest for your selection Usually Match considers the entire area of an image when it compares your original images with the images contained in the database For some special cases however this may result in non optimal results Area of Interest Id Enable I Interactive Mode Reset a Use the left mouse button to include and the right mouse button to exclude segments Define the area of interest by coloring the parts of the image that should be considered during the match Hatched segments are treated as don t care and have no influence on the match result Figure 52 The Area of Interest selector The Area of Interest selector consists of a 20 x 20 grid Each grid cell represents approximately 5 of your images Initially the entire grid is colored in red meaning that the whole image is considered during the match With the right mouse button you can exclud
213. ather easy to import that data into IMatch If there is no built in import export module that can handle you specific data format you can write or let write an import export module with the built in scripting language This object oriented framework that is the core of Match is also the basis for the internal scripting language With this scripting capability IMatch becomes even more powerful Users are able to extend the available functionality of Match with very little effort by creating new functions in form of scripts based on the Match object model If you have ever written a script in VBA VBScript or JScript you will immediately able to use the Match scripting language Scripting is used to perform imaging operations like file format conversion in batch mode Scripting is also used to import export data to from IMatch e g to load data from external databases or text files The dynamic creation of HTML documents including scripting Cascading Style Sheets and custom color and layout can also be done via some simple yet powerful scripting objects The following figure shows the internal object structure of an Match Image Database See the list of terms above for explanation of the objects in this drawing 24 Thumbnail Bookmarks Persistent Result Sets Result Sets Image Property Set User defined property Property Reference e id PRESO Image Match Info External Modules Image Property Set Figure 1 The I
214. ays end the slide show and jump to the currently displayed image in the database view by clicking somewhere in the text area at the lower half of the slide show window If you move your mouse into this area the cursor shape will change to a pointing hand Toolbar IMatch displays a small toolbar in the lower right corner of the slide show window with the most frequently used commands FIRST IMAGE LAST IMAGE PREVIOUS IMAGE NEXT IMAGE and PAUSE 320 Off line Cache Images If your images are off line the slide show will automatically use the images stored in the Off Line Cache see also section The Off line Cache You can also enable that the slide show always uses the images in the off line cache under OPTIONS PREFERENCES SLIDE SHOW This may be convenient when your images are very large or stored on slow removable media Zooming You can zoom the current image by holding down the lt Ctrl gt key and then using the mouse wheel You can also use the lt Ctrl gt key together with the lt gt and lt gt keys to zoom the current image Panning If you view an image in original size or in a zoomed state you can pan the image on screen by holding down the left mouse button and then moving the mouse If you are in rectangular zoom mode you can pan the image by holding down the lt SPACE gt key IPTC Support Thumbnail Property Window The thumbnail property window in allows you to view additional properties and attributes
215. b guides fies eee 231 AddimaSe ici iii Bays dav fea es Cavs cda bo Aine fuss ceusdind Ribs cds i n 236 278 Add images cios iio diia Cav eweichins EEE E 236 AddlimacesBucket 2 5 ooo fesse favs cvesdin aiii loba divs loved ESEE LS fons ted da 236 Adding dilata isa daa dalla 80 82 Adding Categories CEI PUM Fe 5508 foes sats Pevedup toss tuys ln debs aeo Bubs A s E aE E E E E debe setsduustovstebrant k 276 Adding folders and Hilesi etio etereo tuo eso e aeo a ie Ea e Eea D se Ilan debe cono 83 Adding Images SCIP OA ot ie A aT OO E A a 276 Adding new images ide ies 90 O A oe det es A N a A kee e a et te 266 AddSortDetinition os iras 247 Ad hoc search features A A ek eee Bees 33 A NOC SEIECHONS mereen ea eea a E eE beech ccloenns EARE eE a E ERE EREA 126 Adjust CAMA A E E E E A Rs 189 190 adjustment LA VELS tts es ta 341 383 Aging Election atea 185 289 Album Category Sc iia 60 alpha chama 300 An atomy Contact Sheet neta lali 110 ANS co TE EE dd E 300 Apple and IPTC iii ii A A A EAN ER 368 Apple Macintosh eneore ennenen e stas taa tartas 323 Application Class ias at taa ida 212 Application Methods vuitton EE EA ac 213 Application Object NA da 274 Application Properties ata a 212 Apply Pransformss iii ais o Se oe a aa 232 Area of Interest aaa 144 Arithmetic ais laa ta a ia od 184 WIth AMASES ia ts atar da dls o Sebo 184 artifacts REZA e leet 187 ASP e Wester dorado tas dd a JO cad e da 16 Assign ONE2 CCK 2 E1 A
216. ble for the currently selected image format File Format Options x Sub Type z Progressive Options Defaut pe Quality 2 Best Quality Lowest Quality Lowest Compression Best Compression Quality Preview Multipage Formats pa Overwite z Page F 3 coca to Figure 118 The File Format Options dialog box Note Not all file formats support all options shown here Depending on the current file format some of the options may hence be disabled or hidden If the current file format supports a compression factor you can preview the result image by pressing the QUALITY PREVIEW button in the dialog This will lead to the QUALITY PREVIEW dialog box show in Figure 119 Online Quality Preview x Best Quality Lowest Quality Lowest Compression Best Compression Approximate resulting file size 6 532 bytes Cancel Help Figure 119 The Quality Preview dialog box On the left side you see the original image The zoom control arranged under the left window allows you to view your original image and the result image at different zoom factors The right window contains a preview of the result image as it would be saved Use the quality slider control to try out different compression ratios When you are satisfied with the result and found a tradeoff between quality and resulting file size press OK to return to the previous dialog Note IMatch will save the last settings you made in these dialogs Until
217. bles Image The image to use for parsing Description Parses the given string and replaces all variables with the corresponding values If Str contains image variables like Image Name you must set a valid image as the second argument Example Sub Main Dim db As Database Set db Application ActiveDatabase Dim i As Image Dim iset As Images Set iset db ActiveSelection For Each i In iset Debug Print db ParseVariables Image Width x _ Image Height Image FullPath i Next I End Sub SetFileDateTime Arguments Image The image to work with NewDateTime The date time to set 230 SetCreateTime Also set the file created date time stamp In this case both the created and last modified timestamps are set to the same value Return Values Returns an IMFileOperationResult to indicate success or error Description This method sets a new date time for the given file Example db SetFileDateTime img Date AddFolder Arguments Str The fully qualified path of the folder to add Return Values Return an IMFolder object if the folder has been successfully added Otherwise nothing is returned The method raises an exception if the folder cannot be added Description This method adds the folder to the database No images are added and sub folders are not automatically added You can use the Dir function in Basic or the Microsoft Scripting FileSystemObject to recursively add a folder hierarchy
218. can The Urgency Category IMatch treats the IPTC Urgency field somewhat special The IPTC standard defines 9 different values for this field All IPTC compatible applications must adhere to these 9 values Possible values are O undefined empty 1 High Urgency 2 3 4 5 Medium Urgency 6 7 and 8 Low Urgency This field is used to assign an urgency or priority to images and is used mainly in the Newswire business and by Press Agencies If you enable the import for the Urgency field Match first checks if the parent category that is selected for this field contains the 8 standard categories These categories must be named accordingly to the schema described above If one or more of these categories don t exist IMatch creates them The Categories 1 5 and 8 get an automatic Color Coding see section Color Coding Categories Error Bookmark not defined as it is used by many other applications During the import Match automatically assigns your images to these Urgency categories based on the corresponding IPTC field Images without an Urgency value or with an urgency value of O are not assigned Since Match uses Color Coding for these categories you will immediately see the different image priorities in the thumbnail windows You need to enable Color Coding under OPTIONS PREFERENCES Importing dot notation If you have IPTC categories like A B or Beach South Match will now import these categories creating appropriate sub
219. ccnnnncnnanarrnnccnnnns 48 Selections which span multiple drives and or Media oooooocccnnnnnnnnniccccccnnnno 49 The Off line Cache cooocnccnnnncccccccncnncnnnnncnncconnnnnnnnnnn nn cnn cnn rra nana n nn cnc 49 The Off line Cache oooooocccccnccccoconoccncccnnnccnananonnncnnnnnnnnnnnn cnn ccnnnncnnnnns 49 Managing Files With MatCh ooonnooncccnnnncininncccccccnnncconanacan cnn cnn con nnnnr nn ncnnnnos 52 Managing Files With lMatch ooonnnnninnnccnnnnncnnnnncccccccnnnnnnnnnaranccnnnnnnnanns 52 Copying Files sa ee 53 Moving Files ooooooonnnccccccnnnnnccnananonnccnnnncnnnnnnonnnc cnn nn nana n cnn cnn nn rra rr 53 Deleting Files out 53 Smart handling for files with duplicate NaMes ooonocnnnnnnnicnccnnnnnnnnacccnncnnnnn 54 Renaming FeS ciesa cnn cn nnnnnn naar nn nn cnn nn cn aaia 55 Faster Moving and Copying ccoconococccccnnccononanonnncnnnnccnnnnnnonncnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnos 55 Transforming IMageS oooccccnnccccccnnnncconanannnncnnnnnnonnnn nn ncn nan r rana rn rca 56 Transforming ThumbnalilS ooocconnncnnnnncoccccconncccananannnccnnnc conan nn nncnn anno nnnnnnnnno 56 Resetting TransforMati0NS oooncnnnnncnnncccnnnnononnnarnccnnnn cnn annnn nn cnn 56 Rotating MIES AA AAA 57 Batch Converting IMages ooocccccnnncnoccccnnncconannnonnncnnnncnnnnnnn ocn ncnnnncanannns 57 Drag and Drop SUPPOM sicicssesehendothetebotebeteloteleioloteletelotelebebotelstedotebetvlotedsts 57 The One Click Dialog Bar coooconnnnnnnnccccnnnnc
220. cel to abort the whole process Drive Path M 2 Media ID 3221215922 Media Label 9912272203 Folders on this drive media Folder Comment MACorPhoto 4NCIENT 1030024B JPG Images of Ancient Buildings from the E gy MACorPhototANCIENT4030022B JPG Images of Ancient Buildings from the E gy M CorPhoto SANCIENT030020B JPG Images of Ancient Buildings from the E gy M CorPhoto 4NCIENT 030012B JPG Images of Ancient Buildings from the E gy Figure 12 The Offline File Handler dialog box Here we ve tried to open four images in the Image Editor and these files are currently unavailable because the wrong CD ROM is in the drive As you can see the dialog prompts you to insert a specific media into drive M From the media id and the media serial number the file names of the requested files and the folder comment displayed next to each file you should be able to select and insert the correct media The Offline File Handler continuously monitors the drive and automatically detects media changes If you have inserted the correct media the dialog box will indicate this with a green check mark behind the drive identifier see Figure 13 below 48 Media Changer x Some of the files in your selection are either offline or the wrong media is in the drive Please insert the media specified below and click Load now to process all files from that media Click on Skip to skip all files from that media or
221. cel Help Figure 25 Defining a password for your database Tip You can change the password later at any time using the Database Wizard from the DATABASE menu Choose the third option of the wizard MODIFY DATABASE OPTIONS and then click on the CHANGE PASSWORD button 361 Step 3 Choosing a Location for your Database Proceed with NEXT to the next screen Here you must enter a name and location for your new database Use the BROWSE button to choose a folder for your new database and enter a name in the dialog box Again it is a good idea to create a dedicated folder for each database Just use Windows Explorer to create a new folder on your disk before you start IMatch The Thumbnail Size Each image in your database is represented by a smaller version of the original image in your database These smaller representations are called thumbnails When you create a database you need to choose the size of these thumbnails out of several predefined thumbnail sizes Choose a thumbnail size appropriate for your screen resolution and requirements A good value here is 100 x 100 or 120 x 120 for screens with 1024x768 or higher resolution If your screen has a higher resolution you can also choose something like 160 x 160 pixels for easier viewing Perhaps you should try your optimal setting with a test database that you can throw away later Note You cannot change the thumbnail size once the database has been created It is therefore importan
222. cesecancevsccnecoesccadeessedea cevueddacesuccaacesncdddevancdsvecanccanevarceseeees 149 Color Format ATi selection a A 145 Color Management nieo eene ec iia 345 346 347 Color profiles ta on ee 345 346 347 Color resolutionen a AN T es 189 Color SeparatlO asii to a ada ieee 184 Color Similarity tar a oh Se ns ee A A 152 ColorG oded 2 iii cai cin rs diri 235 Color D1al6e 2 uta ta na paa is 212 O NN 194 aid Cate os e tae 124 Changin amp UT Colors iia aan cie 345 A A A 250 258 263 CombineBueket c0cocos tutti e iea epa ea paea espose aeien Sna 241 Combine mage ett stagnate fetes r aee ee eRT area e Eea ae eea Ee 241 CA een iesen eae Sapa ea p ea pe ae EEEN Se 241 COMMONS italia 35 39 40 41 Comment nanne ee e ea e e e a ea e tes eaea ea epe a ee eO ser eS 233 Compression Factory soree ee r ae Ne PSA aE EEEE Nee E eae EEEE iaa 181 Concurrent ACCESS eranen aa eN EEE EE E e A TER ic sie 374 contact sheet oooonnccnnnnccconncnnn 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 Contact Sheet Builder CRW ALES aeee E e r O NR 104 DECR les iii aa a E E a SE abla nd E aR Ea aAa aa SEa a A EEE Eei 105 Contact Sheets arie Matis otara ia nati a pl aSa 48 108 109 110 112 116 118 119 Contents TN 212 Context for variables E 199 Context menu Windows Explora d red Mites Mata do nde aise 41 A o eee Se SE a oe SS RN Pa 189 190 COPY Welk A cu Mua teh Ais 39 40 52 249 257 258 Wate BOLles dronn r itive carlo brincan
223. ch automatically monitors all your drives If you change a CD ROM or DVD it takes only a couple of seconds or a press on lt F5 gt to refresh the folder states IMatch always is able to recognize the media in the drive and to map it to the current database If you have 50 CD ROMs with images and only a single CD ROM drive in your computer you will love this powerful feature If you have more than one physical CD ROM drive in your PC Match can handle them as well Tip Even if you insert a CD into a drive different drive than the drive you originally scanned the CD IMatch can handle this situation Click on the root folder for that media in the DATABASE VIEW and then choose Relocate from the context menu of that folder to change the physical location of that folder in the database to point to the new drive For CD ROMs and other removable media IMatch will normally automatically detect that the media has been inserted into a different drive Match will ask you if you want to relocate the media to the new drive Friendly Names IMatch allows you to give each folder in your database a user defined name The friendly name Using the second button in the local toolbar of the Database View or the corresponding option in the context menu you can switch between two view modes Normal View Mode In this mode Match displays the real physical folder names For removable media Match appends the media label and serial number to the topmost
224. ch to load the cache image Bitmap IMBitmap containing the cache image on return Return Values Raises an exception in case of an error If no cache image exists for the given Image the returned Bitmap is nothing Description Loads the off line cache image for the given Image object ImportIPTC 232 Arguments Images Images collection containing all images to import Return Values True if successful otherwise False Description This method runs an IPTC import using your default IPTC import preset on the images contained in Images ImportEXIF Arguments Images Images collection containing all images to import Return Values True if successful otherwise False Description This method runs an EXIF import using your default EXIF import preset on the images contained in Images The Folder class The IMFolder class This class represents a folder in your database The folder class gives you access to the folder attributes and all images files contained in the folder Properties MedialD String R O The media identifier for this folder MediaSerial String R O The media serial number for this folder Comment String Gets and sets the comment for this folder FriendlyName String Gets or sets the friendly name for this folder Name String R O The name of the folder as it is displayed in the Windows Explorer 233 Path String R O The fully qualified path of the folder LastUpdate
225. che allows you to store screen size previews of images stored on removable media This enables you to use features like the Slide Show the Image Preview and the IPTC and EXIF Quick View even if your images are off line and the media is not in the drive The Off line uses your hard disk to store resampled previews of your images and hence treats disk space for comfort Depending on your Off line cache settings each image in the Off line Cache takes between 10 KB and about 50 KB so you get 20 to 100 image previews per MB of disk space The Off line cache works fully automatic and is kept in sync with your images automatically IMatch takes care that the cache is updated when you modify images or if you move copy or delete files If Off line caching is enabled for a folder and you perform a Rescan IMatch will automatically remove cache contents of deleted images and create cache images for new or updated files 49 Note Off line cache folders are displayed with a special blue frame in the Database View Off Line Cache Settings First you need to define the disk location for the cache This location is a folder on one of your hard disks which will be maintained by IMatch You should select a large hard disk with plenty of free space if you want to work with removable media extensively To define the Off line cache folder go to the OPTIONS PREFERENCES menu and select the OFF LINE CACHE tab Define the folder you want to use fo
226. ck Bd tai ta Seah ok Sieh oe Rese oh en 57 SDE lia Reels Rl aia ia poa cbc 303 Standard EXT ii ds 94 95 96 97 98 Standards A O NN 79 StatusBarHidePercen tages sssccccsvecocepeseteuvesvesscayeteveustoeutetesotet enti arepa adopte 212 282 Status BarSetPercentage s wcscaveiscocesseecesessuspecessnepsessanepeteostep SE e kS SEA KEENER Neni 212 282 StatusBardSetT eto ia S E ains EN Rak 212 282 StatusBarShowPercentage soreness eiea ienee isre eve iian ieni 212 282 Storacemedidia eee 45 Stretch Histogram ie ee e e ee as ee ested Ss peat e pea NO 189 SEDI COUE ooe aee aeea e Ea e ste e aE EE ened EAA EEAO SEE AE SOENE EO EEEE TE EO CaSe 269 SAna TaS AAE e ves 76 SUD EEE T E svseiasspaapls omeanbenadesp oes 124 SDD DLO m E Meade sti deli atin bushes atin E 379 Support A dese dove suabc abe sussdasavvsbass tase cdsvousdiaspdvsplasnes 14 Supported EXIF Picldsisis ccihs csiesiosetiaes sesdasssvethbsecpasdeseseubigoicvasdssovneBhes dese tienes tos nouns ys 98 Supported Bile Formats ss cs555 asssbesvetdcas A sidabvoveniees cpaosbodeups EER EEVEE EEE ESA E EAEan 93 Synonym PTE o Late Aes Moen Ad E 323 Keywords Synonyms IPTC and Synonyms ooococooccnonccnonnnonnnnononncnonccnoncnnnnnnonnnccnnnccnanccnnnnss 327 T Lape streamets naa 20 TEMP directory scr 352 Templates 2 53 vein beh wheel a es SE 195 Temporarily unavailable media 0 ce eeceeesccsseceeseecesseecsseecssceceseeeesaeeesaeecseessneesesaeessaeers 45 Text Export Eller eis
227. ck Rescan profile for your database If you have such a profile you can rescan the entire contents of a folder by choosing the One click Rescan command from the folder context menu a great time saver 87 The Scan Process After you have completed the wizard Match starts to scan the selected folder for new updated and deleted images Depending on the size of the folder and the number of files in it it can take a couple of seconds until Match has scanned the folder s and files to process Immediately after this step Match begins with the analyzing process and adds the images to the database Scanning folders and files PHOTOS Aktion JRA002 JPG current Folders 6 of 109 Files 242 of 5 156 0 Bytes processed Skipped 0 Estimated time to complete 3 minutes 2 042 files min Enable Preview B Stop Figure 34 The scan database dialog box while adding new images to your database During this process IMatch presents a dialog box see Figure 34 with the overall progress status You may enable the preview to see how images are added however this may slow down the process a bit because IMatch needs to retrieve and display the images while they are added The duration of the scan process depends on the number of images that are new or updated On a current computer system IMatch adds up to 1000 images per minute so even for large folders the scan process should take only a coupl
228. class BrowseForFolder Arguments StartDir The start folder for the browser Title The title of the browser dialog box Return Value Returns the folder selected by the user or an empty string if the user has canceled 215 the section Description This method displays a Windows common Select Folder dialog box Example Dim foldername As String folder Application BrowseForFolder c Please select a folder If foldername lt gt Then MsgBox Selected folder amp foldername Else MsgBox Folder selection aborted End If GetMedialnfo Arguments Path The fully qualified path to the media e g C or Cilmages MedialD Contains the media id after successful execution MediaSerial Contains the media serial number after successful execution Return Value Returns false if the media is not accessible or the folder does not exist Description Returns the media id and media serial for a specific media You can use this method to get the media information needed for the GetFolder method of the IMFolder class Example Dim mediaid as String Dim mediaserial as String Application GetMedialInfo c mediaid mediaserial VisualBrowse Arguments StartDir The start folder for the browser Title The title of the browser dialog box BrowseFiles If set to True the folder browses for files else for folders AllowMultiFileSel Optional If set to True the user can select multiple files Only valid if BrowseFile
229. cnnnnccnnccnnnncnnnnnnn cnn cnn nn nnnnnnnn cnn 57 A New Concept Dynamic Categori8s oooccccnnnncnccccnnncconannnonnncnnnnnonannnnn nn 60 A New Concept Dynamic Categories ooooooocccnnncccnnncconcccnnncconnnann nc ccnnnnos 60 Example Category Hierarchy for Image WorkflOW ooooonncnnnniccnccccnnncccnnno 63 Example Category Hierarchy for Family Photos cccccccceeeeeeeees 63 Category Formulas PowerfUlloooooocccnnnnccnnncococcccnnncnnnnnannnccnnn nro anar rn n cnn 64 Formulas tor F Ode S a aaa ese tek etchetel tel vtebeteheted stebetebetelatetel 65 Formulas using Persistent Result Sets cssssssssssseseesetsseesssseeeeeseeeeeeee 66 More Formula ExamMplesS oooooccccononccccccccnnncocnnnncnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnncnnnnns 66 The Category VIEW sssccscecuveestcsczvecnvevescareaczvesseevpescecs sek peyeresores oeeeeeyereveanenaee 67 The Image Viewed cesses esses vs paeeesveusensenesss sees saesstegsasseeus aes saegeesseeusveateete 68 The Selection View scacsseceesvezeesezsseneevensdtenepesehenssuact oa ppeueheeusuaetonsgea Ph eeususeteness 69 Creating an IMatch Database ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeteeectaaeeeeeeeeetees 72 Image Property A rea prai rnar Enna Enni NNA EENA ENUAS A NESNA SNES rEAE 73 Image Property Sets coooccccnnocccccccccnnconannnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnn cnn narra naar nn nn cn nana nnnnnns 73 Managing Property Sets 0oooccoccncccnnccoccncccnncconannnnnnncnnnncnnnnnnn nn nncnnnnnannnnns 74 A
230. comparison depends on the type of the selection Selections like DIMENSION CRC FILE SIZE and the like can be calculated with information contained in the internal index that Match maintains These selection types are very fast even for larger databases 50 000 images When you perform selections that need to analyze image data e g DUPLICATES or SHAPE AND COLOR selections Match needs much more information about your images In this case IMatch needs to access the disk based matching information that was precalculated when you added the images to your database The data is compressed and optimized but needs about 2 000 bytes per image on disk For example if your database contains 10 000 images Match needs to read 20 MB of data from disk to run a selection This process takes its time depending more on the speed of your hard disks than on the speed of your processor IMatch optimizes the access to the database using several techniques known for example as caching or as sequential only access You can help Match a lot when you set up your selections with some extra care When you run a selection Match will perform some initial optimization to minimize the disk accesses needed during the match If you have multiple selectors in your selection IMatch first will calculate all selectors that don t require additional access to the shape information stored on disk This step will sort our all images which will not part of your result set bef
231. contact sheet with no textual information Lets add the file names of the images next to each thumbnail To do this go to the DATA sheet of the Contact Sheet Builder and type Image Name into the edit field Contact Sheets Test 2 x Presets Output Thumbs Style Data Header and Footer Preview IM Process folders recursively Sort images using this sort preset MAA Define which information items should be displayed for each image You can type text or select variables from the local or global scope You can enter any number of lines or properties here a Image Name You can either do this manually or you can use the VARIABLE SELECTOR dialog box To open the dialog box click on the button with the little V on the top right of the edit field In the dialog box locate and select the variable Image Name Variables x a Image Image BPP Image CRC Image Colors Image Date Image Folder Image FolderComment Image Format Image FullPath Image Groups Image Height Image LongDate Y Image 0ID Y Imaqe ShortDate zl Rik amp kk amp kkk ek amp ek amp ek amp ekeeke Figure 138 The Variable Selector dialog box 117 When the contact sheets are created Match applies this text mask to each thumbnail The content of the variable is retrieved and then placed below the associated thumbnail Match automatically takes care that everything fits nicely and that the layout of the contact sheet
232. contents of the folder change Under these circumstances you need to run the rescan command manually to update your IMatch database If you are using NTFS formatted drives Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP only IMatch can tell from the date time stamp of a folder if the contents of that folder have been changed while IMatch was not running and hence IMatch will prompt you to update the contents of the folder Note If you want to move copy rename or delete images that are indexed by an IMatch database please perform these operations from within IMatch using the comfortable functions provided This allows IMatch to stay in sync with the modifications you make and you don t need to re sync your database manually Automatic Folder Refresh Match always monitors the currently selected folder for modifications If you modify a file from an external application or you delete files in the folder Match will automatically update the database Depending on the options you set under OPTIONS PREFERENCES IMatch will also automatically add new images to your database whenever you add new files to the folder from outside of IMatch Per default Match will only update existing images or remove deleted images Folder Commands From the content menu of the database view you have access to all folders and media related functionality implemented in IMatch 28 New Folder Rename Rescan One click Rescan Run Selection Contex
233. cripting language to the core system Using this scripting language you can easily automate frequent tasks or extend the built in functionality of the application The scripting language also enables Match to interface to other applications using OLE Automation or to import and export information in formats not directly supported by one of the built in Import Export modules Note This section assumes that you have at least some basic knowledge about programming with scripting languages There are excellent books available at your local bookstore that will teach you the basics in only a couple of hours If you have no previous experience in programming study the examples in this section carefully and try new things out You will see that it looks more difficult than it actually is IMatch Script is language compatible with Visual Basic for Applications VBA found in many Microsoft applications like Word or Excel If you have ever created some macros or scripts for these applications you will find the scripting language available in IMatch pretty comfortable and similar Since the basic rules are the same if you have ever programmed in HTML Java or JavaScript you will also find IMatch Script very easy to learn The Integrated Development Environment IDE comes with full online help and samples IMatch uses the excellent SAX Basic Engine www saxsoft com to provide its scripting capabilities Sax Basic has proven to be an extremely r
234. ct one of these folders with the QUICK MOVE command Deleting Files Make your selection Then choose the DELETE command from the context menu of the thumbnail viewer You may also press the lt Del gt key on your keyboard Match will ask you if you are sure to delete all selected files If you confirm Match will delete all files in the 53 current selection If one or more files in the selection are read only Match will prompt you again to confirm your command Depending on the setting in the GLOBAL OPTIONS see section General Settings Match will delete the files physically or move them into the Windows Recycle Bin To skip the confirm message when you delete files hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while you press the lt Del gt key IMatch will now only prompt for confirmation if one or more files in the current selection are read only Hint Wherever in IMatch you can delete files with the lt Del gt key or the mouse you can press lt Ctrl gt at the same time to avoid additional requester dialogs Smart handling for files with duplicate names If you move or copy a file to a folder and that folder already contains a file with the same name IMatch will bring up a dialog box indicating this situation This dialog allows you to skip the current file or rename either the source or the target of the move copy operation Two preview images show you the source and the target file for easier identification To view both files side
235. d gt IPTC_Date Edit Date Created gt IPTC_String_Date Keywords gt Keywords Time Created gt IPTC_Time Remove J Update only empty properties Convert text from Mac to Windows m Automatic Categorizing Panta arent Category JZ Import IPTC category into Match Categories PTE Categories E I Import IPTC supplemental categories into IMatch Categories IPTC Supplemental Categories J Import IPTC keywords into IMatch Categories PTE Keywords Convert IPTC Urgency Field 10 into IMatch Categories PTE Importance jad IV Un assign image from all categories before import fire oy These settings are stored for later reuse Whenever you do a scan operation on images or update your database otherwise IMatch will automatically use these settings for importing IPTC information Comcel Hb Figure 173 The IPTC Import Wizard To import an IPTC field create a mapping by clicking the ADD button A second dialog box will open Map this IPTC Field Object Name String Cancel to this IMatch Property Title String y Help AINIPTC fields can be mapped to properties of type String Additionally IPTC fields of type Date or Time can also be mapped to properties with the same data type in your property database Figure 174 The Field Mapping dialog There are two lists in this dialog The upper list contains all IPTC field definitions from your IPTC configu
236. d Creating CSV CRC files ooooooccccnnncnininiciccconnninanananarnccnnnn 312 Matching and Creating CSV CRC files ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeettteeeeeeeeetee 312 Creating a Standard CRC CSV file oooooooooccononiciciciconanocananananccnnn cnn nannn nro 313 Importing and matching CSV CRC files oooooocnnnininicicinononannnaaanncnnnncnnnnnno 313 Importing and Exporting Category SChemas ocooninccccccccnncccnnnaaanncnnnnccnnnnns 315 Importing and Exporting Category SChemas oconcncocccccnnncccnnnaaanccnnnncnannnns 315 Importing a Category ScheMa ooocccccnnicoccccccnnconannnnnncnnnnccnnnnnnnncnnnncnannnns 315 Exporting a Category SChNeMa ccoocccccnncccococcnnncconanannnononnnccnnnnnnnnnccnnnnnannnns 315 Smart Rename 317 The Smart Rename Mask occooccccnnccnnnnccoocnccnnncconannnnnnonnnnncnnnnnnn nn nnnannnnnnnnnns 317 SA 317 Other Options 318 Using Variables aussi rd 318 Slide Show 319 SIde ShO Witt rro roinroE a 319 IPTC Support 321 Thumbnail Property Window ooooccccnnnccoccccnnncccnnnnonnccnnnncnnnnnnn non cnnnnncnnnnnns 321 The IPTC EditO ita cnn tan E 323 The Mateh IP TG Editor imrmoncnstainonsndrtiacnrdcrrs 323 General Informations nena arranca 328 Standard What Standard oooooconnnnnococccnnncconnncnnoncnonnnnnnnnnnn ocn nnnnn nro nannnnnnnos 328 Where does the IPTC information Come from 329 Handling Non standard fieldS ooonnoooccccnnncnnnnncccoccccnnnccnananrnnccnnnnnnannns 329 The IPTC Configuration files
237. d Format Output Folder Application OutputF older p 5 File Format fuPEG 24 bit Options Filename Mask Sheet HHH Use to indicate the placement of the automatic numbering For example a file mask like contact will lead to file names contact 001 contact 002 mM Contact Sheet Dimensions and Sheet Units Sheet Units Pires H Resolution 72 Width 800 Dots Inch DPI y i 600 Height 800 x 600 px Cancel Epp Help Figure 130 The Output Sheet You can also define the size of the canvas in inches centimeters or millimeters If you have a professional approach and need to create index prints at high resolution for pre press you can define the size of your canvas in inches or millimeters and also create them at print resolution Note Keep in mind that creating a contact sheet at print resolution may need huge amounts of memory For a 600 DPI device and a contact sheet with letter format a 24 Bit contact sheet needs about 100 MB RAM Usually there is no need to create contact sheets at this high resolution The output quality of IMatch is very good even if your images are resampled at a high ratio Make some experiments to find the optimal settings for your needs Anatomy of a Contact Sheet IMatch applies various measures to contact sheets By adjusting these measures and settings you can create exactly the layout you want Figure 131 depicts the various measures tha
238. d and to share Batch Processor presets with other people even if they store their bitmaps and masks on different drives or in different folders Figure 156 Using a border mask for the entire target image To change the color of the mask enable the COLOR option and choose a mask color of your liking You get the best effect if the color you choose here matches the canvas color if you use a canvas r M Border Mask Stretch 100 Stretch Y fico H Vv Invert Vv Fit to image 3 le nf C NoFil Color Es El ion Bitmaps Borders eure Me The result of coloring the mask white is show in Figure 157 below Figure 157 The colored border mask Now enable the canvas in Step 1 of the wizard and use Left Top Right 10px and for the Bottom a height of 100 pixels Leave the ALIGNMENT to ALIGN to adjust the original image to the left and upper canvas margins The resulting image should look something like this 295 Figure 158 The border mask applied to the original image with a 10 10 10 100 canvas Using a contrasting color for the mask bitmap often leads to interesting results Figure 159 The same border mask with a contrasting color Figure 160 uses a different mask to add some smooth borders around the original image This mask is part of the Match distribution and is named MatchMsk004 msk Figure 160 Using a different mask 296 You can also use a bitmap
239. d category make sure that the check box INCLUDE CHILD CATEGORIES is checked To export all of your categories simply check the All category Press OK to start the process 316 Smart Rename The Smart Rename Mask You tell Match what you want to do with your file names using a mask statement The mask statement is simply a string with some special characters tokens These tokens are This character represents the original file name A mask like will simply leave the original file name as it is You can combine this token with other tokens or characters to extend the original file name This character represents one character of the original file name The position of this character within the mask maps to the position of the respective character in the file name Indicates an auto number series You can use up to 10 tokens in your mask The number of tokens controls the number of digits in the resulting auto number series Indicates the beginning of a string text replacement token A string replacement token consists of two parts and three tokens The format for a string replacement token is lt Old Text gt lt Replacement Text gt This That This string replacement token will replace all occurrences of This with the text That image img This token will replace all occurrences of image in the file names with the shorter img My image This token will replace all occurrences of My image with n
240. d then by file name Image Attributes to Check all predefined image attributes you want to include 300 include in your text document Match supports a variety of predefined image attributes Object Identifier The unique object identifier OID for this image This identifier remains valid as long as the image remains in the database File Name The name of the image file including the file extension Full File Name The complete path and file name of the image file File Name w o Extension The name of the file without the extension File URI The file Universal Resource Indicator e g file c temp beach jpg Folder Name The name of the folder where the file is located Folder URI The folder URI Width The width of the image in pixels Height The height of the image in pixels Size The size of the image file on disk File Format 301 Image Properties to include File Format Options 302 A specifier for the image file format Checksum A 32 Bit CRC checksum for the file This checksum is compatible to applications that read and write CRC and CSV files Last Modified The date and time of the last modification of the image file Last Updated The date and time of the last update of the image file in the IMatch database Categories A comma separated list of all categories that contain this image BPP The bit depth color resolution of the image Similarity The simi
241. d to an injunctive order appropriately restraining and or prohibiting such unauthorized use without the necessity of MMW posting bond or other security YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT YOU UNDERSTAND THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT AND UNDERSTAND THAT BY INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE BY LOADING OR RUNNING THE SOFTWARE OR BY PLACING OR COPYING THE SOFTWARE ONTO YOUR COMPUTER HARD DRIVE OR RAM YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT EXCEPT FOR WRITTEN SEPARATE AGREEMENTS BETWEEN MMW AND YOU THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS A COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE RIGHTS AND LIABILITIES OF THE PARTIES HERETO THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT SUPERSEDES ALL PRIOR ORAL AGREEMENTS PROPOSALS OR 13 UNDERSTANDINGS AND ANY OTHER COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN MMW AND YOU RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IN SIMPLE WORDS YOU USE THE SOFTWARE ON YOUR OWN RISK NO GUARANTEES IN COUNTRIES WHERE ANY OF THE ABOVE TERMS OR CONDITIONS IS ILLEGAL YOU ARE NOT ALLOWED TO INSTALL OR USE IMATCH IMATCH IS DISTRIBUTED AS USER SUPPORTED SHAREWARE ONLY IMATCH IS DEVELOPED BY A SINGLE PERSON ME MARIO M WESTPHAL I DO THIS ALL ON MY OWN AND IN MY SPARE TIME FOR ME IMATCH IS A HOBBY FOR YOU IMATCH IS A GREAT APPLICATION THAT CAN SAVE YOU TIME AND MONEY GIVE IT A TRY IF YOU DON T LIKE IT SIMPLY REMOVE IT FROM YOUR DISK IF YOU LIKE IT PLEASE REGISTER AND BECOME A LICENSED
242. daeccsigeshscanasicasgiias nbahhcayga as E E a ES 260 HIStory tsi iaa slot egageths dents leceaieaths dendateccgigethsdandalicayigiisiendathen A E E RERA 160 for CateSories canica iio ale li naan 359 for Folder ua 28 history folders for Move and CoPYiirinasiiaais naaa 55 HomePage 14 Hotkey The Tools Mens naci 375 HS bieira a eink lien ain bali ras 189 HSV veces il tensa 148 189 HIM sis cintiaiiowieinbhialinn can hialancishralinancinbidlianinbiind 122 123 203 337 Hitman latir 189 190 Hyperion liar 76 I A A a 346 Diarias dao cs paa dias hos 272 liD EEE dicas adoro 121 Idle State ica nro opt drid nas db 88 TMA SE ati di did 57 68 69 244 and CAPO sa leidas de 249 UP A ee o a 68 Image Attributes o nae ke stan ah aaae eta a wh Shee ld E a leet ees 73 Batch Process Mi a te at a 297 298 Image Catalog 392 Caine 120 IM ge coMM dias 38 All Image Dimension Units Display Units 96 DPI Show All group images 343 Image Editors ociosas 179 180 183 Image Editor Set iia rris 340 Image Licensing arrie a ras 298 Image Match iii cosines e Ee Eene EEEE E ESE EEEE E EEES ASEE EE 139 Image Panel a 157 Image Panels A Sk A dan 36 Image Properties i fe cities rape an andadas 73 Image Propecia 22 Image Property Set in Contact Sheets 2 0 0 0 ceseessccsseecsseeceseecseecsseecsseeeesaeecsseesseessneeessaes 116 Image Variables issesioitis ails ncteihiel ae a taa 193 199 Image Viewer ias popa ada darlas 68 Imase
243. disk Please refer to the manuals of these applications or devices for more information Important Make sure that you use the correct profile Don t use a profile that looks good on your device Using the wrong profile may lead to unbalanced or off images Turn of Gamma Correction Make sure you set the gamma correction in Match to neutral value 1 0 when you use color profiles Applying gamma correction will lead to wrong results if combined with color management IPTC Information This dialog allows you to control which IPTC fields are shown in the IPTC Quick Display see section IPTC Quick Display The IPTC expression controls the position and format of IPTC fields within the IPTC Quick Display You can add any number of IPTC fields from the list of available fields to get exact the amount of information you need Monitor Gamma Slide Show File Format Preferences General Thumb View Colors IPTC EXIF The IPTC format string controls how IPTC information is displayed in thumbnail viewer windows To view an IPTC field add its number with a leading symbol to the expression below ou may also add arbitrary text to create exactly the format you want to see IPTC Expression Name 5 a Headline 105 Caption 120 Copyright 116 xl Available Fields This expression controls what a Add to Expression Object Name Edit Status Urgency zi Cateoonm The version number of this record Reset Figure 202 T
244. ditor shows the number of selected images and the number and file name of the current image You then can switch back to the single image mode and add information to individual images Switching between the multi image and single image mode allows you to add information in batch to all selected images and to add specific information to individual images Undo You can undo your changes to the current image at any time by pressing the UNDO button in the toolbar at the bottom of the IPTC editor Once the information has been written Undo will be disabled Multi image Options You can control the write mode of the IPTC editor on the third pane These options give you maximum control on how new information is written back to your images and how it is merged with existing IPTC information 324 Note You can also control the write mode using the three write mode toolbar buttons IMatch IPTC Editor IMG_0906 2 psd 1 of 2 modified j E xj Description Image Information Other Fields and Options This table shows all fields described in the IMatch IPTC configuration files that are not part of the normal IPTC standard set You may edit the information in these fields but be aware that IMatch is unable to validate the field contents It is up to you to enter only valid information to stay compatible with other applications that may process these fields Sublocation Custom Field 1 Custom Field 2 Custom Field 3 Custom Field 4
245. dium sharpen for the best results If you want to sharpen your images in batch but you don t want to resize them use the resize mode Percentage and set both dimensions to 100 In this case the batch processor will only apply the sharpen operation but will not attempt to resize the image Resizing Matrix IMatch allows you to resize your images with many options Please see the matrix below for details Keep Aspect is set Both Width and Height are set Limit The image must not exceed either width or height IMatch checks for portrait landscape orientation Use the larger dimension of the image resize the image Either Width or Height is set IMatch uses the dimension given and resizes the image to this dimension while keeping the correct aspect ratio 290 Keep Aspect is not set Both width and height are set Resize the image to exactly the given dimensions Either Width or Height is set Use the given measure and resize the image based on this measure Keep the aspect ratio The new Adjust for portrait landscape images instructs Match to exchange width height according to the image orientation This allows you to use one batch processor preset for both landscape and portrait images while limiting the maximum width height of the image according to the larger dimension The Canvas The canvas is a background bitmap on which Match arranges your source image In the simplest case the canvas allows you to add some borders to
246. drive into an IMatch database IMatch keeps the media separated using the media label and media serial number so you and IMatch will always know which media to insert to view a specific image When you add images from external media to your database Match saves the unique media id together with your other drive and folder information Whenever Match needs to access the drive it hence cannot only check if the drive is ready but also if the correct media is inserted e g the correct CD ROM If not Match will flag all folders from that media with a special icon indicating the offline status of the media If you want to view an image from such a media Match will prompt you for the correct media giving you additional information like the Media Id the Media Name and the comments you assigned to this media Folder State Icons The following table contains a list of all folder state icons and their meaning 26 Internal storage media Off line External disk media Off line CD ROM drive Off line Network drive Off line HTTP FTP or other Internet Connection currently not supported Off line This graceful handling of external media is very unique and allows you to add all your CD ROMs to a single Match database You can perform most of the operations in Match without ever changing the media in the drive Only when you want to display or edit the original image Match will prompt for the correct media Furthermore Mat
247. dth bm Height Don t forget to free the font object after use Set font Nothing The IPTCStream Cass The IPTCStream Cass The class IPTCStream allows you to access the IPTC information embedded in image files You can read the information contained in a file process it within your scripts and even write IPTC information back into a file If you re working with IPTC information on a regular basis and you have to process a huge number of images it is now easier than never to automate captioning tasks and to safe time by utilizing the built in scripting capabilities of IMatch Properties Fields This property allows you to access the field collection of this IPTC stream object It returns an IPTCFieldCollection object KeepFileDateTime Boolean If this property is true the WriteFile method keeps the original date time of the output file This allows you to update the IPTC information in files without changing the time stamp of the file Methods ReadFile 270 Arguments FileName Fully qualified file name of the file to load Return Values This method returns one of the following values IMIPTCResults imiptcSuccess Successful execution imiptcFailed General failure imiptcNotlnitialized The IPTC subsystem is not initialized Check your IPTC configuration files imiptcNoIPTClInfo The file does not contain IPTC information imiptcUnsupportedFormat Unsupported file format You can only read IPTC information from J
248. e to the image to the category The physical location of the images plays no role here By assigning images to categories you can create a virtual hierarchy of all the images in your database without ever moving the images around on your disk Even if all images are in a single folder or located on 20 different CD ROM s you can move the images around in your categories as you like Categories are independent from the actual storage location of the images and they work equally well with images stored on your disk or on your bookshelf Note A parent category always contains the images of all its sub categories so when you click on a parent category you see not only the images in that category but also the images contained in any of its child categories Each image is shown only once even if it is contained in more than one child category You can control whether or not a parent category displays the images of all child categories via the categories property dialog This may be useful under some circumstances for example when you use categories for export or web page generation An image can be added to multiple categories at the same time Consider a second category Location which is added to the category hierarchy above Animals Birds Location Afrika America North South Australia Pacific Europe For example if you have taken a photo of a Bird in Northern America you will add this image to both the category Animals B
249. e Drientation 2 Results for Files lt 100 KB 1 IMatch saves all result sets of the current session in a special folder in the SELECTIONS VIEW From here you can re open any of the result sets with a double click or the context menu right mouse button Even if the initial selection took a few seconds or even minutes to open a result set from the history takes only a few seconds Since you can open any number of result sets at any time this feature allow you to compare result sets visually even if you already closed the corresponding result window When you manipulate your database by adding new images or deleting images IMatch keeps the result set history automatically in sync with the database However if you add new images to the database these images will not be added automatically to the entries in the result history IMatch needs to rerun the entire selection after you have added new images If you try to open an entry from the result set history under these conditions Match will bring up a message and prompts you to rerun the selection When you close the database the result set history will be destroyed The next time you open the database workspace the result set history will be empty It will fill up again while you perform selections against your database This is why the result set history is called transient or temporary Persistent Result Sets If you want to keep a result set for a longer period of
250. e Selection View or create an interactive selection Cancel Help in the selection builder Figure 49 Searching for image properties The dialog allows you to search all your string type properties or to limit the search to specific properties in your image property set You can either search for plain text like beach or beach car or you can form complex queries using standard regular expressions Note The Ad hoc queries allow you to quickly search your database for the most frequently used fields To create more complex queries either run interactive selections or create a stock selection in the SELECTION BUILDER Data Security and Backups Backup Procedures Regular backups are important They protect you against data loss due to hard disk damage disk failure or program errors To backup your Match databases simply copy all database files to another disk an external media or a tape streamer A database consists of a number of files all sharing the same name but different extensions IMatch stores your personal preferences IPTC presets and other configuration files in your personal folder Under older versions this folder is located below Windows Profiles lt User Name gt For newer Windows versions this folder is located under Documents and Settings lt User Name gt My Documents In both cases the folder is named photools com IMatch You should also backup your Windows installation including the syst
251. e Types Sequential IMatch will display all images of the current selection in sequential order Random IMatch displays all images from the current selection in random order Manual IMatch displays all images of the current selection in sequential order but does no auto advance the images The slide show displays only one image at the time and then waits until you click left with your mouse or press lt SPACE gt Display Mode With the DISPLAY MODE you can choose if you want to view the images in original size or scaled to fit the available screen size If choose the USE ORIGINAL IMAGE SIZE SETTING the images will be automatically resized to cover the available screen space Tip If you want a full screen preview in the slide show go to Options Preferences Slide Show and enable USE ORIGINAL IMAGE SIZE Then disable the info window display Remove the check mark before SHOW IMAGE INFORMATION This leaves the slide show maximum room for the image and displays the image in full size If the image is larger than the available screen space you can move the image on screen by holding down the left mouse button 338 Delay The DELAY setting controls how many seconds IMatch waits until it moves on to the next image You can always proceed to the next image with the left mouse button or the lt SPACE gt key Show Image Information If you check SHOW IMAGE INFORMATION Match will display the available information about the current image at
252. e format of the selected image is in a format that does not support IPTC data the Quick Display will be disabled The EXIF Quick Display shows the EXIF metadata fields contained in the selected image if any If the selected file does not contain EXIF information this display will be disabled See section EXIF Metadata Support for more information about EXIF The Categories Display shows the categories of the selected image If there is more than one image selected the categories list displays categories in different styles to differentiate between categories valid to all images and categories matching only some of the selected images Use the context menu for more commands You can control what information is displayed in the Quick Display via the EXIF IPTC settings tab under OPTIONS PREFERENCES The Category Display The category display in the thumbnail property allows you to review and edit categories for the currently selected image es With lt Del gt you can un assign the selected images from the current category in the category display With the right mouse button and the context menu you can easily open the Category Assignment dialog or jump right to the selected category in the Category View 322 The IPTC Editor The IMatch IPTC Editor The Match IPTC Editor is a full fledged and feature rich IPTC editing feature It supports single file updates and batch updated multi file updates of any number of selected images
253. e image data even if the CD ROMs with your images are located on your bookshelf Note IMatch databases only store links or references to your images They do not store copies of your images Only a thumbnail representation of each of your images is stored in an IMatch database Your images stay on your disk or removable media or network or wherever you put them Having an Match database does not protect your images against accidental deletion or corruption Don t forget to create backup copies of your images on a daily basis at least Some General Tips Always create a new folder for each database This keeps all database files together in a single location Match database consist of a number of files and if you want to move your database to a different disk or computer it s easier to have them all in one place Also since an Match database represents a valuable asset especially when you add comments to your images or create categories from your images you need to create frequent backup copies of your database s If all the files are in one folder you just need to copy the entire folder to CD ROM another disk or a tape streamer to secure your database from disk damages and other errors Keep your images under a single root folder Managing your images is much easier when you keep all your images below a single root folder like c images or c My Pictures If you store your images on more than one physical disk use one
254. e images in the database against your color mask can be controlled with the slider at the bottom of the selector editor Use a lower tolerance value to find images that 148 match the color mask more closely If you result set contains only a few images use a higher tolerance value to loosen the match Note Depending on your definition different tolerance values will produce different results Since IMatch reacts more or less sensitive to minor color differences the tolerance setting has a large impact on the result set of your query Take the time to play around with this setting to get the optimal result You may use the EDIT SELECTION TEMPLATE button in the local toolbar of the result window to modify the current result set The COLOR DISTRIBUTION mode allows you to actually draw a sketch of the image you re looking for In Figure 56 you see a sketch match for finding images with a red center To define such a search activate the COLOR DISTRIBUTION mode and draw a sketch of the image you have in mind With the SQUARE BUTTON below the grid you can change the size of the brush and the RESET button will reset the grid back to the empty state Color Distribution aSUISEEEE E Current Color PE R 243 Hi 122 REA G 43 Ss 100 ears Beset m Boj cay e psa C Overall Color Tolerance Figure 56 Finding images with a red center When you run this selection Match will analyze all images in your database and wil
255. e is read only the function will fail Addimage Arguments FileName The fully qualified file name of the file to be updated or added The file must be in one of the supported file formats Return Values This method returns an IMFileOperationResult to indicate the outcome of the operation imforSuccess Successful completion imforGeneralFailure General unknown error imforFileDoesNotExist File does not exist imforFilelsReadOnly File is read only imforFileOperationFailed File operation failed Windows error imforDatabaseFailure Database error imforFileExists File already exists Description This method adds or updates the given image to the database Refreshlmage Arguments Image The image that needs to be updated ForceUpdate True means that IMatch will import and refresh the image even if the time stamps and the checksum have not changed KeepTransforms Set this to true to keep existing thumbnail transformations Otherwise IMatch will reset all thumbnail transformations back to neutral Description This method checks the given image for modifications and updates the database if the image has changed Call this method from your scripts when you make modifications on image files on disk to keep the database up to date Refreshimages 227 Arguments Image A collection of images to be refreshed ForceUpdate True means that IMatch will import and refresh the images even if the time stamps and the checksum have not cha
256. e left mouse button Hue Saturation Lightness Hue To change the Hue Saturation and Lightness attributes of an image use this dialog box describes the color s shade Hue is measured on a circular spectrum running from red to green to blue and returning to red The hue slider has a value between 100 and 100 and selects the hue value from on the circular spectrum Saturation describes the hue s purity A color with 100 saturation is bright and vivid and a color with 0 saturation is a shade of gray To correct flat colors in your image use more Saturation If the colors are too bright and heavy use lower saturation values to correct Lightness describes the brightness of the colors in your image A color with 100 lightness is always pure white and a color with 0 lightness is always pure black To adjust a bad scan or an image that is to bright use higher or lower lightness values Hue Saturation Lightness Saturation Lightness Cancel Help Figure 125 Hue Saturation and Lightness Color Change This function allows you to change the individual Red Green and Blue values of the colors in your image You can correct wrong colors or produce interesting effects on your image 191 Change Colors x 0 Coca tee Figure 126 The Change Colors dialog Printing an image from the Image Editor Open an image with the image editor Double click on a thumbnail in the THUMBNAIL VI
257. e lower values for more tolerance with respect to shapes or a higher value to be less tolerant Both sliders also interact You should take some time to get used to the influence that both sliders have on the final result If you find a setting that works good for your type of images save these settings as a selection template This will allow you to reuse these settings later to match other images If you check the EMPHASIZE IMAGE CENTER option IMatch will emphasize the center of the original images to focus more on what happens in the middle of the image The ACCOUNT FOR MIRRORED AND FLIPPED IMAGES option forces Match to perform some extra calculations to identify images that have been mirrored or flipped These additional calculations take some extra time though Expect your selection to take twice as long as without this option However without this option Match may miss images that have been mirrored or rotated Also activating this option may return more irrelevant images in your result set It depends on the original images which setting works best The ENABLE SHORTCUT EVALUATION uses a faster matching mode with some type of prediction This results in faster matches but also may return less optimal results Try it out for your type of images and decide whether or not it works for you Some notes about Image Matching Please keep in mind that image matching is not an exact science What it very easy for your natural eye brain comp
258. e of minutes Running IMatch in the background If you want to reach the best possible performance during the update disable the image preview in the SCANNING FOLDERS AND FILES dialog Shrink IMatch to the Windows task bar to force it into idle state Idle state means that IMatch behaves much more cooperative with respect to other applications Updating a database is a really processing intensive task believe me the algorithms executed during that progress are really complicated and hence there will be very little processing power left for other applications When you force IMatch into the idle state it will consume only the CPU power not required by other applications running It will also free all unneeded memory and hence reduce its memory footprint significantly leaving more memory for other applications The IMatch icon in the task bar always shows the overall percentage for the current task IMatch will take more time to perform the update but you will be able to do other things with your computer in the mean time Tip Send IMatch to the Windows taskbar if you want to work with other applications while Match updates your database After all you can abort the scan process at any time All images added so far will remain in the database The next time you run a scan operation Match will process only the files that are not already in the database or files that have been updated since the last scan Updating a database
259. e portions of the image By excluding a portion of the image you tell IMatch that the content in this part of the image is of no interest for the final match result You can also say that these excluded portions are the don t care parts of your images If some of your images have borders and some don t it may be a good idea to exclude one or two grid cells on each border see Figure 52 After this definition Match will ignore the contents of a 5 10 area on each side of your images thus ignoring the border area Another good way to use this feature is when you store images captured by digital cameras in your database If you want to check only a specific portion of the images set the Area of interest only to these areas of the image 144 Interactive Mode Figure 53 Focusing on relevant parts of the image Besides defining a static Area of Interest that is used for each image you may also activate the interactive mode If you check this option Match will show the selector dialog box whenever you run a match IMatch will use the first original image as a backdrop for the Area of Interest selector This allows you to erase all irrelevant parts of the image compare to Figure 53 By erasing the irrelevant parts of the original image will usually lead to better matches The File Format selector IMatch supports over 40 file formats with several sub types The File Format selector allows you to create a result set cont
260. e selection IMatch supports over 50 different criteria to create results sets from simple things like Find all files named like beach or Find file smaller than 200KB to the most complex combinations of several rules and matching algorithms Although being very powerful it is remarkably easy to create selections with Match A result set is the result of running a selection a search against the images in your database A result set is basically a list of images presented in form of thumbnails All image manipulation operations and functions available in IMatch work on result sets If you like the contents of a folder on your hard disk is also a result set containing all the images in that folder IMatch can now store result sets on your hard disk making them persistent over program runs You can access any of these persistent result sets within seconds saving the time to re run the selection IMatch automatically monitors all modifications in your database and keeps the persistent results sets up to date If you copy move or delete image files all persistent result sets are updated automatically Only when you add new images to your database IMatch will need to re run the selections to refresh the persistent result sets The result set history contains all result sets created during the current session You can access any of the results within seconds to compare it to new results or use them as the start for a new selection w
261. e selector all selectors have to be met to include an image in the final result set Note Unless you change the Result Set Options all selections in IMatch return a maximum of 200 matches per original or in total For example if you define a selector to limit the file size to 640 x 480 and a second selector to limit the file size to a maximum of 200 KB Match will return only images that meet both conditions Selector Categories IMatch arranges the available selectors into a couple of selector categories Each selector has it s own properties and options which you can set in the selection editor The available categories are Pre Selectors This category contains the Folder Selector and the Category Selector These selectors allow you to restrict your final result set to contain only images from specific folders or categories Basic Selectors This category holds all selectors that act on image file properties e g the file format file size image dimensions orientation date and time and file name Of special importance is the Result Set Options selector It allows you to control the size of your result set the similarity threshold and the maximum number of images to show Image Matchers This category contains the most sophisticated selectors Sketch and Color Match allows you to find duplicate images or images similar in color and 139 shape to some original images With the Sketch Match you can find images based on spec
262. e via the Match main toolbar and the SCRIPTING menu From the toolbar you can open the Script Manager the Scripting IDE Window and the Script Output Window When a script is running you can stop it with the red STOP button next to the OUTPUT WINDOW button 203 Script Menu poriet Output Window Script Manager Scripting IDE Stop Script Execution Script Group _ My Scripts Fl EZ Active Elements Demo Add Text Demo Bookmark all files with a similarity of 99 in the current result set Application Variables Demo Image Buckets Demo Calculate Total File Size Category Demo Create Text File from Images Create Thumbnails Delete all files in the current result set with 99 similarity How to browse for a folder Image Transformation Demo Select Categories Dialog Box Demo Select Folders Dialog Box Demo Wait Dialog Demo Scripts Figure 183 The Scripting Environment in IMatch The IMatch status bar contains a new icon that indicates the execution status of the scripting engine When a script is executed the icon will be shown blinking compare to Figure 184 la Figure 184 The Script running indicator in the IMatch status bar The Script Manager The Script Manager is the central point of management for all your scripts From here you create edit and delete scripts The Script Manager also allows you to start a script or to load a script into the Integrated Development Environment On the left
263. ecification For example the SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS can take a maximum of 256 characters Match automatically enforces these field length limits to stay compatible with the IPTC standard IMatch IPTC Editor IMG_0906 2 psd 1 of 2 modified ma j Description Image Information Other Fields and Options Presets Special Tools b Delete specific keyword s from all selected files Load Run L Delete Store File D Data incoming New 2002 09 IMG_0906 2 psd Current Image Caption li Alte Briicke in Weilmiinster Hessen mile Special Instructions EN Object Name te Br cke Headline ale Br cke Byline Alte Br cke in Weilmiinster Hessen Byline Title Poo lt gt o B Bl i PE ou Navigation Credit Mario M Westphal 00 Copyright Mario M Westphal 000 Caption Writer Mario M Westphal 0 Source m sj i o oa Write Modes Open Thesaurus Multi Singe Edit Paste Mac Conversion Copy Figure 103 The Description Pane The first pane of the IPTC Editor also allows you to Create Update and Delete IPTC presets Managing IPTC Presets Presets v Delete Store Load Figure 104 IPTC Presets IPTC Presets allow you to save a complete set of IPTC information for later reuse Instead of typing things like Cop
264. ed Show all images which contain the text New York or Manhattan in the property Image Description Duplicates Finds duplicate images This is a specialized selector that finds duplicate images very fast Use it to scan your database for duplicates Color Similarity Find image with similar colors 70 Color and ShapeFind images with similar colors and shape The most complex algorithm performs image matching based on the color texture and shape information contained in images Sketch Match Find images based on a user drawn sketch or color distribution Very good for finding images based on a specific requirement like Images with a red object in the middle or Images with a green bottom and a blue top or find images that are mostly red Plug In Selectors These selectors are external match modules written by researchers or other companies See the documentation of the installed plug in modules for more information 71 Creating an IMatch Database This section explains how to create and setup a new database with IMatch You will also learn how to add images to your database and how to use the Database Wizard to perform frequent tasks Creating a database is a simple process but requires a bit of thinking upfront You usually keep the database for a long time while you add new images to it and arrange the images on your disk Perhaps you even want to a add couple of removable media to this database so you have access to th
265. eeees 107 Creating CON nts ce a cseeeeeivesh seriales releer tre pes 108 Creating Contact Sheets cccccccccciccccneeeeeeeeeeteecnaaeeeeeeeeetessesaeeeeeees 108 The Batch ProceSsof siescsvieseiveriesctveveesehsuriarctetveesetstelatebeivbetedetelatetetets 120 The Fet EXPO RI sofcsciessivectstcivevienstvecdvtchvnviensgeteletebebvleteletedetsbeteds 121 Programming IMatch ooooonccnnnncccoccconncononanannncnnnnncnnnnnnn nn cnn nan cnnnnnnn nn 121 IMatch and the WWW A EEEE 122 The IMatch Photo Gallery ooooooocccnnncconnnncccccconnnccnnnanannccnnn cnn nano nc 122 Importing Data from other applications oooonnnnnnnnnncccnnnnnnnnncccancccnnncnannnns 124 Optimal Category Setups oooccccccnnnccoccccnnnnconnnnnnnnncnnnncnnnnnnn non cnnnn cra nnnnn rra 124 A E 124 Color Coding Categorles ooooccccnnnconcccccnnccnnnnnnnnncconnncnnnnnnnn nn ccnnn cra nnnnnn nano 124 Searching for images esr repere penipeni pe ena erite ena au enu ene nn ncnnnnn nene 126 Selections Finding IMages ccoonnnnccncccnnnncconnncconncnnnncnannnnn ocn cnnnnnnanannnnnnno 126 A eds en ena aeaea Aena aniru nE auier kee 126 Find Text in Properties ooocconnnnncccccinnnccnnnononcncnnnncnnanano cnn cn nnnnnnnnnna cnn 127 Data Security and Backups ooooooccccncccconocoonnccnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnn non ncnnnnncnannns 128 Backup ProC dures ccis sssecectsrtissteaavecereartasstesavesseesteasinentvestseeteasteeaaess 128 Selections Finding Images 129 Whaat is th
266. eer odos 147 low res preview images Slide SHOW cessscesseessseeceseeceseeeseecseecseeecesaeecsaeecseeseseeeesaes 339 Slide Show icono ici 40 319 and offline caching asresten eana EAE EE Ea EEEE IEE EK Ea EEEE Pa EE TEREE 49 Keyboards NN 319 Slide Show Preview Images sissano a a A A oa 339 Slide Show Settings cionado iii a a a a a a a oa 338 Slideshow offline CACHE RN O 49 Smart Rename ara E r E A A R 38 91 92 Smart Rename Mask nerne iire i ei ers r e eres ee a 317 Smart Sortint sienn ra ea a RA a a aie 42 Softe NN 185 SolariZe id ie E Sa 190 Sony Maker NOtes veias old E actus do tada E 380 Sort Orders eera e suka dev E E E e E S A O cda 42 for Light Table Sorts omiso lit cvs dow ibs died sto cue Savon didas 44 SOLE PLES OR EAE EN AIEE Bees oe as bes chine ETAPE cine a TAAA TANTE TE NT 42 43 44 Sort Pr s t for Contact SHEGS cities dep dike a esbelta eds daba 115 O A 35 42 43 44 Sort Sequencers sorio ton een Ee ereen cabs diendo hs ESEESE EN EEES EEE EESO data ESE SES 43 den a ii id did a E e ES 42 403 SOBRA es 248 SortlmaPesin lid 247 248 SOM nadaa 42 247 IMAGES VIA SCI 246 of th umbaals ncilnniia id 42 SortProllesia a aca 247 SortSequence cuina paa 235 SPACE BAR cuca ca 181 SpatialFilter cotton ta a ee ros 262 263 Special Tools PTE id dd la 368 369 370 371 Special Tools aiii ria sia aio o A tries de 335 Specifie S ort Order canada Rati oh Stee a Ra a hes 44 Splash ici oa ss 175 One Cli
267. efined zoom factor from the list and even enter a free percentage On the right of the zoom combo you find the ZOOM IN ZOOM OUT and Zoom 100 zoom controls If you have a scroll mouse you can also use the scroll mouse to zoom your image Move the wheel down to zoom in and up to zoom out Rectangular Zoom By clicking the rectangular zoom button in the image editor toolbar you can select a rectangular area of the image to zoom in This zoom mode is very convenient when you want to inspect certain areas of your image Saving Images The Image Editor allows you to save your current image into over 40 different file formats and even more subtypes You can save the current image in the original format save it toa different file format or under a new name You can even save copies of the image without touching the original Save in ea temp y fal c File name Funny Birdipg Save as type JPEG 24 bit Cancel Dptions Figure 117 The Save as dialog box 181 If you choose one of the save options from the FILE menu or the IMAGE EDITOR TOOLBAR IMatch will display the dialog box shown in Figure 117 Here you can select the folder to which you want to save the image the file name and the file format for the new image Many file formats supported by IMatch have advanced options To change these options click on the OPTIONS button in the dialog box This will open a second dialog where you can modify the advanced options availa
268. egories aia rs 168 Moving Filesi nits hate ee ha en ad en oe ed A SR 35 Moving images dra and dr pi ihe da dad da 57 MPEG Standard 2x posiciona a eS 79 MSS BOX cin ada aa ic ici 274 Multi Edit Modeni sa Ata 340 MultiPage 0 A oh a he A eh Se AAS 35 SAM a eee 183 Multiple Users A Ea 374 N O a NN 106 Nim ia a d 193 194 212 233 235 238 239 243 244 245 272 NameNoEXtbi O A RdA 194 NEE cana oa e don at e ll e e ll a et lad e Se 108 NGS ative tt A q ones Dees bos ot sans E etek ot a aed 189 Netscape Palette si sinsi tao eee he cath it Haste ie cath esau i ech alee it ok UT on We ohne 289 Network CLIVE serisi oii A at een Et ok A eae a E cee Mee ee 46 ING EW OKI Et res ck ccc Reet eM ah oh te ot i eck ah ct dan a cheb tay ot a oath eet Seek ache ee oo eek at ea 374 Networking IMatchus cascada clica iaa ies 374 NeW Shortcuts tiara calida ista dan ai 375 Nikon Maker Notes tists othe it o a dina td do att tae nt 380 Not T coaliciones 185 NOISE TEMOVAl alli dali al acia 104 Non standard Held ui till A TRR 329 A tenisteetaaliits bandas aati danastietaaties E A A ER 329 Number Or Colors 00 uscar dalla iii 249 O Object Modelado 210 OEM character S t iccsivie 0ciceceseedeviest dee debeedaviendedes iebuadenleanedeeduuvedendeseedevdvsnedatdestodevivanedeaders 300 OPPCEs vicstesricstetesiedeeuerdestiderdeveiderdesusdandenssdandevvedaabenvedandes vedanbeaecdandeaucdasdvancdevdvabsdeedsandeonese 303 Ollanta rails idolos 45 46 339 Offli
269. eight of the image in pixels The size of the image file in bytes The 32 Bit Cyclic Redundancy Checksum CRC of the image This checksum uniquely identifies the contents of each image and is used for the Checksum match method in the CSV CRC export and import filters The date of the last modification The date of the last modification short format The date of the last modification long format The time of the last modification The color depth of the image measured in Bits Per Pixel BPP The number of colors in the image based on the BPP value Format Categories CategoriesFullN ame Date Y Y Y YMM DD Date Y Y YYMM Date Y Y YY TimeHHMMSS TimeHHMM WidthIN HeightIN WidthCM HeightCM WidthMM HeightMM Global Variables The file format of the image This attribute contains a description of the file format e g Windows Bitmap A comma separated list of all categories that refer to this image A comma separated list of all categories that refer to this image The category names are fully qualified including all parent categories The date of the last modification in the format YYYYMMDD for example 20010101 for January 1 2001 The date of the last modification in the format YYYYMMDD for example 200101 for January 2001 The four digit year of the file date The time of the last modification in the format HHMMSS for example 120001 for 12 00 01 The time of the last modification in the for
270. el Help Figure 206 Relocating folders When you move or rename a folder in Windows Explorer IMatch will loose track of that folder To tell IMatch the new drive or media on your system perform the following steps Select the folder that has moved in the Database View Choose the Relocate command from the context menu of that folder In the dialog navigate to the new location of that folder and press OK IMatch will now update all internal references to point to the new disk media No information will be lost and you database will be up to date afterwards Note Always use the available file commands in IMatch to rename or move folders and files This allows IMatch to keep track of the changes and relocating folders is not needed Burning CDs or DVDs Most often the Relocate command is needed after you have moved burned one or more of your folders to a removable media like a CD ROM or DVD If you want to move a part of your image collection to a CD ROM or DVD perform these steps Use your CD writer software to copy the entire contents of a folder to CD ROM Note IMatch cannot relocate single files only relocation of entire folders is supported Always write entire folders on CD or DVD Next select the folder in the Database View and choose Relocate from the context menu of that folder Navigate to the new disk media of that folder and press OK IMatch will now update all internal references to point to the new location
271. elds These files are text based and can be viewed and modified with any text editor e g Windows Notepad If you edit these fields make sure you create a backup copy of the original file Gust 107 in case and that your editor is able to write normal Windows ANSI text files without adding additional data Note This is an advanced topic You only need to read this section if you work with special IPTC dictionaries or if your company agency uses custom IPTC tags There are three configuration files that are processed by IMatch imiptctags ipt This is the standard configuration file It contains descriptions of all standard IPTC fields This file is located in the IMatch program folder Don t modify this file because it will be overwritten when you reinstall or update IMatch imiptcusr ipt This is the user specific configuration file Here you can add new IPTC field types or replace existing field types found in the standard configuration file This file is located in your personal folder e g Windows Profiles lt User Name gt photools com IMatch or in the Documents and Settings photools com IMatch folder if you run Windows 2000 or Windows XP imiptcusr dat This configuration file contains the contents of your thesauri It is updated whenever you add update or delete entries from your thesauri You can edit this file directly when you want to import information from other applications or in house captioning standards If you add new ent
272. elect the TILE setting when you use this type of bitmap If your background bitmap is a larger bitmap you can also CENTER it cutting of the parts that are higher or wider as the canvas or STRETCH it to grow or shrink it to make it the same size as the canvas Figure 155 The new target image with background bitmap and image borders The Border Mask The border mask allows you to add a mask based border around your entire target image or the source image A border mask is a grayscale or black and white bitmap with transparent areas also known as Vignette Match will combine the mask with the target image or the original image to mask out any parts of the bitmap that are set to opaque in the mask Tip You can create border masks yourself with any advanced imaging application for example using Photoshop or PaintShop Pro See the user s manual of the application of your choice for more information about masks There are also excellent resources on the Internet that explain how to create masks 294 or how to find freely usable masks on the WWW Give your favorite search engine a try Figure 156 shows the target image with a border mask applied The mask used to create this effect is contained in the file MatchMsk001 msk that is part of the Match setup As with the background bitmap I have used a path relative to the folder referenced by the variable Application Bitmaps to specify the mask This allows me to move my masks aroun
273. elected in the thumbnail viewer If the image is on line Match will load and display the original image If the image is off line Match will prompt you to insert the media containing the image showing some helpful hints like the media name and label and the description you entered for that media and folder Enable Disable Zoom Factor Fit to window Fitto window Ela Original image size Expand viewer The preview is capable to display any of the image formats supported by IMatch It supports various zoom factors and an auto fit mode to display the images with the correct aspect ratio in the available space You can unfold the preview at any time to occupy the available space This full screen modus allows you to display the image in its original size and to inspect image details using various zoom factors IMatch demo imd 01x Database Edit Image View Options Window Help lal x EAEL E Various images of birds ie M Selections For Help press F1 m Num Figure 20 The thumbnail preview 68 18 x Database Edt Image View Options Window Help Ber t Be 8 wii we 144 images g Birds Various images of birds Sort Standard IEEE FA 4 I m NUM For Help press F1 Figure 21 The thumbnail preview showing an image in full size IMatch demo imd 01 218 xl Database Edit Image View Options Window Help
274. eliable and fast scripting environment for applications like IMatch IMatch and the WWW The IMatch Photo Gallery The Match Photo Gallery is a powerful script that allows you to create sophisticated online photo galleries from your images You can access this script via the SCRIPTING menu Choose the PUBLISH YOUR IMAGES ON THE WEB GROUP and then choose the PHOTO GALLERY CREATOR script In the dialog box choose one of the predefined templates on run it to create a HTML photo gallery You can then copy these files to your server to publish your images to the web 122 IMatch Web Gallery Scripting Sample Xx This script allows you to create HTML based presentations and galleries for the Word Wide Web You can choose between several predefined layouts or edit the templates used for this script to create new designs on pour own Available Templates IPTC Keyword Index with contact sheets chit ie to PTY Description Frameset with IPTC keyword navigation on the left and a contact sheets per keyword on the right This preset allows you to publish your images to the web with nearly no effort Your visitors will be able to browse your web site using IPTC keywords Edit Template 7 Template MV Develop imatch3 S cripts WebGallen IPTC Keyword Show Script Help Index iptcindex wpgl r Options The resulting HTML pages and images are written to this folder je Temp web Browse e Empty Folder before
275. em registry IMatch stores user and machine depended configuration settings in the system registry However 1f you need to install IMatch on a fresh Windows version this information can be easily recovered by re installing IMatch 128 Selections Finding Images What is this all about When image collections grow it becomes more and more difficult to keep track of this image flood Often you will be in a situation where you know that you have an image like this but you cannot recall where it is However often you remember a part of the file name or a date where you have added this image to your collection or even the basic shape of the image In these situations the selection functionality of Match can help you to find your images within seconds Perhaps you use keywords in an image property set property or you want to find specific words or phrases in another property like Title or Description Imagine a situation where you need an image with a blue sky and some grass in the foreground Usually you will begin to browse your stock collection for this type of images If you re lucky your images have keywords and they will allow you to restrict your search to images with a specific keyword or keyword combination With IMatch this process becomes as easy as never Simply draw a sketch of the image you re looking for and let the system do the work for you Or you want to find all duplicate images in your database If you try this
276. ema files for importing and exporting property database schemas IMatch contains Import and Export modules accessible via the IMPORT EXPORT menu that allow you to import pre built schemas or to export your own schemas to be used with other applications or Match databases Exporting Property Database Schemas Open the IMPORT EXPORT MANAGER from the DATABASE menu and select the Export the property database as XML schema entry Import and Export x Available Import Export modules fy Contact Sheet Builder a MY Batch Processor c ancel H Import ACDSee tm 4DOS tm description files 4 Import and match CSV and CRC checksum files B Export standard CSV CRC checksum files Help 8 2 Export the property database as XML Schema 4 Import property database from XML Schema j Export to Text Format Replicate IMatch Database Ene tan Doficiinon m Description This module exports the property sets of your current database into an XML schema document Options allow you to control what sections of your database are exported You can for example use the output of this filter to initialize another IMatch property database Current Selection Folder I Clipart and Photos Celebrities Alyssa Milano Figure 169 Exporting a property database schema In the dialog box that opens select an output file name and the type of data you want to export You can either export the schema only or also include the data th
277. ent will be displayed in the IPTC Editor as 331 This is quoted text Text The standard Match IPTC configuration file contains predefined lists for the IPTC fields Country Code 100 County 101 and Category 15 You may add other lists to your user configuration file if you wish Note Don t add new list blocks to the standard configuration file This file will be overwritten when you update or reinstall IMatch Modifying the IMIPTCUSR IPT configuration file This file has the same structure as the standard IPTC configuration file You can add user defined fields and user defined lists to this file On program start Match searches the personal folder of the current user for a file with this name If it is found its contents are loaded and interpreted If the user file contains tag blocks for the same fields as the standard configuration file these fields are overwritten replaced with the tag blocks from the user configuration file Note If you support logins for multiple users on the same machine or work in a terminal server environment make sure that modifications to the imiptcusr ipt file are promoted to all user specific copies of that file on the machine Adding application specific fields If your digital camera stores information in IPTC fields and you want to be able to view and edit this information in IMatch you need to add one or more tag blocks to the user configuration file 1 Locate and open the imiptcusr
278. ents One Click Bar iS a 57 Category Class ici roiete rnn coleeth cette E AE E E deeb heehee 234 Categories Thumbnail Property WindoOW ooooconocccnonccnonnnconnnonnnncnonccnonancnnanonnccnonccnanacinnoss 322 Category Display taaan A A a 322 Category Formulas iis vies ccutcced seis itn oe udetdk age EAE A suu dea caus ewes oatucteh cued anibal 64 65 359 365 366 Cates Ory HIStory ss osc easiest II a is 359 Category PEEMKES EE Seed e e ST SEL SE need 170 385 Category Properties Knee eae Ra BARE Re RURAL 367 368 category Toll is 163 Category Schema matinal 315 350 LIN POTTING TIA cias 315 Category Splasher sarna lion 175 Cate gor y MEW ido 67 CAN a co ca eat tiers 170 360 CD ROM aiii aci n es 46 47 48 376 377 Friendly Na ataca 27 orme cache ti a on eee E aaa 49 offline medi O a a 45 Centimeters SEM A A A DA 343 ChangeContraSdiuncniicn E EE EEE EE Suehteeseies 249 Change Hue iii capa A E a A n 260 ChangeSatutatl is a a o barrales 249 Channel a E ao o o o anto a eet 189 190 Channel Split tiran ati tao ac diia Sesh ds Doa a a 189 EA A O 185 Character O RS 323 Character Sets ANG U eA K E i et se E E A NO 368 SA RN 234 235 236 Clases Tima Se Buck etica la 240 241 242 CIASSES 9d tocar NE 210 A E 212 A AO RIO 234 235 236 237 238 Collection CLASSES Vid alii 272 Database sitio dari ating 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 Boldt lio dpto deh 233 234 TE 238 239 240 E E 246 247 248
279. eople at the beach Beach AND People If you display the contents of this category Match will show only the images that are in the category Beach and in the category People To create a category that contains all images from Beach and all images from the category People you would use the Boolean OR operator People or beach Beach OR People 64 Consider an image with two persons male and female and a car at the beach This images is assigned to the categories People Female People Male Location Beach and Cars Ford Category formulas allow you to create powerful combinations of the images contained in several even remote categories By combining several categories using formulas you will get the maximum out of your dynamic categories You should definitely play with this exiting feature Remember the example from the introduction of this section Birds in North America How to create a category that contains all photos of Birds taken in North America Animals Birds Location Afrika America North South Australia Pacific Europe Birds_In_North_America Animals Birds AND Location America North Note If a category has a formula it first evaluates the images assigned directly to it then evaluates the formula and combines the result with the images in the sub categories All three results are combined via OR so no images are duplicated in this process Formulas for Folders You can create categories that refe
280. eplacelfExist If a file with the same name already exists in the target folder this flag controls if it will be overwritten deleted or not If you set this to False and a file with the same name exist in the target folder the copy operation will fail with the result imforFileExists KeepProperties Set this to True to copy properties and categories to the new file Return Values This method returns an IMFileOperationResult to indicate the outcome of the operation imforSuccess Successful completion imforGeneralFailure General unknown error imforFileDoesNotExist File does not exist imforFilelsReadOnly File is read only imforFileOperationFailed File operation failed Windows error imforDatabaseFailure Database error imforFileExists File already exists Description This method allows you to copy a file on disk and at the same time in your database GetFolder Arguments Path Fully qualified path of the folder MedialD The media id of the media for the folder May be empty 225 MediaSerial The media serial number for the folder May be empty Return Values Boolean Returns false if the folder was not found Description Searches the database for a folder with the given name on a specific media If you work with removable media you may have the folder R lmages multiple times in your database but on different media To get an IMFolder object for the folder on a specific media use this method You can use the GetMedial
281. er R O Returns the width of the bitmap in pixels Height Integer R O Returns the height of the bitmap in pixels BPP Integer R O Returns the color resolution in bits per pixel IsClipboardAvailable Boolean R O Returns true if there is a valid bitmap in the Windows clipboard If this method returns True you can use the CopyFromClipboard method to copy the bitmap in the Windows clipboard into an MBitmap object NumberOfColors Long R O Returns the number of unique colors in the bitmap This method counts all unique colors in the bitmap Methods LoadFile Arguments FileName The fully qualified file name of the file to load The file must be in one of the supported formats BPP Bits per pixel to load IMatch can convert the bitmap into any number of colors during the load operation Use 0 to keep the color depth of the image PageNo Optional For multi page formats you can specify the number of the page to load Description Loads a bitmap from disk into this bitmap object After loading the image is ready for manipulation 249 LoadLowRes Arguments FileName The fully qualified file name of the file to load The file must be in one of the supported formats Description This method loads the thumbnail or the embedded preview image for RAW format files CRW NEF ORF MRW DCR RAF The method always loads the largest possible thumbnail or preview image some file formats have multiple ima
282. er class Dim cf As IMFolder For Each f In db Folders Debug Print f Images Count Next f If you want also the names of the images or the size you can use the methods provided by the Image class Dim img As Image For Each f In db Folders For Each img In f Images Debug Print img FileName img Size Bytes Next img Next f Accessing Categories Categories are similar to folders in the way they are accessed To get a specific category by name use the following procedure Dim c As Category Set c db Categories Events If Not c Is Nothing Then Debug Print c Images Count End If The above script retrieves a Category object for the category named Events from the active database Match will return the first category in IMatch s internal order that matches the name Events If you have more than one category with the same name make sure that you use the fully qualified name e g CAI Events Set c db Categories Events Birthday If Not c Is Nothing Then Debug Print c Images Count End If Birthday is a child category of Events and hence we must use the fully qualified path as given above To access all categories in a database use the Categories method of the Database object Dim c As Category For Each c In db Categories Debug Print c FullName 275 Next c To iterate over all child categories of a given category use the Children method of the Category class Set c db Categories Event
283. er whole number with 64 Bits Double Floating Point number 1 7E 308 15 digits Storage size is 8 bytes Date Date values Match displays a Calendar Control to allow you to choose a date for this type of properties Time Time values Match displays a Time Control to allow you to enter time values Boolean Boolean Yes No True False 1 0 values Match displays a combo box control to allow you to choose from a set of alternatives Currency A precise data type for currency monetary values Always includes an explicit currency symbol e g USD or EUR Hyperlink URL Like String but with special handling in the Match user interface When you add a property of this type to your property set Match will display it with a special color and font When you double click on the link Match will automatically launch the associated application e g your web browser or your email application Reference A reference to a property in another property set This data type allows you 76 to create links between different property sets in your database Each property in a property set has a Description field where you can add some comments about the meaning of this property Most of the properties also have a Default value If you enter a value for the Default this value will be shown as the property value in the thumbnail viewer New images automatically get the default value for all properties A property that has no default has the special
284. er and Footer Preview Thumbnails Width Height 600 Workspace Margins Lett 200 2 Top 200 a Right fico a Bottom 200 3 IV Apply thumbnail transformations Use preview images for RAW files File Handling Prompt for media for off line files y Layout Rows Below Right J Rotate landscape a images Columns Thumbnail Borders and Interior Transparent y MM Border Color E eio Shadow None y Depth Sima Opacity asa TC Blur Cancel Apply Help Figure 132 The Thumbs sheet 111 IMatch automatically resizes your images to fit the thumbnail size you set here Match will also adjust the size of the thumbnails to the correct aspect ratio The workspace margins control the area that is available for your thumbnails The TOP and BOTTOM workspace margins define the size of your header and footer area If you want to add much text in the header or footer of you want to use a large font use higher values for these margins If you use thumbnail transformations make sure you check this option in the dialog This will ensure that Match applies thumbnail transformations before adding the image to the contact sheet If you work with RAW images NEF CRW you can enable the USE PREVIEW IMAGES FOR RAW FILES option If this option is enabled Match will not use the full RAW data of the image but instead use the embedded preview image to create contact sheets
285. er or other means b No Copying You may not copy or reproduce the Software or any accompanying documentation except as permitted by section 3 hereinbelow by any means c No Modifications or Reverse Engineering You may not remove any proprietary notices or labels from the Software and you may not modify alter translate reverse engineer decompile or disassemble except to the extent that this restriction is expressly prohibited by applicable law or create derivative works based on the Software d Rental Transfer You may not rent lease sell or transfer the Software or documentation without MMW s express written consent which MMW may withhold in its discretion Reservation of Rights All rights not expressly granted to you are reserved to Mario M Westphal e Legal Notices You may not remove or alter any legal notices such as trademark or copyright notices affixed on or within the software or any accompanying documentation 3 PERMITTED ELECTRONIC DISTRIBUTION AND COPYING You may make only the following copies of the Software 1 you may download the Software from the Internet and onto your computer hard drive ii you may copy the Software from your computer hard drive into your computer RAM and iii you may make one 1 back up or archival copy of the Software on one 1 hard disk You may print out the tutorial the online documentation or any accompanying documentation for your own usage only 4 DISCLAIMER OF
286. erence in the thumbnail viewer or the result window immediately If you use Plug In selectors for your database it may be important in which order they are evaluated with respect to the built in match modules You can either run Plug In selectors before or after the built in match modules by checking the appropriate option on this tab Try it for yourself Open your initial database in IMatch If you have not already added some images do it now You should have at least 1 000 or 2 000 images in your database to get an impression on how selections work Switch to the SELECTION VIEW by clicking on the SELECTION tab on the lower left of your workspace window or by pressing STRG 3 You may also choose SELECTION VIEW from the VIEW menu Unfold the SELECTION TEMPLATES item in the tree control on the left Select the entry named FILES lt 100 KB compare to Figure 50 In the selection editor on the right click on the selector RESULT SET OPTIONS under the BASIC SELECTORS GROUP This selector is set as follows The result set will contain all images with a 100 match a maximum of 10 000 images will be shown The HIDE ORIGINALS WITHOUT MATCHES OPTION has no meaning here since this selector does not need original images Now select the FILE SIZE selector You can see that we use an absolute file size between 0 and 100 KB This selector will filter out all images with a file size larger than 100 KB To run this selection and to create a result s
287. erence to a previous sub expression that has already been matched the reference is to what the sub expression matched not to the expression itself A back reference consists of the escape character followed by a digit 1 to 9 1 refers to the first sub expression 2 to the second etc For example the expression 1 matches any string that is repeated about its mid point for example abcabc or xyzxyz A back reference to a sub expression that did not participate in any match matches the null string NB this is 135 different to some other regular expression matchers Back references are only available if the expression is compiled with the flag regbase bk_refs set Word operators The following operators are provided for compatibility with the GNU regular expression library w matches any single character that is a member of the word character class this is identical to the expression word W matches any single character that is not a member of the word character class this is identical to the expression word lt matches the null string at the start of a word gt matches the null string at the end of the word b matches the null string at either the start or the end of a word B matches a null string within a word The start of the sequence passed to the matching algorithms is considered to be a potential start of a word The end of the sequence passed to the matching alg
288. erial NN 27 Medica ia ts ita ti ai di oia 45 46 Media Label iento iio meda 46 402 Series OF WMAGES irse ria rias si ora 312 Seba aaa 240 SetFileDate Time ci ticas 221 SetFormula courses 238 Settings for File Formats A ca 339 FOr Side SHOW A econ ee a ao 338 SetlserVariabler in A A A a 212 Shadow Colors caian aria ara 269 270 ShadowOftsetHorz iaa ac o 269 270 ShadowOftsetV ett a rara a aa 270 Shape Contribution acaparan io aaa oh E A 152 Shareware fet A E Ea 14 Sharing Network A a cin 374 O 184 262 durmg batch conversion aca ia dias aia 290 NI NEL T PA NN 184 Sheet Variable vies ocedsdeeetesecsnaceaecapereseveneddeevanstenave eNe EESE ae ette nectar 116 A PS a a a 41 TEM OE UU O 38 39 40 41 DHEHEXECULSS A ll eL tetas 212 O 194 A AA RA RN 343 Show Folder Thumbnails ccccccsssscceeeseceeeseneeeceeneeeeceeneeeeesnaeeeceenaeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeesenees 342 Similar colors PUTO Oo soe NN A O 126 Similar Images AGM Sis e a lta Levies Lanta Ano Lani Asis Meese Ase ie aes Aiea 126 Similarity ye A codes avethbeeAsadgss svupbaes sapiens a a rasa Ea ERE EA RATERS AREE 140 244 SIA E E A T 184 194 239 269 270 chand nE n rea a aE ea a E a a a aE E Eaa arai ae 184 Size or Dimensions Md AEE 126 Millimeters display units Inches display units Image Dimension Units Display Units Printer and display units Centimers display UNIfS oooooccnooccnonccoonnnonncnonanccnonccnonacinnnss 343 SECA Colors cose feeis vs d
289. ering series used in file names and hence sorts images named beach01 and beach 009 nearby If you use properties see section Image Property Sets to associate text with your images you should create a sort preset based on one or more image properties This allows you to sort images with the same or similar properties If you import and use information from ACDSee description files into your property database it is useful to create a sort preset on the associated property Light Table Sort Manual sort orders Light Table Sort In addition to sort orders based on attributes and properties Match also allows you to create customized sort orders with a special sort option named Light Table sort The Light Table sort preset is special because it allows you to manually reorder your images using your mouse and drag and drop You can just drag images around in the thumbnail view until you have exactly the sequence you want Match will store this sort sequence together with the folder or category in your database and you can recall the sequence at any time by selecting the Light Table sort preset in the sort preset combo box 44 Figure 40 Reorder images by dragging To sort your images manually first select the Light Table sort preset in the thumbnail window Then select one or more images press the left mouse button and while holding down the left mouse button move them to their new position A yellow indicator will show you
290. ers However if you make modifications in folders other than the folder currently selected you 1l need to issue a rescan operation to re sync your database manually Tip Do all your file management operations from within IMatch using the powerful built in commands This keeps your database up to date automatically and without extra effort 52 Copying Files All image file commands work on the current selection see above of images in the thumbnail viewer To copy all selected files to a specific folder choose the COPY command from the context menu This will open the Copy dialog box from which you can choose a folder from the list of recently used folders browse for a folder and even create a new folder Select folder or type a new folder name here FT Sort alphabetically c temp y 59 00 MB free on drive Search M Add to database Cancel Figure 41 The Copy dialog box The SORT ALPHABETICALLY option allows you to sort the list of recently used folders alphabetically for easier finding If this option is unchecked the folders are presented in the LRU last recently used sequence To create a new folder type in the name of the new folder in the edit field and then press the corresponding button If you don t want to add this folder to your current database make sure that the ADD TO DATABASE OPTION is unchecked With the SEARCH button you can easily locate a folder in your database by typing the first few characte
291. ese buttons allow you to save the current settings to a Preset preset file or to load a stored preset Exporting to Microsoft Office Applications If you want to import the resulting text document into Microsoft Office applications you should use lt Tab gt as the field delimiter and a single lt Line Feed gt as the record delimiter Make sure that you check the WRAP TEXT IN and WRITE FIRST LINE AS HEADER options Using these settings importing your data into Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel is straightforward Relational Database Systems To export data from IMatch into other database systems a simple text file is the easiest way Nearly every database application can import data from text file into existing tables See the documentation of your database for detailed information on how to import text data You can also use the Match scripting language to create and use database connections using ADO or ODBC See the Microsoft documentation and the documentation of your database system for more information on these issues XML Support XML Support The property database used by IMatch to store non image data is based on XML and UNICODE aware All textual data stored in an Match property database is stored in UNICODE to support all language and localities 303 IMatch property database schemas are XML documents based on the Match Document Type Definition DTD This DTD describes to format of IMatch XML sch
292. esult sets click on the PERSISTENT RESULTS folder or on any of the persistent results Open the context menu and select UPDATE or UPDATE ALL to refresh your persistent results Match will rerun all selections and update the persistent result sets Depending on the number of persistent results sets and the complexity of the selections and your database size this process can take from several seconds or minutes up to several hours for very large database and a large number of persistent result sets Running Selections on External Images IMatch also allows you to perform selections for external images External images are images not already indexed in your database Note You should consider adding the external images to your database before you run selections on them IMatch works much faster on internal images than on images not indexed by a database To run selections on external images switch to the DATABASE VIEW Press the EXTERNAL MATCH button EY in the local toolbar This will open the MATCH EXTERNAL FILES AND FOLDERS dialog box shown below From here you can add folders or single files you want to match You can match any number of folders or files at once Just press the ADD FOLDER or ADD FILES button to add folders or files to your selection Match external folders and files x Select folders and files to match Sy Group of 4 files Add Folder y SPHOTOS Weltraum Add Files 1APHOTOStUnterhaltung Selection Templ
293. esultSetOne Result Set all bits to 1 Description Combines this bitmap with the given source bitmap using the given dimensions and flags With this method you can mimic the ayer operations found in many modern imaging applications You can also create transparency effects or things like Dodge and Burn Height Original Width AddBorder Arguments Left Left border Top Top border Right Right border Bottom Bottom border Color The color for the border Arguments Adds a simple border around the bitmap RemoveBorder Arguments Pixels The amount of pixels to remove 264 Description Removes the outer size pixels from each edge of the image AddOverlay Arguments pOverlay The overlay bitmap to use Alignment The alignment of the overlay image within the target image Use one of the following values imbalPositioned Positioned using explicit X and Y positions imbalCenter Center in both directions imbalCenterHorz Center Horizontally using Y Position imbalCenterVert Center Vertically using X Position imbalTopCenterTop Center imbalTopLeft Top Left imbalTopRight Top Right imbalMidCenter Mid Center imbalMidLeft Mid Left imbalMidRight Mid Right imbalBottomCenter Bottom Center imbalBottomL eft Bottom Left imbalBottomRight Bottom Right X Column of the final source image position in the target image Only used if Alignment is set to imbalPositioned Y Row of the final source image position in the t
294. et opens the PROPERTY EDITOR window at the bottom of the thumbnail viewer From here you can edit the image properties or perform category assignments See section Image Property Sets starting for more information about property sets opens the category assignment dialog see section Categories opens the Category Splasher dialog box see section Category Splashers starts a new selection for the selected images in the thumbnail viewer The results of this selection will be presented in a new Result window the current result window will remain open this will bring up a Selection Builder dialog box allowing you to edit the selection template for the current result set allows you to save the current selection template under a name of your choice for later reuse The selection template will be added to the SELECTION VIEW Allows you to save the current result set as a persistent result set You may retrieve this result set later at any time without the need to rerun the selection In addition to these buttons the toolbar also contains your QUICK MOVE and QUICK COPY buttons the IPTC EDITOR button and the ONE CLICK button Managing Result Windows The WINDOW menu in the main menu bar contains a list of all open result windows You may jump to any open result window directly from the corresponding entry in this menu You may also close all open result windows with the CLOSE RESULT WINDOWS command in the same menu If you are c
295. et click on the selection template in the left window and open the context menu by clicking the right mouse button From the options available in the menu choose RUN After a couple of seconds Match will open a result window showing all images in your result set 142 Note This selection does not need original images IMatch indicates that with a special icon shown next to this selection in the SELECTION VIEW All selections without originals can be executed directly from the SELECTION VIEW For all other selections you first need to select at least on original image in a thumbnail viewer You may also start a selection from the context menu of a folder or a category IMatch Results for Files lt 100 KB 2 Z Database Edt Image View Options Window Help 5 x Dr BA iw Fito window y Results for Files lt 100 KB 2 4 554 images Eo Eagan m Sort Standard E P 14 AMERIVER JPG ANO00214 ipa 100 00 100 00 100x57 73x100 652KB 8 71 KB 8 78 KB 05 05 99 21 25 46 05 05 99 21 25 46 05 05 99 21 25 46 05 05 99 21 25 46 N Cliparts clips N Cliparts clips N Ciiparts clips N Cliparts clips N Cliparts clips E View For Help press F1 I mm NUM Figure 51 The result set for our selection in a result set window In my demo database this query returns a total of 4 554 images see Figure 51 On the left side of the result
296. ets 338 File Format Preferences ccccccccsecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeccaaeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeteee 339 Image Editoriales triplete 340 M t Edit M Ode ri a ara aa aara a a aaar a Aaa earar aeaa ararat eat 340 Keep original file date tiMe ooonnnncicnnnnnooconnoronnnnnnanrononncnrenrnnrrncnnnnes 341 Keep the THM file with the CAW oinncccninccccccnnonccnnnnancnononanncono nan cnncnnnnos 341 CS excheevsvesces es seesveasubuned et phesepassuesabessbsteeeasbetar ete 341 aO AAA A E A EA EEE 343 COONS A E E E E E 345 Color Management ccooooococccccccnnconanannncncnnnnnonnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nn cnn anna nana nr nnns 345 Why is Color Proofing Important oooconnnnicnncccnnncconnncoannccnnncnannnns 345 The ICC Color Management Dialog cccoonicocccccnnnncconacanncccnnnncnannns 346 Turn of Gamma Correction cooooccocccccnnncccnnnnonnncnnnncnnnnnnnnnncnnnncnannnns 347 PTC ANO MAtION tesorero p ops r erario 347 EXIF IPO Ati ON ass eecheveees veces sachepves auaa eu enau aenant AENA eiio aapa aesan aei 347 Technical Information 348 Technical InformatiON oooonnoccccnnnnnccnnnnncccnnnnnnnnonananancncnnnnncnnnnnnn cnn nc nancnnnnnns 348 Hardware and Software Requirement oooocconnnicoccccccnncccnnnannnnnos 348 A note on LZW format ooooocccccccnnccccconanonnncnnnnnnonnnnn conc cnnnn cnn nan nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 349 Folders used by lMatCh oooonocooccccnnnccconocococccnnnccnnnnannnncnnnn conan n nn cnn cnn cnn 349 Restoring IMatch on
297. exadecimal digits A hexadecimal character code where XX is one or more hexadecimal digits optionally a unicode character An ASCII escape sequence control Z where Z is any ASCII character greater than or equal to the character code for The following are provided mostly for perl compatibility but note that there are some differences in the meanings of I L u and WU Equivalent to word Equivalent to 4 word Equivalent to space Equivalent to space Equivalent to digit Equivalent to digit 137 Equivalent to lower Equivalent to lower Equivalent to upper Equivalent to 4 upper Any single character equivalent to Match any Unicode combining character sequence for example a x 0301 a letter a with an acute The begin quote operator everything that follows is treated as a literal character until a E end quote operator is found The end quote operator terminates a sequence begun with Q Creating and Managing Selections Creating and Managing Selections IMatch combines all selection related functionality in the SELECTIONS VIEW accessible via the third tab on the lower left of your workspace window In this view you can maintain and manage your selection templates the bookmarks the selection history and the persistent result sets Every new IMatch database has a couple of predefined selection templates which handle the most co
298. eyes slightly and sit back from the monitor for better results If you use tools like Adobe Gamma ships with Photoshop and several other Adobe products you should leave the gamma setting in Match at 1 0 neutral to avoid over correcting your monitor Slide Show Settings This dialog allows you to configure the slide show appearance and workflow Program Preferences x IPTC EXIF OffLineCache CanonCRW NikonNEF KodakDCR Display Slide Show File Format Preferences General ThumbView Colors Sequence type IV Show Image Information Manual y Image FullPath Image Width x Image Hei Image IPTC By line Image Date EXIF Image EXIF Make Ima Image Properties Description Image EXIF Exposure time Image EXIF F Display Mode Fitto screen Use original image size Enter variables or free text to specifiy which information items to show To add image properties use Image Properties lt Name gt where lt Name gt is the name of the property Use lt Ctrl gt lt Enter gt to add a new line Use the left button of your mouse to move the image on your screen Delay between images in seconds mn Background Color ES Y E a IV Wrap around IV Use off line cache image even if media is on line ES Tantek IV Use low res preview images for suitable formats RAW images Cancel Apply Help Figure 196 The Slide Show Options dialog Sequenc
299. f db Folders i photos regenwald Debug Print f Name This script fragment gets a specific folder by name from the current database You may also want to access the currently active folder Dim f As IMFolder Set f db ActiveFolder If Not f Is Nothing Then Debug Print f Name End If Please not that the active folder may be nothing when no folder is selected or the database root node is selected showing the database statistics If you have a valid folder object you can access it s Images collection to iterate over all images in the folder Dim f As IMFolder Set f db ActiveFolder If Not f Is Nothing Then Dim i As Image For Each i In f Images Debug Print i FileName Next i End If The script above gets the active folder and dumps the names of all images in that folder to the scripting output window To calculate the size of all images in that folder only a few modifications are needed Dim f As IMFolder Set f db ActiveFolder If Not f Is Nothing Then Dim i As Image Dim totalsize As Long For Each i In f Images 277 totalsize totalsize i Size Next i Debug Print Total size of all images totalsize Bytes End If Here the variable totalsize is used to sum up the sizes of all individual images After all images have been iterated the script dumps the contents of totalsize to the scripting output window The output will look something like this Total size of all images 3831911 Bytes If y
300. f the other provisions shall not be affected thereby If any provision is determined to be unenforceable you agree to a modification of such provision to provide for enforcement of the provision s intent to the extent permitted by applicable law Failure of MMW to enforce any provision of this License Agreement shall not constitute or be construed as a waiver of such provision or of the right to enforce such provision If you fail to comply with any term of this License Agreement YOUR LICENSE IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED WITHOUT NOTICE AND MMW MAY PURSUE ALL RELIEF AND REMEDIES AGAINST YOU WHICH ARE AVAILABLE UNDER APPLICABLE LAW AND OR THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT You agree that in the event of litigation relating to this License Agreement the prevailing litigant shall be entitled to recover the prevailing litigant s attorneys fees and expenses and costs of court in addition to all other relief available under this License Agreement and or applicable law In the event this License Agreement is terminated you shall have no right to use the Software in any manner and you shall immediately destroy all copies of the Software in your possession custody or control You agree that your unauthorized use of any MMW property whether in whole or in part would immediately and irreparably damage MMW such that MMW could not be adequately compensated by an award of monetary damages and in the event of such threatened or actual unauthorized use MMW shall be entitle
301. f this is all new to you take your time to get used to the concepts behind Note You may add and remove property sets and properties at any time However if you remove a property set the information you have entered will be lost forever Data Standards and XML The ability to add new property sets and to create links between property sets is one of the outstanding features of IMatch The upcoming imaging standards like to one proposed by the Digital Imaging Group http www digitalimaging org or the new JPEG JBIG standards http www jpeg org 79 and the upcoming MPEG standards http www cselt it mpeg all include specifications or initiatives to include additional Meta Data with each image IMatch is prepared to support these standards that will widely adopted in the professional digital imaging community IMatch internally manages the property sets the properties and the property data you enter in an optimized form of XML storage IMatch also allows you to export your property set definitions or to import pre built definitions into your IMatch database See XML Support for more information on this subject Adding data to your property sets The Database Property Editor also allows you to enter data in your property sets The Image property set is usually edited directly from within the IMatch thumbnail viewer To add data to other property sets you use the PROPERTY BROWSER Click on the tab PROPERTY BROWSER in
302. f you want to see even more thumbnails at once you can use the kal button to switch to full screen mode This command will cause the thumbnail view to occupy the maximum space available thus displaying more thumbnails at the same time Depending on your current level of detail each image panel shows a different amount of information In the modus with the least level of detail you will see only the thumbnail itself which leaves maximum room to show as many thumbnails as possible In the intermediate level you will see the thumbnail and the file name The third modus Bookmark Indicator Read Only Indicator Fi File Name TRO01JPG Image Dimensions 640x480 File Size 23 47 KB Date and Time 23 09 98 18 02 05 will show all the information available about an image resulting in a much larger image panel In the upper left corner the panel will display a red triangle if the image is write protected or resides on a read only media like CD ROM If you have defined a bookmark for the image a bookmark indicator will be shown in the upper right corner Below the thumbnail of the image Match displays the file name To rename a file just click on the file name Match will automatically update the database and the image files on your hard disk when you rename a file Of course you can only change the file name if the image is not write protected or on a read only media In the Result Window see Error Reference sou
303. f your database containing all the images that match one or more specific criteria IMatch allows you to perform selections based on over 40 different criteria File Format Selections based on the file format of images Show all BMP and JPG images All images except TIFF files File SizeSelections based on the file size of the image with various options Show all image files smaller than 200 KB Include only files larger than one Megabyte Dimensions Selections based on image dimensions Width and Height also with a number of options Show only images up to 640 x 480 Date and Time Selections based on the file date and time with a variety of options for even the most complex cases Show images from May 1999 Show images one week older or newer than the selected image File Name Selections based on the file name of the image including wildcard matches like the well known and operators smart file name matches based on the actual similarity between file names and sub string matches Show images like a Show images like beach0001 Category Selections based on categories Folder Only include images from category people Only images that are not in the category Animals Selections based on the physical location of images Show only images from c photos Properties Selections based on user defined properties Any number of properties and all data types Text Date Time Boolean Reference are support
304. faults Contrast as shot y Noise Removal Off y Saturation Jas shot y 2 I Linear Disables all processing Sharpness Jas shot zi I Suppress false color filter White Balance Jas shot y Auto Levels Cancel Apply Help Figure 16 Canon CRW options In general the options match the capabilities of Canon ZoomBrowser and many other CRW processing applications Only the noise removal and auto levels features are specific to IMatch You have two general processing options 104 Use defaults If you choose this option Match will always use the options set in this dialog to process your CRW files Note The slide show and other features like the batch processor or the contact sheet builder will always use the defaults defined in this dialog Prompt for If you choose this option Match will prompt you for options processing options when you open a CRW image in the image editor This dialog box shows the same options as this dialog box but you are able to choose the options for each image or set of images manually Kodak DCR Options This dialog allows you to control the processing of Kodak DCR images in IMatch Program Preferences IPTC EXIF OfflineCache CanonCRW NikonNEF Kodak DCR This dialog allows you to control settings for Kodak Professional Digital Cameras and Digital Backs for other cameras Light Source w the camera IV Portrait Mode Exposure Compensation I
305. file Either use a profile from your monitor vendor or create your own custom profile with hardware devices like Pantone Image Spider or a similar device 345 Embedded Profiles For images with embedded profiles Match can read the color profile and apply it to the image before the image is displayed in the preview window the slide show or the image editor feature Applying a profile to an image does not modify the data in the image The colors in the image are only temporarily transformed using the embedded profile when the image is displayed Display Profiles IMatch allows you to define a monitor profile that defined how your monitor displays colors and what color translations must be applied Please refer to the manual of your monitor to lean more about color profiles The ICC Color Management Dialog This dialog allows you to control if and how Match uses color management for your images Program Preferences a i x Colors IPTC EXIF OfflineCache CanonCRw NikonNEF Kodak DCR Display Color Management Slide Show File Format Preferences General Thumb View VV CAWINNT system32 spool drivers color Videos even L174S July 2003 icm S8 Note When using a monitor profile you should set the gamma correction for your monitor to the neutral value 1 0 to avoid unwanted side effects IV Use the embedded profiles in your image files Display thumbnails using the monitor profile Very slow and not
306. fine application to add descriptions to your image collection These descriptions can now be easily imported into your Match database If you use the description feature ACDSee will create and maintain a file with the name descript ion in each folder you access with ACDSee This file contains the comments you enter for individual images Each comment can be up to 3800 characters long Carriage returns and line feeds are not supported IMatch can import these descriptions and populate one of the text properties of your image property set with the information from the ACDSee comments To access the ACDSee import filter choose the IMPORT AND EXPORT command from the DATABASE menu In the dialog box select IMPORT ACDSEE 4DOS DESCRIPTION FILES A dialog box appears that presents the available options for this specialized filter 311 Import Descriptions from ACDSee tm and 4D0S tm Xx Update all folders in the current database DK Update only the selected folders PHOTOS Cancel Help Amerikanische Bilder Antiquit ten C Architektur y Am Select the image property to update Comment a Figure 177 The ACDSee import filer dialog box You can choose to update all folders or only selected folders of your current database If you choose the option UPDATE ALL FOLDERS IN THE CURRENT DATABASE IMatch will scan all folders in your current database for ACD
307. folder of that media Friendly Name Mode When you switch to this mode IMatch displays the friendly names of your folders If this mode is on the database view uses a different display color to indicate that friendly names are displayed 27 Per default Match sets the friendly name of a folder to the physical name of that folder You can change the friendly name by switching to friendly name mode and then entering a different name Click on the folder label and rest the mouse for a second Then enter a new descriptive friendly name You can use any characters you want Changing the friendly name of a folder does not change the physical name of that folder on disk Friendly names are stored in your Match database only Note To rename a folder you need to switch to normal view mode As long as you are in friendly name mode you can only change the friendly name Auto Scan 2 sal IMatch automatically scans the folders indexed by your database from time to time If the contents of a folder have been changed outside of IMatch a small red box is shown next to the folder state icon to indicate that a Rescan operation is required Just issue a rescan operation from the context menu of that folder to update your database If you work with FAT or FAT32 formatted drives IMatch cannot tell that the contents of a folder have been modified from outside of IMatch because this file system does not update the date time stamp of a folder when the
308. for images on removeable media on your local hard disk Using these cached images IMatch can display the images in previews even when the media is not on line Folder for cache images fem El Image Quality Fixedsize Relative to original Normal y 400 4 so 3 V Use cached image for preview even if media is on line Cancel Apply Help Figure 14 The Off line Cache settings 50 Enabling the Off line Cache Off Line caching is enabled on a folder media basis This allows you to enable off line caching for specific folders or an entire media Off Line Cache x IV Enable off line caching for this media folder and all sub folders By unchecking this option you can remove all cached images for this media folder from the off line cache on your hard disk Update cache contents Click on this button to rescan the folders and to update all cached images now Cache Statistics Number of images cached for this folder 100 Total size for cached images for this folder 1 578 36 KB Total size for cached images for ALL folders 1 578 36 KB Figure 15 The Off line Cache dialog box To enable Off line Caching select the folder you want to be cached and choose the OFF LINE CACHING command from the context menu of this folder In the dialog box check the check box at the top of the dialog box Since this folder is currently not cached press the button labeled UPDATE CACHE CONTENTS to create the prev
309. ften use IPTC information to add copyright information or other items to digital images When you work for the press business most wire services accept only images with embedded IPTC information Image Archives often use IPTC information to build image catalogues and to associate all types of information with digital images Modern Digital Cameras and Scanners also add IPTC information to images Stock Photo Agencies also use IPTC information to associate copyright and usage information to images Handling Non standard fields Besides the official IPTC fields there exist a variety of other field types Many digital image management and thumbnailing applications use application specific fields to store additional data in images Most vendors of digital cameras also extend the official IPTC standard with their own field types to add information with images The same is also true for applications that come with scanners and other imaging hardware IMatch takes a unique approach to handle these vendor or application specific field types Unlike most other applications Match allows you to define edit and update these non standard fields If your scanners or digital cameras add non standard IPTC information to your images Match not only shows you this information but also allows you to edit and update it Note The valuable information stored by modern cameras and scanners in non standard fields is not lost when you manage your images with I
310. functions to perform various actions that manipulate the colors in an image Q Grayscale and Invert Q Color Depth manipulations Q Optimizations for the Internet Browser Compatibility a Histogram adjustments a Brightness Contrast and Gamma manipulations a Hue Saturation and Intensity a General Color modifications a Channel Split and Combine a HSV HSL CYMK and RGB manipulations Function Description Grayscale Converts your image into a 256 shades grayscale image Invert Image Creates a Negative from your image Count Colors used Calculates the number of individual colors in your image Color Depth Changes the color depth color resolution of your image You can convert any color resolution into any other color resolution A specialty is the OPTIMIZED FOR WEB BROWSERS color resolution This procedure converts your image to a color resolution and a palette that can be handled by any web browser Interactive Color This opens a dialog box that allows you to change Resolution the color depth of your image interactively This dialog gives you maximum control over the final color resolution and palette of your image Channel Split Splits your image into separate channels You can choose between RGB HSL HSV and CMYK channels 189 Channel Combine Combines a new image from separate color channels The dialog box checks all open images to provide a preset of the images that are most likely to be combined Histogram Functions The HISTOGRAM
311. g XML as the core for its property database concept Per default Match ships with four rather basis property schemas for your convenience 1 Title and Description Default This schema allows you to enter a title and comment for each of your images You can add any number of fields later 2 Title Description and Image Source This schema allows you to enter a title and comment for each of your images There is also a second property set that allows you to create a set of Image Sources e g Photographer Agency Country and to assign one of these sources to your images You can add any number of fields later 3 Title Description Photographer and Image Quality This property schema contains two additional property sets One to enter photographer details and one to enter image quality metrics 4 IPTC Official Fields This property set is of rather specific use for users working with IPTC fields in their images In most cases it s better to use the The Match IPTC Editor and embedded IPTC fields instead of this property set A Note on Compression IMatch is able to compress the databases on disk and in memory Enabling compression for your database will hence save you disk space and also will lower the memory requirements for IMatch However there is a drawback Performance When IMatch needs to scan your database while you perform matches Match will read data from one or more of the files forming your database If the data i
312. g information in the image Only f Write Options when working with multiple images empty fields will be overwritten Mw co area lo Bt we Close Figure 106 The IPTC Editor Other Fields and Options Pane However this information is often important For example digital cameras often store information like Flash Exposure Time and Light Source in application specific IPTC fields This information may be to valuable to throw it away Unfortunately each producer of digital cameras implements its own IPTC fields to store this camera information The same also applies to scanner vendors or other imaging hardware 371 To enable you to make use of these non standard fields Match allows you to define additional fields and to view and edit these fields in the third pane of the image editor Note Match makes no assumptions about the contents of these fields Since the type of information contained in these fields is unknown to IMatch IMatch cannot validate the contents of these fields It is up to you to enter only valid content and to adhere to the limits of these fields Specials This section describes the various special features available in IMatch IMatch Slide Show Contact Sheet Builder Smart Rename The Batch Converter FolderWatch 372 Panning You can pan the current image by clicking somewhere in the image and then moving the mouse while holding down the left mouse button You can also t
313. ge in the preview control since it usually would be scaled down to fit the available space anyway The default setting is DEFAULT which uses the default size as defined by the image file For the preview you may also set this to 512 x 768 or less to load images faster and with far less memory requirements Note The FlashPix format does not support all of the PhotoCD resolutions IMatch automatically selects the image size that fits best to the resolution defined here Use EXIF Orientation information IMatch automatically uses the EXIF orientation flag in your images if available to rotate images during the load If you have problems because you rotated your images with an application that does not update the EXIF orientation flag accordingly uncheck this option Image Editor These settings allow you to control the initial display size for images opened in the image editor and if you want to retain the EXIF information when you save files Multi Edit Mode When you choose the EDIT command in a thumbnail window and you have more than one image selected IMatch will normally open one image editor window for each selected image If you enable the option OPEN MULTIPLE FILES Match will open all selected images in a single image editor window Using the toolbar buttons you can move forwards and backwards though your selection 340 Keep original file date time If you enable this option Match will keep the original file da
314. ges If the file does not contain a thumbnail or preview image the method returns false Since the size of the thumbnail or embedded preview image varies from file format to file format and sometimes even from camera model to camera model you usually need to combine LoadLowRes with Resize Resample to get the image size you need SaveFile Arguments FileName The fully qualified name for the output file If a file with the same name exists in the output directory it will be overwritten Format The file format for the output file MBitmapFormat enumeration You can use any of the supported file formats If the color depth BPP of this IMBitmap object is incompatible with the resulting file format Match will change the color depth on the fly to the best matching Bits Per Pixel value imbfJPEG24Standard JPEG Standard Format JPEG 24 Bit YUV 411 imbfJPEG24_YUV411 JPEG 24 Bit YUV 411 imbfJPEG24_YUV444 JPEG 24 Bit YUV 444 imbfJPEG24_YUV422 JPEG 24 Bit YUV 422 250 imbfUPEG24_YUV444_ Pr ogressive imbfUPEG24_YUV422 Pr ogressive imbfJPEG24_YUV411_Pr ogressive imbfJPEG24_LossLess imbfJPEG8_YUV400 imbfJPEG8_YUV400_Pro gressive imbfJPEG8_ YUV400_Los sLess imbfCALS imbfPNG1 JPEG 24 Bit YUV 444 Progressive JPEG 24 Bit YUV 422 Progressive JPEG 24 Bit YUV 411 Progressive JPEG 24 Bit Lossless JPEG 8 Bit YUV 400 JPEG 8 Bit YUV 400 Progressive JPEG 8 Bit Lossless CALS PNG 1 Bit imbfPNG4 imbf
315. ges thus ending up with the same image in more than one category Having an image in more than one category is very useful For example you may want to add an image to a category Beach and a category Family You can later then combine these two categories into a third category showing only family members at the beach G fs cA Alia A 28 all a m a2 3 4 6 7 Blow ALHAHAA H Categories 4A Category H E Keywords H Supplemental Categories Urgency Photos amp Themes Fun a A Leisure amp Recreation H A Sport o Figure 5 The Category View with some categories Database 4 Categories You can create categories for themes customers clients topics persons locations and whatever you like If you are used to manage your images by keywords you can continue to work this way using categories instead of keywords However categories allow you to manage your images much easier and with greater flexibility than the simple keywords used by other applications Note Read more about categories in section Categories The Preview View The PREVIEW VIEW allows you to view the currently selected image in the Thumbnail Window with various zoom factors You can either fit the image to the available space or view it in original size The preview allows you to view the thumbnails in your current folder or category at a whole and the currently selected image side by side 31 Figure 6 The
316. ginal images Find images based on complex combinations of criteria like Find all images named like bea that have been added within the last 3 months or Find images that are mostly red and smaller than 640 x 480 but only if they are newer that 6 weeks You get the point Note Other image management tools may refer to the process of running selections against your database as Finding Images Running Queries Searching or something similar Ad hoc Selections IMatch allows you to perform the most frequently selections directly from the SEARCH menu Some of the search commands here work with their own user interface others open the Selection Editor to allow you to edit and run a selection 126 Search for File Names This selection allows you to find images based on their file name This dialog supports two search modes e Simple Search Here you just enter a part of the file name beach in the example This search will return all images in your database with a file name containing the word beach e Power Search Regular Expression Search This is a regular expression based search Using regular expressions you can find literally any file name even with the most complex search criteria Search for File Names __ x Simple Search Just enter a part of the file name you want to find beactl Use to indicate phrases which must appear in the file name and to indicate phrases which must not appear in
317. gory schema is useful if you want to import IPTC metadata from your images It contains root categories for keywords categories supplemental categories and importance Initialize property database from this schema This option allows you to import an XML based metadata schema into your new database Such a schema contains property set definitions and optionally property data The Match installation contains a number of pre build schemas for your convenience Note Read the section entitled Image Property Sets starting for more information about property databases and the meta model used by IMatch See also section entitled Meta Data Standards and XML starting Depending on your requirements you may want to create your property database yourself or import an existing property database Several metadata standards are currently available depending on the type of images you manage with IMatch The IPTC standard organization www iptc org publishes a Meta Model for journalistic and broadcast users that is also used by other companies and organizations The new JPEG2000 www digitalimaging org Standard also contains a Meta Model for associating textual and other information with images Several image and stock photo agencies also publish their own standards for describing and indexing images Many museums also publish and use their own Meta Model for describing images and artifacts IMatch 3 is prepared to handle all of these standards by usin
318. gram startup If you receive a new plug in just copy it into this folder XCopy Deployment During installation these folders are created automatically and filled with pre build files contained in the IMatch distribution The location of these folders on your hard disk can be adjusted via the OPTIONS PREFERENCES menu from within IMatch IMatch stores your personal preferences IPTC presets and other configuration files in your personal folder Under older versions this folder is located below Windows Profilesi lt User Name gt For newer Windows versions this folder is located under Documents and Settings lt User Name gt My Documents In both cases the folder is named photools com IMatch Planning your Databases Depending on the number of images you want to manage in a database the IMatch database and additional files may become rather large You can expect the database and all related files to be between 5 and 15 of the total size of all image files contained in your database For example if you add 10 000 image files to a database and these files have together a size of 2 GB 2000 MB the IMatch database will be between 100 and 250 MB depending on the size of your thumbnails and some other variables Itis a good idea to create databases on a hard disk with sufficient space and in a separate folder for each database If you want to move your database to another hard disk you only need to move the complete folder and you re done
319. h criteria interactively For example if you frequently perform matches based on a property like Image State you may check this option When you run the query IMatch opens the selection builder dialog and allows you to select the Image State that you want to search for Finding duplicate images If you want to find duplicate images use the DUPLICATE FINDER mode of this selector This algorithm has been optimized to identify duplicate images even if they have been cropped resized mirrored flipped or otherwise manipulated The ACCOUNT FOR MIRRORED AND FLIPPED IMAGES option forces IMatch to perform some extra calculations to identify images that have been mirrored or flipped These additional calculations take some extra time though Expect your selection to take twice as long as without this option However without this option IMatch may miss images that have been mirrored or rotated However activating this option may return more irrelevant images in your result set It depends on the original images which setting works best You should also activate the RESULT SET OPTIONS selector when you try to identify duplicate images Use a high value for the similarity setting 85 or so is a good starting point If you want to find only images that are real binary duplicates you should better use LIMIT THE RESULT SET TO FILES WITH THE SAME CRC CHECKSUM option in the RESULT SET OPTIONS selector 151 Color Similarity The COLOR SIMILARIT
320. h similar colors 1 TJ Database Edit Image Search View Result Window Scripting Options Window Help s rely A Has 1 0 Jae oc PARR sooo Ale e awn anme s 640 x 480 6467KB 23 09 1998 18 02 640 x 480 3029KB 23 09 1998 18 02 D Datalphotos Meer DV086 IPG DELTA 93 48 640x480 24 30 29 KB 23 09 1998 18 02 04 juan fm Of num Figure 63 The dual image view expanded and zoomed to 100 Note that the split orientation has been changed to vertical The ability to display an original image next to one of its matches is very useful if you need to compare two images that appear to be identical If you view both images with a high zoom 156 factor you can identify even the smallest differences e g image compression fragments or pixel errors not visible to the human eye without magnification Image Panel Indicators for Result Windows If used in a result window the image panels in the thumbnail viewer get some additional indicator icons to visualize some special conditions FBO74 JPG FBO74 JPG 88 44 88 44 PHOTOS PHOTOS Blumen Duplicates The El symbol indicates that this image is binary identical to the original image If this icon is shown next to a match you may safely delete this image or the original image since both are identical The 2 symbol is added to a match in the thumbnail viewer if this image is also an original image in the current result set The leftmost image in
321. h user interface will update all open windows to indicate the modifications Categorie Assignments Geb hren 0 24 DM 7 min 1 image s selected neg es 2 09 Animals m om Birds and Insects og Fish oA Insects 8 14 Mammals 2 04 Formulas 2 08 Nature 2 04 People 4 08 Plants a O GA Vehicles Figure 74 The category assignment dialog box You may also create new categories on the fly in this dialog box Just select the category you want to become the parent of the new category in the tree control Then enter a name and press the ADD CATEGORY button Then assign the selected image s by checking the categories you want the images to be contained in Note You can create any number of categories in this dialog However calculated categories can only be created in the CATEGORY VIEW This dialog box is non modal which means that it stays open until you close it explicitly by pressing ESC or by clicking on the close button in the upper right As long as the dialog box is open it will always reflect the current selection in the thumbnail viewer If you select other images the dialog will update to show the current category assignments of all the selected images If all images in the selection are in the same group the check box in front of the category will be shown like this Y If only some of the selected images are contained in a category the dialog will show the check box in an intermediate state 4 Note A red rec
322. haracter ID 5 Standard 1 ExtVendor Name Object Name Desc Used as a shorthand reference for the object Type String MinLen 0 MaxLen 64 Mandatory 0 DisplayHeight 1 List Block A list block is associated with an IPTC field block within the same file It contains an enumeration of list elements The format of a list block is as follows ID lt IPTC Field ID of the corresponding field lt List Element 1 gt lt List Element 2 gt lt List Element n gt The following example list block contains the valid Category Field 15 elements according to the IPTC standard IPTC Standard Categories IDS ACE 330 CLI DIS FIN EDU ENV HTH HU LAB LIF POL REL SCI SOI SPO WAR IMatch displays these list elements in the associated control element on the Image Information tab in the IPTC Editor compare to Figure 107 Category LH v Aramina Figure 107 The contents of the list block in the IPTC Editor Quoting If the list elements contain carriage return linefeed tabulator or other characters with special meanings the entire list element must be wrapped in double quotes ID 5 Normal With embedded newline Other Element IMatch then treats all contents enclosed in quotes as opaque If your list element contains double quotes itself these quotes must be escaped by using doubling the quotes ID 5 This is quoted text Text Other Element This elem
323. he IPTC options dialog You may also add arbitrary text to the expression like Captions or comments EXIF Information This dialog allows you to control which EXIF fields are shown in the EXIF Quick Display see EXIF Quick Display The EXIF expression controls the position and format of EXIF fields within the EXIF Quick Display You can add any number of EXIF fields from the list of available fields to get exact the amount of information you need 347 Monitor Gamma Slide Show File Format Preferences General Thumb View Colors IPTC EXIF The EXIF format string controls how EXIF information is displayed in thumbnail viewer windows To view an EXIF field add its number with a leading symbol to the expression below You may also add arbitrary text to create exactly the format you want to see EXIF Expression 270 Date Time 306 Original 36867 Digitized 36968 Y Ayailable Fields Add to Expression Image length Bits per sample Compression zl X Photometric internretation Figure 203 The EXIF options dialog Displaying additional EXIF fields and maker notes Besides the standard EXIF 2 2 fields you can also display camera specific EXIF information in the quick display To do so just add EXIF fields using normal variable syntax into the edit field If your camera for example supports the maker note nik Lens Information see the EXIF editor for supported maker notes for your camera y
324. he Software or the copyright trademarks or other rights related thereto The additional terms and conditions apply a Installation Use This License permits you to install any number of copies of IMatch on one or more computers given that a the licensee is the only user on these machines and b no other person can use IMatch on these computers 11 b Restrictions on Transfer Except as otherwise expressly allowed under this License Agreement you shall not rent lease sell sublicense assign pledge encumber or otherwise transfer the Software Any party authorized by MMW to use or receive the Software must agree to be bound by and Recipient agrees to inform all users of the Software of the terms and conditions of this License Agreement MMW reserves the right to withhold such authorization for any reason 2 OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS If you receive the Software in more than one 1 medium e g by electronic distribution and on floppy disk regardless of the type or size of medium you receive you may use only one 1 medium that is appropriate for your single computer You may not use or install the other medium on another computer You may not loan rent sell lease grant a security interest in or otherwise transfer the other medium to another user a Distribution You may not distribute the software except as permitted by section 3 hereinbelow by any means including but not limited to direct mail retail mail ord
325. he application status bar This method can be used to display information in the Match status bar while a script is executed StatusBarShowPercentage Arguments Min Low value Max High Value Description Displays a percentage bar in the IMatch status bar The parameters Min and Max define the range of the percentage bar Usual values are 0 and 100 respectively 213 Example Application StatusBarShowPercentage 0 100 Application StatusBarSetText Doing some work Application StatusBarSetPercentage 20 Application StatusBarSetPercentage 100 Application StatusBarHidePercentage StatusBarHidePercentage Hides the percentage bar in the IMatch status bar StatusBarSetPercentage Arguments Value The new value Must be in the range defined by StatusBarShowPercentage Description Sets a new percentage value for the percentage bar Variables Description Returns a Variables collection containing all transient variables You can add any number of variables to this collection All variables are of type Variant IMatch keeps this collection until the application is closed Variables in this collection keep their value between script executions thus allowing you to transfer information between different scripts If you need to access or automate other applications the Variables collection is a good place to store the ADO connection handle or the application object of the other app to make it persistent between script execution
326. he bitmap HistogramStretch Increases the contrast in the bitmap by manipulating the range of intensity values ChangeHue Changes the hue of colors in the bitmap by rotating the color wheel Valid values are from 0 to 360 degrees ChangeSaturation Increases or decreases the saturation of colors in the bitmap Valid values are between 100 and 100 Invert Inverts the image creating a photographic negative Detectintensity Arguments Low Low value High High Value Description Applies a filter to detect colors with a specific intensity range Valid values for Low and High are from 0 to 255 AddNoise Arguments Range The amount of change Valid values are 0 to 1000 Channel The channel to apply the effect to Use one of the following values imchMaster Master Channel imchRed Red Channel 260 imchGreen Green Channel imchBlue Blue Channel Description Adds noise random pixels to the given channel of the image AverageFilter Arguments Range The size of the square that is used to form the effect Description Applies an average filter to the bitmap to produce a Blur Soften effect RemoveNoise Arguments Amount The size of the square to form the effect Description Applies a median filter to remove noise from a bitmap Mosaic Arguments Amount The size of the squares to form the effect Good values are 10 or 20 pixels Description Applies a mosaic effect to the bitmap Oilify Arguments Amount Amoun
327. he file browser dialog box If you have opened a database in read only mode and you open it again IMatch will ask you if you want to open the database in read only mode again Choose YES to open the database in read only mode or NO to open it in write mode Note If a database is opened in read only mode all command and features that may modify the database are disabled The Help menu This menu allows you to open the IMatch online help and the IMatch tutorial In addition you can perform some commands or visit selected parts of the IMatch home page 374 Info Tips Info Tips allow you to view details about a folder or image while you move the mouse over it To enable info tips click on the corresponding button in the main toolbar 07 09 2002 15 13 52 JPEG Image D Datalincoming New 2002 09 IMG_0938 psd DELTA 14 43 x 19 24 cm x 24 1 704 x 2 272 px 25 424 94 KB 08 09 2002 00 11 44 Figure 204 The Info Tip Window The Tools Menu The Tools menu allows you to add custom tools to IMatch or to register external applications to be used with IMatch This menu also contains some of the most frequently used special tools in IMatch like the Batch Processor the Contact Sheet Builder or the IPTC and EXIF Import modules Customizing User Tools To add new applications to the tool menu choose the CUSTOMIZE USER TOOLS command from the TOOLS menu Tip To open images with their associated application choose Ope
328. he first line of the file This line contains a header for each column in the file 3 This For loop iterates over all files in the current selection 4 This Print statement writes some information about the current file into the file Each field is separated with a tabulator character 0x09 or vbTab 5 After the work is done the file must be closed Using a similar script you are able to export all the information contained in your Match database into files This enables you to share the information from your database even with the most exotic applications 284 Importing and Exporting your Data Importing and Exporting your Data 285 IMatch has powerful built in Import and Export functions With these functions you are able to exchange data with other applications in numerous ways thus making Match an Open System IMatch allows you to import and export data in many ways The simplest way to get information from Match into other applications is the Windows clipboard Match allows you to copy file names or images directly from the Thumbnail Viewer or the Result Window into the Windows clipboard From there you can paste this information into any other application that supports the Windows clipboard If you want to export property set data database structure data Metadata or other information contained in your database into other applications you can use any of the import and export filters accessible via the IMPORT
329. he thumbnail the IMAGE MENU or press lt Shift gt lt F12 gt The EXIF Editor is a special window displaying all EXIF fields contained in the image in a grid On the left side of the grid the name of each field is displayed The right field contains the actual contents of the corresponding field in the EXIF image file The EXIF Editor always shows the contents of the currently focused image even if you have multiple images selected IMatch EXIF Viewer Es 2001 04 20 21 30 16 2001 04 20 21 30 16 2001 04 20 21 30 16 RGB Components Configuration Binary Object Compressed bits per pixel 4 00 Compression JPEG Exif Version 0210 Exposure bias value EW 1 00 Exposure program Normal program Exposure time 1 63s F Number 3 20 File source Unknown Not fired FlashPix Version 0100 Focal length 10 10 IFD pointer 886 150 speed ratings Date and time Date and time Digitized Date and time Original Image description E ouble click to edit the writeable fields Currently only date and time fields can be odified DK Close Figure 109 The EXIF Editor You will notice that different rows have different colors IMatch uses three colors to differentiate between normal read only content GPF related information if your camera creates it and writeable fields IMatch current supports write back for date and time fields only However for most users thi
330. hen you use one of the ALIGN CENTER VERTICALLY or CENTER HORIZONTALLY alignment modes If your canvas size is relative to the target image these two margins define the left and top margins of the canvas Background Mask and Text Options With Step 3 of the Batch Processor you can define a background bitmap a mask bitmap and an overlay bitmap for the target image The Background Bitmap If you use a canvas the color of the canvas is controlled in Step 2 of the Batch Processor wizard If you don t want a plain colored background for your target image you can apply a background bitmap 292 Background Mask and Text Options x H fi a EE Color IV Background Bitmap application Bimaps tlesttizO1 5 ipa EJ Tie y Bottom Right Depth Opacity 5 F Blur M Border Mask Stretch X rio 3 Application Bitmaps masks MskO07 ms Je Ss Stretch Y frio a I Invert I Fitto image m ne 4 C Nofi MN Color e E gt TF Use Overlay Image Filename Bepication Bitmaps logos IMate Bottom Right z IM Use alpha channel for transparency x p 3 Y p HBB Transparent Color Tolerance fic 4 FT Align within image coca Figure 152 Step 3 of the Batch Processor wizard As a starting point I ve set up a Batch Processor preset that resizes the image to a maximum of 300 x 300 pixels keep aspect ratio is on The canvas is relative to the image and has the settings Left 10px Top
331. hen you view your image collection you may assign bookmarks to any of your images Match maintains a special result set named My Bookmarks The options available for bookmarks are the same as for normal images e g you can copy move delete images directly from the bookmark view or you can convert your bookmarks into a category A named storage location that is controlled and maintained by IMatch IMatch provides a complete set of global and local variables that can be used with various modules and Import Export filters A text document that contains commands for the internal scripting language IMatch contains a powerful BASIC scripting language that allows you to automate frequent tasks perform all type of image operations in batch and to enhance the built in functionality of IMatch in many ways The Script Manager displays all your scripts and enables you to create execute modify and delete scripts The Scripting Integrated Development Environment allows you to edit and debug scripts This IDE is full featured with an integrated debugger and gives you maximum control over script execution IMatch allows you to assign colors to any of your categories The thumbnail windows in IMatch can be set to show you these colors 23 providing visual feedback about the categories of an image You may use this feature to visually rank your image based on priority urgency resolution quality and any other criteria Plug In IMatch suppor
332. her data on your computer for your own security There s always the chance for a computer virus or a physical defect of your hard disk Be safe make backups of your data All database files used in Match and the internal core have been developed to provide maximum data security Match also has a built in database repair and tuning facility accessible via the Database Wizard that can repair most common errors and tune your database for optimal performance In the case of a hard disk crash however there s no chance to get your database back if you have no backup copy of it Make Backups Regular backups are important They protect you against data loss due to hard disk damage disk failure or program errors To backup your Match databases simply copy all database files to another disk an external media or a tape streamer A database consists of a number of files all sharing the same name but different extensions Tip You can use the built in backup tool in IMatch In the DATABASE menu to backup your database and personal settings But you also need backups of your Windows installation and the IMatch program folder to recover your system in case of a hard disk problem or computer virus IMatch is very safe and uses the latest technology to prevent damage to your database files Even in case of a hard system shutdown or power failure your databases are usually safe BUT there is never a guarantee and a hard disk failure can happen e
333. how you work with image properties in IMatch The thumbnail viewer optionally displays a property editor window showing all user defined image properties next to the image categories for the selected images Note Match uses property sets in various modules and Import Export filters to access the information associated with each image See Variables or Creating Contact Sheets or The Batch Processor for some examples 73 IMatch demo imd lol Database Edt Image View Options Window Help 181 x pr Br e ire Dla H D m EWPHOTOSiRegenw Click here to enter a descrip New York Niederlande Nostalgie Paddeln und Segeln Pistolen Propeller und Flugzeuge i Colorful bird with orange bill LO Radios a ipti lAn image of the head and upper body of a bird Al Large orange bil with black tip white and black feathers Background shade of green Rain Forest For Help press F1 I m INUM Figure 82 The Property Editor with a user defined property set To modify the properties for the selected images just click on the property you want to change and begin to type If you want to modify the category assignments for the image double click in the categories window on the left of the property editor and make your changes Managing Property Sets Property Sets are managed with the Database Property Editor accessible from the local toolbar of the D
334. ia the MOVE and Copy commands you can access the full list of 50 history entries 55 You can also use the Thumbnail Viewer toolbar to quickly move and copy files Redo last Copy Redo last Move a Access Move history Access Copy history Figure 44 Quick Move and Quick Copy toolbar buttons Note Some file operations may be unavailable if one or more files in the current selection are read only You can use the READ ONLY TOGGLE command from the context menu to remove the write protection from these files Transforming Images The TRANSFORM sub menu in thumbnail windows allows you to Transforming thumbnails Transforming images Perform Batch conversions Transforming Thumbnails The ability to rotate thumbnails may be convenient when your original images are rotated but stored on a read only medium To protect your neck IMatch allows you to rotate thumbnails independent from the orientation of the original image All thumbnail transformations are virtual This means that Match just records the transformation operation No physical modification is made to the image or the thumbnail Hence thumbnail transformations are reversible When you for example rotate a thumbnail by 90 clockwise Match saves this transformation with the image in your database Whenever the thumbnail needs to be displayed Match performs the rotation on the fly before the thumbnail is shown IMatch automatically applies thumbnail tr
335. icator Status Bar T il wi humbnall Window Memory Indicator Information Display Selector Figure 2 The IMatch workspace window 25 The Database View The DATABASE VIEW contains all drives media and folders currently indexed by your database starting with the database root node This view resembles the view you have when you use the Windows Explorer The Database view is related to the physical side of your database because it works with things like drives media folders and image files In the tree control a folder icon or a folder thumbnail represents each physical folder Beneath each folder icon a second icon is displayed indicating the folder type and online state of the folder Match can handle all types of drives external storage media and network folders Hse 44 8 FA e o Database E g Local Drive gt photools com 11p400 photoois com f ime j Network Drive Q 4 Q oo 2130ENUO E626 466C Lao Removable Media 0 i 4p 3 Samples de Media Media Serial No Label Figure 3 The Database View represents the physical device oriented view on your images Since Match only requires access to the original image when the image needs to be displayed in the preview or slide show it can handle removable storage media like CD ROM JAZ media or DVD drives gracefully even if they are currently off line Note You can add any number of media CD ROM from a single
336. ies ea ee iea Tee e p e e ia dedo 259 E AN 222 GTaYSCale sssccevesatcevestredessdatees E EEE EEEE 249 Hd dd 249 HistogramEqualiZe i eaea oean aea a aSa a TEOS A eign ablando pd 260 Histogram Stretches i a a Saa aS a AE ie IO AARTO EE dis 249 Image class disco bool 238 ImaseBucket Class ccoo nico b niger e Sa EAN ae EAR ieaS ARETE ESEU KEES 240 ImaseSorter ss io ra a Mh LA eis Ma Atl in 228 Image Sorter laS Sineo stiit does ieasswenbssssvip ener a oE nR EREE EAA eaS PORAS KETAST EEEO a SEATS 246 IMFont clasg ar vats cao e oi 268 OIT 249 IsChpboardAvallable ocio tisk Maan chen 249 LoadFile n daian aves heh pias a a Naps si seablsbsd soisssnysblassdhaplasionstasbsdaeiasenetishs Aapees 249 Mosaites 5 od sie bik hil ea cis Mai Aad cule elaine Ain 261 O Jcusssceapiasodsinscnisespdanssvannecseapsenndeantiaevrapseasceeniassevapbanedeanedeisnaoiaascvaesiys 221 Oly sstthin ie ei awiian i A diabinidn wieniniin wiahinidh Mian ane 249 PersistentResultSets 3 2c chch ie E mek nin E niin einai 223 O NN 249 Property SetalasS ita radar in 244 PropertyRecord clas iniciada ideada ds 246 PropertysetProperty class ita aint in 245 PLOPErty Sets aztec raid ido ido 221 RemoveBookmark incre tages 229 RemoveBookmarks i ci ccccceesccsesdencceustenccesedeadeesedensebscdeadeavedeacenuedaadeancdeoesuncdevevansdenesancdenever 221 Removelmage cuidat 226 RemoveN dls cian ditt anes edi isin eines 261 Rename Lima ge nein n cous ces cous ited ove dust cave diodes dades db
337. iew images for all images in this folder Note If you enable caching for a folder this includes all sub folders of this folder recursively IMatch will scan all images in this folder and create cache images After a couple of seconds or minutes depending on the number of images in this folder the initial set of cache images will be ready to use From now on IMatch will automatically maintain the contents of the cache To get a measure of the disk space used for the cache images in this folder and the total size of all cache images in all cached folders press on the UPDATE button at the bottom of the dialog box IMatch will calculate the size of the cached images for this folder and all other folders with off line caching in the current database Disabling Removing the Off line Cache for a folder To disable the Off line caching for a folder open the Off line Cache dialog box and uncheck the first check box Then click on OK IMatch will ask you if you want to remove all cached images and if you answer YES all cached images for that folder are removed Using Off line Cache images If a media is off line and you request a preview for one of the images on that media Match will check if a cached preview image exists in the Off line Cache If a cached image is found IMatch will display it in the preview If no image is found you will get the usual Media off line message in the preview instead The Slide Show will also use the c
338. ific colors in the image or by using a sketch that you draw User defined properties These selectors are based on the user defined property sets They allow you to perform selections on any property set that you associate with the images in your database See section Image Property Sets for more information on this subject Plug In Selectors All external and third party matching modules are arranged in this selector category To use any of the selectors in your selection template you must first enable it by double clicking on the selector name in the left window or by checking the ENABLED check box in the right window By default Match disables all selectors Since the selection gets slower as you add more rules or selectors to your selection template you should use only the minimum number of selectors to create the desired result Enabled selectors are shown in bold see Figure 50 At least you should enable the Result Set Options selector to control how many images will be in your result set Then use another selector to actually perform a selection on your image database Explained Originals Matches and Similarity Before we can explain the different selectors and their options we should shed some light on some new terms introduced here An original image is an image that is used to find matching images in your database Most of the selectors need an original image or have a special mode dealing with original images For example if y
339. ill always show all images in your database with the phrase beach in the file name Formula Examples How to create a category that contains and shows all my images Just create a category with this formula All However please note that this category really links to all your images and if you click on it it can take a while for Match to retrieve and load the images I have tested this up to 50 000 images without problems Tip You can also enable the option Show AII category images under Options Preferences Thumb View How to create a category that shows me all uncategorized images Just create a category with the formula 66 Unassigned This category will show you all images not yet assigned to a category The Category View The second view on the left use the tab at the bottom to switch views is the CATEGORY VIEW This view shows all the categories that you have defined for your database This is the central point of management for categories here you create new categories delete or rename existing categories or move categories around At the top of the list the virtual category AI represents all images in your database Note The CAI category is special in that it virtually contains all the images in your database However when you click on it no images will be shown per default in the thumbnail window Since there are databases with 100 000 or more images out there showing all images in a single thumbnail
340. ill display only the images that have been added to this category IMatch demo imd Mme Ei Database Edit Image View Options Window Help l x Ber Be Sul ive INAR Alia ES g Birds 249 es Various images of birds B Animals amp Birds E Fish amp Insects 2 4 Mammals amp Bears B Nature amp Cities amp Mountains amp Rivers amp Under Water E 4 People B Age Group Y Adults amp Babies amp Children amp Seniors amp Teens Gender amp Female A Male amp Unknown H A Race a Database 4 Categories For Help press F1 m Num Figure 68 The Category View with the Birds category selected 163 Instead of using static old fashioned keywords with Match you create dynamic categories in the virtual image view that match the real world or your specific requirements Then while browsing your images within IMatch you add images to one or more categories with a couple of mouse clicks or by using the Category Splasher introduced a bit later Match will keep track of all category assignments and will update the links and relations between all your categories whenever needed in the background Note Categories allow you to create a virtual order on top of your database Categories store links references to images and moving an image from one category to another does not move the image on your disk or removable media Assigning images to categories is like adding a link or referenc
341. ilt in restore tool in IMatch If something bad happens just copy the contents of the backup folders back into the corresponding folders of your Match installation 17 Important Also make backups of your Windows installation and your Program folder containing your IMatch installation At least daily Installation and Setup Installation and Setup Download the IMatch setup executable and run it from the Windows file manager An assistant will guide you through necessary steps to install IMatch on your computer IMatch utilizes the latest Windows Installer Technology for clean installations updates and uninstalls The IMatch installer contains the latest Windows Installer version and updates your system automatically Managed installations on Windows XP are fully supported IMatch includes an auto repair feature that automatically will re install corrupted or missing parts of IMatch in case another application damages your Windows installation which unfortunately happens Installing Updates IMatch updates are delivered either as self installing executables or as ZIP files If you receive a self installing executable follow the directions on screen Make sure that you install the update into the same folder as your original IMatch installation Updates are available in the download section at http www photools com If you receive a ZIP file unpack the contents of the ZIP file into the original IMatch program folder ove
342. image or negative CSV CRC file and publish it Other persons can load these files into Match and check if they have one or more of the missing images This match method only finds files with the same 32 Bit checksum or the same file name as contained in the CSV CRC files Don t compare this rather simplistic approach with the powerful and intelligent matching methods built into IMatch 312 Creating a Standard CRC CSV file Select the folder category or images you want to be contained in the file Then run the EXPORT STANDARD CSV CRC CHECKSUM FILES module from the IMPORT AND EXPORT dialog box accessible via the DATABASE menu Generate CSY CRC checksum files x File Name estemprmy collection cs ae File Format esv files with CRC32 checksum y m Options Use this image property as the Comment for the checksum file e vr Sort output using this sort preset fey Folder and File Name IV Process folders recursively Cancel Help Figure 178 Generating CSV CRC files Enter a FILE NAME or browse for a file Select one of the three supported file formats CSV files with CRC32 checksum this is the most common format today It contains the file name a checksum and optionally a comment for each file CSV files with CRC32 checksum in ECSV format this format is basically the same as the normal CSV format but it contains additional path information for each file CRC files this f
343. import is complete and the categories are available in the CATEGORY VIEWER Note If the category schema contains formulas that refer to folders or persistent result sets the import module will automatically remove these formulas if the corresponding folders or result sets don t exist in the current database Exporting a Category Schema You can also export one or more of your categories to a category schema file You then can re import that schema into new or existing databases or exchange the schema with friends or customers 315 To export one of more of your categories run the EXPORT CATEGORY DEFINITIONS filter from the DATABASE IMPORT AND EXPORT menu Export Category Schema x File Format Match Category Schema Standard Format y Ca File name farms O Select categories to be exported 4 all amp People amp Vehicles amp Celebrities amp Animals amp Extemal Images 0 Ext and Intemal B 4 4 4 y IV Include child categories of selected categories recursive Check all categories you want to export To export all categories in your database check the all category Figure 182 Exporting categories to a schema file Chose a format for your file and enter a file name You may also select an existing file to replace it with a new schema In the category tree select one of more of your categories If you want to export all child categories of the selecte
344. in the file and the related categories in your database If you enable this option Match will remove the image from all categories and then assign it to categories related to the keywords categories and supplemental categories in the IPTC record If you have multiple hierarchies in your database and you want to keep the category assignments of an image in some parts of the hierarchy you can tell Match to remove the image only below a specific parent category 309 Example All IPTC Keywords Categories Supplemental Categories Urgency l Clients l Client A l Client B This example shows a hierarchy with two major parts An IPTC based hierarchy with child categories for keywords and IPTC categories and a Clients hierarchy If you use similar hierarchies you don t want to loose the assignments of images in the Client hierarchy When you update your categories from IPTC information you only want to synchronize the images below the IPTC category To tell IMatch to un assign images only below a specific parent category use the category selector field next to the UN ASSIGN IMAGES FROM ALL CATEGORIES option in the IPTC Import Wizard Per default this parent is set to All so your images will be removed from all categories during an IPTC import Note As all settings in the IPTC Import Wizard these definitions are saved automatically and reused whenever you do a folder rescan or One click res
345. ined by this category Description This method checks whether the given image is contained in this category The image must be assigned to the category images in sub categories are not considered by this method HaslmageReference 237 Arguments Image The image under consideration Return Values False if the image is not referenced by this category Description This method checks whether the given image is referenced by this category An image is referenced by a category if it is contained in the category or in one of the categories child categories SetFormula Arguments Expression The new category formula Return Values True if the formula has been successfully updated Return Values This method sets a new category formula DeleteChildren Arguments None Return Values Throws an exception if the operation fails Description Removes all sub categories child categories of this category from the database The Image class The Image class The class image represents an image in your database Using this class you have access to all attributes and properties of the image With the help of the MBitmap class you even can manipulate the contents of the image Properties FileName String R O The fully qualified file name of the image Name String R O 238 File name and extension Width Long R O The width of the image in pixels Height Long R O The height of the image in pixel
346. ion etc with your images IMatch fully integrates these user defined properties and allows you to perform selections based on these properties or to use these properties with the export functionality or HTML generation A collection of properties IMatch has a built in property set called Image which collects the properties you create related to specific images in your database Additionally you may create additional property sets e g for Camera Location or Photographer Each of these property sets may have any number of properties and you can create links between property sets One of the most amazing features of IMatch are it s Dynamic Categories You can create any number of categories and each category can have any number of sub categories You then assign your images to one or more of these categories and the intelligent mechanism behind the category concept will do the rest Since categories can depend on other categories even based on formulas the category concept of IMatch is superior to the simple process of assigning Keywords used by other thumbnail applications Selectio n Result Set Persiste nt Result Set Result Set History Bookma rks Variable Script Script Manage r Scriptin g IDE Color Coding a selection is a set of rules and criteria which are used by Match to query your database and creates a result set containing all the images adhering to the rules and limits given in th
347. ional derivative images for publishing layout and web Such a hierarchy can be modeled in two different ways at least My Images Mountain Beach Originals TIFFs Layout Versions Web ready This hierarchy has a Title Category on top Mountain Beach and then arranges the different versions of the images below You could also create a hierarchy as the following with a different approach My Images Originals Mountain Beach TIFFs Mountain Beach Layout Versions Mountain Beach Web ready Mountain Beach Here all original images are kept below a single parent category and below that each shooting gets its own category with a descriptive name Then there are separate categories for TIFF Layout and Web versions of the images again with a sub category per shot Example Category Hierarchy for Family Photos If you want to manage your private photo collection with IMatch you can model a family hierarchy in Match in several ways Note Categories in Match are unidirectional and have only one parent You cannot model a category that has two parents to resemble a natural ancestor 63 hierarchy My Family Peter Children Paul Children Mary Children This hierarchy allows you to add images from Peter Paul and Mary to your database If you have images of Peters Paul s and Mary s children you put them into the Children sub categories below each Persons name Since you can add images to any number of categories
348. ipting SetPixel eee eeeeeeeeee 249 COPIA ai ti 122 210 ACtive Category ui gh spate SOS at EE SE EO eek oak 222 Active Folders iii ita SE O E OES r 221 ActiveResultSet iii a ia iii ai 223 ActiveWindo WI Pei A 221 AddB 0o0k Marks cit da 221 400 BANC TAN A nE 249 AddSortDefiniti On sine nee a E E vecaaseauccaaseauecevecsucdaaevanccavevanccaeevas 246 Applications enn ces E E E E E AE EE E O EE E S 212 Bookmarks mcooccionco noia neren E EE E EE EE E E E E 221 Building Blocks nrsisuceeenen en E E E E E OEE E r 274 CaculateSize WithAspect eee cececeseeceseeceseeeesseecseecseecesaeeesaeecsaeesseessseesenaeessaeers 258 Caterina end ese eee 221 Cate sory Clas iii ai 234 Change Ue iii A A ok ees een 249 Cha ngefntensity cosa rca ers pa s 259 Cha igeSaturatiOO cuina As 260 Collection classes A e 272 Combi acia Lets a bn a o ha o ahs ene a 249 CopyEFromClipboard v000iiinoiia napa 257 COPY REGi noiire io Eror E EE E EEE A aes 249 Copy Fo lipboard cuca Rican atando ade ea tei pia id 257 CreateIlmageB ticket coin ciar a a e pia hs 222 Data Base zea ina 221 Det ctl intensity O A ENS 249 DAW LEX N NEEE EE E EE eicetna etehes ertitetaretesevenadteedenetebewvagttbevegetstasepottnetes 249 EMDOSS tt lll todita 249 BX AMPS tencia r e e e e ee e ee e E er Eea e eee Ee 274 UND AAEE AEA EE O EEE 258 Folder la ias tries E Ea E a Ea ES 233 270 271 272 FOLJES ts dl Ds dd O da O da 221 222 230 GammaCorTeCti seper ei eiie ie e
349. irds and Location Amerika North To see all images shot in America just click on the America category To see all photos of Birds just click on this category The photo of our Bird will show up in both categories because it s a Bird and the photo was taken in Northern America But what if you want to see all images showing Birds that have been taken in North America This can easily by done by using categories with formulas explained below Instead of using old fashioned keywords with Match you create categories in the virtual image view that mimic the real world or your specific requirements Then while browsing your images within IMatch you add images to one or more categories with a couple of mouse clicks or by using the Category Splasher explained in section Category Splashers Match automatically keeps track of all category assignments and updates the links and relations between your categories whenever needed 164 The special WAI category This category serves as the root of your category hierarchy It represents all images in your database You cannot delete or change this category Per default the All category does not show images when you click on it If you have several thousand images 10 000 or more in your database it would take a few seconds to display all images You can allow IMatch to show all images in your database when you select the All category under Options Preferences Thumb View Example Modeli
350. irst image on the current sheet CurrentFolderDescrip The description for the current folder as entered by tion the user CurrentCategory List of all categories that refer to the first image on the current sheet This variable is best used when you create contact sheets for images from one category CurrentCategoryDesc The description for the current category ription MediaID The Media Identifier Label for the first image on the current sheet MediaSerial The media serial number for the first image on the current sheet In addition to these Contact Sheet Builder specific variables the Contact Sheet Builder also publishes the Image variable set see section Image Attributes Using this set you can access all properties and attributes that IMatch stores for an image You can even access to user defined properties and Image properties you entered in the property editor See section Image Property Sets Error Bookmark not defined for more information on property sets How to add information to your thumbnails I ve started with a fresh contact sheet preset The width and height of the canvas are 1000 x 340 The background color for the contact sheet is set to White The thumbnail dimensions are 200 x 200 pixel For demonstration purposes I ve added an overlay bitmap with the IMatch logo in the lower right corner of the contact sheet Running this contact sheet results in something like this 116 IMATCH Figure 137 The initial
351. is all about Siiri iai saias iaaa i anaE i 129 The Selection Process oooooococcccnnnnccononnoonnncnnnncnnnnannnnnnnnnnncnnnnnn nn nn ca nnncnnnnnns 129 Regular Expressions nin 130 Regular EXpressiOMS ooocccccccccccoocccncccnnncnnnannnnnncnnnnconnnnnn nn cnn cnn nnnnnnnn cnn 130 igi och elk S a ree rrr rrr ree errr rr rre reir creer 130 Examples seas a a se 131 Regular Expression Syntax cccccccccceeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeseeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaes 131 Ll Setar A Rei Pele 00 0000 oe 000 00 O 131 Wilco ee aio e 132 REPOSO oie or ee a eee 132 Creating and Managing SelectiOMS ooonncnnnnnncncnccnnnnconnnnnaanncnnnnnnnnnnnr nn 138 Creating and Managing SelectiONS ooonnccnnnnninocccnnnncinananananccnnncnnnnnnno nono 138 Selector Categories ooooocoooccccnnncccnnononnnccnnnncnnnnnnn ocn nnnnncr nana n nn nr cnn nr ra nnnnnn nano 139 Explained Originals Matches and Similarity ooononnninnnininnnnnnnnnnconcco 140 The Folder Selector oocoonnnccnccccnnnncccnnncoonnccnnncconannnnnnncnnnncnnnnnnn nn nc nnn nn cnn 141 The Category SelectOF ocoonnnnconcccnnnnnconnncccnccnnnncnnnnnnn no ncnnnnnnnnnnn rra cnn 141 The Result Set Options Selector ooooonnnncnncccnnnnnnnnnccccnccnnncnonnnnrnn cnn 141 Try ltfor YOU aaas n raap marre anaana EE eens eetianeeeh eeeneaeEraan eevee 142 Modifying the current result set s selector 143 The Area of Interest Selector ooooconnnnicccccccnnnccononcnnoncccnnnccnnnnnrn nn cnn nn ncnnnnnns 144 Inte
352. is allows you to resize your images before sending or to convert them info a file format which can be opened by the recipient of your email Supported File Formats IMatch supports over 40 different file formats with even more sub types JPEG and LEAD Compressed JPG and CMP Canon CRW full raw access and conversion and corresponding THM files Nikon NEF full RAW access and conversion JPEG2000 read only Fuji RAF Kodak Professional Digital Camera DCR read only Casio Digital Cameras with the cam file format extension Support for Sony Digital Cameras with the pmp file format Support for PaintShop Pro 5 x 6 x 7 x format files Read only no layers TIFF Without LZW compression only TIFF with ZIP compression BMP Formats Icons and Cursors ICO and CUR PCX Formats PCX and DCX Kodak Formats PCD and FPX Exif Formats TIFF and JPG Windows Metafile Formats WMF and EMF Drawing Interchange Format DXF XPicMap Format XPM Interchange File Format IFF Portable Bitmap Utilities PBM Dr Halo CUT PhotoShop 3 0 Format PSD Layered Photoshop formats are also supported excluding secret or undocumented Photoshop features like adjustment layers If you want to manage these images with IMatch make sure to enable the maximize compatibility option in Photoshop Portable Network Graphics Format PNG Truevision TARGA Format TGA Encapsulated PostScript EPS JBIG Format JBG SUN Raster Format RAS
353. is stored in a file named imiptcusr dat in your personal folder e g Windows Profiles lt User Name gt photools com IMatch or in Documents and Settings photools com IMatch Tip To distribute or exchange thesauri between different computers and or users simply copy this file to the other system This allows you to establish a standard repository or keywords comments and categories to be used within your company or user circle Using Synonyms Synonyms allow you to associate IPTC keywords with other words terms or the same keywords in another language You can also use synonyms to create variations or derivatives of the same keyword or category For example you associate the word Woman with several other keywords Girl Female Frau and the German Weiblich using the Synonym Editor in IMatch 327 i y a Synonym Editor athe x Synonyms allow you to associate keywords with multiple other terms or words IMatch can add synonyms automatically when you assign a keyword to an IPTC record or remove all synonyms when you remove the associated keyword ly a Man Add Boy Male Edit Mann esa D PE H Woman Delete Gil Female Frau Weiblich Expand Collapse Search Go Use lt Ins gt to insert a new entry after the current position Use lt Del gt to delete the selected entry and lt F2 gt to edit Cancel Figure 102 The synonym editor If you insert the keyword
354. ith an extra help file which explains how you can create your own web pages and style templates To access this help file open the SCRIPT MANAGER and select the photo gallery script in the tree on the left Then click on the SHOW SCRIPT HELP button on the right See also The IMatch Photo Gallery Configuring IMatch Options This section describes the various options of IMatch All options are accessible via the OPTIONS menu Monitor Gamma Here you can adjust the gamma correction factor that Match applies when it displays your images This allows you to adjust your monitor display adapter combination to display colors with the correct gamma value brightness Program Preferences IPTC EXIF OfflineCache CanonCRW NikonNEF KodakDCR Display Slide Show FileFormat Preferences General ThumbView Colors Use the slider control above to adjust the image s gamma level so that the all areas of the image on the left are of equal brightness 1 0 means neutral fou should be able to differentiate between all 26 different levels of gray in the image below Display Settings Use high quality bicubic resampling for zoomed images editor slide show preview Slower but displays images with much better quality Cancel Apply Help Figure 195 The Monitor Gamma options dialog 337 To adjust your monitor gamma settings just follow the instructions given in the dialog Close your
355. ither the Login name of the current user or the network domain name of the user if the computer is connected to a network EnableUserAbort Boolean Enables or disables script abortion by the user in non interactive mode If this is set to False the user is not allowed to abort the script execution Use this flag with care because when your script fails to stop the user has no change to abort it It is a good idea to set this to False only during critical sections in your script and let it 212 True the rest of the time OLEServerBusyTimeout Long Returns or sets the number of milliseconds during which an automation request will continue to be retried before the default Component Busy dialog box or an alternate message is displayed The default for this property is 5000 Milliseconds 5 seconds If you use OLE automation from your script to automate other applications and you get timeouts because the calls take longer that 5 seconds use this property to increase the timeout Methods Databases Description Returns a Databases collection containing all open databases ActiveDatabase Description Returns a Database object for the active database The active database is the database that has the input focus and is on top of all other databases Example dim db as Database set db Application ActiveDatabase StatusBarSetText Arguments Text The new text for the status bar Description Sets a new text for t
356. itmaps and Textures IV Use recycle bin for delete operations JV ADevelop imatch3 Backgrounds FZ Caption bar text height General output folder 2 ExTempiiMatch Output R Standard action for double click Script folder Slide Show y VADevelop imatch3 Scripts S When Ctl key is pressed Category Assignment y Cancel Apply Help Figure 198 The General options Option Description Display Info Tips Toggles the display of info tips tool tips in various windows 341 Show Folder Thumbnails Load last database at startup Use recycle bin for delete operations Caption bar text height Preset Folder Bitmaps and Textures General Output folder Script folder Standard action for double click When Ctrl key is pressed 342 Info Tips display information about the folder under the mouse cursor or the image panel in the thumbnail viewer You can also toggle info tips on and off using the corresponding button in the main toolbar Toggles between folder thumbnail display and normal display in the database window If you turn this option off Match will display the folder tree in a Windows Explorer like fashion You can choose different sizes for the folder thumbnails Choose the size that fits you If you want to load the last used database on startup automatically enable this option This option instructs IMatch to use the Windows recycle bin on file delete opera
357. itten in C C and probably other languages supporting a DLL interface Since Match got much interest in the image research community I hope that many researchers will use Match do experiment with new algorithms using Match as a comfortable starting point Match will do all the dirty work like reading over 40 different image formats displaying the results reporting and printing The plug in interface will allow researches to concentrate only on their algorithms without the hassle of providing also a front end application This should lead to much faster development cycles for new algorithms and hence will speed up the overall process of the development of new algorithms Combining multiple selectors to form a Selection Template You may combine any number of selectors to form a selection template Match will consider all enabled selectors during the selection process Usually you always enable the RESULT SET OPTIONS selector to restrict your result set to a maximum number of images or image with a specific similarity To speed up the matching and to get a better match quality it is most of the times advisable to enable the DIMENSIONS selector Check the SAME AS ORIGINAL IMAGE orientation setting to limit the result set to images with the same orientation as the original images This leads to better results most of the time Make sure that you use 10 000 for the size constraint to avoid unwanted restrictions based on image size If y
358. ive and it also knows which files in your database are on that media Whenever you need access to the file just insert the media and let Match do the rest Tip Use folder comments to identify your media The root folder of the media or the first folder you ve scanned is the right place for a folder comment that also includes some information about the CD ROM or DVD The Offline File Handler will display this comment to help you identify the media How to identify the correct media The root node of each drive media combination in the Database Viewer also displays the Media Identifier Media Id Media Label and the Media Serial Number as it was set at time of scanning that media Additionally you can enter a folder comment in the caption bar of the Thumbnail Viewer when you selected that folder in the Database Viewer This information is always visible even if the media is not loaded or the drive is offline CorPhoto M 9912272203 3221215922 ES Regenwald M 981222_1045 315211607 E Figure 11 Two media loaded from the same drive Figure 11 shows a database that contains references to two different media from the same drive The drive identifier is M in both cases but the media identifier and media serial numbers differ Following the drive identifier M the media identifier and the media serial number are shown in parentheses Media Id Media Serial Number 9912272203 32212159
359. ject provides methods to manipulate the application status bar Application StatusBarSetText Doing some useful work The above statement will show the message Doing some useful work in the IMatch status bar To show a percentage indicating the progress of an operation use the following sequence Application StatusBarSetText Doing some useful work Show the percentage bar with a range from 0 to 100 Application StatusBarShowPercentage 0 100 This loop simulates the actual work done by this script Dim i As Integer For i 0 To 100 Wait 0 1 Update the percentage counter Application StatusBarSetPercentage i Next i Remove the percentage bar Application StatusBarHidePercentage Using the Wait Dialog Using the Wait Dialog The Application object also enables you to show an application modal Wait dialog box This dialog box contains a message an optional percentage bar and an optional Abort button 282 11 done To open the Wait dialog box use the WaitDialogOpen method of the Application class Application WaitDialogOpen Doing some useful work 0 100 True This call opens a wait dialog box with the given message a percentage bar with the range 0 100 and an Abort button allowing your user to abort the current operation Here s a full sample Application WaitDialogOpen Doing some useful work 0 100 True Dim i As Integer For i 0 To 100 Wait 0 1 Application WaitDialogSetPerce
360. k into all selected files For example you change the Caption field of the current image and then press SAVE Match knows that you have only changed the Caption field and will write back this field only to all selected images This mode allows you to update specific fields in your IPTC information without changing other fields Always keep existing information in non empty fields This mode is rather special but may come handy at some occasions Match will update only IPTC fields which are empty in the image files and will replace these empty fields with the IPTC information visible in the editor This mode allows you to fill in new information into images but only if the images don t already have information in these fields Updating Keywords and Categories You have also advanced control about how keywords and categories are updated when you write IPTC information This is important when you work with multiple files at once No modifications Existing keywords and categories are not modified 325 Replace existing items Keywords and categories are replaced with the keywords and categories from the current template image Merge items from template image This mode merges the keywords and categories from the current image with the existing keywords and categories This mode allows you to add keywords and categories to existing IPTC fields Forcing updates of keywords and supplemental categories Per default keywords and sup
361. ket to hold images from this database ActiveFolder Description Returns the active folder ActiveCategory 222 Description Returns the active category ActiveThumbWindowSelection Description Returns the selected images of the currently active thumbnail window ResultHistory Description Returns a collection of result sets from the result set history PersistentResultSets Description Returns a collection containing all persistent result sets ActiveResultSet Description Returns the active result set or nothing if there is no active open result set PropertySets Description Returns the property sets collection for this database IsFolderOnline Arguments Folder The folder to check Description Returns true if the given folder is online IsFileOnline Arguments Image The image file to check Description Returns true if the given image file is online 223 IsFileMutable Arguments Image The image to check Description Returns true if the given image file is not read only and online DeleteFile Arguments Image The image to be removed DeleteFile True to delete the file on disk If this is False the image is only removed from the database but not from your hard disk Return Values This method returns an IMFileOperationResult to indicate the outcome of the operation imforSuccess Successful completion imforGeneralFailure General unknown error imforFileDoesNotExist File does not exist
362. kmarks Arguments Images A collection of images to be added to the bookmark collection of this database RemoveBookmarks Arguments Images A collection of images to be removed from the bookmark collection of this database RemoveBookmark Arguments Image The image to be removed from the bookmark collection Description Removes the given image from the bookmark collection of this database SelectCategoriesDialog Arguments InitialSelection Optional A collection of categories to be selected initially ShowALL Optional If False the ALL category is hidden Return Values Returns a collection of all categories selected by the user 229 Description This method displays a category selection dialog and allows the user to select or deselect categories You may use an initial set of categories to populate the category control in the dialog The method returns a collection of all selected categories SelectFoldersDialog Arguments InitialSelection Optional A collection of folders to be selected initially Return Values Returns a collection of all folders selected by the user Description This method displays a folder selection dialog and allows the user to select or deselect individual folders You may use an initial set of folders to populate the folder control in the dialog The method returns a collection of all selected folders ParseVariables Arguments Str Input String containing the string to parse for varia
363. l WM oh Se A a R 35 Thumbnail siii Sosa E Grebe ea A EE 36 Rotten a EE Boh oa Bd Se hd on hs ah ees 56 WAG W iran A A AS A ee Sl ee A 37 Thumbs Display Sizes ade miei ol ie dsd a 37 tiling the background bitmap aiina eee E E E E EE EE 113 TEs ao eaen o aaa dd 76 194 195 196 ToRAAM Mia aa aa aaa edd EA TA E 195 TmeHHMMSS e Secs hci enen aia aa iia de ido NEE AS 195 NS ete edecadedates E A Dicedesewieedeaetas oteseugedaestes 196 A NS 44 PS lt A O 90 Toggle Friendly Names ett tai tdci ide 30 Toolbar Result WI Wii dd di Elda 157 158 TOMA td ti a a ed daa E aia 34 Tools USA ii lll dilata dicas 38 TotallmageFileSize otros 234 TA A A EN 56 57 184 Transformations for Thumbnails di 56 Transforming Thumbralls nido AEN Ea idas 56 PPANS PALCN CY ss deshass listando antro bessaveplesscesdishsdeap iaaseeadh she cosbdasseasbs ihe cess dasseasd bobs snaa isos 300 ASS 26 Trimming CABOS aia 187 A ON 184 O NN 20 ANEO Ee PE E E E E E E E seu veends 11 ADAE A E A E E T 378 A E ain ais aad A E 245 246 U Ut Casciari 280 Umlaut nn 323 Unassigned finding images not in a Category 0 eee eeeeesseeeeneeceneeceseeeesaeecsaeecsseessneecesaeecsaeesseeeeneeeesaes 359 Unassigned Images rionn a a aE EE E E EO E EE E a a 359 Underline inaen gee Sood in aida ees 269 Und id as 183 pase Editor illa ita iia ia aci 183 UNICODE ota ais Se A NAE 302 UNIS Sinto to iia ee 349 Universal Resource Titi ata elk A ee E ca 194 Universal Resource Iden
364. l available fields in the EXIF metadata stream Using EXIF Variables Some modules in IMatch allow you to use variables to add text to images or to display certain information about your images You can use EXIF fields contained in your images by referencing them with special variables syntax fImage EXTF lt Field Name gt For example to get the EXIF camera model use Image EXIF Camera Model You can combine any number of variables and mix them with text For example the variable declaration below returns the vendor name and camera model Camera vendor Image EXIF Make Camera model is Image EXIF Model Note EXIF variables as all variables in IMatch are case sensitive You must use 98 the exact names as given in this section of the user manual You can also open the EXIF editor and copy the contents of the EXIF record to the Windows clipboard Paste the clipboard contents into a text editor of your choice or Notepad to have easy access to all EXIF fields and maker note names List of standard EXIF fields For an explanation of these fields please refer to the EXIF standard documentation mentioned above Image width Image length Bits per sample Compression Photometric interpretation Orientation Samples per pixel Planar configuration YCbCr SubSampling YCbCr positioning X Resolution Y Resolution Resolution unit Strip offsets Rows per strip Strip byte counts JPEG interchange format
365. l return only the images that have similar colors as your sketch at approximately the same position Of course image matching is not an exact science there is always some fuzziness in the game As you can see from the result set of this query in Figure 57 Match will not only return images with a round red object in the middle but all images which contain similar shades of red in the center of the image Z Database Edt Image View Options Window Help laxi H CE SESE ISTE TAI k cinibears ipg 97 70 PHOTOS Sibigkeiten pistach jpg 32 poemoros PHOTOS Flowers S igkeiten Blumen 1 5 isg a tedi inn DVNRAIPR For Help press F1 I m Num Figure 57 The result for the red center selection 149 All grid cells not filled with a color are treated as don t care and may contain any color in the resulting images Since we filled only a couple of cells with red color Match returns images that are completely red and also images that only have a red center Compare to Figure 57 above With this the definition in Figure 58 you can find images with a sky shade of blue at the top of the image and a sand color at the bottom A medium color tolerance worked best for the sample database used Overall Color pe Tolerance Figure 58 Finding images with sky and sand The result for this query is shown in Figure 59 Again to reach the optimal result require
366. larity of this image available for result sets only If your database contains an Image Property Set you can include information from this set into the resulting text document These options allow you to control the resulting output The optimal settings depend on the application that is the target for the export See the documentation of the respective application for details Choose a file format for the resulting text document IMatch supports Windows ANSI format for most Windows applications OEM character set DOS for older applications UNICODE for UNICODE enabled applications UTF 8 for Internet Applications XML Editors and the like Field delimiter IMatch arranges the output into rows and columns The character s you enter here specify which character is used to separate columns in the resulting document Common are comma tab or semicolon Record delimiter Specifies the record delimiter in the resulting document Write first line as header If you enable this option IMatch will include an initial header line in the output This line contains the names of the exported fields attributes and properties This option is pretty handy if you want to import the resulting document into applications like Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Access Wrap text in Many applications require text content to be included in double quotes IMatch will not include date time and numeric fields in quotes Load Preset and Store Th
367. lding BlOCKS oooonnnccnncccnnnnninnnccconcccnnncnnnnnnrr nn ccnnncrnnannnnnnno 274 The Active DatabDase uisimss rre reds 274 AGCOSSING FOIMSrSiisccchesshetexseiaes ceveveete repeler ietlereltda 274 Adding and removing Categories ccccccccceeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeseeeeteeeeeees 276 Working with IMages oooomnoccccnn nncicnnnccocncccnnnconnnnnnnnnncnnnncnnnnnnnnnnccnnnncnnnnns 276 Accessing images in afolder ooooccnnnnncccccccnnncccnnncaooncconnncnnnnnn non cnnnnncnnnnnns 277 Accessing images in a Category occccconccoccccccnncccnanannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnncnnnnnns 278 Updating or adding images ooooccccnccinncconaccncnncinananonnncn cancion nana n nn cnn cnn cnn 278 Remvig Mages resis rarrrerEea 279 Accessing Property MiS oooonooccccinnncccconocnncccnnncnnnnnn nn nn cnn nn rana nr n nn 279 Iterating all property sets in your database ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 279 Accessing the contents of a property Set record coooooccccnnnccccnccocaccncnnnccnnnnns 279 Advanced Sample Running a selection on your OWN cesses 280 Providing User Feedback oooooocccnnnnccccnnccccccccncncnnannrnnnccnnnncnnannn ocn cnnn cnc 281 Providing User Feedback ooooonncocccccnnnnccnnnncoonccnnnnconnnano no ncnnnnconnnnnn nano 281 Using the Scripting Output WiNdOW ooonioncccnnnnnninnncconcccnnnconannnannnconancnannnns 282 Using the Scripting Output WiNdOW coonnncnncccnnnncicnncnoncccnnnnconannn nano 282 Using the IMatch Status
368. lide show This is much faster than processing the RAW image data File Format Preferences This dialog box allows you to define the standard load and preview size for FlashPix and PhotoCD image formats Since each of these image formats may store images at different resolutions you can choose which of the available resolutions will be loaded for the image preview in IMatch 339 Program Preferences ee x IPTC EXIF OffLineCache CanonCRW NikonNEF KodakDCR Display SlideShow File Format Preferences General ThumbView Colors Default load resolution for image preview Reset Move Copy folder lists Default All formats Default load resolution for Image Editor Default All formats he m Image Editor I Fit image to screen on load Open multiple files in a single editor window IV Keep EXIF information when saving image files IV Keep original file date time when writing IPTC or EXIF information IV Keep the THM file with the CRW file Move Copy Delete Y Photoshop files Use Adobe composite image instead of interpreting layers JV Use EXIF orientation information when loading images auto rotate Cancel Apply Help Figure 197 The default image format settings For example the biggest resolution of PhotoCD images is 4096 x 6144 pixels An image of this size takes up 72 Megabytes of main memory It absolutely makes no sense to load this huge resolution to display the ima
369. like Beach and Day at the beach Here you can get much better results if you choose the PARTIAL FILE NAME selector type which is optimized to handle such cases It will identify that the second file name also contains the word Beach and will include the image in the result set This selector works with a set of original images your current selection Regular Expression Search The REGULAR EXPRESSION SEARCH works with patterns much like the and Wildcards you can use to specify file names at the command line or in a File Open dialog box The patterns you can enter here can be very complex satisfying even the most difficult requirements Hint All selection dialogs that allow you to use regular expressions have a regular expression quick reference Just click on the corresponding button in the dialog Search Engine Like With the SEARCH ENGINE LIKE selector you can find all file names containing one or more specific patterns For example by entering beach Match will return all file names containing the word beach You can combine the search patterns with or minus to force inclusion or exclusion of specific patterns If you don t use and Match treats all patterns as combined via logical OR Some examples beach Finds all file names containing the word beach beach car Finds all file names containing the words beach or car or both beach car Finds all file names containing the words beach and car beach car
370. ll use the wizard to add a couple of folders and images to the new database to get started Choose the first option of the wizard as shown in Figure 29 and click NEXT to proceed The other operations By using the database wizard you can also perform other operations like performing a database health check optimize your database for optimal performance or change the caching mode and password for your database Step 2 Choose the folder you want to add to your database Add or update folders from your local computer or network 25 l x Please choose the folder you want to add to your database If the folder is already in the database it s contents will be updated automatically Foldername ERE Browse IV Also add sub folders recursively IV Don t add empty folders IV Skip hidden or system folders I Create Off line Cache for this folder automatically TF Force update of all files Figure 30 Adding a folder to your database This screen allows you to select the folder you want to add to your database If you want to include the sub folders of that folder make sure you leave the ALSO ADD SUB FOLDERS RECURSIVELY option checked Leave all other options as they are Adding a folder to an Match database means that Match scans the folder for all images and then adds links or references to each of these images to your database For each supported file Match creates a thumbnail representation and reco
371. m locale setting for short dates and hence adjusts to your countries date format Returns a formatted long date like Monday 01 2002 Returns the date in the standard format as set for the current user in the Windows control panel Returns the time without seconds 10 00 Returns the time with seconds 10 00 55 Returns the time in the time format set for the current user You can use these fields like using the following syntax Image IPTC Release Date ShortDate EXIF Variables To access EXIF variables use this syntax Image EXIF lt Name of the EXIF field gt For example use Image EXIF Date to get the date of the EXIF information Note EXIF information is not very standardized and some images contain only a subset of EXIF fields If an image does not contain a specific EXIF field IMatch will return an empty string for the corresponding variable For a list of supported variable names see Supported EXIF Fields In addition Match supports some special EXIF date time variables Image EXIF lt Date and Time Field gt Short Image EXIF Date and time Original Short Image EXIF lt Date and Time Field gt Long Image EXIF Date and time Original Long Image EXIF lt Date and Time Field gt Default Returns a formatted short date with time like 01 01 2002 12 00 00 Returns a formatted long date with time like Monday 01 2002 12 00 00 Returns a formatted date and time string
372. m the list of available options With MATCH BY CRC32 CHECKSUM IMatch will compare the checksums contained in the file with all images in your database If you choose MATCH FILE NAMES or MATCH FILE NAMES IGNORE EXTENSION IMatch will only consider the file names contained in the file Press OK to run the start the import process After a couple of seconds Match will display a special window with the results of the process Match CS 7 CRC files x 16 record s in input file 16 record s have matches 0 record s unmatched m f 0470042 jpg 1 56 329 Add matches to category a 082069 jpg 1 58 618 082069 jpa Bookmark matches A 4269 JPG 9 31 676 4269 JPG Image 402 JPG Export Results Image 002 JPG Positive list records with matches Image 102 JPG Heaative list Missing fies list Image 202 JPG Y Image 402 JPG 4269 JPG 4269 JPG Gren FR 4269 JPG El IA Clipart and Photos Temp x4711 jpg 26 378 IA Clipart and Photos Temp z4711 jpg 26 378 Figure 180 The result window for a CSV CRC import operation The selected file has two hits in the current database This special window presents the results of your match From here you can either add all matches to a category for later inspection or create bookmarks for all matches for later inspection You may also create a positive I have or negative I m missing CRC CSV file from the results This file then can be posted or sent
373. mages to a different color depth enable the option COLOR CONVERSION and choose the new color depth from the list For example if you want to use your images in web pages it s a good idea to convert them to JPEG format and to change the color resolution to a Browser compatible 256 color palette Netscape palette If your images are too dark you can apply a gamma correction filter by enabling the corresponding option Or you can use one of the histogram functions to apply some histogram based color corrections To convert your output image to gray scale just select the corresponding option in the list shown This will change the all colors in your image to one of 256 shades of gray IMatch takes care that the resulting output file has the correct color depth depending on the original file format or the new file format defined for the target images Saving a file to JPEG even a gray scale one needs 24 Bit color depth to be compatible with most other applications IMatch automatically takes care for these things To apply an aging effect to your select the APPLY AGING EFFECT option IMatch will change your image to look like an old photography This is a very nice effect if you create images for web pages or photo albums 289 To change the dimensions of your images resize resample enable the corresponding option and enter either a height or width Match calculates the other dimension automatically for you You can also change the
374. mat HAMM for example 1205 for 12 05 The width of the image in inches This calculation is based on the resolution defined in Options Preferences Thumb View The height of the image in inch The width of the image in centimeter The height of the image in centimeter The width of the image in millimeter The width of the image in millimeter Table 1 Image Attributes In addition to the attributes stored with each image IMatch also provides a set of Global Variables These variables are listed in the following table Variable Name Version Folder Templates Bitmaps Description Name of the application The application version The folder where the IMatch executable is located The folder where your presets and templates are stored You can change the content of this variable in the General Settings dialog see General Settings This variable contains the name of the folder that stores 195 OutputFolder TimeNoSec Time DateShort DateLong Year Month MonthNum Day DayNum User Variables bitmaps and backgrounds used for example with the CONTACT SHEET BUILDER or the BATCH EXPORT module You can change the content of this variable in the General Settings dialog see General Settings This variable contains the output folder that is used with the CONTACT SHEET BUILDER or the BATCH EXPORT module You can change the content of this variable in the General Settings dialog see General Settings The cur
375. matically uses the last part of the folder path the target directory as the name of the list item You can change this name by 58 clicking once on the name in the list Type in something that has makes more sense to you or that allows you to associate the name faster Tip Use colors to differentiate the items in the OC bar or to mark special or important folders categories or splashers The configuration dialogs for categories splashers and scripts look and work similar They allow you to add the most frequently used categories or splashers to the OC bar thus allowing you to assign images to categories with a single mouse click 59 A New Concept Dynamic Categories A New Concept Dynamic Categories IMatch extends the core concepts of keywords by supporting dynamic categories Dynamic categories allow you to create a virtual view on all your images independent from the actual physical location You can create any number of categories in your database and also any number of links and dependencies between such categories When you once get used to this new concepts you will be pretty amazed how simple but powerful it really is Note Categories allow you to create a virtual order on top of your database Categories store links references to images and moving an image from one category to another does not move the image on your disk or removable media Images can be in as many categories as you want Adding an image to outdoors
376. me Name of the image JPEG only to transform Op The operation to perform 219 imJPTRot90cw 90 clockwise rotation imJPTRot180cw 180 clockwise rotation imJPTRot270cw 270 clockwise rotation imJPTRot90ccw 90 counter clockwise rotation imJPTRot180ccw 180 counter clockwise rotation imJPTRot270ccw 270 counter clockwise rotation imJPTMirror Mirrors the image left gt right imJPTRotFlip Flips the image top gt bottom Return Value Returns true on successful operation else false Description Performs various lossless JPEG transformations ShellExecute Arguments Verb A string referred to as a verb that specifies the action to be performed The set of available verbs depends on the particular file or folder Common Verbs are edit Launches an editor and opens the document for editing If File is not a document file the function will fail exploreExplores the folder specified by File find Initiates a search starting from the specified directory open Opens the file specified by the File parameter The file can be an executable file a document file or a folder print Prints the document file specified by File If File is not a document file the function will fail properties Displays the file or folder s properties File Name of the file or object on which to execute the specified verb Parameters The parameters to be used on File Directory The initial Start directory ShowCmd Controls how the applica
377. mmon queries Figure 50 shows the Selections View with the opened selection editor the selection template selected is Duplicate Images 138 IMatch demo imd ox Database Edit Image View Options Window Help lal x Mr 64 9 41 Kes Duplicate Images My Bookmarks B Selection Templat aa LEE FEED Files lt 100 KB EMY Pre Selectors E Shape and Color Same Orientation amp Categories Result Set Options Id Enable E Similar Colors E Folders a Persistent Results EY Basic Selectors TT Limit the result set to files with the same CRC checksum Scion Hist a 7 File Format Result Set Limits File Sit eich Minimum number of images to show 50 E Date and Time rl El File Name Only show images with at least this similarity sa Ee Image Matchers Sketch and Color y ene 1 General Matching Maximum number of images to show zi E User defined Properties pa 3 Plugin Selectors 7 Hide originals without matches Categories Figure 50 The Selections View left and the Selection Editor right The SELECTION EDITOR consists of two windows on the left you see a tree control with all selection criteria grouped by selector category The right window contains a specific editor for the highlighted selector All selectors are combined via the Boolean operator AND This means that if you selection template contains more than on
378. modify it Hint The Standard sort profile is used for the SLIDE SHOW or the REVIEW dialog when you select a folder or category and execute one of these commands Since folders and categories have no sort order themselves IMatch automatically applies the Standard sort preset in these cases If you want to run your slide show or review with the same sort order as it is used for the thumbnail window select all images in the thumbnail window and then run the SLIDE SHOW command from the context menu of the thumbnail window Creating a new sort preset The easiest way to create a new sort preset is to first empty the list on the right By double clicking on an entry you can remove it from the list and put it back into the list on the left Use this method to empty the list on the right Then add the fields after which you want to sort by double clicking the appropriate field in the list on the left This will move the field into the SORT SEQUENCE DEFINITION list By default all fields sort in ascending order thus resulting in a smallest first sort For example if you sort by file name the thumbnails will be sorted in ascending order A Z If you want to sort in reverse order click on the little arrow button show within each field This button toggles the sort order between ascending and descending You can add any number of fields to create complex sort sequences e g Sort first by similarity and then by file name or Sort by file size
379. n from the SHELL sub menu of the context menu in the thumbnail window or press lt Ctrl gt lt Shift gt lt 0 gt IMatch will then open a normal Windows Explorer Window for the special Tools folder below the IMatch program folder To add new applications use the New Shortcut command from the context menu of that folder or use drag and drop to add applications from the Window Start menu or your desktop 375 CI ada the pie Yew Potes Jeb teb a Gy Used poes Y A amp 29 ages i v Derralopi att Patet Daba eer Tooke eh a J Kem Ss as EE nE Hi Li Fete Settings Fie Folder 07 07 2000 1929 Dire Pie Poker 04 07 2000 00 34 UserTools Cromag Fie Folder 0407 2000 00 34 mae AL certosa LES Sonos 17 08 2000 0227 Select an temto view be descrption H Gedeapars LID Configuration Settings 07 07 2000 13 29 vadis LEB Soros 17 11 2008 1056 This folder cost ains the IMetch User Touts To add new boots and enptcations to the Took rerun Match put Gente Drrtiuts wy thes Folder By luting the Mer Shotarnenand Of the folder oF by he dayo apphcalcra rto the folder ee es 4 II Figure 205 Customizing User Tools Sub Folders You can also create new sub folders within the Tools folder IMatch will display these folders as sub menus below the Tools menu This allows you to arrange your user tools and applications in any way you want Controlling the Hot key IMatch will automatically assign a hotkey to
380. n IMatch you can undo the Auto Trim operation with the UNDO command from the EDIT menu Resizing Images Resizing images is one of the most frequently used image manipulation functions Either you need a smaller preview image of some larger image or you want to prepare an image for the use on a web site 187 x Width 600 Height 750 m C Percentage Width fo 4 Height fico 3 m Print Width Cancel FEE Help we Dats Inch DPI y By Height 1024 z m DPI Resolution 72 3 Y Maintain aspect ratio Resize Method Bicubic Resample y Reset Dots per Inch Figure 123 The Image Resize dialog IMatch provides a sophisticated resize and resampling functionality that gives you perfect control over the whole process You can control the resulting size of your image in different ways Pixel Enter the width and the height of the resulting image If MAINTAIN Size ASPECT RATIO is checked IMatch will automatically calculate the perfect height width depending on your settings The resulting image size is given as a percentage of the original image Percen size For example if you use a 50 x 50 setting here the resulting tage image will be half the size of the original image Print This setting allows you to specify the exact dimensions of the result image based on Centimeters Millimeters or Inches If you working with
381. n about variables 318 For example using a mask like Image EXIF Date and time you can use the EXIF date time information to create unique file names Slide Show Slide Show The Slide Show in Match allows you to quickly browse through the files in your database using your current selection a folder or an entire category Depending on your current selection Folder Category Bookmarks selected Thumbnails the slide show displays all images in a sequential fashion in a full screen window Tip You can use the slide show as a full screen view for your images You can modify the slide show options like background color delay and mode via the OPTIONS PREFERENCES menu see Slide Show Settings During a slide show there are several keyboard and mouse commands available By clicking the right mouse button somewhere on the image you open the context menu for the slide show It contains all commands and also describes the keyboard shortcuts available Tip Use the context menu of the slide show to execute command unless you memorize the shortcut keys Slide Show Keyboard Shortcuts Left mouse button Proceed to the next image in the sequence If you run a random slide show a random image will be selected automatically The left mouse button is also used to pan a zoomed image lt SPACE gt Proceed to the next image in the sequence If you are in rectangular zoom mode see lt R gt below holding down the lt SPAC
382. n nn rr anna nr rn n rca 163 Formulas for FolderS ooocoonnnconccccnnnccconoconnnccnnnccnnnnan ocn cn narco naar nn nn cn cnn cnn 165 Formulas using Persistent Result Sets oooocconnnncnnnccoccccccnnconananannncnnnnncnannns 166 More Formula Examples 2 cccccceeeeeeeeeccneeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeseeesaeeeeeees 167 Adding renaming and deleting Categories cc cccceeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeeetees 167 Using Drag and Drop to manage your categories ooooccconncccnnncccccccnnnncnnnnns 168 Using Category ForMulaS oooooooccccnnncccnncooonncnnnnccnnnnannnnnnnnnconnnnnn non nnnnncnnnnnns 169 E CS cecum aA LAES 170 Linking Fo ee ees 171 M re on Formulas icono cierne por 172 Linking other ODjectS oooononninncnncccnnnncccnnnnconccnnnnnnnnnnn nn nc cnn nn crnnnn rn nncnnn 174 Editing Category Assignments in the Thumbnail Viewer o o cnc 174 PTOS oi odres 174 Category Prefixes ooooccccnnnccocccccnncconannnonnncnnnnccnnnnn non n cnn nn ncrnnnnn rn nn cnn 174 Category Splashers oooooocooccccnnnccconcooancnnnncnnnnnnn conc cnn nn non annnn nn ncnnn nn ra nnnnnn nano 175 Category Splashers oooooocococcccnncccconononnccnnnnnnnnnn ono cnn nan nn naar nn nn cnn nn nrannnnnn nano 175 Executing a SplaSheF oooccoconcccnccococcccnncccnnnnannccnnnncnnnnnn nn nn cn narra nnnnnnnnno 176 Some Example Category SetUpPS ooocooccccnnnccoccncoonncconnncnnnnnnnnncnnnncnannnnnnn noo 176 Some Example Category Setup
383. n rn cnn 202 Automating Frequent Tasks ooonccnnnnnccocccccnncconancnnnncconnncnnnnnnnn cnc nana ncnnnnnns 203 Automate other Applications via OLE oooccccnnncccnnccccaccccnnncconananannccnnnncnnnnnns 203 The Scripting EnvirONMeNt ooocccccnncncncncoocnncnnncconannnn ocn cnnnnccnnnnnn non cncnnncnnnnnns 203 The Script Manager innii mnnn aaa a aa aED iaia 204 Running your first script ooooonnoccccnnnnccnonccoconcnnnnccnnnnnrnnncn cnn cn nana nn nn cn cnn cnn 205 Creating a Simple Script oooonncnnnnnnocccccnnncconnnnananccnnnncnnnnnn non cnnn nc nn nnnnnnnno 206 Editing Existing SCriptS oooonnconcccnnnnnnnonncoonccnnnncnnnnnnrnnncn narco nana n o nn cn cnn nnnnnnns 209 Extended Script Help oooooooonoccccccnnncccononccnnccnnnnonnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnn nn ncnnnancnnnnes 209 The Scripting Output WiNdOW ooccconnnnconcccnnncccnnnnananncnnnnccnnnnn non cnnnnncnnnnnns 209 The IMatch Object Model All classes ooooonnnnncnncccnnnnninnnnccconcccnnnccnannns 210 The IMatch Object Model ooocoooccccnnnccoconocccccccncconannn nc ccnnncnanann ona ccnnnnos 210 Glass OVA oo 210 The Application Class ooonnnnnnincnnnnnnninnnonccncccnnncnnnnnnn cnn cnn nn rra nr nn 212 The Application ClaSS ooooncnnnnnconcccnnnncconnnnonnncnnnncnannnan o nn cnnnncnnnnnns 212 POP ra rata 212 Methods ll N 213 The Database Class ooonncnnnnnccccccnnnnccnnnnncnnncnnnnconnnnno cnn cnn nn rra nr nn 221 Lhe Database Class tiara 221 Fhe Foldericlass
384. nable one of the auto un assign options for these categories This will enforce that the image will be in only one of your workflow categories Example Category Hierarchy for Family Photos If you want to manage your private photo collection with IMatch you can model a family hierarchy in Match in several ways Note Categories in IMatch are unidirectional and have only one parent You cannot model a category that has two parents to resemble a natural ancestor hierarchy 62 My Family Peter Children Paul Children Mary Children This hierarchy allows you to add images from Peter Paul and Mary to your database If you have images of Peters Paul s and Mary s children you put them into the Children sub categories below each Persons name Since you can add images to any number of categories if a Child both belongs to Paul and Mary you put the child s photos into the Children sub categories of Paul and Mary But what if you have a photo that shows both Mary and Paul You can add the photo to both categories Or you create a new category named Mary and Paul and put the images there Or both Categories are very flexible and allow you to do almost everything you want Example Category Hierarchy for Image Workflow Consider you have an original for each of your images This original is the image you originally shot with your camera in CRW format For work you create a TIFF file from this image and then create some addit
385. nannncnnnnccnnnnnn oran cnn ancianas 246 The ImageSorter ClaSS ooonnnncoccccnnnncccnnncccnccnnnncnnnnnnn nn cnn nan nn naar nn nn 246 The ImageSorter class oooonconnnncccccccnnncccnnnnannncnnnncnnnnnnn nro cnnnncnnnnnns 246 The IMBitMap Class oooocconnnccoccccnnncconannnonnccnnnc conan nn nn cnn nn na nan rn nn cnn 249 The IMBitMap Class oooocccccnciconocooccccnnnccnnnnnnnnncnnnncnnnnn non ncnnnncnnnnnns 249 The IMFont ClaSS oooocconncccnnnccoccccccnnconannnannccnnnncn anna r nn ncn nn rra 268 The IMFont class oooooccccnncccccccnnnnccnnnnnannncnnnncno naar nn nn nn cnn crn anar n nn nc nana ncnnnnnns 268 The IPTCStream CaSS oocccconccocccccnnncnnnnnnnnnccnnnncnnnnnnn nn cnn nn rra naar nn rn cnn 270 The IPTCStream Cass ccooooocococcccnncccnnnonannncnnnncconnnnn non ncnnnncnnnnnnnn nn cnnnnncnnnnnes 270 The IPTCFieldCollection Cass ooooocnnnnicnccccnnncconnnnacnnccnnnncnnnnnrn nn cnn 271 The IPTCFieldCollection Cass ooooonnnnccoccccnnncccnnnnannnccnnnncnnnnnnrn nn cnannncnnnnnns 271 The IPTCField Cass ccooooccccnnccococccnncconnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnn rra ncn nn cra nana n ran 272 The IPTCField Cass c0ooooccccnccccononoonnccnnnccnnnnnnnncnnnncnnnnnnn ono ncnnncnnnnnns 272 IPTG EX ample a O 0 272 Gollection Classes csi 272 Errors and Messages ooococcccccccccoconncnnccnnnnnnonnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnns 274 Scripting Building BlOCKS ooononnnncnncccnnnnnnnncccccccnnnnccnannnrnnn cnn nn cra nannnnn no 274 Scripting Bui
386. ncnonocnnnnnconanonnnncnnnccnancccnnass 341 Global variable Application OutputFolder ooooonnoccnonccnoncnconanononccnnnncnonaconnanonnnccnnnccronccnnnnos 341 Global variable Application ScriptFolder ooooocnnnccnonccnonccconancnnancnonccnoncnonna conan ccnnnccnoncccnnoss 341 Global variable Application Templates oooonnccnnonccnonccnonnnonnnononccnonccnonanonnnnonnnncnnccnonacinnoss 341 Global Variables oia on eee oh Sn ee ee ee 195 GNU ident ts Roe ease lee Sn es de a ee 136 Golden Rules cut Seen ok Week Ses ok ee a ee 90 GPS Fields ocios tios Rn oe Wate ion So oe en da 98 Ofay Scale MAS es eel oe Wesabe Pee an ee eee eee 145 Grayscale os s s ins Siva ae uk Geen Sess aug ORE EAA E O Sauk Fae dechdos Bend A dent 189 253 257 TN 147 Groups NN 204 H Hardware and Software emmisoiiainta leida aii N TEE a 348 Bas Tima genoa e a cee a cara ht eee He E E i E E E ae one We ok Been 237 Hasimage Reference iia ook tats oes Oe oe ae ea eee ees ere teed 237 Het Shite a stevie potencies Mer led his at i n 194 195 239 249 257 258 263 Hei ghit Me a lends leccaidaths denis ies caiesihscandslicesgiavvoendatacssleaiseoteateal RRE 195 Hei Stn A OUT 195 Hei shit MM escocia aio 195 E suet faves ietasianatasaaens 16 Help about Match cucioasio orillas iaa eoliano nice 357 A O E T A 163 164 165 within Cate Bories eiiieaen cocaina tennis ica en alocada 60 Hito rallada teca 187 Histo Sd tocador ias 189 E siici 2 s c5 s3 c4stosisieceeigsihsiaa
387. ne Cache A AN 49 MAR A RN 46 Off line cache and the Slide SHOW c cccssscceeseeeceeeeneeeeceeeecesseaeeecesnneeecseeeeeeeeeeeensaaees 49 Offline Pile Handler cuan EEE 45 180 Off line File Handler dies 46 48 OID iuris tae lo ti dde pis 193 221 239 245 Ol Pa ales a eea isis rd dai ba 185 AS aooe terea ereduetara e cov favs ee eana tobicn era cons aseos Eanes Seat 185 Oily aaa A er eE E isa 261 Odin inc o ros dd isis 165 OLE 00d io iii ta 203 OLE Automat Git nt id da a dt 121 OLES rverBusy Timeout sis iss sys eieseesceustouscsbvseescuvs Ep Eee EERE Kone ERACE eeenatese ei 212 Olympus Maker Notes ista iio did doit tues aii ii aoa A SE e donates 380 OMbUAS MA e id Ed a E E eos 16 EXIF Import Workflow while scanning esccesscccesseeesseecsseecsseeeesaeeesaeecseeesseesesaeessaeers 87 ONE tenes ad a e dh e alae oe a Ae oat a LA 84 85 86 One Click Dialog Barinas Gin aes 2005 ate eed ees GS conse aks aes wade EKN REE AA ak 57 58 onlmestate sae oes ee e leet see as 26 396 Only return images assigned to this category coocooccconccnoncncnnnnonanccnonccnonanonnanonnccnnncnanccnnnoss 366 Open System civic 286 Open with cons 41 OpenImageE dio ninia de oa aie 212 OpenImageEditorBitmap ceeceescecsseecesneecsseessscecsseecesseecsaeecscesseecesaeecsaeecseeseneeeesaes 212 Opening Files COPIA a eee el 283 Opening multiple files in the same editor WINdOW oooononccconcccnooncnonncnonannonanonnnccn
388. nfo method of the Application class to get the media id and media serial number of a specific media Or the corresponding properties of the IMFolder class If you leave MedialD and MediaSerial empty IMatch returns the first matching folder in its internal folder list Sub Main dim db as Database set db Application ActiveDatabase Dim mediaid As String Dim mediaserial As String Application GetMedialInfo R mediaid mediaserial Debug Print mediaid Debug Print mediaserial Dim f As IMFolder Set f db GetFolder R Images mediaid mediaserial If Not f Is Nothing Then Debug Print f Name End If End Sub Removelmage Arguments Image The image to be removed DeleteFile Use True to delete the physical file also Return Values This method returns an IMFileOperationResult to indicate the outcome of the operation Description This method removes the given image from the database The image is NOT removed from your file system unless you use True for the DeleteFile parameter Renamelmage Arguments Image The image to be moved 226 NewName The new name for the file file name only no path Return Values This method returns an IMFileOperationResult to indicate the outcome of the operation See above for details Description This method allows you to rename a file on disk The database is updated automatically If a file with the same name as NewName already exists in the directory or the image fil
389. ng environment this includes things like Resize Rotate Convert Frame Color Change Saturation Brightness and Contrast Automating Frequent Tasks If you deal with large numbers of images every day you can write down your most frequent tasks as a script and perform all these operations with a couple of mouse clicks You may copy or move files resize them and write them out in a different file format send files via email to remote clients add watermarks and copyright statements and much more Automate other Applications via OLE If you want to create a full fledged and professional looking catalogs from your image database contents you can use Match Script to automate Microsoft Word or similar applications that support OLE automation If you keep pricing information in your Match database you may use Microsoft Excel to print accounting information or billings You can even link your database with your Microsoft Exchange Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes address books to send images via email to your customers or friends If you have sufficient skills you can even create sophisticated HTML documents directly from IMatch with JavaScript Cascading Style Sheets and all other fancy HTML stuff Tip The IMatch user forum contains numerous scripting samples from other users There is also a section with new and updated scripts at the photools com home page The Scripting Environment The scripting environment is accessibl
390. ng a Client and Project History Another sample for category hierarchies are customers or client You may want to create categories based on your customers clients or projects Client House of Images Projects Stocks Old Houses Feb 2001 Foster Projects Mill Photos Initiative Mullik Imaging Projects Stocks Brewery Images Caribian Impressions 2001 Photo Netzwerk Projects Samples Autumn 200 This hierarchy contains the top level Customer For each customer all projects are added as sub categories Within each project you arrange your images Using such a hierarchy makes it very easy to track your work for a specific customer or project Of course you can combine such a hierarchy with a theme based hierarchy or other hierarchies The possibilities are endless By clicking on Foster for example you get all images for all projects you have ever done for this customer By using a sort preset for the thumbnail view you can arrange this images by various criteria You can also create a second category hierarchy that orders your images based on their topic their location or their contents Since you can add a single image into any number of categories this allows you to create different views on your images Formulas for Folders You can create categories that refer to folders in your database basically like saying This category contains all images in Folder X You can of course also combine several folders in a single category
391. ng the structure of the IPTC information and how it is handled by different applications it has been found that there seems to be no real standard on how to embed IPTC information into JPEG and TIFF files The IPTC standard only describes the structure of the various information items contained in an IPTC block but not how this information is to be embedded into an image file 328 Over the years several formats have been used by different applications to embed IPTC information into images There is a good change that one application can read an IPTC block without problems while another application completely fails to even recognize the embedded information Great care has been taken to make Match compatible with a variety of formats found in digital images today Match reads and understands 5 different IPTC formats found in JPEG and TIFF files It also recognizes a variety of other IPTC formats found in other file formats IMatch itself always writes IPTC information compatible with most applications available on the market today The IPTC information written by IMatch is also fully compatible with Adobe Photoshop and other Adobe products Note Match conserves IPTC information when you edit an image with the Match Image Editor No IPTC information is lost during a load edit and save cycle Where does the IPTC information come from IPTC information can be added manually with application like IMatch Photographers and digital artists o
392. ng this syntax Image EXIF lt Name of the maker note gt 381 For example to get the value of the Canon maker note for White Balance use the following variable name Image EXIF can White Balance Note As all variables maker note variables are case sensitive To get a list of all maker notes supported by your camera open the EXIF editor and then press the Copy to Clipboard button Paste the clipboard contents into Notepad or your favorite text editor and you have a list of all maker note names supported by your camera model The Overlay Bitmap The overlay bitmap allows you to place an extra bitmap somewhere on your target image This feature can be used to add a company logo or a watermark to each resulting image IMatch supports transparent regions in the overlay image either by a transparent color or by using the alpha channel of the overlay bitmap If you use a transparent color choose the color that should appear as transparent with the TRANSPARENT COLOR button You may also increase the TOLERANCE to add colors similar to the color you selected to the transparent region If you enable the ALPHA CHANNEL the overlay bitmap must contain a mask in the alpha channel that masks all transparent areas of the image Currently only files in TIF PNG TGA and PCD store alpha channel information The position and alignment of the overlay bitmap can be relative to the original image or the entire canvas If you select ALIGN WITH
393. nge the size of your images with minimal impact on the overall image quality This option also allows you to change the output DPI resolution of images with certain types JPEG TIFF PSD Sharpens your image Unsharp masking or USM is a traditional film compositing technique used to sharpen edges in an image The Unsharp Masking command corrects blurring introduced during photographing scanning resampling or Red Eye Removal Soften Blur Gaussian Blur Motion Blur Edge Enhance Edge Enhance more Emboss Intensity Detect Add Noise Remove Noise Mosaic Aging Effect Oil Painting Effect External Open File Properties printing You can control the amount of sharpening Strength the number of neighbor pixel used during the sharpening Radius and the threshold which controls how much the sharpened image must differ from the unsharpened image to apply the sharpen effect This tool allows you to remove red eyes from your images caused by direct flash exposure Softens your image to remove unwanted spots or compression marks Applies an adjustable blur effect on your image Applies a Gaussian Blur effect to the image This blur type gives you more control over the blurring process Allows you to apply a motion blur effect to your image simulating the blurred impression of fast motion Enhances the edges of your image sharpens edges Same as a above but even edgier Applies an emboss effec
394. nged KeepTransforms Set this to true to keep existing thumbnail transformations Otherwise lMatch will reset all thumbnail transformations back to neutral Description This method checks the given images for modifications and updates the database if the image has changed Call this method from your scripts when you make modifications on image files on disk to keep the database up to date ImageSorter Description Returns the Image Sorter object for this database You can use this object to sort the contents of an Image collection or an Image bucket SelectFolder Arguments IMFolder The folder to select Description Opens the Database View and selects the given folder SelectCategory Arguments Category The category to select Description Opens the Category View and selects the given category Selectlmage Arguments Image The image to select Description Opens the Database View and selects the folder containing the image Then selects the image in the Thumbnail Viewer ActiveSelection Description 228 Returns a collection of all images in the active selection The active selection depends on the current state of the application and the currently active window Bookmarks Description Returns a collection with all book marked images for this database AddBookmark Arguments Image The image to add to the bookmark collection Description Adds the given image to the bookmark collection of this database AddBoo
395. njunction with PageNo to create multi page files Use one of the following values imfsoOverwrite Overwrite existing file imfsoAppend Append page to exiting file imfsoReplace Replace existing page imfsolnsert Insert before the given page Description Saves the contents of this bitmap object to a file All supported formats can be written except Photo CD which is a read only format ChangeColorResolution Arguments BPP The resulting color resolution Valid values are 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 16 24 32 48 and 64 Options Optional Controls the quality and behavior of the operation Use one of the following IMBitmapColorResOption values imcroNearestColor Nearest Color imcroFixed Fixed Palette imcroOptimized Optimized Palette imcroBrowser Web Browser Standard Palette imcroWindows Windows Default Colors imcroFloydSteinberg Floyd Steinberg dithering imcroStucki Stucki dithering imcroBurkes Burkes dithering imcroSierra Sierra dithering imcroStevensonArce Stevenson Arce dithering 256 imcroJarvis Jarvis dithering imcroOrdered Ordered dithering imcroClustered Clustered dithering Description Changes the color depth Color Resolution of the bitmap The number of bits per pixel used in this operation controls the resulting number of colors in the bitmap You can convert in both ways from lower BPP values to higher values and vice versa Note Many of the higher bitmap operations supplied by the IMBitmap class require a
396. nnccnonacinnnos 340 Optimization Pero MMC A A ee A cle ee 354 Optimized WeD BrowSsers gt cers cta A ates eae Ad Shad eel Daehn IA 189 Optimized for Web Browsers ui a caca 189 Opt cial a ia da 337 Orientation and EXP a 339 pra Smal os 2c Spel Sess tan ai iii poda 243 aNd Selecionar 140 Output Windows DELI PUU S Setkan eset cel onset e e Do oat eL 209 210 CUT PULP OLGEL yore See NN 196 P PA A aa bead aaa eee 2 373 A AAA ON 319 Parent ARRA E A A 234 235 Parseyanables tetas tl e eclesial 212 230 Password Chama nales 360 for databases tai ostia iia tocan 360 O O Mblaniuibaeie ae maakt 212 234 Performancer ata cialis E ati Docs id a all dd 84 354 E E RE 83 PerformanceIdle tte siciliano cialis deci lianas aoi 88 Persistentisini trocito lo opel ale opte acota 243 Persistent Result Seti ti laa aia 158 EN A OT 170 Photo Gallery ii 122 123 337 PhotoC D ui 36 PHOtOSK OPi minna Er N T T ad hie T TNS 329 mdiP Emma aaa 328 layers and Mitra tes 339 The Tools Memoria 375 Photoshop Options ias ts 374 Physical disuelto 46 Planning your database iuris ia 19 A ON 139 141 Polylmage Image Library 2 ese bien nieta ries 356 POSD Cia Seibel a Me a ee Sa ie ct 133 135 PosteriZe 4 5455 2 BEL A E E E E A E E E E 190 261 262 Power Search osei aioe ef A A Aa 127 Preta ete A Ah AA Rh a hed 139 187 Pd ee ed 339 File Formats lt 2 2set cet ah ccsteate e nr e na eras dl 339 Prefix for Cates Ores tics iil esata ei A el ta Sei athena 1
397. nnnn non cn cnn conan nn nn cc nnn cnn 376 Scanning IMageS cccccocncoconcccnnnccnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn cnn nn nr rana n nn nrn nn nr ra nnnnrnnnne 378 Match Online 208 4 ia ca a a 378 Welcome to IMatch oooconnnncccccccnnnnccccnnaoonnccnnncnonannn non ncnnnn cnn nan n nn nc cnn nncnnnnnns 379 EXIF Maker Notes 380 Supported Maker Note Types oooocccoonccoccccccnncccnnnnannncncnnncnanannonnccnnnnos 380 Maker Note Prefixes cc ccccceeeceeesccneeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaes 380 Using Maker Notes in Variables cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaes 381 10 Introduction This user manual contains the complete reference for IMatch It explains every feature in detail and allows you to get the maximum out of this application Quick Start This section shows you how to setup your database and how to index your image collection with Match System Overview In order to get used to Match quickly you should first read the System Overview section This section explains how Match works and how IMatch differs from other browser like applications you may have used before Help Click here to get an overview about this online help and the Overview main modules in IMatch Creating The tutorial section Creating an IMatch Database contains a your step by step example on how to create your first IMatch Database database Follow this example to create a database to hold all your images After you have completed
398. nnnns 151 Color SimilaritY oooononnnnnnnnccnnnnnonnnncoococcnnnnnnnnnnrn ocn nnn nn cnn nn rn ncn cnn rra 152 Color and Shape tii An AN AAMAS AAA ORE i 152 Some notes about Image Matching oooocccnnnicnccccnnnnconananonnnccnnncnonnnnnn nano 152 Combining multiple selectors to form a Selection Template 153 How Selections work Some technical background ooococccccnnncccocccacanccnnnno 154 The Result WindOW ea a a aaa a aaa aaraa pa aa aaa a a aa aaa taae Da e baneban stl vale 155 Phe Result MN AOW a r aaa ae maaa a a aa arae aaa aa aaiae haaati 155 Image Panel Indicators for Result WiINdOWS cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 157 The Result Window Toolbar ooooonnccnnnnnicccccnnnncconnncnanccnnncnannnnn nn cnn 157 Managing Result WiNdOWS ooonnccccccnnnncccnnccoonccnnnncnonanann nn conc n cra nnnnn nn n cnn 158 Modifying the Current selector ooooccccnnccnnnccccoccccnnnccnnnna nn ccnnn cnn nnnnn nn n cnn 158 The Result Set Historyxsienestedet bet a a a r a raa aaa a tel eteletlet lated telstule 160 Persistent Result Sets oooononnnncccccccnnnncccnaancnnncnnnncnnnnnnn cnn cnn nncnnnannnnnno 160 Running Selections on External Images ooooocccnnnccocccccnncccnnnaaanncnnnncnnnnnns 161 Dynamic Categories 162 Assigning images to Categori8sS ocoonnnccnncccnnncccnnnnnoonccnnnncnnnnnnnn occ nannncnnnnnns 162 HOW it WOFKS cocccccccccoconononcccnnncnnnnnnnnncnnnnncnnnnn nn nn cnn nn cnn nan r nn n cn
399. nononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononinineninenos 193 A a A E E a ee teeth ces 53 54 55 A te 266 267 390 NN 241 Dimensions Or S126 sisus en n E E vecaoees seed EE Adria 126 Duplicate Images ia a E E E a E E E E EE E ayes 126 AN 126 Similar Colo asadas 126 End aaa 359 Pidime Images td o cra een 32 126 Flash Pike 2 2s a es a e rel as a ga Le O 36 Flipa i ana E E E EE E EEE EEE rara ea 56 184 Flipped nan an ae ea Soe E Shs ed EA EE 151 Folder Mio tin re ERE on E A oe ee id es 65 66 194 239 Friendly Name Luca e E de 27 28 One Click Barret aen s A es cis a 57 FolderAuto Retreshix damene eset tei a a a a e 28 older Class a oi 233 Folder Histotias ais aran 30 History for Folder Srni sus cis iii Da 30 Polder Retreat Edel atada 28 Auto Refresh options Automatic rescan option Automatic folder monitoring Folder Monitoring monitoring folders for MOdIfiCatiONS ooocnonccnononcnoncconnncnonanonnacononccnonccnanacinnnos 344 Folder tb tdi cadillacs 26 40 AA a Da dd E Dc thet 26 HOLM EL Otto coritainoloncia cit tae dilatan detailed esla dilatan dai cite 170 Eolder COMME aci at toda 194 FolderEriendiyNaMe s stn csstcceesdeesing ette neste sate edebecescdee site ri eaer akpi eerie tp ries tan doeet 194 Folder Medal Dni ta data 194 FolderMediaSetial AA seee Enere p eeN KESER Eep SaR KES Pe EEEE EAEKO Esn 194 RNA E E an E E Eee Eee ee esae Versa 359 Folder Thumbnail is diee ensaian aN a aN eaa Ea TEOS A EEE dianas ninos 234 Folder Watch A E
400. ntage i Application WaitDialogSetText i amp done If the user has cancelled the dialog box exit the loop If Application WaitDialogIsCanceled Then Exit For End If Next i Application WaitDialogClose This sample shows a wait dialog box increases the percentage in a loop from 0 to 100 and enables the user to abort the operation at any time Working with Files Working with Files The Basic language provides a rich set of functions that allow you to create open read and write disk files In the context of IMatch these functions can be used to import or export data in all imaginable formats If you need a special output format to communicate with other applications use the building blocks presented above and combine them with the simple but powerful output functions provided by Basic Open the file for output 1 Open c limatch txt For Output As 1 Write the file header 2 Print 1 Width vbTab Height vbTab Date voTab File Name Iterate each image in the active selection and write one line per file Each field in the file is separated by a tabulator the first line is the header with the field names 3 For Each i In db ActiveSelection 4 Print 1 i Width vbTab i Height vbTab i Size vbTab i FileName Next i 5 Close the file Close 1 283 1 Here the file c imatch txt is opened for output If the file already exists it is overwritten 2 This statement writes prints t
401. nter your information into the IPTC editor and then press the SAVE and CLOSE buttons or just the CLOSE button When you hit CLOSE after you have modified the IPTC data of an image the IPTC editor will prompt you to save or discard your changes Tip The caption bar window title of the IPTC editor displays the text modified when the currently selected image has been modified To edit multiple images at once select all images you want to process in a thumbnail window and then start the IPTC editor In the IPTC editor there is always a current image or template image This is the image currently selected The information of this image is displayed in the editor and the thumbnail of the image is shown on the first pane With the multi image and single image button at the bottom of the IPTC editor you can control whether your changes are written to all selected images or only to the current image If the button is pressed Match will write the fields displayed for the current image to all selected images If the button is depressed Match works only on the current image The multi image is a great tool to add IPTC captions to a unlimited number of images at once For example when you want to add your copyright information agency code or similar information to all your new images you should enter this information for the first image and then press the multi single button before you press SAVE Tip The caption bar of the IPTC e
402. nting afterwards Methods Folders Description Returns a collection of all folders contained in this database RootFolders Description 221 Returns a collection of all root folders folders with no parents in this database CreateFolders Description Returns an empty Folders collection You can use the Add Remove methods of the Folders collection to add or remove individual folders from the collection Categories Description Returns a collection of all categories in this database You can use an expression like Set c db Categories Test to get an instance of the category with the name Test Please be aware that Match will return the first category with that name unless you specify the full path of the category including all parent categories Use Images Test if you want the category Test which is a sub category if the category Images Getlmages Description Returns an Images collection object containing all images in this database No specific sort order is applied on the images in the collection You can use the class ImageSorter to sort the images in the resulting collection Example This example retrieves the Image object for the given image Dim img as Image set img db GetImages c somefolder someimage jpg This example iterates over all images in the database Dim i as Image for each i db GetImages Debug Print i Name next i CreatelmageBucket Description Creates a new image buc
403. nts dialog and allows you to assign the current selected images to one or more categories see section Categories Category Splasher Gives you access to the Category Splasher This feature allows you to assign images to multiple categories at one mouse click Goto Folder Opens the folder of the current image in the Database View This command is only available in the Category View the Bookmark View and in Result Windows 38 Visual Browse Toggle Bookmark Quick Copy Quick Move Context Scripts Copy Move Edit Rename Smart Rename Review Delete This command allows you browse the contents of the folder that contains the currently selected image allows you to add or remove bookmarks for the current selection contains the history of the last 20 folders to which you copied or moved image files Just select an entry from the sub menus to copy or move the current selection to the same folder allows you to access all scripts from the Context Menu group these commands copy or move image files to any drive on your local computer or a network connection If you choose one of these commands Match will display a dialog box that allows you to select the target folder or choose a folder from the list of recently used folders You can also create new folders right out this dialog box opens the current image in the internal Image Editor See The Image Editor for more information There are two modes available
404. nty of free space and your fastest hard disk Match needs between 3 and 5 of the total size of the images indexed by a database for the database files For example a database that indexes images with a total size of 1 GB 1000 MB Match needs between 3 and 5 MB for the database See also Planning your Databases for additional information Database Backups To backup your database close Match and then copy the entire folder holding your database to a second hard disk or a CD ROM You can also use the Match Backup Wizard to create backups of your database and all other IMatch files presets templates and stuff See also Make Backups for more information Updating Images or adding new images To add new or updated images to your database just run the Database Wizard with lt Ctrl gt lt W gt Choose the first option and then click NEXT Choose the folder containing your images and then continue to the final step of the wizard Tip If the folder is already in your database and you only have added new images downloaded from your camera for example you can use the One click Refresh to update the folder in your database Select the folder you want to update and then click on the One click Refresh in the local toolbar of the Database View Categorizing Images The optimal category structure depends of course on your personal preferences The golden tule is Start simple and add categories on the fly when you need them
405. o aiii 236 Display Col it Id 345 Display KA ea ni ct dd 77 388 Display Info Tipsen aana E E ee Pe ee ee ih 341 Display UnS cosita iia oia E Ea e E Es 344 Settings NN 343 Display Height nsi ara ii 246 Distributing Category Shemasi a aE KEE Ae Rea ARA lee idee 315 Double i ii A A A odos 76 doubleclick caia tas naaa 342 DP ati ta i Da ci 120 188 DPEresolutioO e Solis atico tanda 290 DPI Resolution taria na a aaa 184 chanel adaptada 289 dras and dp cita add 53 copying and MOVING IMAGES mein dad cados 57 DEA WT ext ocedite e en deviate Gavin devses Ben sce hades ect Sees ees eee sasha Seaton 267 Drill ehhh tanatorio cia 142 Dropshad OW ss 232057 oa RA tacita opa A E 269 270 Duplicate WIth TMA BES oe eect i cassie eects td E E ants E E otet set auetevesctet savy niet AA 192 Duplicate images PATON Pies ios O votes svteaentedssctet sen austenes tet eave ateteddectetat 126 Duplicates PATI Sot O scores sveerentedssctet set austenes tet seve atetevdecteters 151 Duplicating A e a salle to de Gates seach 192 DAVA D ARE O NRO 46 47 48 376 377 Brien dl yi NAME tia a a A tdt 27 Olmeca rta 49 offline m dias a ekoe Re tet aee Re aeea Er Re stu eaate devotee step ESERE IEE SEa MENER S 45 Dynamic Cate soria ihien e E a aE Ea Ea S E EE aise 124 Dynamic Category concepts ra a a S S E E E N aE ESE 31 E Edge Fnhancement peesi E AEE E N E AT E ER RE 184 Edges AULO EE S 186 Edit rtn T a e E AE A E R ARRE R 38 Edit Statene E E E
406. o change it TW Panel Background selected focused TV Panel Text Color selected TV Panel Highlight Color TV Panel Shadow Color TW Panel Highlight Color selected TY Panel Shadow Color selected coca Figure 201 The Color option dialog Color Management Color Management allows applications like IMatch to display images with correct colors on a wide variety of devices Some image formats allow for embedded color profiles These profiles can be used to transform the colors in the image to match a specific output device like a monitor or printer In addition devices like printers or monitors also have color profiles which tell applications how to transform colors of an image to match the colors of the device IMatch supports embedded profiles in images and also monitor profiles Why is Color Proofing Important Displaying images correctly on your monitor is very important when you make corrections on your images If your monitor is badly adjusted to dark or to bright or uses a wrong color temperature your images may look bad when they are displayed on another monitor after you have modified your images in a way that they look good on your monitor All monitors display colors slightly different and hence what may look good on one monitor may look way off on another monitor To get the optimal colors from your images make sure you use a monitor pro
407. od returns a ResultSetOriginal object that represents the original image Matches This method returns all matches as a ResultSetMatches collection 243 The ResultSetOriginal class The ResultSetOriginal class This class represents the original image in a result set Properties URI String R O This property contains the universal resource identifier for the original image If this is a fake original this will be empty Properties Image This method returns the image of the original If the original is an external image or a fake original in an original less result set this method returns nothing The ResultSetMatch class The ResultSetMatch class This class represents one match in a result set Properties Similarity Double R O This method returns the similarity measure for this entry a value between 0 and 100 Methods Image This method returns the mage object for this match The PropertySet class The PropertySet class The PropertySet class represents a property set in your property database This class enables you to read and write the properties stored in your database Properties Name String R O The name of the property set as it appears in the IMatch user interface Description String R O The description of the property set 244 Methods Properties Returns a PropertySetProperties collection describing all properties in the property set Records Returns a PropertyReco
408. odel the database exactly after your individual requirements With categories you can create a Virtual Image Space You then work only with your categories and the images contained in these categories Since IMatch can handle all types of media there is no longer a need to think in folders drives and image files In the virtual image view every image is simply an image totally independent from its physical location An IMatch database can contain any number of categories and sub categories to any depth The category concept of IMatch is easy to understand and even easier to handle Once you get used to this new concept you will be amazed how simple yet powerful it is You may create categories based on Themes Customers Projects Shootings Priorities Image State Printed Edited etc and much much more You can even combine a customer related hierarchy with projects with a theme based hierarchy This way you can order your images into customer projects and into themes at the same time No problem with IMatch Color Coding Categories IMatch supports a Color Coding scheme based on categories Color Coding allows you to assign colors to categories and to view these colors in the thumbnail panels This feature allows you to assign a visual identifier to each of your thumbnails It depends on your requirements and situation what you use this feature for Example uses are Edit States or Priorities To assign a color code to a category s
409. of the selected image s To view the thumbnail window check the corresponding button in the local toolbar of the thumbnail window or press lt Ctrl gt lt 5 gt OCE Figure 97 The Property Window toolbar button The property window contains four tabs Properties IPTC EXIF and Categories By clicking on one of these tabs you switch between different display modes in the property window 321 E Title IMatch Rendered Dias 2 Description 3D Rendering of IMatch Dias created with POVRay and Moray T5 5 E EXIF_Date E EXIF_Camera APA Properties IMC Name IMatch Dias Headline 3 D Rendering of IMatch Dias Caption Title 3 D Rendering of IMatch Dias Content Provider 2001 IMatchimage Inc All rights reserved Images provided by 2001 Some Artists y155 Contact IMatchlmage Inc US Phone 555 528 3472 or 555 9355 US Fax 555 555 4961 Properties PTC EXIF 24 152 96 KB 28 07 2001 13 03 21 m w NUM Date Time 2001 01 19 23 34 25 Original 2001 01 19 23 34 25 Digitized 2001 01 19 23 34 25 y1t55 Exposure 1 25s ShutterS peed Properties J IPTC EXIF 4ALF 2240x1680 24 2 638 33 KB 21 06 2001 21 14 06 m ae INUM Figure 98 The three display modes for the property window categories hidden The Property display shows the contents of your Image property set The IPTC Quick Display shows the IPTC fields contained in the selected image if any If the fil
410. of files with powerful options Shorten or lengthen file names Create image series with the Auto Numbering function Correct file names by replacing sub strings with other text Clean file names from images downloaded from the WWW or the USENET Newsgroups You can access the Smart Rename functionally from the context menus for folders categories thumbnail viewers and bookmarks 91 Smart Rename Hawai 1999 HHHH Smart File Name 7 ES E Hawai 1999 DODO JPG Hawai 1999 0001 JPG Hawai 1999 0002 JPG Hawai 1999 0003 JPG Hawai 1999 0004 JPG Hawai 1999 0005 JPG Hawai 1999 0006 JPG Hawai 1999 0007 JPG Hawai 1999 0008 JPG Figure 111 The Smart Rename dialog box Sending Images via Email If you have an active selection in a thumbnail viewer window you can easily send selected files via email to a customer client or friend Just select the images you want to attach to an email and then choose the SEND command from the DATABASE menu Your normal email client will open with the selected images attached Just enter or select the name of the recipient and proceed as you would do with any other email Send Images via Email Erion Figure 114 Sending Images via Email 92 Manipulating images You can apply a batch processor preset before you send your images Match will run the batch processor on your original images creating copies as required Th
411. oggle into Pan mode by holding down the lt SPACE BAR gt Red Eye Removal To remove red eyes from your images caused by direct flash exposure use the RED EYE REMOVAL tool Zoom in the image until the eye of the person fills the entire screen Select the red portion of the eye plus some extra space outside with the circular lasso tool image editor toolbar Then open the Red Eye Removal tool from the IMAGE menu Red Eye Removal IES C xj Processing Mode al Threshold 97 o od E Choose Color Reset 8 w Figure 128 Red Eye Removal dialog IMatch contains two automatic red eye removal modes and a manual mode Start with the Auto 1 mode and check the result Tip Use the zoom tool in the preview window to enlarge the display of the eye for better control If the results are not satisfactory try Auto Mode 2 Each of these two modes uses different features of the image to determine and correct the effect caused by the flash to the persons eye If none of the automatic modes produces satisfactory results you can switch to the manual mode Use the THRESHOLD LIGHTNESS and COLOR controls to replace the red color in the iris with a color of your choice Finally click OK to apply the correction to your image Repeat this step with the second eye 373 Photoshop Options Photoshop PSD files are somewhat special Only certain parts of the file format are documented for newer Photoshop
412. olor I Use Background Bitmap Filename oO E Alignment rie z T Use Overlay Bitmap Filename ial oe Position Top Left z X p 4 e p Transparent Color Tolerance 10 Y Use alpha channel Figure 133 The Style sheet If you don t use a BACKGROUND BITMAP the entire canvas is filled with the BACKGROUND COLOR If you enable the use of a background bitmap IMatch fills the canvas with the bitmap you choose If the bitmap is smaller than the canvas you can control whether it is tiled or centered using the ALIGNMENT option You can also tile the background bitmap Match fills the whole canvas with tiled copies of the bitmap you select here see Figure 134 FA ANT TIRE AREAS EAS A fie Figure 134 A contact sheet with a tiled background pattern The Overlay Bitmap The overlay bitmap enables you to place a bitmap of any size on top of your canvas and thumbnails This feature allows you to place border masks or a company logo on top of each other content on the contact sheet See Figure 135 for an example of an overlay bitmap An IMatch logo is shown on the bottom right of the contact sheet Using the options available for the overlay bitmap the logo is merged into the existing contact sheet contents and hence the background is visible through the transparent areas in the Match logo bitmap 114 HI001 JPG HI002 JPG HI003 JPG HI004 JPG 640 x 480 640 x 480 640 x 480 640 x 480 47 287 49 865
413. on a column separator or drag the column to the desired width with the mouse Auto fitting a column to the database contents can take a couple of seconds if the table contains a large number of records 80 Open a folder in the DATABASE VIEW Make sure that the property editor is visible by pressing the EY button in the local toolbar of the thumbnail viewer Select an image and have a close look the property editor window at the bottom of the thumbnail viewer Quality Normal y Above Average High Resolution Figure 88 The property editor with the Quality property set If you click on the Quality property of the Image property set Match will display a list with all the records in the property set to which this property is linked Since the Quality property of the Image property set is linked with the Quality property set compare to Figure 86 or below the combo box control will contain all records from that set Since the database links by the property Description of the Quality property set the contents of this property are displayed 15 Lets add some records to the Photographer property set Since this property set contains a reference to the Location property set the second property shown in the editor will allow you to select an entry from the Location property set Now add some records to the Location property set and the Photographer property set to get used to the property editor handling The best thing is to start
414. on the contents of one or more persistent selections use formulas like PersSel My Persistent Selection 1 If Match needs to calculate this formula it will retrieve the current contents of the persistent selection and create a collection with all result images contained in the persistent selection If the persistent selection is updated Match will automatically update the category Tip Ifyou create categories based on persistent selections you are able to manage result sets like categories This feature can be very powerful and time saving when you manage large image collections with frequent updates More on Formulas We want to create a category containing only Birds and Insects To do this first add a new category somewhere in your category hierarchy Label it Birds and Insects Open the category properties dialog via the context menu or the al button in the local toolbar You may also press lt Alt Enter gt to open it Enter the expression Animals Birds OR Animals Insects in the expression field and close the dialog box with the OK button Match will calculate the expression and show all matching images in the thumbnail viewer This formula reads like This category contains all images which are in the category Animals Birds or the category Animals Insects Consider the following category hierarchy People Age Group Babies Children Teens Adults Seniors Gender Female Male Unknown Race Asian Black Caucasi
415. only the images that have been added to this category see Figure 19 2 26 44 W e 28 all 1 Unassigned Images 2 4 Animals amp Birds Fish aA Insects E Mammals amn Figure 17 The Animals hierarchy in the category view 60 Note A parent category always contains the images of all its sub categories so when you click on a parent category you see not only the images in that category but also the images contained in any of its child categories Each image is shown only once even if itis contained in more than one child category An image can be added to multiple categories at the same time Consider a second category Location which is added to the category hierarchy above Animals Birds Location Afrika America North South Australia Pacific Europe For example if you have taken a photo of a Bird in Northern America you will add this image to both the category Animals Birds and Location Amerika North To see all images shot in America just click on the America category To see all photos of Birds just click on this category The photo of our Bird will show up in both categories because it s a Bird and the photo was taken in Northern America But what if you want to see all images showing Birds that have been taken in North America This can easily by done by using categories with formulas explained below Instead of using old fashioned keywords with Match you create categories in the virtu
416. only when you work with folders or categories Result sets have no manual sort order To work with a selection of images in a thumbnail window first select the light table sort order and then select the images Then use the appropriate feature Category Formulas Introduction But Match does not stop here It even allows you to create category formulas to specify complex dependencies between categories For example you may create a category named Animals but not fish by combining the contents of the category Animals with the contents of the category Fish using a formula like this Animals NOT Fish When you click on the category Animals but not fish Match will automatically evaluate the formula and will show only the images that are in the category Animals including its sub categories but which are not in the category Fish Category formulas can also refer to categories from totally different segments of your virtual image view Consider the following categories Location Beach City Mountain People Female Male Cars Porsche BMW Audi GM Ford If you would like to create a category People at the beach you could combine the contents of Beach all images related to the topic Beach with the contents of People all images showing people by defining a formula like this 365 People at the beach Beach AND People If you display the contents of this category Match will show only the images that are in the
417. ontents of the off line cache for display if the media is off line This enables you to browse through your images even if the media is not in the drive 51 Using Off line cache images even if the media is on line You can choose to use the Off line cache images even if the media is on line See OPTIONS PREFERENCES OFF LINE CACHING If you work with large images it may take a while to load them in the preview or the Slide Show If you want to be able to preview images faster you can define that you want to see always the Off line cache version of the image even if the image is on line This setting can be defined for all preview windows under OPTIONS PREFERENCES OFF LINE CACHE and for the Slide Show under OPTIONS PREFERENCES SLIDE SHOW Managing Files With Match Managing Files With IMatch IMatch contains sophisticated functions to move copy delete and rename single or multiple image files in your collection All of these functions are intelligent in a sense that they promote all changes in the file system to the current Match database and hence automatically keep the database up to date These functions are usually also much more powerful than Windows Explorer so it is a good idea to manage your image files from within IMatch Note IMatch actively manages the Files contained in folders indexed by your current database Match needs to know when files are moved updated renamed deleted or otherwise modified If you use the buil
418. or codes you need to enable the Color Coding under OPTIONS PREFERENCES dialog box Select the THUMB VIEW pane and make sure that the SHOW COLOR CODING check box is activated 125 JASkyOOSJPG JASkyOO4 JPG Figure 81 Color Coding in the Thumbnail Viewer Note Color Coding works only for normal categories Formula based categories don t support Color Coding Searching for images Selections Finding Images This section explains how to create and perform database selections queries with IMatch You will learn how to create and maintain selection templates how to execute queries and how to display the result set windows This section also introduces the result set history and the persistent result set feature One of the most import features of Match is its ability to perform complex queries against your image database Selections allow you to Find duplicate images in your image collections even if the images have been resized rotated cropped or resized Find image with similar colors or similar shapes based on original images you select Find images with absolute or relative size or dimensions Find images with similar file names or images that match a specific file name pattern Find images based on an absolute or relative date and timestamp Find images from a sketch you draw Find images that contain specific colors or color combinations Find image with specific properties or properties similar to some ori
419. or all projects you have ever done for this customer By using a sort preset for the thumbnail view you can arrange this images by various criteria You can also create a second category hierarchy that orders your images based on their topic their location or their contents Since you can add a single image into any number of categories this allows you to create different views on your images Example Category Hierarchy for Image Workflow Consider you have an original for each of your images This original is the image you originally shot with your camera in CRW format For work you create a TIFF file from this image and then create some additional derivative images for publishing layout and web Such a hierarchy can be modeled in two different ways at least My Images Mountain Beach Originals TIFFs Layout Versions Web ready This hierarchy has a Title Category on top Mountain Beach and then arranges the different versions of the images below You could also create a hierarchy as the following with a different approach My Images Originals Mountain Beach TIFFs Mountain Beach Layout Versions Mountain Beach Web ready Mountain Beach Here all original images are kept below a single parent category and below that each shooting gets its own category with a descriptive name Then there are separate categories for TIFF Layout and Web versions of the images again with a sub category per shot Tip You should e
420. or color adjusted E File Size E Dimensions Color Similarity E Date and Time This method matches images based on their color distribution in a E File Name quantized histogram This method works good for all kind of images EMD Image Matchers but does not consider specific shapes Y Sketch and Color Dic VA General Matching A x User defined Fi The color and shape match considers color shape and texture in an El User defined Properties image and tries to identify all similar images in your database Use this 2 Plugin Selectors method to get the most accurate match Quick Match faster but a bit more sloppy Fuzzy Match slower but more intelligent Shapeimpotance n Color importance aoe OS I Emphasize image center T Check for mirrored and flipped images slower T Enable shortcut evaluation faster but may be less precise Figure 60 The General Matching selector User defined properties selectors This selector type allows you to create selections based on data contained in your property database see section Image Property Sets ff for more information IMatch contains one special selector type for each data type in a property database Interactive Mode All property selectors allow you to activate a special INTERACTIVE MODE If you enable this option IMatch will always present the Selection Builder dialog box when you run a selection with an interactive selector This enables you to enter the matc
421. ords and Subject These proprietary fields can be modified using the file properties dialog box of Windows XP Simple Mode Windows XP allows you to display these fields in addition to some IPTC and other EXIF fields directly in Windows Explorer IMatch recognizes these fields in UNICODE format and allows you to view them in IMatch import them into the property database and to access these fields via variables and various export modules contact sheets slide show batch processor etc EXIF Quick Display Besides the IPTC QUICK DISPLAY IMatch also contains an EXIF QUICK DISPLAY right below the thumbnail viewer window lt Ctrl gt lt 5 gt If the selected image contains EXIF metadata this information will be visible in the EXIF Quick display automatically 94 Date Time 2001 01 19 23 34 25 Original 2001 01 19 23 34 25 Digitized 2001 01 19 23 34 25 76 5 Exposure 1 25s ShutterS peed Properties J IPTC EXIF 4ALF 224041680 24 2 638 33KB 21 06 2001 21 14 06 um mer Of NUM Figure 108 The EXIF Quick Display If the selected image does not contain valid EXIF information this window will be disabled The information displayed in this window is freely configurable See section EXIF Information for more information on how to configure the display The EXIF Editor IMatch contains a built in EXIF metadata viewer To open it select an EXIF image and choose EXIF EDITOR from the context menu of t
422. ore Match starts to load additional data from your disk After this initial step Match knows all the files that need to be matched with one of the image analysis selectors It then creates an execution plan to optimize the disk transfers in a way that only sequential accesses to your hard disks are required If you enable caching for your database Match needs to read each image data record only once After it has been read from disk Match stores it in main memory for faster access If you have enough memory in your system it is advisable to enable disk caching from within the DATABASE WIZARD However for the first selection that you run Match will need to read the data from disk The larger your database is the more data needs to be read For a 10 000 images database Match will need to transfer about 20 000 000 Bytes 20 MB from disk into memory For a 100 000 images database the data transfer will be about 200 MB This alone takes between 5 and 60 seconds depending on your Operating System and the overall performance of your disk subsystems and your processor If you want optimal performance during the selection process use smaller databases If your system has enough memory enable caching for the databases Run the DATABASE DIAGNOSIS AND OPTIMIZE task from time to time to optimize your database for better performance Note Match is not a simple application It is a very powerful database server combined with a user interface
423. orithms is considered to be a potential end of a word Buffer operators The following operators are provide for compatibility with the GNU regular expression library and Perl regular expressions Y matches the start of a buffer A matches the start of the buffer Y matches the end of a buffer z matches the end of a buffer Z matches the end of a buffer or possibly one or more new line characters followed by the end of the buffer A buffer is considered to consist of the whole sequence passed to the matching algorithms Escape operator The escape character has several meanings Inside a set declaration the escape character is a normal character The escape operator may introduce an operator for example back references or a word operator The escape operator may make the following character normal for example W represents a literal rather than the repeat operator Single character escape sequences The following escape sequences are aliases for single characters Escape Charac Meaning sequence ter 136 code a 0x07 f Ox0C Ox0A n r 0x0D t 0x09 v 0x0B e 0x1B Odd Odd xXX OxxXX x XX OxXX cZ z Miscellaneous escape sequences Bell character Form feed Newline character Carriage return Tab character Vertical tab ASCII Escape character An octal character code where dd is one or more octal digits A hexadecimal character code where XX is one or more h
424. orize images and to perform selections on all kind of data embedded in the image IMatch directly supports IPTC information embedded in JPEG JFIF CRW TIF and Photoshop PSD files IMatch extracts the information contained in the image and is also able to write the information back after editing Note Match updates embedded IPTC information without recompressing the image Thus no quality loss occurs during such updates For TIFF PSD CRW files the IPTC information is embedded in a standard IPTC tag without touching the other information contained in the TIFF file IPTC Import The IPTC import allows you to import the IPTC information contained in image files into your property database You can also automatically assign images into Match categories based on IPTC fields like Category 15 Supplemental Category 20 Keywords 25 and Urgency 10 This feature is indeed exiting because it automatically creates a complete hierarchical category tree from the information already contained in your images Since most stock photography agencies and also most photographers use keywords to categorize their images this gets you an initial category setup for your images in nearly no time 106 keywords Coun ne right BY AW Copy C Prion Fun F F Mountain Figure 172 Importing IPTC information To import IPTC information from your images run the IPTC NAA IMPORT wizard from the DATABASE menu This wizard enables you
425. orizontal Shift Difference Horizontal imspShiftDifferenceVertical Shift Difference Vertical imspLineSegmentHorizontal Line Segment Detection Horz imspLineSegmentVertical Line Segment Detection Vertical imspLineSegmentLR Line Segment Left gt Right imspLineSegmentRL Line Segment Right Left Description Applies a SpatialFilter effect to the bitmap Combine Arguments pSource The source bitmap to combine with Width Width of the area to combine Height Height of the area to combine XDest Column in the result bitmap YDest Row in the result bitmap XSource Column in the source bitmap YSource Row in the source bitmap Flags Controls the operation Use one of the following values imbcfNop Nop no operation imbcfSourceNot Source Not imbcfSourceSetZero Source Set all bits to O imbcfSourceSetOne Source Set all bits to 1 imbcfDestinationNot Destination Not imbcfDestinationSetZero Destination Set all bits to 0 imbcfDestinationSetOneDestination Set all bits to 1 imbcfOR OR Operation imbcfXOR XOR Operation imbcfADD ADD Operation imbcfSubstractSource Substract Source Operation imbcfSubstractDesination Substract Destination Operation 263 imbcfMultiply Multiply Operation imbcfDivideSource Divide Source Operation imbcfDivideDesination Divide Destination Operation imbcfAverage Average Operation imbcfMinimum Minimum Operation imbcfMaximum Maximum Operation imbcfResultNOT Result NOT operation imbcfResultSetZero Result Set all bits to 0 imbcfR
426. ormat is also commonly used It contains the same information as CSV files but with a slightly different format If you want to export comments to your CSV CRC files select an image property from the list Match will retrieve the contents of this property for each exported image and add it to the generated file Select the sort preset you want to use to sort the images that are exported to the file If your selection is based on a folder and you want to process this folder and all it s sub folders recursively make sure that the PROCESS FOLDERS RECURSIVELY option is checked That s all By pressing OK you start the CSV CRC file generation process The files created with Match are compatible to all utilities and application that support the Standard CSV CRC file format Importing and matching CSV CRC files If you get a CSV CRC file and you want to compare it with your Match database select the IMPORT AND MATCH CSV AND CRC CHECKSUM FILES module from the Import Export dialog 313 Match CSV CRC files x File Name extempri esy T File Format csv files with CRC32 checksum Match file names Match file names ignore extension Cancel Help Figure 179 Importing CSV CRC files Select a file name The FILE FORMAT control will automatically switch to the correct file format if the file you selected has one of the standard extensions CSV or CRC If not select the correct file format fro
427. ors like File Size or Dimensions images get a 100 ranking if they meet the criteria you defined or 0 if not Note Unless you change the Result Set Options all selections in IMatch return a maximum of 200 matches per original or in total 140 The Folder Selector This selector allows you to select a set of folders for your selection If you activate this selector Match considers only the files in the selected folders during the match This selector operates in one of two modes FILES IN THE ACTIVE FOLDER If you check this option Match considers only files in the active folder during the selection This option is especially useful if you want to search for similar file names or files in the folder you re currently viewing Combine this option with another selector type to limit the search to the files in the active folder FILES IN SELECTED FOLDER S This option allows you to select a number of folders from a list Match only considers files from these folders during the match You may also check the INCLUDE SUB FOLDERS RECURSIVE option to include the sub folders of the selected folders in your search The Category Selector This selector allows you to select a set of categories for your selection If you activate this selector Match considers only the files in the selected categories during the match This selector operates in one of three modes FILES IN THE ACTIVE CATEGORY If you use this option Match considers only
428. ory Beach If Beach has sub categories images assigned to these categories are not returned This prefix analyzes the images assigned to the category and returns only images that are exclusively assigned to that category This formula returns only images which are assigned to this category only Example CatDistinct Beach This formula returns only the images exclusively assigned to the category Beach All images also assigned to other categories are filtered This prefix does not require a category name It returns all images not yet assigned to a category Example Unassigned If you use this expression as a category formula the category contains all images not assigned to other categories When you assign an image to a category it will vanish from this category This category formula can be used only once in your category tree and must be used as a top level category directly below the special Alll category Creating your Database Step 1 Starting the Wizard To create a new database click on the icon de in the main toolbar or choose the NEW command from the DATABASE menu The NEW DATABASE WIZARD will open 360 2 MS Welcome to the New Database wizard This wizard will assist you with the task of creating a new IMatch database Choose a location for the database on your hard disks gt Define the settings for the thumbnail database Enter a password to protect this database against unau
429. ory and below that each shooting gets its own category with a descriptive name Then there are separate categories for TIFF Layout and Web versions of the images again with a sub category per shot Category Hierarchy for Family Photos If you want to manage your private photo collection with IMatch you can model a family hierarchy in Match in several ways Note Categories in IMatch are unidirectional and have only one parent You cannot model a category that has two parents to resemble a natural ancestor hierarchy My Family Peter Children Paul Children Mary Children This hierarchy allows you to add images from Peter Paul and Mary to your database If you have images of Peters Paul s and Mary s children you put them into the Children sub categories below each Persons name Since you can add images to any number of categories if a Child both belongs to Paul and Mary you put the child s photos into the Children sub categories of Paul and Mary But what if you have a photo that shows both Mary and Paul You can add the photo to both categories Or you create a new category named Mary and Paul and put the images there Or both Categories are very flexible and allow you to do almost everything you want Priorities If you need to rank your images by specific priorities you can easily add a new top level category to your database A1L Priorities High Low Normal By assigning images to one of these three ca
430. otate 90 right Arithmetic Crop Framer Auto Trim Edges Resize Sharpen Unsharp Masking 184 Description This command will turn your image upside down This command will reverse your image Allows you to rotate your image in steps of tenth of a degree Moves the corners of the image in the fashion of a parallelogram Rotates the image by 90 counter clockwise Use Ctrl lt Cursor left gt as a shortcut Rotates the image by 90 clock wise Use Ctrl lt Cursor left gt as a shortcut Allows you combine images with Boolean and binary operators to produce effects If your image has a Selection this command removes all unselected parts of the image This function is great to remove unwanted borders or other stuff from your image This command allows you to add a border to your image or to remove borders from images The latter function works great if your images have unwanted borders or frames This is a very powerful function to automatically remove unwanted borders or frames from an image It works by removing blank space of the selected color from the borders of your image For example if your image has a irregularly shaped black border this function will remove this border automatically leaving the rest of the image untouched Changes the dimensions width and height of your image You can choose a specific pixel size or a percentage of the original image size Several resample methods allow you to cha
431. othing thus totally removing this string from the file name All other characters in your mask are treated as literal normal characters Examples Mask Description Creates an auto numbering series with at least three digits ttt IMatch will format the numbering with leading zeros File names like bear jpg or cat wmf will be transformed into bear001 jpg cat002 wmf Animals Transforms bear jpg and cat wmf into Animals 001 jpg Hit and Animals 002 wmf 2 4H This mask copies over the three first characters of the file name into the resulting file name and adds a 4 digit auto numbering series 317 Beach jpg beachaa 00 jpg will result in Bea0001 jpg and bea0002 jpg Car This mask creates file names starting with Car followed by a HHH sign Then the first 4 characters of the original file name are copied followed by a and a 3 digit number porsche jpg bmw jpg will be transformed into Car pors 001 jpg and Car bmw 002 jpg Image Im This mask will replace all occurrences of Image with Img and g then take over the entire file name Image001 jpg Imagea jpg will result in Img001 jpg and Imga jpg 17201 This replacement token will translate all 20 HTML code for Space into a space characters My 20image 20is 20nice jpg will be transformed to My image is nice jpg IT This mask will remove all blanks from the file names leaving other characters un
432. ou are unable to resolve a shareware related problem with an ASP member by contacting the member directly ASP may be able to help The ASP Ombudsman can help you resolve a dispute or technical problem with an ASP member but does not provide technical support for members products Please contact the ASP Ombudsman online at http www asp shareware com omb Copyright Notice IMatch the Match Logo and photools com are trademarks or registered trademarks of Mario M Westphal Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Various other product names mentioned in passing are registered trademarks trademarks or service marks of their respective owners 16 IMatch Database Backup IMatch comes with a handy database backup tool that allows you to create backups or one of more databases including all your scripts presets personal workspaces and other preferences files IMatch Database Backup xi This assistant will help you to create a backup copy of your lMatch database personal settings workspace scripts presets and backgrounds templates and scripts and other data 1 Select the database to backup 499 files 26 MB required Fsimdbv4 imd ve 2 Select the target folder for the backup operation 4 667 MB free JENBackup IMatchDB 4 K Notes If you have more than one database use different folders for each d
433. ou can add this field to your quick display by adding the following line to your EXIF Expression Image EXIF nik Lens Information The prefix Image EXIF is the same for all maker notes Add the name of your maker note behind that case sensitive and you re done Tip For more information on variables and how to use them see the section Variables here in the online help Technical Information Technical Information Hardware and Software Requirements PC with a Pentium 200 or higher processor or compatible processor Microsoft Windows 98 Windows NT 4 x Windows ME or Windows 2000 Internet Explorer 4 x or higher 64 MB of RAM 128 MB recommended For large databases with 100 000 images and more 256 MB or more recommended for optimal performance Hard disk space 20 MB for the Match software and accompanying files 800 x 600 screen resolution or higher Graphics adapter with 32 000 or more colors True Color recommended 256 color modes are not supported Windows compatible Mouse or other pointing device 348 A note on LZW formats At the moment of writing Match does not support the GIF format and some of the sub formats of TIFF that rely on the patented LZW algorithm Supporting these file formats would require a license from UNISYS Folders used by IMatch IMatch stores all user related contents in the default folder as specified by Windows This folder is referred to as the Personal folder Backgrounds
434. ou can select only from these predefined lists to stay compatible with the ITPC standard All other fields may contain any arbitrary text or data Working with Keywords To add keywords from the thesaurus you can 370 a b d Select the keyword in the drop down list box above the keyword list Open the keyword selector dialog and check uncheck keywords Open the thesaurus and select an existing keyword Here you can also add new keywords to your thesaurus or modify existing keywords Type in a new keyword and press lt Return gt This keyword will be added to the list of keywords of the current image template image but not automatically to the thesaurus Note You can work in the same way with IPTC supplemental categories Only IPTC categories are special because the IPTC standard defines a set of categories and hence you can only select categories from the supplied list The Other Fields and Options Pane Beside the official IPTC fields standardized by the IPTC consortium there exist a variety of application or hardware specific fields During our analysis of several thousands of images with IPTC information we have found not less than 200 different fields that are in use today The bad thing is that often applications use the same field identifier tag id for completely different meanings One application may use a field number like 220 for storing Image Notes while another application uses the same field to store camera o
435. ou re running Windows NT Windows 2000 or a newer version of Windows The Image Information Pane The second pane contains all remaining standard IPTC version 2 fields Again most of the fields are linked to a thesaurus thus enabling you to fill field contents from a thesaurus without the need to retype information Quick Select List Manage Thesaurus Add to thesaurus Add all to thesaurus Delete IMatch IPTC Editor ve 2919n jpg 1 of 1 modified Description Image Information Other Fields and Optibns Category 7 Supplemental Categories 4 E rs 8 8 1 Peated I 0 09 2002 ied IV 1200 r TT Set from EXIF date time information Release I 21 11 2002 y Y 1200 I Set from EXIF date time information Keywords m Status kese SC eC Edt Status Reviewed i Priority none Object Cyole Bon i m Other Originating Program Po yl T Fisture Identifier E y T Location City Weilmiinster y T Province State Hessen T Country Code Deu y Country Germany Original Transmission Reference OTR MwE 85 098920 T Me co olaa lo Bl Close Figure 105 Image Information The CATEGORY COUNTRY CODE and COUNTRY fields on this pane are pre filled with the official IPTC standard codes for these fields Y
436. ou run them against a production database A good method to avoid any kind of trouble is keeping a test database that is only used to develop and test new scripts This database should index a couple of folders that contain copies of your real images In case of an error in your scripts you only damage these copies and not your original images However this type of warning applies to all applications that allow scripting Make sure that your script does what you expect it to do and then have fun Examples of use As said above the capabilities of the built in scripting language are nearly limitless There are numerous uses for this type of power and here are some examples Importing and exporting data With a small script you can export all or parts of your database contents to other applications Since Match Script gives you full access to the file system and OLE automation you can also write and read files or access databases from within IMatch Manipulating Objects in IMatch Using the Match object model you can access any type of object in Match from scripting For example you can iterate over all selected images and perform specific operations on each 202 image You may delete move and copy images You can assign images to categories or the bookmarks collection You can open images in the Match Image Editor or manipulate them directly via scripting All capabilities of the Image Editor are also available from the scripti
437. ou want to find similar images you first need to specify an image to be used as the original image to compare all other images with Some of the selectors don t need an original image An example is the Dimension selector Here you have the choice between a query relative to the dimensions of an original image and an absolute query based on numerical values you enter yourself Relative Find all files with 20 of the original image dimensions or Absolute Find all files less than 800 x 600 pixels Another sample for selectors that don t need original images is the File Size selector Here you have the choice whether you want to define a size relative to an original image Within 10 deviation of the original image or an absolute size All files larger than 500 KB Note A special icon in the selector tree indicates selectors that are configured to use original images If a selection has no selector that needs on original image you may run the selection directly from the SELECTION VIEW else you first need to select some images in a thumbnail viewer The similarity between images in measured as a percentage between 0 and 100 0 means no match and 100 indicates a very good match of course depending on the selectors you use in your selection The Color Similarity Color and Shape and Duplicates selectors rank each image in your database somewhere between 0 and 100 compared to the original image you supply For the simpler select
438. ou want to include thousand separators in the number you can use the built in Format function to generate a valid format Debug Print Total size of all images Format totalsize Bytes For more information about the Format function check out the Language reference accessible via the HELP menu in the Scripting IDE Accessing images in a category Accessing images in a category works basically the same as accessing the images in a folder First you need to get a Category object of the category you re interested in Dim c As Category Set c db ActiveCategory If Not c Is Nothing Then Debug Print The active category is c Name Dim i As Image Dim totalsize As Long For Each i In c Images totalsize totalsize i Size Next i Debug Print Total size of all images Format totalsize Bytes End If This script uses the currently active category calculates the total size of all images in the category and prints the result to the scripting output window If you want to access a specific category you can also create a Category object by name set c db Categories Vehicles Motorbikes Triumph Mario s Bike Please note that the name of the category must be fully qualified including all parent categories If you use only a single name Match will return the first category with a matching name You never need to include the All category in your category names it is implicit Updating o
439. ou want to search for files only in specific folders or categories enable the corresponding selector and choose the folders or categories you want to include in your selection IMatch will return only images that meet all criteria defined by your selector For example if you search to images with similar colors by using the COLOR AND SHAPE algorithm from GENERAL MATCHING you can also use a DIMENSION or FILE SIZE selector to limit the images that are considered by this algorithm With combined selectors you can enhance the performance and query quality of Match a lot so take some time to get used to the different selectors and their possible combination Tip Ifyou have large databases or match a larger number of images at a time try to restrict your initial set as much as possible Use the DIMENSIONS selector the RESULT SET OPTIONS and optionally the FILE SIZE or DATE AND TIME selectors limit the initial number of images that need to bet matches with one of the complex algorithms It is not a good idea to try to match 5 000 or more images at a time IMatch will need to create a result set with 5 000 or more original images and 50 100 or more matches per original This will use up much memory and will also probably take a long time 153 It is always better to match a folder at a time or 1 000 or images How Selections work Some technical background When you perform a selection the amount of information that Match needs to do the
440. ountains Save Delete Cancel Apply Help Figure 129 The Preset Sheet To create a new preset from the current settings type in a name in the edit field at the bottom of the sheet and click on the NEW button IMatch will retrieve all settings from all sheets and create a new preset from that information under the given name Output On the OUTPUT sheet allows you to define the file format for your contact sheets You can choose any of the file formats supported by IMatch The OUTPUT FOLDER contains the folder to which the resulting contact sheet bitmaps are saved With the FILE NAME MASK you control the file names used by IMatch IMatch uses an automatic numbering schema the first sheet always has the number 1 A mask like Sheet will result in the file names Sheet 001 Sheet 002 etc If you use My travel to Hawaii 1999 instead you will get file names My travel to Hawaii 1999 0001 My travel to Hawaii 1999 0002 and so on The CONTACT SHEET DIMENSIONS control group in the lower half of the dialog box controls the size of the canvas You can use different measurement units to control the size of your contact sheet Per default the size of the canvas is defined in pixels Compare to Figure 130 Usual dimensions for contact sheets are 800 x 600 or 1024 x 768 pixels 109 Contact Sheets Much info Ea Presets Output Thumbs Data Style Header and Footer Preview m File an
441. our bookmark collection and the Selection History You can run a selection search your database for images using the Ad hoc search features from the SEARCH menu or by pressing lt Ctrl gt lt M gt anywhere in IMatch Note The Selection View is used to manage selections To Run Execute a selection perform a search against your database you normally switch to the Database or Category View You can only run selections from the Selection View directly if they do not require a set of original images Other selections require you to select one or more images first For example the standard selector Files lt 100 KB can be executed directly from the selection view because it works on the entire database To run other selectors like Duplicate Images you need to select a folder a category or some thumbnails first because this selector needs some original images to work with Tip You can also use the SEARCH menu to run the most frequently used searches against your database See Search for File Names and related topics in this online help The Status Bar The IMatch status bar informs you about various states of Match and your system Database Busy Memory Status Script Indicator E gt NUN L Percentage Indicator Keyboard Indicators Figure 8 The IMatch Status Bar 33 The Percentage indicator is used to show you the progress of specific operations e g database updates file copy operations and the like
442. ouse button or lt Alt gt lt Return gt Properties for Edited Description pr category contains edited images Category formulas allow you define the contents of a category using an expression language Using expressions you can combine the contents of two or more categories via the Boolean operators AND NOT and OR Examples A OR B Images contained in category 4 or in B A AND B Images contained in 4 and in B A NOT B Images contained in category 4 but not in B x Expression OR AND NOT ga EN Only return images assigned to this group don t include images from child categories IV Enable Color Coding categories without expressions only M Color Code If an image is assigned to this category Un assign the image from all categories with the same parent as this category y coca 10 169 Figure 71 The Category Properties dialog In the DESCRIPTION field you may enter a description for your category This description will be shown in the caption of the thumbnail viewer and is also used when you export your data to other applications In the EXPRESSION field you enter your formula Note If you d ever used a search engine on the web you should be familiar with Boolean expressions and the formula concept behind the categories in IMatch Category Prefixes EN A category formula consists of category names folder names or persistent result set names combined via the ope
443. out 100 times faster Don t load several databases at the same time If your databases are large load only one database at a time Match needs to share the available RAM between all loaded databases so more loaded databases means less memory for each database Less memory means slower performance 355 Acknowledgements Acknowledgements This software is based in part on libraries and source code provided by companies standard organizations and individuals Regex Regular Expression Library Copyright c 1998 2001 Dr John Maddock Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation Dr John Maddock makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty Apache Xerces XML Library This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org LIBTIFF Image Library Copyright c 1988 1997 Sam Leffler Copyright c 1991 1997 Silicon Graphics Inc Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that 1 the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all co
444. pies of the software and related documentation and ii the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics JPEG Image Library This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Polylmage Image Library Copyright 2000 2003 Polybytes Inc All Rights Reserved Lead Tools Imaging Library Copyright LEAD Technologies Inc 1991 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Portions of the DICOM help files are reprinted with permission from the National Electrical Manufacturers Association Copyright 1998 by the National Electrical Manufacturers Association All rights including translation into other languages reserved under the Universal Copyright Convention the Berne Convention or the Protection of Literacy and Artistic Works and the International and Pan American Copyright Conventions Portions of the PCDLIB32 DLL PCDLIB DLL LFFPX7 DLL and LFKODAK DLL files contain material that is Copyright Eastman Kodak Company 1996 356 Portions of the LFFPX7 DLL and LFKODAK DLL files contain material that is Copyright Hewlett Packard 1996 The FlashPix format uses Microsoft s OLE structured storage The ImageMagick Library Copyright C 2003 ImageMagick Studio a non profit organization dedicated to making software imaging solutions freely available The official Image
445. plemental categories will only be updated depending on the write mode if they have been modified in the template image by adding or removing a keyword or supplemental category But what if you only want to merge the keywords from the current template image with the keywords already existing in your images For this special case the IPTC editor allows you to force an update of keywords and categories by checking the corresponding check boxes on the Keywords pane Check one of these boxes to force the IPTC editor to update existing keywords in your images The keyword category mode on the third tab of the editor controls if existing keywords are replaced or merged See above for more information Examples The following table lists the outcome for various combinations and keywords It is assumed that Image A is currently visible in the editor the template image and that the Image B is updated Image A Image B Write Mode Image B after the write operation A B A C D No C D modifications A B Replace A C D existing A B A B A C D Merge Items A B C D A B C and D are keywords Managing Thesauri For each suitable IPTC field Match allows you to use a thesaurus A thesaurus contains a list of predefined texts that can used to fill the contents of a field Each IPTC field that is linked to a thesaurus has an accompanying thesaurus button next to the edit control or list box To access the contents of the thesaurus click on
446. print media this setting produces the most precise results You even can choose the resolution in Dots Per Inch DPI of the target device Desktop Printer or High Resolution Printing Device If you choose your image to be 13 x 9 inches and the target device has a resolution of 600 DPI the image will become 7800 x 5400 pixels Fixed If you want to resize your image to be of a predefined with or height use this option IMatch will automatically calculate the matching height width based on your setting For example if you want all your images to have a width of 800 pixels set BY WIDTH to 600 and let IMatch do the rest DPI Allows you to change the DPI resolution virtual resolution of the image This resolution is used as a resolution hint or output size intent by some applications and printer drivers 188 The RESAMPLE METHOD allows you to control how Match adds or removes pixels during the resize operation RESIZE is the simplest option but may result in unwanted artifacts or raggedness in the resulting image The RESAMPLE method avoids these effects by a process called interpolation This process considers the surrounding pixels of a pixel that needs to be duplicated removed during a resize operation The BICUBIC method works similar but produces better results than RESAMPLE when you shrink an image The Color Group All functions from the Color group are accessible via the COLOR menu of the Image Editor This menu contains
447. ption in the PROPERTY NAME field of the dialog box and press ENTER Please compare to Figure 83 To complete this step change the DISPLAY HEIGHT field for the Description property to 4 Then press OK to close this dialog box Important You can change the property data type only as long the property is empty This means after you have added data to your property database the existing property data types cannot be changed Metadata Designer Property Browser Data Type String Description a la Default ss Display Heit ft Load Template Save lempate Figure 83 The new properties Title and Description Select any folder in the DATABASE VIEW to open a thumbnail viewer Click on the E icon in the local toolbar or select PROPERTY WINDOW from the VIEW menu to open the property window Use the split frame and resize the property window to be large enough to display all properties Compare to Figure 84 below eee ee l TROO JPG TROTOJPG TR011 JPG 33 96 KB 6 68 KB 22 09 2000 07 12 50 um mmf NUN Li Figure 84 The property window in the thumbnail viewer To add a Title or Description to the selected image just type some text in the property editor When you select another image or window IMatch will automatically save the new content into the property database To set the same title or description for multiple images at the same time just select the images in the thumbnail viewe
448. r See also Category Splashers for more information Quick Access ES BR Aa oe Landscapes 1 Scanned 2 Edited 3 Reviewed 4 Finished 5 Archived Figure 78 The Quick Access button for the Category Splasher From the local toolbar of the thumbnail viewer you also have direct access to the first 20 of your splashers in alphabetical order To open the menu just click on the down arrow next to the Category Splasher toolbar button To apply a splasher click on an entry in the menu You can control which splasher items are displayed by naming the splashers accordingly Some Example Category Setups Some Example Category Setups You can create any type of categories in your database at any hierarchy depth Besides the usual Theme based categories there are several other hierarchies that may be useful to you 176 Modeling a Client and Project History Another sample for category hierarchies are customers or client You may want to create categories based on your customers clients or projects Client House of Images Projects Stocks Old Houses Feb 2001 Foster Projects Mill Photos Initiative Mullik Imaging Projects Stocks Brewery Images Caribian Impressions 2001 Photo Netzwerk Projects Samples Autumn 200 This hierarchy contains the top level Customer For each customer all projects are added as sub categories Within each project you arrange your images Using such a hierarchy makes it very easy to track your wo
449. r database workspace window Select the category under which you want to add a new sub category If you want to add a top level category select the ALI category that represents the root of all categories Then press the lt Ins gt key to insert a new category Enter a name for the new category and press enter to complete the operation Match will automatically sort the new category under its parent category in alphabetic order 167 You can rename a category at any time by selecting the RENAME command from the context menu or by clicking on the item itself much like you would rename a file in the Windows Explorer To delete a category select the REMOVE command from the context menu or press lt Del gt IMatch will ask you if you are sure and then delete the category If the category has sub categories these categories will be deleted also Note When you delete categories IMatch will first check whether the category is referenced in a category formula see below If this is the case you first need to remove the category from all formulas before you can delete it This is a security mechanism that prevents category formulas from becoming invalid When you create sub categories Match will automatically roll up the sub categories to their parent category When you click on a category you will also see all images contained in one or more of the sub categories of the selected category Using Drag and Drop to manage your categorie
450. r Help press F1 m Nuw 4 Figure 54 Finding images with specific colors For my test database this selection returns the result shown in Figure 55 Imagine how long it would take to find all these images manually by browsing your database folder by folder IMatch Results for Sketch 4 7 Database Edit Image View Options Window Help CIEN MFO328JPG 86 18 FB021 JPG FBO46 JPG JG1415 JPG FB015 JPG FB067 JPG 85 48 84 96 84 87 84 65 PHOTOS PHOTOS PHOTOS PHOTOS Blumen Antiquit ten Blumen Blumen RAMA IPR 4161215 IPG MEF1277 1PG FRAN IPR For Help press F1 m NUM MENS IPR ARONA IPR Figure 55 The result for a search on images that contain large amounts of blue and yellow To define such a query select the colors you want in the color selector at the upper right of the selector editor or enter color values in the RGB or HSV Hue Saturation Value edit fields below Simply click on a color to select it and then paint the amount of color you expect to be in the image in the OVERALL COLOR box Each segment of this box represents 5 of the total image summing up to 100 Please note that this match method is intelligent in a sense It will not only find the exact colors you specify but will also apply some fuzziness to find all similar colors nearby You don t have to be too exact here The amount of fuzziness or tolerance that IMatch considers when comparing th
451. r adding images The Database class allows you to add new images or update exiting images in your database Just call the AddImage method with the fully qualified file name Dim result As IMFileOperationResults result db AddImage i photos A Flowers1JG1191 JPG If the image is not in the database it will be added else updated This operation automatically adds the folder of the image to the list of folders managed by the database if the folder is also new Only the images explicitly added with AddImage are added to the database the remaining images in the folder are not indexed automatically 278 Removing images You can remove images from a database with the RemoveImage method Dim result As IMFileOperationResults result db RemoveImage someimg True The second parameter controls whether the file on disk is also removed If you set this parameter to False only the index entry for the file in the database is removed but the disk file remains untouched Setting this to True will also delete the file from your hard disk so be careful Accessing Property Sets IMatch gives you full access to your property database including update operations Iterating all property sets in your database The class PropertySet represents a single property set in your property database Using the PropertySets method of the Database object you can easily iterate over all property sets in your database Dim ps As PropertySet If db Proper
452. r and enter the text in the appropriate property fields 75 All properties you add to the Image property set will immediately appear in the property window in the thumbnail viewer Changing Properties You can change the name of a property at any time However you can change the data type of a property only as long as the property set is empty contains no records Changing a property data type when the set contains records would probably cause data loss due to conversion and hence is not supported in IMatch Hint If its absolutely necessary to change a data type you can export your property database into an XML schema change the property type and all records accordingly and re import the schema into your database However this procedure is not recommended To avoid such problems plan you database carefully or import a pre built schema from one of the standard organizations Property Data Types IMatch supports a variety of data types for properties Each of these data types has been carefully chosen to support easy interchange of data with other applications String The most often used data type Stores text of any length Signed Integer Integer whole number from 2 147 483 648 through 2 147 483 647 Storage size is 4 bytes Unsigned Integer Positive Integer whole number from 0 through 4 294 967 295 Storage size is 4 bytes Signed Long Integer Signed integer whole number with 64 Bits Unsigned Long Integer Positive integ
453. r images The Image Editor Perform basic image manipulations like cropping color correction and rotation Create sophisticated borders and frames Convert your images into more than 50 file formats The Slide Show View your images quickly and in full size Reviewing series of images Present your images to others Image Properties The Image Property Set is the central meta data store in Match Annotate your images Add text date time and other information to your images Import IPTC and EXIF information for sorting and searching IPTC Support Viewing IPTC information The IPTC editor Importing IPTC information for searching and sorting EXIF Meta Data Viewing EXIF information The EXIF Editor Importing EXIF information for searching and sorting Importing and Exporting Data Use the Batch Processor to convert series of images Use the Contact Sheet Builder to create index prints and contact sheets Import IPTC and EXIF information into your property database Import ACDSee compatible description files Import and work with CRC and CSV files Programming Match Learn how to use Match Scripting to enhance Match 358 Create your own scripts to automate frequent tasks The IMatch scripting object model Special Features and Time Savers The Review module allows you to review series of images quickly Use the Smart Renamer for rename series of image quickly and with many options Using Match Folder Watch Sending images
454. r inch DPI for the image XRes Vertical resolution in dots per inch DPI for the image Description Set the vertical and horizontal resolution for the image This information does not change the number of pixels in the image lt only sets the suggested output resolution for the image which may be used by other applications Note Only certain file formats support DPI resolutions TIFF Rotate Arguments Angle The angle in 1 100 degrees FillColor The fill color for the background DoCrop Optional Set this to True to crop the rotated image within the outline of the original image If this is False the image will be resized to fit to the rotated bitmap Description Rotates the bitmap clockwise by the number of degrees given in 1 100 degrees specified Note This operation is not lossless because you need to save the image to make this operation persistent Changelntensity Changes the intensity brightness of the bitmap Valid values are from 1000 to 1000 GammaCorrect Modifies the gamma value for the bitmap Any value gt 0 is suitable 259 ChangeContrast Arguments Amount The amount of change Valid values are from 1000 to 1000 UseHistogram Set this to True to use the actual image histogram during contrast correction This usually leads to better results Description Modifies the contrast of the image Valid values are from 1000 to 1000 HistogramEqualize Bring out the detail in dark areas of t
455. r multiple times in an image file This method always returns an array of Variant containing one entry for each appearance of the field in the image file All field contents are returned as Strings except the fields Create Time Create Date Release Time and Release Date which are returned as Date values for your convenience If a date value is returned both the time and date parts are filled To set update field contents always use arrays of Variants Match will automatically convert the variant into the suitable data type for updating the file To get maximum control over date and time values always use Date variables to update the fields Create Time Create Date Release Time and Release Date IPTC Example The following script loads the IPTC information for a file updates the field Copyright and writes back the information into the file More samples can be found in the Script Samples collection that is part of the Match distribution Dim iptc As IPTCStream Set iptc New IPTCStream Dim res As IMIPTCResults dim newcontent 0 As Variant newcontent 0 My Copyright notice here res iptc ReadFile FileName if res imiptcSuccess then iptc Fields 116 newcontent res iptc WriteFile FileName end if Collection Classes A collection is a sequence of objects of the same type Collection classes serve as containers for a number of Match objects like Images Folders or Categories All collection classes
456. r scanner related information items If you ve used other applications to manage your images in the past it is very likely that these applications simply skipped these non standard fields while reading and displaying the IPTC contents of on image file IMatch IPTC Editor ve 2919n jpg 1 of 1 modified i x Description Image Information Other Fields and Options This table shows all fields described in the IMatch IPTC configuration files that are not part of the normal IPTC standard set You may edit the information in these fields but be aware that Match is unable to validate the field contents It is up to you to enter only valid information to stay compatible with other applications that may process these fields Sublocation Custom Field 1 Custom Field 2 Custom Field 3 Custom Field 4 Custom Field 5 Custom Field 6 Custom Field 7 Custom Field 8 Custom Field 9 ly These options allow you to control how the information in the editor is combined with the information in the image file If you choose to replace the existing information IMatch will overwrite all IPTC fields in the image with the information in the editor The second option will only update the information that is different in c What to do with keywords and categories the editor compared to the information contained in the image All other information remains unchanged Merge items from template image y The third option always keeps existin
457. r temporary cache storage here IMatch will create a sub folder for each database that you use with off line caching enabled Note You can delete the images in the cache folder at any time Match will automatically regenerate the images if they are gone However until you re generate the images during a Rescan operation or explicitly from the Off line Cache properties dialog Match will not be able to use Off line cache features Image Quality The image quality has a great impact on the total size of the off line cache images on your hard disk Higher quality needs more disk space You should try the NORMAL quality first If the results are unsatisfactory for your images try MEDIUM and then HIGH quality Cache images will be saved in JPEG format so the disk space requirements will be fair even 1f you decide to use HIGH quality Preview Size You can either choose a fixed size for your off line cache preview images or a size relative to the size of the original images For most uses a fixed size of about 400 pixels both width and height is sufficient If you have a large screen resolution you can also use 600 or more pixels Please keep in mind that the size of the images also has an influence of the total disk space used for the Off Line cache Program Preferences x Monitor Gamma Slide Show File Format Preferences General Thumb View Colors IPTC EXIF Off Line Cache The off line cache stores screen resolution previews
458. r to folders in your database basically like saying This category contains all images in Folder X You can of course also combine several folders in a single category for example all images on two different CD ROM s or images contained in folders on different drives Properties for FOOTBALL 2 xi Description OR AND NOT amp a Expression Folder file D D ata photos lt DELTA 1008886567 gt off J Enable Color Coding normal categories only Cancel Help Figure 18 Folder Formulas You create a folder formula the same way as other formula categories but instead of combining other category names you combine folder names In Figure 18 you see the category properties dialog with a folder formula It starts with Folder file followed by the name of the folder the media label and media serial number This is an URI unique 65 resource identifier as it is used by IMatch internally to uniquely identify an resource like a file or folder Folder file c photos lt Label Serial gt If you close this dialog with OK Match will store this formula with the category Whenever the contents of the category need to be calculated for example if you want to view them IMatch will query the database for all files in that folder and use the result of this query as the contents of the category If the folder uses in this example has sub folders the images in these folders are not considered as p
459. ractive Mode sissciscenteloivivtebeteletebebvbeteletulitsbebvbetebetulitebebebeteletulatel 145 The File Format Selector oocccooccccncccnncccnncncnncnnnncnonnccnonanonnnnnnncncnnnccnnanons 145 The File Size Sole cl i casesscareciceeseeeavsvssthsseesesvarsvssieersesesvaevesvorssseesteaeanes 145 The Dimensions SelectOr ccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeccneeeeeeeeeseeenaaeeeeees 145 The Date and Time Selector 2 0 0 2 cceeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseennaaeeeeees 146 The File Name Sel Ctol ccccceeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeeeccaeeeeeeeeeeeeetaaeeeeees 146 Smart Fl Name eaaa aaaea aaa E EE EE AE EEEIEE 147 Partial File Name ooooccocnnccnnnccooocccnnnccnnnnnnnnncnnnncnnnnnn non nnnnnn corn nnn nn nn cn nnn rca 147 Regular Expression SlarCh oooooocccnnnccconococnncnnnnconnnnnnnnoconnncnnnnn nono cnnnnnnnnnnns 147 Search Engine Lik8 ooonnococccnnnnccinncccooccccnnnconnnnnnnnccnnnncnnnnnn nn cnn nan crnnnnnnn nano 147 The Sketch and Color Selector ooocoonicccccccnnnccocnnccoonccnnnncnnnnnnnn nn ncnnnncnnnnnns 147 The General Matching selector ooooonnincnccccnnnnccncnccoonncnnnnccnnnnnrn nn cnnnnncnnnnnns 150 User defined properties SelectorS oooonnnconcccnnnncnonncoonnconnnccnnnnnrrnnncnnncnnnnnns 151 Interactive Mode ooooooccccncccocncoconcccnnnccnnnnannnncnnnn conan nn nn nn nan cn naar nn nn cnnnn cnn 151 Finding duplicate images ooooooccccnnnccconccooancnnnnccnnnnnnn nn cn nnn conan nono cn nan cnn
460. ram Arguments Channel The channel to calculate Use one of the following values imchMaster Master Channel imchRed Red Channel imchGreen Green Channel imchBlue Blue Channel Description This method calculates the color histogram for the given channel and returns an array of 256 colors AutoTrim Arguments Threshold Delta value for detecting blank space Starting at each edge of the bitmap and evaluating toward the center any change in intensity that is less than or equal to Threshold is considered blank space Valid values are 0 to 244 Description This method removes borders from the edges of the images by deleting areas of the same color Use this method to automatically remove borders and areas of the same color from the outer areas of an image The IMFont class The IMFont class This class represents a font object with all font attributes available under Windows Font objects are used together with the MBitmap class to add text to an image Properties FaceName String 268 The face name e g Times New Roman or Arial Italic Boolean True if the font is italic cursive Underline Boolean True if the font is underlined Strikeout Boolean True if the font is strikeout like this Size Integer The size of the font in typographical points This sentence is in 10 points This is a 16 points font Bold Boolean True if the font is bold Color OLE_COLOR The color of the font as an R
461. ration files see section IPTC Support The lower list contains all String properties from your Image Property Set Currently you can import IPTC information only into properties with the data type String To create a mapping simply select the IPTC field to import in the upper list and the property to import to in the lower list Click OK to close this dialog box and return to the IPTC Import Wizard You can add any number of field mappings Remember you have to do this only once since IMatch saves these settings as long as your database exists Note Make sure that you don t use the same Image property more than once for your mappings You may map the same IPTC field to different properties in your property database but you can only import one IPTC field per property 308 Automatic Categorizing The IPTC standard specifies 4 field types that fit perfectly into the Match Dynamic Category Concept These field types are Category 15 Supplemental Category 20 Keywords 25 Urgency 10 The field Urgency has a special meaning for IMatch See below for more information To use the information in these fields to create categories and to assign images during the Import just check each of the fields you want to import It is usually a good idea to check all four fields r Automatic Categorizing Parent Category IV Import IPTC category into Match Categories JIPTCCategoy El V Import IPTC supplemental categories into
462. rators AND OR and NOT You can also use parentheses and to control the order of evaluation within the formula All names in an expression must be enclosed by quotes like Animals or Animals Fish To specify sub categories you need to enter the complete name of the category including all parent categories separated by dots The category Fish is a sub category of the category Animals so the complete name of this category is Animals Fish The full specified name for the category Bears is Animals Mammals Bears You don t need to include the Al category in your qualified names All names and Boolean operators must be separated with a blank character Space e Categories cannot contain references to themselves This is called a circular reference and is not allowed For example if a calculated category is a sub category of category A it cannot contain any reference to A in its formula The category properties dialog contains an assistant that helps you to build up your formulas The local toolbar of the dialog allows you to select categories folders and persistent result sets and to insert Boolean operators and parentheses Opens a list with all categories You can select one category from the list by simply clicking on it Opens a list with all folders in your database You can select any of these folders by simply clicking on it If you want also include the sub folders of that folder recursively make sure
463. rce not found on page 36 the image panels have some additional status icons Below the file name the panel shows the image dimensions Width x Height in pixels If the image is in one of the formats FlashPix PhotoCD or JBIG which support multiple resolutions Match will display the text MultiPage instead of numeric image dimensions Below the dimensions Match displays the file size of the image in Kilobytes and the date and time of the last modification of the file As you can see all the interesting information is displayed right where it belongs With the FILE PROPERTIES command from the context menu or lt Ctrl Enter gt you can directly access the Windows file properties dialog If you enable Color Coding see section Color Coding Categories the thumbnail panels also show a Color Coding bar below the thumbnail TROO1 small jpa TROO1 JPG TROO2JPG 320 240x24 640x480 24 640x 480 x 24 26 68 KB 23 47 KB 58 64 KB 36 Figure 36 Color Coding display in thumbnail panels color A B and A B This color bar allows you to see which images belong to which color coded categories at the first sight You can use color coding to prioritize images or to mark images as work in progress or whatever you like Up to 9 colors can be displayed simultaneously per image panel Tip You can configure which information items are displayed in each of the three levels of detail modes in the PREFERENCES THUMB VIEW dialog box Here you can
464. rds additional information about the file like the date and time of the last modification the size on disk the file format the dimensions of the image and much more This information is displayed next to each image in one of the many views in IMatch and allows you to manage your images efficiently and with very little effort Note IMatch only stores links to the images on your hard disk in the database not the images themselves Your images are not duplicated and they stay exactly where they are on your disk or other storage media To start to work with your new database choose a folder that contains at least some image files If your images are stored on a removable media like CD ROM or DVD use the BROWSE button to navigate to the folder on the particular media and drive If you have defined which folder you want to add to your database press NEXT to continue with the next step in the DATABASE WIZARD If you choose a folder here that is already indexed by your database Match will scan the folder for new updated and deleted IMatch will only reprocess images that have been updated or added to the folder since the last ADD FOLDER operation If you have removed images or sub folders from the folder with another application Match will remove these files and folders from your database during the scan process to adjust to these changes 84 Available Options in this step You almost never need to change any of the options in this dialog
465. rds collection with all records contained in the property set Be careful when you use the returned collection with a for each iterator Using such an iterator may require huge amounts of memory for large property sets In such cases use the the Count and access individual records instead to avoid performance penalties The PropertySetProperty class The PropertySetProperty class This class describes the properties contained in a property set Properties OID Long R O The Object Identifier for this property Type IMPropertyType R O The data type of this property See the following table for possible values imptString String of variable length imptint 32 Bit signed integer imptUInt 32 Bit unsigned integer imptlnt64 64 Bit signed Integer imptUInt64 64 Bit unsigned Integer imptDouble Double imptDate Date imptTime Time imptBool Boolean imptCurrency Currency imptURL URL Hyperlink imptReference Reference to another property set Name String R O The name of this property Description String R O The description of this property 245 DisplayHeight Integer R O The display height for interactive applications CurrencySymbol String R O The currency symbol for this property Default Variant R O The default value Methods Reference This method returns a PropertySet object if this property is a reference property Type imptReference else it returns nothing ReferenceProperty
466. re very efficient when you want to use the same text with several IMatch modules In Figure 91 a variable named Copyright is currently selected The content of this variable is a copyright note with a nested variable that returns the current year Copyright O Application Year Mario M Westphal If you use this variable somewhere in IMatch it will resolve to something like Copyright 2003 Mario M Westphal Note that the year 2003 is not hard coded into the Copyright variable The global variable Application Year returns the current year as a four digit number So you don t need to adjust your Copyright notice when the year changes Match takes care that it s always current Using Variables A good example of how variables are used is the CONTACT SHEET BUILDER module refer to section Creating Contact Sheets for more information The OUTPUT property sheet of the Contact Sheet Builder expects an output folder for the generated contact sheet bitmaps You can either type in a path like c temp bitmaps or use a variable instead In Figure 93 the output folder has been specified using a global variable named Application OutputFolder Contact Sheets Test 1 x Presets Output Thumbs Style Data Header and Footer Preview File and Format Output Folder Application eptcaton OutputFoiden 3 Eile Format JPEG 240 24 bit h _ Obtions Figure 93 Using variables In the global variables table above you can re
467. rent system time in a format compatible to the user specific time format settings in the control panel Only hours and minutes are exported Example 12 00 or 05 17 am The current system time in a format compatible to the user specific time format settings in the control panel The time includes hours minutes and seconds Example 12 00 17 or 05 17 23 am The current date in short date format Example 12 24 2000 The current date in long date format Example Sunday September 24 2000 The current year as a four digit number e g 2000 Full name of the current month e g January The number of the current month 01 12 The full name of the current day of month e g Monday The current day of month as digits with leading zero for single digit days 0 31 Table 2 Global Variables In addition to the global and local variables you can define your own variables These user variables can be used wherever other variables can be used All user variables are of type String and may contain any number of characters To create or edit user variables open the USER VARIABLES dialog box from the OPTION menu 196 User Variables x Variables Company Name Rename 11 Delete Value Copyright 9 Application Year Mario M Westphal Description This variable contains the copyright mark for the current year Cancel Help Figure 91 The User Variables dialog box User variables a
468. rge image databases on a normal PC but there are some physical limits even Match cannot ignore The rule is The larger the database the more memory you need Also fast hard disks are always a plus To handle a 100 000 images database your PC should have at least 128 MB of RAM The more RAM the better Tips and Tricks Store databases on your fastest hard disks IMatch needs to access your database frequently So the faster the hard disk is the faster IMatch will be Don t store databases in the same folder as your images Enable database caching 354 If you have sufficient main memory enable the caching of database records in memory DATABASE WIZARD If a database record is in memory Match can access it 100 times faster than on disk However this will eat up much of your main memory about 2KB per image in the database For example to cache a database with 50 000 images you ll need 100 MB RAM plus the additional RAM that is needed to store the internal data structures Add some memory The more memory your computer has Match can use the additional memory to cache frequently used information If your databases are too large to be cashed efficiently adding some more RAM will speed things up Split large databases Instead of creating a database with 200 000 images it is faster to create two databases with 100 000 images In the later case Match can store more information in memory and hence can access the data ab
469. ries to this file these entries will be available in IMatch when you run IMatch the next time Note Always quit Match before you edit any of these files Otherwise IMatch will overwrite your modifications when it shuts down An IPTC configuration file consists of single lines A line starting with a semicolon is considered as a comment line This line contains a comment IMatch also ignores empty lines in the file All other lines must contain valid content Important IMatch does very little validation when loading configuration files Be careful when you edit these files and always keep a valid backup copy in case something goes wrong Creating Content Creating Contact Sheets A contact sheet or index print combines several thumbnails on a larger bitmap the canvas IMatch allows you to create contact sheets of any size with any number of thumbnails You can customize the look of your contact sheets with many options including background and overlay bitmaps customizable text fonts and colors The CONTACT SHEET BUILDER module can be reached via the IMPORT AND EXPORT command from the DATABASE menu The Contact Sheet Builder operates on the current selection The contents of the current selection depend on the current context If you set the focus to a folder in the DATABASE VIEW the current selection contains all images from that folder optionally including all sub folders If you highlight a category and then open the Contact
470. rk for a specific customer or project Of course you can combine such a hierarchy with a theme based hierarchy or other hierarchies The possibilities are endless By clicking on Foster for example you get all images for all projects you have ever done for this customer By using a sort preset for the thumbnail view you can arrange this images by various criteria You can also create a second category hierarchy that orders your images based on their topic their location or their contents Since you can add a single image into any number of categories this allows you to create different views on your images Category Hierarchy for Image Workflow Consider you have an original for each of your images This original is the image you originally shot with your camera in CRW format For work you create a TIFF file from this image and then create some additional derivative images for publishing layout and web Such a hierarchy can be modeled in two different ways at least My Images Mountain Beach Originals TIFFS Layout Versions Web ready This hierarchy has a Title Category on top Mountain Beach and then arranges the different versions of the images below You could also create a hierarchy as the following with a different approach My Images Originals Mountain Beach TIFFs Mountain Beach 177 Layout Versions Mountain Beach Web ready Mountain Beach Here all original images are kept below a single parent categ
471. rm Folder History The local toolbar for the Database View has two arrow buttons that allow you to move forwards and backwards through the folder history Note This feature is also available for Categories a amp IMatch records each of your movements in the folder list and allows you to jump forwards and backwards to the 20 most recently visited folders D Data ipte and NEWSML S ample Images Getty D Data ipte and NEWSML Sample Images PS Multilayer Figure 4 The Folder History Dialog This feature allows you to navigate quickly in your database folder hierarchy By clicking on one of the down arrows next to the arrow buttons you can open the HISTORY dialog This dialog contains the last 20 folders visited By selecting a folder and then by either double clicking on the folder name or by pressing the GO TO button you can jump right to that folder 30 The Category View The Category View displays the category hierarchy of your Match database The Dynamic Category concept is one of the major features of Match It allows you to create a virtual view on all the images in your database using any type of topic or theme It works basically like assigning keywords to images or like putting your images into a boxes or folders on your desk You can put any number of images into a category and you can create any number of categories At any time you can move images from one category to another or even copy ima
472. rn nn nnnn nn n cnn nn nr nnnnnnnnnno 359 Creating your Database ooocoocccccconccoccccccnnnconnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn non cnn nn cnn nnnnnn nano 360 Using the Light Table sort with other features 365 Category Formulas Introduction oooooccccnnnncnnnnccocccccnnncconnnnrnnn cnn nn nnnnnnnnnnnno 365 Category Properties ooooonooocccnnnncccononononccnnnnconannnnnnnnnnnnnn nana n non cnn nn rra nnnnnnnnno 366 IPTC Special Tools ooooocccnnnccccccccnnncconnnannncnnnnnconnnnnn nn cnn nan cn naar nn nn cn nnn cnn 368 The Descriptio Panesar saradia a 368 Managing IPTC Presets ccccccccceeccseeeeeeeeeeeeecnneeeeeeeeeeeeenaaaes 369 The Image Information Pane oooooccccnnncccnnccoonnconnncnonnnannnoccnnncnnnnnns 370 The Other Fields and Options Pane 371 O vars saiavasavaratesetara S 372 BINNING eer eri e O krreererre 373 Red Eye RemoValooooocccccccccocococccncccnnncnannncnnncnnnnncnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnanancannnes 373 Photoshop Options m mem 374 Reset Move Copy LiSt coooonooccccnnnncccnoncconcccnnnnconanannnnccnnnnnnnannn cnn cnnnnnnannnns 374 NE cccccecesecscneeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeceaaaeeeeeeeeseeseuaeeeeeees 374 The Help MeNU coococcccccnncccnnnnonnncnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnro nan nro nn nn nan nrnnnnn nn nn nnanrncnnnnnes 374 IO PS a a la E 375 The Tools MeNU oooocccnnnccccnncooonccnnnncnnnnnno non cnnnnnconnnnn nono rn cnn nr naar nn nn cnn n nn cnn 375 Relocating Folders oooooccconnnccocccnnnccnonononnncnnnnncnn
473. rous properties and methods to get access to the information associated with each image in your database If your script works on files you usually use the active selection as the set of images to work with The active selection depends on the current state of IMatch and the current active window If the user has selected and focused a folder the active selection contains all images in that folder If a category is selected the active selection consists of all images in that category direct and indirect via formula If a thumbnail viewer window is active the active selection contains all selected images in the thumbnail viewer To get the active selection you need a valid database object Get the active database dim db as Database 276 set db Application ActiveDatabase if db is nothing then MsgBox Please open a database before running this script exit sub end if Now get all images in the active selection Dim imgs As Images Set imgs db ActiveSelection if imgs Count 0 then MsgBox Please make a selection before running this script exit sub end if Now you can do whatever you want with the images in the selection Dim i As Image for each i in imgs Print the name and the size of the image to the scripting output window Debug Print i Name i Size next i Accessing images in a folder First you need to get the folder object Several methods are applicable here is one Dim f As IMFolder Set
474. rs of its name IMatch will show you all folders containing this search term in a list After you have made your selection press OK to start the copy process You may also use drag and drop to copy files within your database Make a selection and then drag the selection while holding down the lt Ctrl gt key to a folder in the DATABASE VIEW on the left IMatch will copy the images to the target folder and automatically update the database If you don t press the lt Ctrl gt key IMatch will move the images instead The context menu of the thumbnail viewer keeps a list of folders recently used for Copy operations So if you need to copy individual files to the same folder you can simply select one of these folders with the QUICK COPY command Moving Files Make your selection Then choose the MOVE command from the context menu This will open the Move dialog box from which you can choose a folder from the list of recently used folders browse for a folder and even create a new folder as the target for your move operation You may also use drag and drop to move files within your database Make a selection and then drag the selection to a folder in the DATABASE VIEW on the left IMatch will move the images to the target folder and automatically update the database The context menu of the thumbnail viewer keeps a list of folders recently used for Move operations So if you need to move individual files to the same folder you can simply sele
475. rs the regular expression syntax used by IMatch Regular expressions allow you to specify patterns and tokens you wish to find in your database IMatch uses regular expressions in various ways to search for file names text and image properties This section is based on the official documentation to the regexp library developed by Dr John Maddock See also http ourworld compuserve com homepages John_Maddock regexpp htm or www boost org libraries htm for more information about this library See the Open Unix Specification for more information about regular expressions and their use in various environments In Simple Words IMatch allows you to search the text contents file names user defined image properties of your database for specific patterns 130 For example if you want to find all file names containing the word beach or car you can use the FILE NAME SELECTOR or the AD HOC SEARCH FOR FILE NAMES to find these files If you want to scan your user defined image property Title for specific patterns you can use the PROPERTY SELECTORS or the AD HOC SEARCH FOR IMAGE PROPERTIES to do so These are rather simple search terms and you can search for such simple patterns in Match by just specifying the pattern you re looking for in the appropriate fields beach beach car beach car Find all file names or properties containing the word beach Find all file names or properties containing the words beach
476. rse it depends on your requirements how you name these properties and how many properties you create for importing the EXIF information Configuring the EXIF Importer When you first start the EXIF METADATA IMPORTER from the DATABASE IMPORT AND EXPORT menu you will first need to configure it based on your requirements EXIF Import xi This import module allows you to import EXIF information from image files into your property database Once in the property database the information is immediately available for selections and accessible via the scripting engine and all import and export filters Import files from the active selection O blumen p400 foto Import files from selected folders O jets p400 foto H O Y Sample Images F temp C xl IV Process folders recursively IMatch Property EXIF Field Description y EXIF_Date Date and time Original y EXIF_Camera Model y EXIF_FlashOn Flash These settings are stored for later reuse Whenever you do a scan operation on images or update your database otherwise Match will automatically use these settings for importing EXIF Co i H information _ Cancel _ Help Figure 176 The EXIF Importer dialog box First you have the common options on whether you want to work with the actual selection of images or specific folders You can also process folders recursively by checking the corresponding check box The FIEL
477. rt Selection iia dada N tias aval 38 lomera aora id 45 46 PTC ada idad rea 106 107 271 329 363 364 and Scripting mica titi 270 271 and yNON MS cities 323 Batch Processor A eevsaes ests dea cevetna seeks das Ene EEEa favs cvecdavs cauesoy deve deeuta ini 300 Keeping the original file date tiM oooconnnccnnnncnnonncnonncnonanonnnnononncnonccnoncncona conan cnn nccranccnnnnss 341 SEO iii lo ies EE PTAA AE EE E doi slds des 347 Special Tools 20st tosis e e eaaa desis bath oot avshes tale fod hush bale post deed aise vhs ENE iene 368 IPTC Edit Or ix vases fs sci io iria lolis letal cubs litis els lui civ 323 324 325 326 328 PIC portan coil aida bs ews cava iadesi cose 87 106 107 IPTC Information dia isis lali iodo liado Ses isivs iid ais da 347 IPTC Quick Display conocia pias a ea AKOE AAE EN dio 94 321 347 393 IR TG eld ysis sates aya aL ee en 272 A TN 272 IPTCFi eldColl ction Cass iiisvicsi scsi cess scaectesecte ces bectecessecda cus vecuasuasedeadessedsvevstecaeeeasecavevanecaeeens 271 IPTES treats essen deisel iii war aes iia 270 271 IsFil Onlihe 2 uo 223 DONE eens ees es eer ee en eee eee 234 239 lc A A OE 269 Memes a tacita Ta aaa 242 271 J JavaScriPloiniia nicas iia olla clado coda ls cb 203 VAL its 23 es de iii sci us dee cube es cous fun Late lados de Seine lbs do Ging fas lios do Dices idad ds 45 46 BG micas iii las 36 JBIG Standard deiei r n a r teed seks lov cuvsdaed tues AE a EREE EEE N eve
478. rwriting the existing files If the update is an executable it will automatically install on your system Note Make backup copies of all files in your IMatch folder before applying the update just in case something goes wrong In case of failure just restore the original files and contact the program author for assistance Note Make backup copies of all files in your Match folder before applying the update just in case something goes wrong In case of failure just restore the original files and contact the program author for assistance You can use the Check for Update command in the Help menu to let Match check for updates automatically Folders used by IMatch IMatch stores all user related contents in the default folder as specified by Windows This folder is referred to as the Personal folder 18 Backgrounds Bitmaps Brushed and other files common to all users are located below the IMatch program folder a The Preset folder contains pre build Batch Converter Settings Contact Sheet Builder templates and other presets for various modules in IMatch a The Bitmap folder contains bitmaps and textures to be used with the Contact Sheet Builder the Batch Converter and the Frame Builder If you want to use your own backgrounds copy these into this folder a The Scripts folder contains all your Basic Scripts a The Plugins folder contains all plug ins Valid plug ins in this folder are automatically registered during pro
479. s Example Assign a value to the variable MyVar Application Variables Value MyVar 1 Debug Print Application Variables Value OneVar GetApplicationVariable Arguments Name The name of the variable Description Returns the application level variable with the given name as a read only variant data type See the list in section Global Variables for information about the available variables GetUserVariable 214 Arguments Name The name of the variable Description Returns the user defined variable with the given name as a read only variant data type See section User Variables for information about user variables SetUserVariable Arguments Name The name of the variable Value The new value of the variable Description Assigns a new value to the user variable Name See section User Variables for information about user variables Example dim v as Variant v Application GetUserVariable MyCopyright Debug Print v Application SetUserVariable MyCopyright Copyright 2002 by Me ParseVariables Arguments Str Input String containing the string to parse for variables Description Parses the given string and replaces all variables with the corresponding values Example Debug Print Application ParseVariables Application DateShort Debug Print Application ParseVariables User UserName Note To parse image variables like Image Name use the ParseVariables method of the Database
480. s If Not c Is Nothing Then For Each cc In c Children Debug Print cc Name Next cc End If This script will print the names of the first level child categories of the category Events Adding and removing categories Using the Categories collection of the Database object you can add and remove categories db Categories Add My New Category nothing This statement creates a category named My New Category as a child category of the All category If you want to create a new category under an existing category get an Category object for the parent category and then call the Add method with this Category object as the second parameter Dim parent As Category Dim newcat As Category The parent category Set parent db Categories Categories Events Birthday Create a new category below the parent If the function is successful newcat will contain the new Category object Set newcat db Categories Add New Category Name parent Note Categories must be unique If you try to create a category with an already existing name IMatch will raise an exception To remove a category get the Category object for the category you want to remove and then call the Remove method of the categories collection Dim delcat As Category Set delcat db Categories Categories Events Birthday If Not delcat Is Nothing Then db Categories Remove delcat End If Working with Images The Image class provides nume
481. s Size Long R O The size of the image on disk CRC Long R O The 32 BIT CRC checksum of this image DateAdded Date R O Date and time the image was added to the database LastModified Date R O Date and time of the last modification of the image BPP Short R O The color depth of the image in bits per pixel OID Long R O The unique object identifier for this image IsOnline Boolean R O True if this file is online Methods Folder Return Values A Folder object Description This method returns the folder containing this image as a Folder object Categories Return Values A Categories object 239 Description This method returns a collection of all categories containing this image Properties Return Values A PropertyRecord object Description Returns the property record for this image Using this object you can get and set all user defined properties for this image The ImageBucket class The ImageBucket class The ImageBucket is used to store collections of Image objects It works like a bucket or a bin you can add any number of Images to a bucket and iterate over the images in the collection at any time An ImageBucket is always associated with exactly one database You cannot add or maintain images of different databases in an ImageBucket ImageBucket allows you to combine images from various sources into one single collection While adding images to the bucket you c
482. s The Category Viewer allows you to move or copy categories by using drag and drop You can even create category references using only your mouse To move copy or reference a category select the source category with the mouse While holding down the left mouse button select a target category This target category will become the parent category of the selected category When you are satisfied with your target selection release the left mouse button A dialog box will appear Category Operation E x Please choose the action you want to perform or click Cancel to abort Create a copy of the category Create a category reference Reorder the category C Above the selected category Below the selected category Cancel Help Figure 70 The drag and drop operation dialog box Select the action you want to execute and press OK If you copy a category IMatch will create an exact duplicate of that category The copy is independent from the original category A category reference is simply a category with a formula that references the original category Whenever you modify the contents of the original category the reference category will update accordingly This allows you to use the same category in different places of your category tree without maintaining unwanted copies When you move a category IMatch will remove the selected category from the current parent and assign a new parent to the category 168
483. s The possibility of hard errors that affect the integrity of your database is very low However if it happens make sure that you send me the relevant parts of the log file so I have a chance to correct the problem Save the log file before you continue to repair the database The information in the log file will be probably lost otherwise The Match log file is located in your TEMP folder e g C WINDOWS TEMP It is a normal text file you can view it with Windows NotePad or Write Please extract only the sections beginning with an E gt or an W gt plus about 100 lines above and below these lines Tip You can also access the log file via the HELP menu in IMatch Choose TECHNICAL SUPPORT OPTIONS and then VIEW APPLICATION LOG FILE Then use the DATABASE WIZARD and run the DIAGNOSIS AND OPTIMIZE task Second choice in the wizard This special process can repair almost any damage or corruption on an Match database The worst thing that can happen is that you need to rescan your folders in the database to update replace some missing links Typos and strange language As you might have noticed I m not a native English speaker If you find some typing errors or other kind of strange language please drop me a line Any suggestions and help appreciated ASP Ombudsman Statement This program is produced by a member of the Association of Shareware Professionals ASP ASP wants to make sure that the shareware principle works for you If y
484. s ccooonccoocccccnncconnnconnncncnnncnanannnnncnnnnnos 176 The Image Editor 179 The Image Edilicia 179 What the Image Editor iS NOt oooooocccnnnccnnnncccccccnnnccnananaarnccnnncnnnnnns 179 GeneraliUsage 4 iio 180 ZOOMING ais pat 181 Saving IMag s ciu 181 File Format Options kasi eee 183 Imaging FUNCUONS sich eee eee ee eee a 183 Thelmage GOUD mnene E rrr erence E 184 Nekam ore a a errrrer reer 186 AUTO AIMIENJES ae a a a a Tree serene 186 EA See aeaa a a rere 187 NECO GOUD sa a a a A 189 Modifying Brightness Contrast and Gamma cseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeees 190 Hue Saturation LiQhtneSs ie an a a a a A 191 Color GANAN AA AAA A 191 Printing an image from the Image EditOF ooooconnnncnnccccnnncnnnnccccocccnnncnannnns 192 Variables 193 Variables tits sets 193 Image Atributos es seed el edie ees 193 Global Variabl s ic ui eee eee eee 195 User Variables noes aH oi ti oa a ein 196 Using Variables iia 197 Local Variables vu aia io et oie en ia enn io ers 198 The Image variable Sturm 199 The Variables Selec nines ie see aan 200 Scripting and the IMatch Object Model 202 What can be done with IMatch Scripting c scecceeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeeteee 202 Examples Of USC sx ceeecsseedevesvssueced scensecesd acevo EE 202 Importing and exporting Uata ooooccnnnnncnncccnnncccnonnnannncnnnncnnnnnnn cnn cnnnncnnnnnns 202 Manipulating Objects in IMatch ooooonnnnnnnniniccccnnnncnnnnnconncccnnn cona
485. s 79 IDA rara E ENA aa 94 96 O 56 Oslo e o e tos At e ech oh a Jan Gis et at on een Ll El 56 JPEG adi A A A a a di 79 IPEGTEMS O Mi dE RA is a A eee ae 212 IESO il o eu la waco ee is aah os do Set God eo co bl aah he Ze ae i aah 311 K KeepFileDateTime 5 3 c05 ici tok a ae ai aaa EE ied Wink eas 270 Key indicators li dois 33 Keyboard Database Vie Wii di dacdeans 28 30 Slide ShoWi eii n labs 319 Ehumbrail Window E iii 40 Key Words 61 124 IPTC tise ai is 323 324 325 326 327 328 A scisssdesaials sesinedsestbess distiees AT 323 327 328 using categories instead oli 60 Kodak DER Options 20 io 105 L Label for M dia meeen nnan rE E E cues ccadees veda susuedddunsuedanevancdabevancesnevarccavevancesseaated 47 Fapt NN 21 and Math enirere ar a E E E EEE EE ONEEN E ETE SE E 21 Teast Modified 235 ios 239 LastUpdaten nl 234 A 281 level of detailina A aa 35 36 343 LIC AMAIA AS 77 Ligh Table eT E E AEE E A E E A A AT 45 Resetting the Light Table sort ordet ssresstee ieies iaeiaiai er Kan E seii 45 Ficht Table cinc a E en E Ea OE tala oia 42 248 249 Eight TableSort ii A NA A 44 45 365 LighTableSortBookmarks oonooncnnncononccnoncccnonncnonccnonaconnn conc ncnonccnonnnconnnonn cnn nccnonccinnnos 248 Scripting Sortlmages Scripting SortBucket LighTableSortFolder Light Table Scripting AOdS ort etm O a S 247 Lash FableSortC ate S Ory A eo eeh les aee SEa Vep Ter snug ates Tey SEAE CARET ESR SEN PSGE Sm 246
486. s a bit of tweaking but since IMatch is very fast you should be able to find the images you re looking for within a couple of seconds For example in the test database it took me about 10 seconds to find the image I had in mind If I would have to find the image by browsing the 5 000 image database it would easily have took several hours to find all images with a sky and a more or less sandy bottom IMatch Results for Sketch 11 Tl Database Edit Image View Options Window Help 18 x J e t Be Sl a te Frto window E PHOTOS Amerikanische Amerikanische Ameri MFO774 JPG MF0049 JPG 89 69 89 61 PHOTOS E PHOTOS che Amerikanische Majestatische Amerikanische Bilder Bilder 5 ARCO IPR JRMVN49 IPG MFN241 IPR MFN7AR IPG MFNARS IPR For Help press F1 j m Num Z Figure 59 The result set for images with sky blue at the top and sand color at the bottom The General Matching selector With the General Matching selector you can query your database for similar images and images with similar colors This selector also has a special mode tuned to find duplicate images even if they have been resized rotated or cropped 150 E Q Pre Selectors amp Categories A Folders EY Basic Selectors Duplicate Finder E Result Set Options p P n a P d Use this method if you want to find duplicate images fast even if they E File Format have been cropped resized
487. s compressed Match will need to uncompress the data before it can make use of it Although the compression used in IMatch is very fast and efficient this extra step takes extra time 364 If you enable compression for your database you can save up to 30 to 50 disk space depending on the thumbnail size the number of properties and other variables The performance will drop between 10 and 40 also depending on the database size your computer and the hard disk s you re using If you expect that your database will grow large don t use compression This may sound strange but there is a simple reason behind this statement If the database is too large to fit into memory Match cannot provide efficient caching storing frequently accessed data in memory for faster access This means that Match needs to load large amounts of data from your hard disk when it is needed If the database is compressed this will require decompressing each record in the database over and over again instead of using it directly However if you have much memory 128 256 or even 512 MB Match will use the main memory of your computer for efficient cached access to the image data and this will lead to a much better performance Using the Light Table sort with other features The light table sort order is also available in the Contact Sheet Builder the Batch Processor the Slide Show and from within scripting Note You can choose the light table sort order
488. s help you to understand what a program is doing Good programmers use many comments in their source code Replace this line with the following text MsgBox Hello World Be careful not to change any of the other text in the source code After editing your code should look like this File Edit View Macro Debug Sheet Help Benga Bas Y Object General Option Explicit Sub Main MsgBox Hello World End Sub Figure 191 The source code after editing 208 To bring your code to execution click on the toolbar button with the green arrow You may also choose RUN from the MACRO menu or press the lt F5 gt key If you did everything correctly you should get a message box like this Hello World Figure 192 The output of your first program This may be not too impressive but you will see what else can be done with the scripting language in the remainder of this section Close the message box now by clicking on the OK button Match will return to the IDE window automatically Please save your script now Press the toolbar button with the disk or choose SAVE from the FILE menu of the IDE window Tip Ifyou want to play a bit with the scripting feel free to do so Just open the Editor or Language help from the HELP menu and follow the documentation Expect a couple of hours until you get used to the Basic language and the things that can be accomplished Editing Existing Scripts IMatch comes wi
489. s in the Thumbnail Viewer If you display the thumbnail property window Ctrl 5 below the thumbnail viewer you can also edit category assignments from there IPTC LIF Location Beach Properties IPTC J EXIF Categories 600 x 1 200 px 2 117 25 KB 28 07 2 Fun ja ee Figure 75 Editing Categories in the Thumbnail Property Window To do so enable the category display with the corresponding toolbar button If you double click on any item in this list IMatch displays the normal category assignment dialog Do remove the selected image s from any of the displayed categories select the category name and then press the lt Del gt key Prefixes Category Prefixes The objects within a formula are prefixed with special identifier tokens If no identifier token is given IMatch assumes that the object name refers to another category Category This object identifies a category All images of that category are linked to the current category You can leave this out since it is the default 174 Folder This object is a folder name All images in that folder are linked to the current category Only the images of the given folder are linked the sub folders of that folder are ignored CatNoRecurse Returns only images assigned to the category Filters all images assigned to sub categories See also Special Formulas CatDistinct Returns only images exclusively to this category See also Special Formulas RFolder This object
490. s is also true pDatabase Optional If you use a valid Database object as an argument the Visual Browse dialog will use the thumbnails contained in the database to speed things up If you don t define this argument or the selected folder is not indexed by the database the browser creates thumb nails on the fly 216 Return Value Returns a variant array with the selected folders and or files If BrowseFiles is False the first item in the array contains the name of the selected folder If the array the is empty the user has cancelled the dialog If BrowseFiles is False the returned value contains an array of file names If the array is empty the user has cancelled the dialog Description Opens a Visual Browser dialog box similar to the one used in the IMatch user interface With this dialog you can enable the user to select a folder or files from within your script Example Dim results As Variant results Application VisualBrowse foldername Please select a folder False 0 Nothing If Not IsEmpty results Then MsgBox Selected folder amp results 0 else MsgBox Selection aborted End If Browsing for files results Application VisualBrowse foldername Please select som files True True Nothing If Not IsEmpty results Then Dim 1 As Long MsgBox UBound results LBound results 1 amp Files selected For 1 LBound results To UBound results Debug Print results 1 Next 1 End
491. s is the only field they ever want to write back The ability to modify the EXIF date allows you to correct wrong dates for example when your camera s timer failed to add the correct date to the image 95 To update date and time fields in the EXIF file double click on the corresponding field to open the EXIF Date Editor dialog box Date Editor Ea Date az 04 2001 Cancel Time Today Set todays date Now Set curent time Noon Set time to 12 00 Today and Now Set todays date and current time Figure 110 The EXIF Date and Time Editor dialog box This dialog is pretty self explanatory so you just can play around with it to see how it works When you have set the date and time of your liking press OK to return to the EXIF Editor When you press OK Match will apply the new date and time settings to all selected images IMatch will skip all images that are not EXIF files in the selection and also all files that are read only Note Match can only update date and time fields contained in your image Some images do not contain date and time fields at all and some cameras create only a single date and time field in the image This is a violation of the standard but there s nothing IMatch can do about it In these cases IMatch displays only the date and time fields that are contained in the image so at least you can see what s in your image EXIF Import Image files created with digital cameras store
492. sabled make sure that you first copy an image from the thumbnail window to the clipboard sets the current image as the folder thumbnail for the current folder IMatch will use this image to represent the folder in the DATABASE VIEW Allows you to transform Rotate Mirror Flip Transform Batch Convert Shell Submenu Explorer Context Menu Open Open with File properties your images and thumbnails virtual transforms Note Transforming JPEG files is lossless the images are not re compressed by applying transformations You won t loose any image quality when you transform images using these commands See also Transforming Images for more information Allows you to run the batch processor see section The Batch Processor on the currently selected images Displays the same menu as Windows Explorer for the selected item This menu gives you access to all context commands available for the selected image and all tools which you have added to your context menu ZIP Managers Conversion Tools opens the selected images with their associated application allows you to choose the application which you want to use to open files of the selected type displays the Windows file properties for the current image How to select images There are several ways to select files in the thumbnail viewer Clicking with the mouse on an image panel is the simplest way to select images This will first clear the c
493. ses with several 100 000ths of images and adding the ability to change the size of the thumbnails on the fly would cause an enormous overhead and hence is not supported However you can change the display size of the thumbnails using the Thumb Lens accessible via the local toolbar of all thumbnail windows If you use the 100 setting the thumbnails are displayed in their original size as stored in the database All other settings either enlarge or shrink the thumbnail display 37 CEEI ieee Lens 50 TROOJPG 23 47 KB TRO01 JPG TROD2JPG 23 47 KB 58 64 KB TROO JPG TROOS JPG Figure 37 Different Thumb Lenses The quality of the magnified thumbnails is not optimal especially if you use factors of 200 or above but larger thumbnails give you a better impression on the image without the need to load the original image from disk If you use a thumb lens with a factor less than 100 you can see more thumbnails within the available space for a better overview Image File Commands Most of the functionality in the thumbnail viewer is accessible via the context menu right mouse button the local toolbar in the thumbnail viewer and the IMAGE menu in the main menu bar Run Selection Runs a selection based on the current selection See section Selections Finding Images for more information about selections This command is also available via the SEARCH menu in the main toolbar Categories Opens the Category Assignme
494. sets after stopping the monitor check in the corresponding option in the dialog box Note Intermediate result sets need RAM and disk space If you let the monitor run for a long time this may cause your system to get low on memory Be careful when you use this option Checking a folder for updates can take some time especially if your database is large You can control the update interval with the spin control on the lower right of the dialog box Settings like 10 or 60 minutes are recommended After defining all options you can start the monitor by clicking on the START MONITOR button To hide the IMatch window click on the SHRINK IMATCH TO THE WINDOWS TASKBAR button The Match window will hide and a little cube will show up in the Windows task bar on the bottom of your Windows desktop Clicking on that button will open a menu with some options Double click on this symbol to reopen the Match window The Review Module The Review Module When you add large quantities of images on a regular basis to your database you often need to review categorize rename move delete or copy images To help you to make this job faster IMatch provides a specialized review dialog box Tip The Review dialog box is intended as a time saver when you need to review a large number of images All most frequently used operations and functions are available as one key commands in the dialog to speed up the processing of large runs of images 335
495. sparency information in an alpha channel To add a copyright or pricing and licensing information use the text output functions of the Batch Processor Tip You can create watermarking images with any application that supports alpha channels in bitmaps and some kind of masking Just create an empty bitmap set it to transparent and then use a mask to add some less transparent areas Store the transparency information in the alpha channel of the image and save it to a file format that supports an alpha channel PNG PCD or TIFF In IMatch enable the alpha channel for your overlay image and you will get the see through effect that is typical for watermarks EXIF and IPTC Data EXIF and IPTC Data If you enable the corresponding option under OPTIONS PREFERENCES FILE FORMAT OPTIONS IMatch will copy over IPTC and EXIF information from the source images to the target images The Text Export Filter The Text Export Filter Filter Options This section explains the various options available for this filter File name Enter the file name of the resulting text document Choose a generator type Each generator type produces Generator Type different output Currently only one generator is supported Sort output using this Choose one of your sort presets to define a sort order for sort preset the text document For example if you export the contents of more than one folder to a single document you may want to sort the images by folder an
496. ss allows you to manipulate a property set in your property database The PropertyRecord class represents the properties for a single image in your database The MBitmap class allows you to perform sophisticated image manipulation tasks from the IMatch scripting language The MFont class allows you to add text to images from within scripting The ImageSorter class enables you to sort your images using a variety of criteria The Application Class The Application Class The Application class represents the IMatch application and supplies a number of basic methods and collections The most important collection is the Databases collection which allows you to access to all currently open databases The most frequently used of Application is ActiveDatabase which returns the currently active focused in front database The Application class allows you to manipulate the IMatch status bar to show messages or percentage indicators It supplies a number of standard dialogs for example to browse for files or folders or to allow the user to select a color value Properties Name String R O Returns the name of the application as a read only string Version String R O Returns the application version as a read only string Path String R O Returns the path and name of the application module as a read only string UserName String R O Returns the name of the current user as a read only string The name returned here is e
497. sseecsseecsseecsseeeesaeeesseecseecsneesesaeeesaeers 56 Thumbnail Resetting TransformatioNS oo oooonnnccnonccnnocccnonccnoncconnnnononccnonccnonccnonaconnnc no 56 RESIZE iia uedeuedewdistces Vedansseesdercdevedsnedsvedercdavvesbedees 184 257 258 266 Resizing Images an aa Midst ni iin dhe Rial aie lia ek 187 R solution ninesini r e seauadaadesucdevesabcdenduansdsnecanceeedues 188 Resource and Identifica 45 LAS A NN 34 Restoring BAC ups curando liada padel dan 128 Restoring IMathis micas pelada ri cove E Ta aeaa 20 349 A Sacha Pas Peas hea ches estat ved a Pu Veh ee doe Stic eve oe Gu dacs Pen Sal a E Pe ATE EINN 23 155 Persistelita cani iii ida iia ato 23 399 Result Set Historico lion Paleo aie aati idee Pe te sald 160 Result Set Options esise nsss ee aaa aiii 141 Result Wide 155 156 158 Result Windows NN 158 ResultHistol y ios iros 223 ResuliSet Clas a 243 ResultSetEntry Class iii as 243 ResuliSetMateh Class ia cia 244 ResultSetOrigmal Clas cuota paa aaa pais 244 reversible ia 56 Reviewing masones ed 335 REO aia 170 RGB ata ini el ada 148 189 Rolls uence tn ca 163 Ro0tFOldeTS oia ii aia iii aii 221 RO a E E E ksi en E E a ek Ch Nees Oost cant an hoe 56 184 TAMAS CS cock 5 cSek Lat coe askc A N 38 39 40 41 Rotate landscape images cccesesscceesensceceseeeeeceeneeceeseaeeecsenneeecseeeeeseeaeeeceenaeeeseenneeeeeeas 112 Rotatins Images sissy earen ee ee eE aeoea Eneee e Onee P ae Sug Oaea SEE
498. st contain at least one character The information entered here will be shown in the SCRIPT PANE in the Script Manager The name of the script will be used as the file name under which the script is stored in the Scripts folder of your IMatch installation Name My First Script Author Type your name here if you like Copyright Type here some copyright information if you like Category Pontext Menu af Leave the category empty to assign this script to the default category I Add script to thumbnail viewer context menu Description This is my first script Figure 188 Entering the script information The CATEGORY field allows you to categorize your scripts into different groups If you leave this field empty the script is assigned to the My SCRIPTS group To create a new group just enter a name in this field The sample scripts contained in the Match distribution are all in the SAMPLES group to make them easily identifiable If you check the ADD SCRIPT TO THUMBNAIL VIEWER CONTEXT MENU option the script will be automatically assigned to a special group named Context Menu All scripts contained in this group are accessible via the content menu of the thumbnail viewer You may arrange all frequently used scripts into this group for easier access You may enter a Description for your script This description should contain information about what the script does how to use it and any other information that may be useful 206
499. standard captions categories or keywords and to share these predefined lists with other users in your company or workflow To add new list elements either create a fresh list block from start or edit a list block created with the thesaurus manager Note Match currently supports no predefined lists or thesauri for user defined fields 333 EXIF Metadata Support Advanced Features IMatch FolderWatch IMatch FolderWatch The FolderWatch is a wizard that enables IMatch to monitor changes in the file system and to run operations when a new files are added or existing files are updated The FolderWatch feature is accessible via the DATABASE menu then START FOLDER WATCH Note IMatch automatically monitors the currently selected folder in the DATABASE View If you modify images in this folder IMatch will automatically update the database For example if you edit an image in the current folder in the internal image editor or an external application and you save the image IMatch will reload the image information into your current database The monitor is a great feature when you download images from the Internet or USENET newsgroups IMatch automatically sorts out duplicate images and updates the current database with new or updates images IMatch Folderwatch x Select one or more folders to monitor Duplicates Detection M Include sub folders when monitoring Detect duplicates using the CRC32 checksum
500. t in combination define the layout of a contact sheet Don t get confused by all these measures It s all really simple Starting at the size of your canvas IMatch applies an outer border the sheet margin This margin is used to align the header and the footer area vertically and horizontally The second border is the workspace margin This margin controls the vertical and horizontal margins between the sheet margin and the thumbnail area By modifying the sheet margins you control the left and right borders and the height of the header and footer areas IMatch arranges the thumbnails in the inner area created by the workspace margin Simply speaking if you need more space for the header and footer use larger upper and lower workspace margins The horizontal position of the thumbnails is controlled by the left and right workspace margins IMatch automatically fits the thumbnails within these margins depending on the size of the thumbnails the text position and the number of thumbnails to display per row 110 Workspace Margin Sheet Margin Sheet Margin y c amp SS o o wn Figure 131 Anatomy of a Contact Sheet Thumbs y Sheet Margin S Workspace Marg Workspace Margin The thumb sheet controls the size and appearance of your thumbnails the number of rows and columns per sheet and the workspace margins Contact Sheets A4 6 thumbs Xx Presets Output Thumbs Style Data Head
501. t Scripts Relocate Windows Properties Explore Smart Rename Review Off line Caching Remove Folder from Database Delete Folder Slide Show Creates a new folder as a sub folder of the selected folder Renames the selected folder or changes the Friendly Name of that folder You may also click on the label to rename a folder Runs a rescan operation on the folder This will add or update all new or modified images in that folder Deleted files are automatically removed from the database Note You only need to run a rescan when you modify the contents of a folder outside of IMatch e g when you copy images from Windows Explorer When you move copy rename or delete images within IMatch the database is updated automatically Runs a rescan on the selected folder with the options defined in the last normal rescan To define the settings for the One click rescan choose the corresponding option on the last step of the Scan or Rescan wizard Runs a selection operation on all files in that folder This command allows you to access all scripts from the Context Menu group When you move or rename a folder outside of IMatch you need to relocate it in your databases This operation tells IMatch the new location of the folder When you handle external media in your database and you insert the media into a different drive e g scanned from E and now the media is in drive F you also need to tell IMatch the new location
502. t distance Special Windows XP fields Microsoft has added some proprietary EXIF fields under Windows XP You can view and edit these fields with Windows Explorer See the Windows XP online documentation for more information on these fields XP Title XP Comments XP Author XP Keywords XP Subject Maker Notes Follow this link for more information about Match maker note support EXIF and IPTC variables IMatch allows you to directly access IPTC and EXIF information via special variables These variables can be used wherever you can work with variables like in the Batch Processor the Contact Sheet Builder or from within scripts Tip See also Variables for more information IPTC Variables To access IPTC contents use the following syntax Image IPTC lt Name of the IPTC field gt For example use Image IPTC Copyright to access the contents of the IPTC Copyright field Tip For a list of available IPTC fields see the file imiptctags ipt in your IMatch program folder Match in addition supports some special IPTC date time variables 102 Image IPTC lt Date Field gt ShortDate Image IPTC lt DateField gt LongDate Image IPTC lt Date Field gt DefaultDate Image IPTC lt Time Field gt ShortTime Image IPTC lt Time Field gt LongTime Image IPTC lt Time Field gt DefaultTime Returns a formatted short date like 01 01 2002 for Jan 1 2002 The format of this field depends on your syste
503. t in file commands in IMatch your database will stay in synch with all modifications you make to your image files However if you use external applications to modify image contents or move files and folders with Windows Explorer you need to re sync your database afterwards by rescanning the folders in your database Just select the folder in the Database View and choose Rescan from the context menu In normal operation mode Match automatically monitors the folders in your database for modifications If you click on a folder Match checks the date time of that folder on disk If the folder contents have changed since this folder has been scanned the last time Match prompts you to update the folder contents by performing a rescan operation Note This works only with NTFS drives Drives formatted using FAT or FAT32 file systems don t update the folder timestamp when a file in the folder is changed If you use these file systems you need to rescan your folders manually when you have made modifications to their contents from outside of Match The currently selected folder in the database is also monitored continuously If you for example choose the OPEN command to open an image in an external editor modify it there and save it back Match will recognize this and automatically update the thumbnail image in your database As long as Match runs Match also recognizes modifications made on FAT or FAT32 drives because it monitors these fold
504. t is the number of neighborhood pixels to consider Description Applies an oil painting effect to the bitmap Posterize Arguments Levels The number of bits per color channel to consider Description 261 Applies a Posterize effect to the image Sharpen Arguments Amount Value in the range 1000 Description Sharpens the image Emboss Arguments Direction The direction of the emboss effect Use one of the following values imedNorth North imedNorthEast North East imedEast East imedSouthEast South East imedSouth South imedSouthWest South West imedWest West imedNorthWest North West Amount Value in the range 1000 Default is 500 Description Applies an Emboss effect on the image SpatialFilter Arguments Type The type of the filter Use one of the following values imspNorth Gradient North imspNorthEast Gradient North East imspEast Gradient East imspSouthEast Gradient South East imspSouth Gradient South imspSouthWest Gradient South West imspWest Gradient West imspNorthWest Gradient North West imspLaplace1 Laplace 1 imspLaplace2 Laplace 2 imspLaplace3 Laplace 3 262 imspLaplaceDiagonal Laplace Diagonal imspLaplaceHorizontal Laplace Horizontal imspLaplace Vertical Laplace Vertical imspSobelHorizontal Sobel Horizontal imspSobel Vertical Sobel Vertical imspPrewittHorizontal Prewitt Horizontal imspPrewittVertical Prewitt Vertical imspShiftDifferenceDiagonal Shift Difference Diagonal imspShiftDifferenceH
505. t on the image Filters the bitmap to detect colors in a specified intensity range This filter is great if combined with Color Separation and applied to only one or two channels Allows you to add noise to your image for various artistic effects If your image has too much noise or wrong pixels this function can help It works similar to the Blur effect or the Soften effect but with more intelligence This filter is great if you have some badly scanned images and need to improve the overall quality of the image Applies a mosaic effect on your image Applies a sepia effect to your image to make it look old Transforms your image into something looking like an oil painting Combine with gray scale images or apply to only one channel Opens the image with the associated application This command allows you to open your image directly with your favorite image editing application Displays information about the current image in the Image Editor 185 The Framer The Framer is an image manipulation function specifically designed for adding or removing image borders Figure 120 shows the Framer dialog box with the preview image on the left To add borders simply choose a border with To make all borders the same width make sure that the SYMMETRIC check box is checked The Framer will resize your image automatically so that there is enough space to add the new borders The borders will be drawn outside the original image To remo
506. t time may be a bit challenging but understanding the power and flexibility of regular expressions allows you to search your database efficiently in even the most complex cases Literals All characters are literals except N ici a ae mars cc 3 AEN Man M i ee Aas gn and me These characters are literals when preceded by a A literal is a character that matches itself 131 Wildcard The dot character matches any single character Repeats A repeat is an expression that is repeated an arbitrary number of times An expression followed by can be repeated any number of times including zero An expression followed by can be repeated any number of times but at least once An expression followed by may be repeated zero or one times only When it is necessary to specify the minimum and maximum number of repeats explicitly the bounds operator may be used thus a 2 is the letter a repeated exactly twice a 2 4 represents the letter a repeated between 2 and 4 times and a 2 represents the letter a repeated at least twice with no upper limit Note that there must be no white space inside the and there is no upper limit on the values of the lower and upper bounds Examples ba will match all of b ba baaa etc ba will match ba or baaaa for example but not b ba will match b or ba pa 2 4 will match baa baaa and baaaa Non greedy repeats Whenever the e
507. t to choose a size large enough for comfortable viewing You can use the thumb lens later to reduce the size of the thumbnails for screen display without affecting the size of the thumbnails in your database However the size you choose during database creation is the maximum size you will later get without quality loss The quality setting allows you to define how much the thumbnail images are compressed The default setting here is a good compromise between thumbnail storage requirements and display quality The better the quality for the thumbnails is the larger the resulting thumbnail database will grow using up more space on your hard disk The default setting is a good compromise between quality and the resulting file size imi xj Database location and thumbnail options 1 Please choose a name and location for your database Keep in mind that IMatch a databases may become rather large when you add tens of thousands of images Choose a hard disk with plenty of free space to avoid disk space problems Browse IMatch generates a thumbnail representation for each image in the database for optimal display performance Choose a size and quality factor below that fits your screen m Preview ies Thumbnail Dimensions 100 x 100 z Thumbnail Quality Low Quality High Quality ey Choose a size that is easy to view on your monitor For a 1024 X 768 screen resolution a size of 100 X 1
508. t to the scripting output window Updating your property database To update your property database you also use the Properties method of the Image object However it requires two steps to update a record Dim r As PropertyRecord For Each i In img Make a copy else you would work with transient values Set r 1 Properties Update the properties in the record r Property Serie 1234 Finally write back the property record to the database r Update Next i First you retrieve a copy of the image property set of the image then you update the value of your choice or multiple values and then you call the Update method to write the changes back to the database Note If your property set contains references to other property sets Match will resolve these references automatically and deliver the actual contents of the referenced field For example if your property set has a property Photographer which is a reference to the property set Photographer accessing this property will automatically return the contents of the corresponding field of the Photographer property set Advanced Sample Running a selection on your own The selection methods built into Match cover the most frequently used queries However there may be situations where you need to perform a selection against the images in your database that cannot be done using one of the selectors in IMatch The following script iterates over all images in the d
509. tangle after the category name of folded categories indicates that this category has sub categories and that at least one of these sub categories references one of the images in the current selection 162 If you check one of these intermediate assignments all selected images will be assigned to this category If you leave the checkmark as it is the assignments of the intermediate images will not change IMatch will automatically close the category assignments dialog box when you open another window or select a new folder or category in one of the views Tip You can also assign images to categories using the One click bar How it works For example you may create a category Animals in your database to manage photos with animals Below this category you add several sub categories Fish Insects and Mammals The category Mammals gets a sub category Bears The resulting structure then looks like this P There is obviously a natural hierarchy within these categories we model the real world so to speak The category Animals contains the contents of all its sub categories If you select the Animals category IMatch will open a thumbnail viewer displaying all the images from the categories Animals Birds Fish Insects and Mammals Since Mammals also contains the contents of the category Bears the images assigned to this category will also be shown In IMatch this is called category roll up If you select the category Birds IMatch w
510. tch can t Send your ideas comments suggestions bug reports and usage descriptions to the email addresses found in the support section at www photools com You usually will receive an answer within 48 hours How to report bugs and ideas Send your bug reports suggestions ideas and questions to support photools com Please include as much information in your email as possible Exact description of the error problem idea or suggestion Please clearly state the type of message in the subject e g Error Idea or Suggestion If you include log files or parts of log files please ZIP them with a WinZip PKZIP compatible packer 1 don t have RAR or something like that Please send only short log files 1 MB or less packed If you include screen shots please make them as small as possible Don t send screen shots of your 24 Bit Windows desktop with a tiny little message box on it Use PhotoShop PaintShop Pro or something like that to decrease the color depth to 256 or 16 colors this will save a lot space Crop the image to contain only the required parts e g the message box with an error message or the part of the IMatch screen showing the problem Add all other information that may be of use to identify the problem Always keep in mind that I must be able to reproduce the problems you re describing on one of my machines to provide a solution You can expect an answer within 48 hours 15 Errors and Problem
511. tch database consists of several files All files have the same file name but different extensions Extension Description IMD The IMatch database file IMC The catalog file IM2 Secondary feature database IMP The property database IMT The thumbnail database IMW The work space IML Selection template persistence file WSA Presets file Depending on your particular database some other files may exist in the database folder These files also have the same name as your main database file but different extensions If you move a database always keep these files together The resulting size of an Match database depends on a variety of factors such as number of images thumbnail size and some other variables Usually for medium to large size databases the database needs about 5 to 10 of the total size of images indexed by the database For example a database with 50 000 images with a total size of 10 GB needs between 500 MB and 1 GB of disk space 353 Performance Optimization The IMatch database format has been developed for maximum security and speed When add new files to your database or you move or delete files new records will be allocated and old records will be deleted Match automatically reclaims unused space in database files for new records From time to time an Match database needs to be optimized During such an optimize procedure Match rearranges the records in the database for optimum query performance and over
512. tch with some easy steps e Install the latest Match evaluation version e Install the latest service pack upgrade into the same folder e Restore your databases e Optionally restore the contents of your personal photools com IMatch folder e Run IMatch and adjust your workspace settings windows positions and other configuration options 349 After performing these steps you can continue to work with Match and your databases The Category Schema Format imcs IMatch allows importing and exporting category schemas using a file format called IMCS IMatch Category Schema The format of these files is pretty simple and easy to create An IMCS file is a simple text file and consists of records lines separated by Carriage Return Line Feed pairs Each record contains four fields where two of the fields are optional The fields a separated by semicolons Fully qualified Category Name Formula Comment Color Flags CRLF Fully qualified Category Name This field contains the fully qualified category name including all parent categories This field is mandatory Formula The category formula May be empty and omitted If the category has a comment this field must be emitted but may be empty Comment The comment description for the category May be omitted Color Flags The color for the category May be omitted The category flags May be omitted If a field contains a semicolon the entire field must be
513. te and time of the image file when you update the embedded IPTC or EXIF information This may be quite handy if you sort your files after date and time and want to keep the original sort order even if you modify the IPTC or EXIF information Keep the THM file with the CRW If you work with CRW files you should always keep the THM files because these files allow IMatch to work with IPTC and EXIF information The CRW file format does not support IPTC and EXIF information directly but uses a separate THM file instead IMatch allows you to skip the THM file when you scan a folder to avoid duplicate images visually duplicate in your database However IMatch is aware of the THM files that come with your CRW files If you move copy delete rename a CRW file IMatch checks if there is a THM file with the same name in the same folder If there is such a file IMatch will move copy delete rename these files automatically Important You should always enable this option except you have very good reasons to disable it General Settings This dialog contains all general options that control various aspects of IMatch Program Preferences A ae x IPTC EXIF OfflineCache CanonCRW NikonNEF KodakDCR Display Slide Show File Format Preferences General Thumb View Colors r Directories Preset folder IV Show Folder Thumbnails Size 172 C 1 3 C 14 1 6 JV Develop imatch3 Presets x IV Load last database at startup B
514. te the text by 90 degrees Show Properties and Attributes x Test Margins TT Ailign text within original image Left p 3 Top fa 3 Bight fa 3 Bottom fa 3 Top Image Properties Title a Font fia Center Bottom mage Name ally Fh Image Width x Image Height l mw Image Size H Ler Left Copyright 1998 Application Year Mario M Westphal Font zi Center Y Rotate Right 9 Fon fea Bottom VV Rotate coct 1 297 Figure 163 In Step 4 you can add text attributes and properties to your image Using Variables You can use variables to access to the information stored in the Match database for the original image The Batch Processor publishes the Image Application and User variable sets The preset in Figure 163 uses several variables from the Image variable set and the global variable Application Year to create dynamic output Aloha Hawaii Great beach shoot shortly after sunrise 4 couple of palms at the beach nice shadows HIDOS JPG 640 x 480 71 226 Figure 164 The resulting target image with attributes and properties Note If you want to use IPTC information in the Batch Converter you need to import the IPTC information into your Image Property Set first Some Tips amp Tricks The Batch Processor is an extremely powerful tool when you need to create image catalogs or want to share images with others Besides the
515. tegories you can easily create a priority list for your images You may also want to use Color Coding to emphasize the different priorities This way you can actually see the assigned priorities in the thumbnail window Tip You can add these categories to your One click bar for quick access Edit State If you want to keep an eye on the different phases of an image you can create a workflow model using dynamic categories Here s an example A1L Edit State 1 Scanned 178 2 Reviewed 3 Edited 4 Finished 5 Archived There are 5 phases in an image lifetime By assigning images to one of these categories you can model every thinkable workflow If you want to see all edited images in your database just click on the category and the results are there immediately Edit States are also a good example for the usefulness of Color Coding By assigning different colors to each of the Edit State categories you can easily see the different states in all thumbnail windows Tip You can add these categories to your One click bar for quick access Clever Combinations Perhaps you want to create a workflow based on Clients and Edit State so that you can see immediately which images need to be reworked for each client By combining categories using references or formulas you can create such a view on your database easily To create a category Unedited images for Client A you would create a category based on the formula Clients A A
516. tegories that are part of this splasher Finally choose a short code for the splasher This short code will later be used to execute the splasher on the current image selection You can enter any kind of text here but the shorter the code is the better You cannot assign identical short codes to different splashers each short code has to be unique 175 Executing a Splasher To execute a Splasher select one or more images in a thumbnail viewer Press lt Ctrl S gt or select the 4 icon in the local toolbar of the thumbnail viewer The CATEGORY SPLASHER dialog box will appear Enter the short code or select a splasher from the list Press the ASSIGN button to assign all selected images to all categories referenced by the Splasher Category Splasher IE ffin y Un Assign Finished Type in the short code for a category splasher or select a splasher from the list above Use lt Shift gt lt Cursor down gt to unfold the list You can apply any number of splashers to the current selection by pressing lt Enter gt or clicking the Assign button Close Figure 77 The Splasher assignment dialog box By creating a set of splashers you can greatly reduce the time you need to assign images to one or more categories With this feature you easily can handle several thousand images a day The UN ASSIGN button allows you to use the selected splasher to remove the selected images from all the categories referenced by the splashe
517. th a batch of pre built sample scripts that demonstrate various aspects of the IMatch object model Feel free to open these scripts in the IDE window and learn what they do and how they do it To open an existing script open the Script Manager select the script you want to open and choose the EDIT SCRIPT button in the local toolbar The Scripting IDE will open with the script loaded Extended Script Help If your script is more complex and requires additional instructions on how to run and to use it you may write an extended documentation and save it into the scripting folder This documentation must have the same file name as the script itself and an extension different from bas and bai For example you may create a HTML document explaining what your script does and how to use it Your script is named myscript bas and you save your documentation as myscript html The script manager automatically detects this documentation and shows a new button below the description pane allowing users to open your documentation The Scripting Output Window IMatch contains a scripting output window for debugging purposes This window is usually hidden and comes to life when a script is executed 209 Scripting Output Window olx he active folder is H mwndown incoming he active category is Duplicates o active result set found Enumerating selected thumbnails Figure 193 The Scripting Output Window The output window is used
518. that the check box is checked Opens a list with all persistent result sets You can select any of these result sets by simply clicking on it OR AND NOT Inserts a Boolean operator at the current cursor position Inserts a pair of parentheses at the current cursor position Example Create a new category labeled Formulas under the All category Then add a sub category labeled Animals but no fish under that category Open the category properties dialog box from the context menu of that category 170 OR AND NOT amp Om a Animals amp Birds Y Fish gt Insects E E El To build up the formula shown in Figure 71 click on the EXPRESSION field to activate it Then click on the 4 icon in the toolbar and select the Animals category from the list IMatch will insert the fully qualified name Animals in the expression field Now press the NOT button in the toolbar Finally insert the Fish category by pressing 4 again this time clicking on Fish The final formula should look like this Animals NOT Animals Fish Click on OK to close the dialog Match will calculate the expression and when you made no mistakes the thumbnail viewer will contain all images from the Animals category except the images contained in the Fish sub category If Match brings up an error message read it carefully and then check your formula statement Between each part of the formula should be a space blank Each categor
519. the new insertion position IMatch saves the positions of the images together with their folder or category and restores them automatically when you choose the Light Table sort preset again Note Light table sort orders are only available for folders categories and your bookmark collections Result sets have no manual sort order Resetting the Light Table sort order You can reset the light table sort order to the order currently displayed with the RESET LIGHT TABLE SORT ORDER command in the thumbnail window context menu This is also a comfortable way to setup an initial light table sort order Just use a sort preset of your liking to sort the images in the current folder or category Then choose the RESET LIGHT TABLE SORT ORDER command from the context menu to take over the current sort order into your light table sort order Finally switch to the light table sort order preset and reorder the images as you wish using drag and drop Note The Reset light table sort order command is only available when the light table sort preset is not selected active Handling Off line Media Removable Media Handling Off line Media Removable Media IMatch internally stores the location of your images with so called URI Universal Resource Identifiers These special descriptors contain all information required to find access and load an image from any type of media Whether your files are on one of your hard disks a CD ROM a DVD drive or another
520. the PROPERTY EDITOR DIALOG and select a property set from the list at the top of the dialog box In this example we will use the Quality property set for the beginning Property Database Editor x Metadata Designer Property Browser Property Set Quality e En Number of records 4 Description 1 High Quality The best quality Perfect original photo and scan 2 Good Quality Above average quality 3 Normal Quality Normal photo and scan quality Bad original pl scan cot Js Jm Figure 87 The Property Browser When you select a property set from the list of available sets Match will load all records from that set into the table control From there you can add edit or remove records by pressing the corresponding toolbar buttons and providing the required information Press lt Ctrl gt lt Enter gt to add a new row at the end of the table Press lt Ctrl gt lt Del gt to remove the selected record To edit a value in one of the fields double click on it If a field contains a reference to another property set double clicking will open a new dialog box showing you the contents of that property set Just click on an entry in the list to choose that value and return Get yourself used to the editing capabilities of the Property Browser After adding a couple of records close the dialog and return to IMatch Note To fit the column width to the record contents press the adjust button in the toolbar double click
521. the absolute mode to limit your result set to files with a specific size For example if you enter a range like 0 to 200 Match will limit your result set to contain only images less than or equal to 200 KB The Dimensions Selector The dimensions selector works with the dimensions and orientation of your images Dimension means the vertical and horizontal extent of your images in pixels Again there s a relative and an absolute mode for this selector If you use the relative mode you can limit the 145 result set to contain only images with dimensions within a specific percentage relative to some original images For example if you choose RELATIVE HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL DIMENSIONS and a value of 20 Match will only return images that are 20 in both horizontal and vertical dimension relative to your original images The absolute mode allows you to restrict your result set to images that have a specific range in the horizontal and or vertical extent For example if you enter here 0 to 600 for the horizontal extent Match will return only images that have a maximum of 600 pixels in the horizontal dimension The maximum for both extensions is 10 000 pixels The CONSIDER ORIENTATION setting allows you to limit your result set to images with a specific orientation absolute or relative to some original images If you leave this to PORTRAIT AND LANDSCAPE Match will not apply additional restrictions The SAME AS ORIGINAL IMAGE setting
522. the button to open the Thesaurus Manager Tip Thesauri allow you to save typing by storing frequently used keywords comments and other text for later reuse The Thesaurus Manager displays a list of all words or strings currently in the thesaurus To use any of these entries simply double click on it or press OK To add a new entry type the new text in the edit field at the bottom of the dialog and then click on ADD 326 To change the contents of an existing entry select the entry in the list box change the text in the edit field at the bottom and click on UPDATE To remove an entry from the thesaurus select the entry in the list at the top and click on the DELETE button Thesaurus Manager oe xl Available Entries Double click to select and return m Edit Entries Enter new text and press Add to add it to the list To update an entry select it first in the list above change the text below and then press Update Woman Add xl Delete This list allows you to define synonyms for the individual entries Edit S we Click on the Edit Synonyms button to manage the synonyms for lla this list OK Cancel Figure 101 The Thesaurus Manager You can use these thesauri to store frequently used texts and other snippets to avoid typing You can also use thesauri to setup as list of standard texts copyright strings or keywords for in house use and standardization The thesauri information
523. the file name beach Find all file names containing the word beach beach car Find all file names containing beach but not car Don t use wildcards like and with this search mode Power Search This search allows you to use regular expressions fi cry Regular Expression Help Note To create more complex selections use the Selection View or create an interactive selection in the selection builder Cancel Help Figure 48 Searching for images using the file name All options available in this dialog are explained in the section about the FILE NAME SELECTOR below Find Text in Properties This Ad hoc search dialog allows you to search your image property set see section Image Property Sets for any type of text or patterns For example if you have created image properties like Title and Description you can search these fields for words or phrases 127 Search Image Property Set x Here you can search your image property set for properties containing specific text or phrases You can either search all properties or limit the search to specific properties Search only in selected properties This simple search works only on image properties of type String Use the Selection View to search for other data types Enter the text or phrase you want to search for J Use regular expressions Regular Expression Help Note To create more complex selections use th
524. this selection is replaced by the inserted variable name 201 Scripting and the IMatch Object Model What can be done with IMatch Scripting The capabilities of the build in scripting language are nearly limitless The full Match object model is available from the scripting language and allows you to access nearly every object in IMatch Additionally the Basic Language itself contains numerous methods and features to perform calculations access system objects and perform operations on the file system Since Match Script is fully OLE compatible you can also automate other applications via scripting or access databases via ADO or other database interconnection standards By using these facilities you can exchange data with other applications or automate them to perform specific tasks Since the full object model of Match is exported to the scripting language you can at any time access the full contents of all open databases You have access to the folders in the database the categories the images the property database and nearly all other visible and invisible objects Warning The scripting language has been developed to be as safe as possible It is nearly impossible to damage a database from within scripting even if you do very bad things However since you have full access to all database objects you can delete files folders or categories from within a script It is highly recommended that you test your scripts carefully before y
525. this tutorial your database will be up and running and you can start to work with IMatch Categories One of the first things you should do is to think about a category structure that fits your personal needs The Dynamic Category Concept implemented in IMatch is much more flexible than simple keywords or albums used in other catalog applications Support This page contains support addresses and links to interesting sections at www photools com Software License Agreement This Software License Agreement License Agreement is a legal agreement between you either an individual or an entity and Mario M Westphal or his representatives MMW for the software product which included computer software and any other additional media whether provided in physical form or received online in electronic form BY INSTALLING THIS PROGRAM BY LOADING OR RUNNING THE SOFTWARE OR BY PLACING OR COPYING THE SOFTWARE ONTO YOUR COMPUTER HARD DRIVE COMPUTER RAM OR ANY OTHER STORAGE MEDIUM YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT 1 GRANT OF LICENSE Subject to the terms and provisions of this License Agreement MMW hereby grants to you the non exclusive non transferable limited right to use this Software only in executable or object code form The term Software includes all elements of the Software such as data files and screen displays You are not receiving any ownership or proprietary right title or interest in or to t
526. thorized access gt Setup user defined image properties to store your annotations comments and keywords gt this wizard They have been carefully choosen and will create a database 0 IF this is your first database it s a good idea to take over all default values in AS which is usable for a wide variety of purposes Press Next to continue Figure 24 The New Database Wizard Step 2 Setting a Password Optional Click on NEXT to proceed to the first option screen On this screen you may enter a password for your database This password will protect your database from being opened by persons that do not know the password Leave both fields blank if you don t want a password for your database Database password x You may protected this database with a password Doing so will prevent others from viewing and accessing the contents of this database If you don t want to use a password just leave the two fields blank Password ea Repeat password A Remember what you type here If you loose your password there is NO WAY to A access the contents of this database Note Passwords are case sensitve SECRET is not the same as secret or Secret Please keep in mind that this password mechanism only prevents accessing an Match database from within IMatch The database itself on pour hard disk is not protected and may be accessed with other software tools Don t put secrets in Match databases lt Back Can
527. tifiers a Ao 45 Unregistered Versi n cimil ata 14 Unsharp Mask iia ita ica iaa 290 Batch CONVE e 290 Unsharp Mask esta a Ia 184 UnsharpMaskihg uti iu 259 405 UpdateDatabasEiuncar nica tne a ee ee nie 212 Updating Images ouija 90 Updating Keywords and Categories cscceescesssecsseeceseecesseecsseecseecseecesaeecsaeecseesnseeeesaes 325 UR lcd Gh ein eae Bre i aie ands 45 194 244 UR osa 76 Use low r solution Mates cocinar ES 335 Use recycle bin for delete operations cosses en aE 342 USENET iii dada ee cin oa a 91 334 Ur a E o a A ot 22 139 User Torin A A She ea 14 User GROUP inn iia a ceebedeaceense E EE E 378 User Interface changin colors adds na dada ci 345 User interface Colors ct A A hes ada 345 User Vale e rico aer 196 Usersdetined Tools aus A da 375 UscrNaMe initial a a io iio ite terio agen bes 212 Using the Light Table sort with other features oooononcononccnonaconocccnonncnonanonnanonanccnoncccnacinnnos 365 A NN 300 V Vallalta sues ant xt ts E E EE 195 196 197 198 212 318 BATE E T E EEA E ENEE 98 EXIF Maker Notes en e e e e A e Bah A neskie iner 380 for IPPC san a R EXE EE A A Iceland 102 Global llanto eateries 195 196 A O ERNE 193 194 195 in Batch Process ssis r e a R E E E EE TRE 120 E O RRAS 198 Variables Selector trios lidiar E lali ascii 200 MBA cintia aos 121 O SesaseszeesgnWeeasasgaacoagaiae sang susdeansaieaaataauee 341 MOTSIOM irreales atrial altri tia il oe 212 View Mage siei soit
528. time even after you close IMatch you have to convert the normal result set history entry into a persistent result set To do this open the result set from the history or switch to an open result set window Click on the Bl button in the local toolbar or choose the MAKE PERSISTENT menu entry from the context menu in the thumbnail viewer Switch to the SELECTION VIEW and open the PERSISTENT RESULTS folder to view your new persistent result set You should change the default name to something more meaningful to help you identify the contents of the persistent result set A My Bookmarks Selection Templates EY Persistent Results P Results for File v Selection History m 100 KE 1 IMatch will take care that all persistent result sets stay current even if you modify the database contents As you delete or move images around in your database IMatch will automatically update all persistent result sets 160 However when you add new images to your database or update existing images Match will need to rerun the initial selection to update the result sets Match indicates this dirty state with a special icon next to each persistent result set as shown in the figure above Note As long as you don t rerun the initial selections the persistent results sets will remain invalid You can open and view them but they will not reflect the true database contents Keep this in mind To update a specific or all persistent r
529. tion window is shown Use one of the members of the IMShellExecuteShowCmdFlags enumeration Description This method allows you to execute an application or Windows shell command from a script For more information on this subject refer to the Windows SDK manuals or the MSDN online forum 220 The Database Class The Database Class The Database class represents a single Match database It gives you access to all contents of a database including folders image files categories bookmarks result sets and property sets Properties FileName String R O the fully qualified path for the main database file OID String R O The unique object identifier for this database ActiveWindowType IMActiveWindowType R O The type of the currently active window for this database The active window is the window that is in front and has the focus imawUnknown Unknown window type imawinfo The Database node is selected in the Database View imawFolders Database View imawCategory Category View imawSelections Selection View imawPreview Preview Window imawResult Result Window imawResultPreview Result Window Dual Image View imawThumbView Thumbnail Viewer ReadOnly Boolean R O True if the database is read only Redraw Boolean Enables or disables window painting for this database You can disable window repainting to update the speed of your script when you manipulate a database Don t forget to re enable the window pai
530. tions After performing these steps you can continue to work with Match and your databases Mobile Match If you work with more than one PC for example a desktop PC at home and a laptop when you are in the field you can move your database between these two PCs This allows you to manage your images in the field on your laptop and to restore this updated database when you re back at home All you need to do is to install a second copy of IMatch on your laptop computer don t forget to apply the latest service pack Then copy the folder containing your database to your mobile computer system If you work with IPTC don t forget to copy the contents of your personal program folder so your IPTC presets will be ready IMatch stores your personal preferences IPTC presets and other configuration files in your personal folder Under older versions this folder is located below Windows Profiles lt User Name gt For newer Windows versions this folder is located under Documents and Settings lt User Name gt My Documents In both cases the folder is named photools com IMatch When you re back at home just copy the database back to your desktop system In addition restore your personal settings Tip Most laptops allow you to automate this process with a feature called replication Consult your system manual and the Windows documentation for details 21 Overview System Overview IMatch 3 introduces a couple of new concep
531. tions If you turn this off IMatch will delete the files physically with no change of undoing this operation The number of text lines displayed in the caption bar If you use long comments for folders and categories you may set this to a higher value to see more of your text The folder where your Import Export presets Contact Sheet presets Batch Processor presets and things like that are located The folder you enter here is accessible via the global variable Application Templates This folder is the base location for bitmaps and textures The Batch Processor and the Contact Sheet Builder use this folder when you add background bitmaps or masks The folder you enter here is accessible via the global variable Application Bitmaps This is the location to which IMatch writes files produced by the Contact Sheet Builder the Batch Processor and some other modules The folder you enter here is accessible via the global variable Application OutputFolder This folder contains your scripts The Script Manager scans this folder for scripts and presents them in the Script Menu The folder you enter here is accessible via the global variable Application ScriptFolder Defines which action to perform when you double click a thumbnail in the thumbnail viewer Instead of double clicking you can also press lt Enter gt lt Return gt Defines which action to perform when you double click a thumbnail in the thumbnail viewer while holding do
532. tions perfectly built to provide a complete set of functions to create digital artworks of the highest quality The primary focus of Match however is managing your digital artworks photographs scanned images and all other digital assets The Image Editor allows you to perform the most frequent tasks without ever leaving IMatch In this section you will learn how to use the Image Editor and how to perform the imaging functions needed in your everyday work or hobby General Usage There are several ways to open an image in the Image Editor Q Press lt Ctrl gt lt E gt in the Thumbnail Viewer to open all selected images in the image editor The edit mode in Options Preferences File Format Preferences controls whether the images are opened in individual editor windows or in a single editor window If one or more of the images are off line the Offline File Handler will pop up and prompt you to insert the correct media Q Double click on an image in a thumbnail window to open the image in the editor Note This works only if you have enabled the image editor as the default double click action for images see Options Preferences General Q Choose the EDIT command from the context menu of a thumbnail in the Thumbnail Viewer Q Choose OPEN IMAGE from the DATABASE menu to open external images not indexed by the current database You can open virtually any number of images at the same time depending on the amount of memory installed in
533. to define what IPTC fields to import and where to store the imported information It also allows you to enable the automatic categorizing feature or to convert IPTC information stored in Macintosh character set into the Windows ANSI character set Each Match database has its own IPTC import profile because each of your databases may have a different setup or image property set Match saves the settings you make here and uses them automatically in the future unless you change them At the top of the wizard dialog you can choose what to import You can either import IPTC information from files in a specific folder or from the files in the current selection The current selection can be a folder a category the bookmark collection or even a single image in a thumbnail window It depends on the current selection that is active before you run this wizard Running Selections for IPTC Data Before you can use IPTC data in your selections you need to import the IPTC data into your property database See the section Image Property Sets for more information about Property Sets and the Image Property Set See the section IPTC Import for more information on how to import IPTC metadata into your property database After you have added the IPTC metadata to your property database you can run all type of selection on your IPTC data The IPTC Configuration files IMatch uses special configuration files to store metadata information about IPTC fi
534. to fill the mask As with the background bitmap you can use a tile bitmap or stretch center the fill bitmap within the mask Figure 161 Using background bitmaps to fill the mask Using Text Image Attributes and Properties The next step in the Batch Processor allows you to add headers footers image attributes and user defined properties to your target image The TEXT MARGINS control the distance between the canvas or image and the text that is displayed on the target image You can use these margins to add a little spacing between the borders of your target image and the text Usually something like 4 pixels in each direction is a good value for these margins If you want to align your text with your original image use the same LEFT RIGHT margins as you defined for the LEFT RIGHT canvas margins in Step 1 If you check the ALIGN TEXT WITHIN ORIGINAL IMAGE Match will display all text within the bounding rectangle of the original image If this option is unchecked Match will align the text to the entire canvas You can add text above below or on the left and right of your target image Just type the text you want to print in the corresponding edit controls on the dialog sheet With the FONT buttons you can control the font face size and color of the text The alignment of the text can be controlled with the controls next to each edit field The text on the left and right has an additional property that allows you to rota
535. touched DD FET This mask produces 8 3 file names compatible with older computers or software that can handle only DOS like file names The Smart Rename function automatically clean the original file name when it contains numbers or other characters that may affect the renumbering or masking IMatch will also make sure that each file name produced based on a transformation is unique If your mask results in duplicate file names Match will warn you and will not rename the files on disk Other Options You can chance the start number of auto numbering series and the increment with the two combo boxes located below the mask edit field see Figure 111 With the Sort Preset combo box you can use any of your sort profiles to initially sort your images Match will automatically reapply the mask when you choose different sort orders If this is not enough you can manually resort individual files with the two buttons on the right of the preview list To help you to find the correct sort order you have the option so view the thumbnail images for the files to be renamed This helps a lot when you want to create a special sort order before renaming Using Variables IMatch allows you to use variables for renaming operations This enables you to rename your images based on image attributes like date time size width or height You can also use IPTC or EXIF fields to rename your images Tip Please refer to section Variables for more informatio
536. tremely powerful tool Take some time to try this module out to get an impression about what you can do with it If you find some good settings save them as a preset for later reuse The Batch Processor The Batch Processor allows you perform imaging operations on series of images in batch mode without user intervention With the Batch Processor you are able to Change the dimensions of the images Change the DPI settings of images Save the input images to a different file format Change the color resolution histogram or gamma settings Add background images and overlay images Add text image attributes and user defined properties Ooo oO oO 0 O Apply masks to your source images with many options THE BATCH PROCESSOR module can be reached via the IMPORT AND EXPORT command from the DATABASE menu The Batch Processor not only allows you to convert the file format of a series of images or resize the images to a certain size Since the batch processor fully supports the Variables concept of IMatch you can also add text image attributes user defined properties to the target images Tip If you create image catalogs on CD ROM or you deliver images via your web site you now are able to create images that contain watermarks image and photographer information your company logo and any amount of additional information within a couple of minutes See Figure 146 for an example The Batch Processor operates on the current selection The
537. ts external plug in modules that contain new image matching algorithms This feature is very useful for researchers in the field of image matching and pattern matching because they can use IMatch as a framework for developing and testing new algorithms IPTC The IPTC metadata standard is a standard for describing images Image files with embedded IPTC information are widely used in the press and newswire business See section IPTC Support for more information about IPTC support in IMatch EXIF The EXIF metadata standard allows camera vendors to add information about the image into the image file This metadata standard is used by digital cameras to record things like lens settings lighting conditions and other camera settings within the image EXIF information is supported for JPEG TIFF PSD and CRW files with accompanying THM files System Architecture IMatch uses an object oriented approach to manage your images The internal database architecture has been specifically developed for optimal storage and retrieval of image data The property database that holds non image data is based on XML UNICODE aware and extremely fast and secure IMatch is an Open System in a sense that it can import and export data and information in a variety of formats You can use the information contained in an Match database easily with other applications by using one of the built in Export Modules If you have data stored in another application it s also r
538. ts of the bucket with the images contained in mages Description Combines the given images with the images already in the bucket using the Boolean operation BoolOp CombineBucket Arguments pBucket An ImageBucket object 241 BoolOp The Boolean operation to use when combining the this bucket with the other ImageBucket Description Combines this bucket with the bucket given using the Boolean operation Boo Op Images Returns all images in this bucket as an Images collection This collection then can be used for other methods that take an Images collection as an argument Item Return value The image at the given position or nothing Description Returns the image at the given position 1 based Save Arguments FileName The file name to save to Description Saves the contents of the bucket to the given file This method is useful to save the contents of a bucket between script runs or even after IMatch closes Using the Save method you can restore the contents of the bucket at any time Load Arguments FileName The file name to read from Description Loads the contents of the given file to this bucket Note The bucket must have been created by the same database as the bucket that has been used to create the file No checks are made for validity of the contents of the bucket If images have been deleted in the mean time the must be deleted from the bucket manually You can use the Images method of the Database
539. ts to the world of digital image management Please keep always in mind that IMatch is not another thumbnailing application It is a framework for digital image management image processing and image matching To make it easier for you to follow the explanations in this tutorial we introduce all the rather unfamiliar terms used within this document here Databas e Image Thumbn ail Image Attribut es User defined Properti es Propert y Set Categor y 22 A database contains all the information about your images the user defined property sets the categories and the multidimensional data structures used to perform the image analysis and matching An image database is composed from several files with the same name but different extensions on your hard disk You can create any number of databases with Match Any type of image bitmap or vector image that is supported by IMatch The graphical representation of images in an IMatch database IMatch uses a reduced version of the original image to represent images in result sets categories or the database viewer the properties associated with each image in the database For example the image file name and folder the dimensions of an image the file size date and time are all image attributes You can create and associate any number of properties with each image in your database This allows you to store information like Title Description Camera used Locat
540. tutorial with Acrobat Reader If you don t have Acrobat Reader you can get it for free from Adobe s web site http www adobe com If you just want to go ahead and work with Match at your own pace choose the third option Useful documentation links The System Overview explains how IMatch manages your images and how the different modules and features work together 379 The online tutorial Creating an Match Database contains a step by step example on how to create your first Match database The Match Online Help Overview contains pointers to interesting sections in this online help Support addresses and more information about Match can be found on this page EXIF Maker Notes Maker Notes are special EXIF fields which are not officially part of the EXIF specification Each camera manufacturer creates its own format for the maker note fields and they usually do not publish this format In many cases maker note contents and formats change when new camera models are released Through experimentation with images from the cameras they own individuals on the Internet have reverse engineered many of the maker note formats used All maker note information provided by Match is based on these web sources and my own experiments Therefore the correctness and completeness of this information cannot be guaranteed Camera vendors may invent new maker note schemas at any time or change the meaning of existing fields If
541. tySets Is Nothing Then sgBox The current database has no property sets Exit Sub End If For Each ps In db PropertySets Debug Print ps Name Next ps This script dumps the names of all property sets to the scripting output window To access the individual properties within a property set you use the PropertySetProperty class This class provides access to all properties within a property set Dim p As PropertySetProperty For Each ps In db PropertySets Debug Print ps Name For Each p In ps Properties Debug Print p Name Next p Next ps This script dumps the names of all property sets and the names of each property within the property sets to the scripting output window Accessing the contents of a property set record To access the data stored in a property set you will need to use the PropertyRecord class The following sample dumps the contents of the property record associated with an Image object img is assumed to contain the currently active image Dim record As PropertyRecord Dim v As Variant 279 Set record img Properties For Bach v In record Debug Print v Next v A PropertyRecord object contains O to n columns each of type Variant To iterate the properties use a for each loop with a variant data type If you want to access a specific property use the access by name method Debug Print record Property Title This statement dumps the contents of the Title field from the record se
542. uble click on the script name The script is executed and calculates the total size of all files in the selected folder When the script finishes it displays a message box showing you the results The total size of 972 image files is 61 685 372 Bytes Figure 186 The message box created by the script Instead of opening the Script Manager to run the script you can also run the script by unfolding the SCRIPT MENU and selecting the script see Figure 183 on page 434 To unfold the script menu click on the little arrow next to the Script Manager button in the toolbar Hint If you calculate a folder that contains several hundred files you can watch the script progress in the IMatch status bar For folders with only a couple of files the script executes to fast to see any progress control at all 205 Creating a Simple Script Now you will create your first script It will perform a rather simple task but it will demonstrate the basic procedures required to create test and run a script in IMatch Open the Script Manager and select the group labeled My Scripts New Script Script Manager E EAN Samples E Active Elements Demo Morir on Figure 187 Creating a simple script Click on the NEW SCRIPT button in the local toolbar of the Script Manager The SCRIPT PROPERTIES dialog box will open Here you can enter the name of your script and some optional information The script name has to be unique and mu
543. uet ba ah ee es eS ee te ee ee 189 190 Browse Slide SHOW me Haiti Ras HGS Rees SL Es I E a 319 320 321 BrowseRorEdl di died 212 A AN 189 Browser Compatibility oooooconncocnonccnonccconecoonanonnnnnnonacconancnnanonnnnononnnnonanoana nena no rin tapii 189 Burnin sacs set A e EE RNE TO AEE EE werode eset ease tel 377 C cache AMA pE eeii srete e e EE E EEEE E EEEE EE 232 Ca Chi ea Aann ti 154 155 Camera Digitala a ea a E TE T E A A a Se 94 96 CO 77 Canon Maker Notesi taone tene cl laica 380 Cation CRW OPUONS h aeiia n R R Ta aaa as 104 CANVAS it a a a ea E R R EAE 109 110 112 113 114 115 116 Cascading Style Sheets occ iia ARAE 24 203 Casio Maker NOE a dote te dto tes do Me alle a a 380 381 382 Catalog SY 298 CAD laz 170 360 Categories 31 64 65 67 124 126 176 177 178 179 195 221 222 225 229 230 239 240 359 and the thumbnail Window ccsccccsesssceceeseeceeeeeeeceeneeecesseeeeeseaeeeceenaeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeaees 174 Custom sort odisea 169 Drag ind drop sje aisha i ile 168 169 Dragome images ini pta 168 Explamedanionan sacra 61 Moving a d copy gmn nina na a E vi 169 Thumbnail Property Window sseseseseseseseseressressresrersrtsstrsstesstessreseresereserestrestrestrssressreeete 321 Categories collection Samples E E E E A E EE E E E E 274 Categories coll ction Sample sick Ae A eh a Se ee s 275 CatesoriesFull Name susi ia ek 195 Caterina dados 22 23 Category Assignm
544. uous can Exposure Mode can Extended Focus Mode Firmware Version 1 10 Not fired DEY Unknown Yalue 0 Not fired 7 21 mm Single Macro Close Up 150 50 103 0400 Large CRW High definition CCD image Macro can Firmware Version can Flash Activity can Flash Bias can Flash Details can Flash Settings can Focal Length can Focus Mode can Focus Mode can ISO can Image Number can Image Size can Image Type can Macro Mode can Metering Mode Evaluative can Owner Name can Program Easy Shooting can Quality can Saturation can Sequence Number can Sharpness can Subject Distance can Unknown 10 can Unknown 2 can Unknown 3 can Unknown D can White Balance Mario M Westphal photools com Manual RAW Normal 0 Normal 0 41 m 17 825 792 00 2 00 0 00 42 00 Sunny i Double click to edit the writeable fields Currently only date and time fields can be A modified OK Close Lo Figure 92 Maker Note fields in the EXIF Editor Sample Canon CRW maker notes IMatch tries to extract as much information from your image files as possible If a field is encountered which IMatch currently does not know it will be displayed as Unknown in the EXIF editor The internal number of the field is displayed in parentheses right after the name of the field Using Maker Notes in Variables You can use maker notes as IMatch variables usi
545. ure 9 Disabling database caching Toolbars IMatch uses a main toolbar on top of the main window and several local toolbars for each of the different windows The main toolbar contains buttons to execute all frequently used operations that work on a database or application level Local toolbars contain buttons to specific functions associated with a given window Each toolbar button is associated with a short description that will show up when you point on the button and rest the mouse for a second 34 These so called tool tips also contain descriptions of available keyboard shortcuts for many of the available commands The Thumbnail Window The Thumbnail Window The thumbnail window or thumbnail viewer represents the contents of Match collections Folders Categories Bookmarks and Result Sets It gives you to access all image related functionality implemented in Match and allows you to view your images at various levels of detail The thumbnail viewer is a specialized window presenting you a view of the contents of your database Whether you re looking at the contents of a folder a category your bookmarks or the results of a match operation Match displays the contents of the collection in form of thumbnails The number of images that can be displayed at a time is virtually unlimited the speed of the thumbnail viewer is outstanding By creating and using Sort Presets see Smart Sorting with Sort Presets you can order your im
546. urrent selection and then select the image on which you clicked To select more than one file you can use the lt Ctrl gt or the lt Shift gt key lt Ctrl gt lt Shift gt if you hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while you click on images the clicked image will be added to the selection if it s currently not selected or removed from the selection otherwise The lt Ctrl gt key toggles the selection of images Select an image in the thumbnail viewer This image will automatically become the focused image anchor image Then hold down the lt Shift gt key and select another image IMatch will select all images between the anchor image and the image clicked last lt Shift gt selects a range of images You can also use the mouse to select a range of images Click somewhere between the image panels on the thumbnail viewer background Hold down the left mouse button and resize the selection rectangle until you selected all images that you want to become part of your current selection 41 You can use the INVERT SELECTION command from the context menu or the EDIT menu to invert your current selection To select all images use lt Ctrl gt lt A gt or the corresponding command from the menu Tip To rename a file just click on the file name To select images click somewhere on the panel but outside the area occupied by the file name Selecting files by name You can search for a specific file name within the thumbnails b
547. urrently in a result window you can switch to the corresponding database workspace via the OPEN DATABASE VIEW command from the WINDOWS menu Or you click on the L a button in the local toolbar of your result window Note When you change settings or layout options in the result window you need to make these settings the default for the future by choosing the SAVE RESULT SET SETTINGS in the WINDOW menu Modifying the current selector IMatch always keeps the selection template together with the result set When you run a selection the Result Set contains also a copy of selection template This allows you to modify aresult set directly from within the Result Set window Just click on the icon EDIT SELECTION TEMPLATE in the result window toolbar to open a Selection Builder dialog box see Figure 65 158 Selection Builder El of ES E Pre Selectors Te Y Categories Result Set Options Id Enable Y Folders H Q Basic Selectors E Result Set Options E File Format El File Size El Dimensions E Date and Time El File Name EY Image Matchers Y Sketch and Color General Matching E User defined Properties 2 Plugin Selectors T Limit the result set to files with the same CRC checksum Result Set Limits Minimum number of images to show Only show images with at least this similarity Maximum number of images to show IV Hide originals without matches Figure 65 The Selection Builder dialog
548. uter is extremely complicated for a PC Identifying objects in an image Your computer only sees the individual pixels in the image and has no additional knowledge of what the image really contains While you are easily able to decide that an image shows a blond woman with a red jacket in front of a green wall your computer only sees some red color some yellow and brown shades and a larger amount of green It also has no understanding of the depth of the images in the image There is no third dimension for your computer at least not in bitmap images The 152 human brain is optimized for such tasks and the nature took some several million years to reach this grade of excellence in pattern and image matching The image matching science is currently only at it s beginning It will need many years of hard work and much more in depth research to make a computer really identify objects in images If you do research in the field of image matching contact mwmwlabs de for educational licenses or further information I have developed the algorithms in Match over the last two years and I have a long way to go to make my algorithms work better and better Some exiting things are coming Watch the future versions of Match for some additional matching methods With Match 3 there will be a way for researchers to add their own algorithms to the Match application framework Match allows adding other matching algorithms in form of plug in modules wr
549. value NULL which means no value Note Please note that showing a default value in the property editor does not automatically create a physical record in your database IMatch will only allocate space in the database if you enter data for an image in the property editor that is different from the default value Display Height Properties with the data type String have a special Display height setting This setting controls how many lines are displayed in the property editor for this property For example a property like Name or Title usually has only a single line but properties like Description or Comments are often much longer than a single sentence Here you may use a display height of two three or more lines to make it easier to edit the property See the Description property shown in Figure 82 for an impression on how this setting works Reference Properties Properties with the data type Reference have also some additional attributes Property Set the property set to which this property refers to Link by field the field that will be used to link the properties This field will be shown in the property editor Default The default for this property This default is a record from the referenced property set See section Multiple Property Sets for more information on references Multiple Property Sets If you manage images on a professional basis you usually need to store a large number of properties with each image Information
550. ve a fixed number of pixels from the edges of the image switch to REMOVE FRAME Again the number of pixels to remove from each edge is controlled with the border width controls Framer x Add Frame C Remove Frame M Symetric p a a 0 a Frame Color HAEE wa e Figure 120 The Framer dialog box Auto Trim Edges This feature comes handy when you want to remove unwanted borders from an image Often such borders are irregularly shaped and cannot be easily removed with other tools With the Auto Trim feature this is not longer a problem Consider an image like the following Figure 121 An image with an unwanted border 186 This image has some irregularly shaped borders that need to be removed Simply choose AUTO TRIM EDGES from the IMAGE menu and see what happens Auto Trim Edges x Value ajel Ce Figure 122 The Auto Trim Edges dialog box As you can see the border is completely removed without touching any other part of the image This is basically what the Auto Trim Edges feature does It removes similar colored areas from the edges of your image The VALUE control allows you to adjust the tolerance of the Auto Trim algorithm If the colors in the border vary move the control to a higher tolerance value The preview allows you to control the effect of your recent changes If the result fits your needs apply the effect with the OK button Tip As all imaging commands i
551. ve the contents and use the result as the folder name for the Contact Sheet Exporter output To use a variable instead of normal text write the variable name in as in Application OutputFolder IMatch will only recognize variables when they are written in these parentheses Also variable names are case sensitive Application Version is not the same as application Version or Application version Some other examples for the use of global Application Variables The current time is Application Time gt The current time is 12 00 22 Today is Application LongDate gt Today is Sunday September 24 2000 I m running Application Name version Application Version gt I m running Match version 3 01 Local Variables Local variables are variables that are defined only within a specific module The CONTACT SHEET BUILDER for example publishes a set of variables that are only available and meaningful when the Contact Sheet Builder is executed These variables all start with the prefix Sheet and can be used only within the Contact Sheet Builder presets In computer terms this would read The Sheet variable set is only available within the context of the Contact Sheet Builder 198 The Image variable set The Image variable set gives you access to all image attributes and user defined properties in your database For example with Image Name you can refer to the file name of an image All Attributes supplied by
552. version and hence it is difficult to support all features of Photoshop files in IMatch IMatch supports many of the PSD features but not all Currently there is no support for vector layers and adjustment layers You should save your Photoshop images with the option Maximize Compatibility checked This will increase the file size of your images but allows you to view your images in other applications as they appear in Photoshop If you don t save your images with maximum compatibility your images may not appear in IMatch as they appear in Photoshop but Match will be able to index and load them anyway If you don t use maximize compatibility uncheck this option to allow IMatch to process as much image data as possible Reset Move Copy List This button allows you to reset your move copy favorites list All saved entries will be deleted and IMatch will rebuild these lists with the new folders you use for copying or moving your images Networking IMatch IMatch allows you to share a single database located on a network server between multiple users in read only mode As long as each user opens the database in read only mode the database will be accessible and several users can share the database If a user opens the database in write mode all other users are locked out until this user closes the database To open a database in read only mode choose OPEN from the FILE menu and then check the option OPEN AS READ ONLY in t
553. very minute Secure your databases by creating backup copies at least daily IMatch stores your personal preferences IPTC presets and other configuration files in your personal folder Under older versions this folder is located below Windows Profiles lt User Name gt For newer Windows versions this folder is located under Documents and Settings lt User Name gt My Documents In both cases the folder is named photools com IMatch You should also backup your Windows installation including the system registry IMatch stores user and machine depended configuration settings in the system registry However 1f you need to install IMatch on a fresh Windows version this information can be easily recovered by re installing IMatch Restoring IMatch on a new PC Windows installation If you need to re install Match or if you buy a new PC you can re install Match with some easy steps e Download and install the latest IMatch evaluation version Go to www photools com and then open the download section e Install the latest update for registered users into the same folder to convert the evaluation version to the full product again If you are asked for your user name and password use the credentials supplied in your registration email 20 Restore your databases Optionally restore the contents of your personal photools com Match folder Run Match and adjust your workspace settings windows positions and other configuration op
554. via email Configuring Match Learn how to configure Match to match your requirements Find Folder This dialog box allows you to find folders by name Enter the first few letters of the folder name you re looking for Match will show all folders starting with these letters followed be the folders with names containing these letters Category History The local toolbar for the Category View has two arrow buttons that allow you to move forwards and backwards through the category history a wW IMatch records each of your movements in the category list and allows you to jump forwards and backwards to the 20 most recently visited categories This feature allows you to navigate quickly in your category hierarchy By clicking on one of the down arrows next to the arrow buttons you can open the HISTORY dialog showing the last 20 visited categories Special Formulas You can use some special keywords in category formulas to create categories with specific contents This section explains these special category formulas 359 CatNoRecurse CatDistinct Unassigne d This prefix tells Match to return only images directly assigned to the category following the prefix If you use this prefix with a category name only the images assigned to the category are returned Images assigned to any of the sub categories are not returned Example CatNoRecurse Beach This formula returns only the images assigned to the categ
555. will show only images in the result set with a similarity equal to the given threshold or better The sort order of the result set in the thumbnail viewer is controlled by the current sort preset used see section Smart Sorting with Sort Presets Of special importance is the maximum number of images for your result set If you have a very loose selector Match will easily add several thousand images in your result set A good limit is about 200 images However if you set this to the maximum value of 10 000 Match will return all images in your database above the similarity threshold up to 10 000 images If you check the hide originals without matches Match will only show images in the result set that actually have matches If none of your original images have matches Match will return an empty result set If you enable the limit the result set to files with the same CRC checksum Match will only show images in the result set that have the same Cyclic Redundancy Checksum than the original image This will allow you to find all binary identical images real duplicates for your original images This is the fastest selector available in IMatch Use it to scan your database for binary duplicate images Important The CRC selector is based on a 32 Bit Cyclical Redundancy Check algorithm Although unlikely it may happen that two different images result in the same CRC checksum Keep that in mind However if this happens you will see the diff
556. window you have a built in image preview window You now may view your result perform file operations on the images in the result set or assign them to categories see section Categories Of course you also can select some images to run another selection directly from the current result set If you do so IMatch will open a new result window showing the results of the new selection The current result window will remain open thus allowing you to compare the results of both selections Using this schema you can actually drill down your result sets Modifying the current result set s selector The local toolbar of the result window contains a special icon that allows you to modify the selector for the current result set If you choose this command IMatch will bring up a dialog box with the selection template used to create this result You may modify the selectors in this template to rerun your current selection with some new parameters The result will be displayed in the current result window replacing the contents of it This feature is very useful if you try to get the best result or to find some good settings for your selector Gray scale im ages are images that contain only black white and all shades of gray If IMatch finds a real color it will treat the image as a color image even if it appears as gray scale to the user By pressing the SAVE SELECTION TEMPLATE button a in the toolbar you can save the current selection templ
557. window would be a bad idea You can also enable the option Show AII category images under Options Preferences Thumb View Below this root node the categories follow in alphabetically order arranging the sub categories below their parent category Figure 19 shows a pretty detailed category list for the demo database used within this tutorial IMatch demo imd Pl ES Database Edit Image View Options Window Help 18 x rr aereas Mal z Birds 142 images 29 el Various images of birds 49 cu Sort Standard Y Y Fish E amp Insects Mammals amp Bears Nature amp Cities Mountains amp Rivers amp Under Water B People E Age Group E Adults amp Babies amp Children amp Seniors Y Teens E Q Gender Female A Male amp Unknown aA Race Database 4 Categories For Help press F1 m NUM Figure 19 The Category View The category Birds is currently selected This category contains 142 images shown in the thumbnail viewer on the right The thumbnail viewer is set to a minimum level of detail showing only the thumbnails but no other information All operations on categories can either be performed using the local toolbar on top of the category view or the context menu right mouse button See section Categories for more information on categories and the category view 67 The Image Viewer By clicking on the tab labeled VIEW you can preview the image currently s
558. witch to the Category Viewer window select the category and open the CATEGORY PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX 124 Properties for Edited Description category contains edited images Category formulas allow you define the contents of a category using an expression language Using expressions you can combine the contents of two or more categories via the Boolean operators AND NOT and OR Examples PO Images contained in category 4 or in B A AND B Images contained in 4 and in B A NOT B Images contained in category 4 but not in B x Expression OR AND NOT g EY J Only return images assigned to this group don t include images from child categories IV Enable Color Coding categories without expressions only Color Code If an image is assigned to this category Un assign the image from all categories with the same parent as this category y coca 10 Figure 79 Defining a Color Code Enable the use of color coding for this category by checking the ENABLE COLOR CODING check box Then select a color by clicking on the COLOR CODE button Close the dialog box with OK when you re finished The Category Viewer uses the Color Coding color as the background color for the category display gt a 2 5 Archived H A Themes 2 Fun 4 Holidays Figure 80 Color Coding in the Category Viewer The Thumbnail Viewer displays the Color Coding below the thumbnails To see the col
559. wn the lt Ctrl gt key Thumb View Program Preferences x IPTC EXIF OffLineCache CanonCRW NikonNEF KodakDCR Display SlideShow File Format Preferences General Thumb View Colors These settings allow you to control the amount of information shown in each of the three level of details modes of the Thumbnail Viewer ES Thumbs View EH Minmal View ES Detailed View iF lle Name ad MIFile Name File Name Similarity Similarity Similarity Size Size Size Dimensions xl Dimensions xi Dimensions hd as Am I Show Color Coding Image Dimension Units 3 5 IV Show All group images in Category View Centimeter y ppl 300 Folder Auto Refresh Refresh local folders update remove only v Reset Cancel Apply Help Figure 199 The Thumb View settings dialog box This dialog allows you to control the amount of information displayed in each of the three Level of Detail LOD modes of the Thumbnail Viewer For each of the tree modes select the image attributes you want to see Note The Similarity attribute is shown only for result windows You can control how many lines in your thumbnail panels you want to reserve for displaying folder information with NUMBER OF LINES FOR FOLDER INFORMATION control Match will automatically fit the folder name in Result Windows the Category Viewer and the Bookmark Viewer into the
560. wo characters but note that ae would only match one character Equivalence classes take the general form tagname inside a set declaration where tagname is either a single character or a name of a collating element and matches any character that is a member of the same primary equivalence class as the collating element tagname An equivalence class is a set of characters that collate the same a primary equivalence class is a set of characters whose primary sort key are all the same for example strings are typically collated by character then by accent and then by case the primary sort key then relates to the character the secondary to the accentation and the tertiary to the case If there is no equivalence class corresponding to tagname then tagname is exactly the same as tagname Unfortunately there is no locale independent method of obtaining the primary sort key for a character except under Windows To include a literal in a set declaration then make it the first character after the opening or 4 the endpoint of a range or a collating element To include a literal or or in a set then make them the endpoint of a range or a collating element Line anchors An anchor is something that matches the null string at the start or end of a line matches the null string at the start of a line matches the null string at the end of a line Back references A back reference is a ref
561. ws you to view not only the referenced property but also all other properties of the record you referenced The Al button next to each non reference property will bring up a dialog box with all other Image property records in your database From here you can select an entry to create a copy of that entry in the current set Only the property will be copied that is currently selected the property for which you pressed the button This feature becomes handy when you want to assign the same properties to several images without selecting them before Note If you select more than one image and then modify the Image property set in the property editor the modifications will be applied to all images currently selected You may use this to update the Image properties for any number of images at once However only the properties are updated in all images that you actually change All unchanged properties remain unchanged in all selected images even if they are different 82 First Steps Creating a new Database The Database Wizard Adding folders and files Of course a new database is initially empty The next task would be to add images to your database To do this click on the A button in the local toolbar of the DATABASE VIEW or choose DATABASE WIZARD from the DATABASE menu Note If you have checked the appropriate option on the final step of the New DATABASE WIZARD the Database Wizard will automatically launch after your database has been
562. x and the following syntax Image lt Name gt For example use Image Name to get the file name of the image Attribute Description OID The Object Id OID unique numerical identifier of the image This identifier remains unchanged during the entire lifetime of the image in your database This identifier can for example be used to link your images to other information not stored in your database Name The file name of the image including the extension 193 NameNoExt Folder FolderComment FolderMediaID FolderMediaSer ial FolderFriendly Name FullPath URI Width Height Size CRC Date ShortDate LongDate Time BPP Colors 194 Example mypic png The file name without an extension This attribute is useful if you use serial numbers or ids to name your file name Example mypic wm The fully qualified name of the drive and folder where the image is stored Example cNimages The description you entered for this folder Example This folder contains my image collection The media ID label of the folder The serial number of the media created during formatting the media The friendly name of the folder The fully qualified path of the image including the file name Example ecNimageAmypic png The Universal Resource Identifier for the image as it is stored in the database Example file c images mypic png The width of the image in pixels The h
563. xtended regular expression syntax is in use the default then non greedy repeats are possible by appending a after the repeat a non greedy repeat is one which will match the shortest possible string For example to match html tag pairs one could use something like lt s tagname gt gt lt s tagname s gt In this case 1 will contain the text between the tag pairs and will be the shortest possible matching string Parenthesis Parentheses serve two purposes to group items together into a sub expression and to mark what generated the match For example the expression ab would match all of the string ababab Non Marking Parenthesis Sometimes you need to group sub expressions with parenthesis but don t want the parenthesis to spit out another marked sub expression in this case a non marking parenthesis expression can be used For example the following expression creates no sub expressions abc Alternatives Alternatives occur when the expression can match either one sub expression or another each alternative is separated by a I or a I if the flag regbase bk_vbar is set or by a newline 132 character if the flag regbase newline_alt is set Each alternative is the largest possible previous sub expression this is the opposite behaviour from repetition operators Examples a blc could match ab or ac abcldef could match abc or def Sets A set is a set of characters th
564. y or are restricted in other ways Some of the export filters also may create documents that contain additional messages or graphics 14 Registration Benefits When you register you copy of IMatch you will receive a personal user key and password or another token of authorization This token entitles you to receive free support via email access the protected forums on the photools com home page and for discounts on future versions You will also receive a fully functional version of Match and intermediate versions for free All versions and updates are delivered via Electronic Software Distribution ESD only There are no physical media or printed manuals If you want a printed manual print this Please be fair and register your copy when you continue to use it after the 30 day trial period Your payment will allow me to continue with the development of Match and to make it even better over time More information about the registration process is available at www photools com Provide Feedback I m really awaiting your feedback You are the user Let me know what you need in a software application like Match to work faster and better How you can save time with IMatch What functionality do you need to serve your customers better I know that there are image management solutions out there that cost 50 000 US for an initial license and can easily get up to 200 000 US for multiple users What can these system do what Ma
565. y name needs surrounding quotes Every time you now select the Animals but no fish category in the CATEGORY VIEW IMatch will calculate the formula and show the result in the thumbnail view When you add or remove images from the Animals category or any of its sub categories Match will automatically adjust to these modifications Even if you remove sub categories from the Animals category or add new categories the calculated formula will always reflect the actual database contents Linking Folders Consider the following formula Folder F Photos Animals If this formula is evaluated Match will look up all images in the given folder The category then contains all files in that folder If the folder has sub folders these sub folders are not included To add all sub folders recursively change the formula to RFolder F Photos Animals Not the R for Recursive in the prefix Note Match will display folder names always in form of a URI Universal Resource Identifier so f photos will become file f photos IMatch is prepared to handle images from different sources and hence all file names are stored in form of URI s internally Currently Match only supports normal files stored on one of your disk drives or external media or on your network In one of the future versions IMatch will directly support image links pointing to locations on the Intra or Internet 171 If you want to create categories based
566. y typing one or more characters of the file name Match will select the first file that matches your search string If you type follow up characters within 2 seconds Match will combine all typed characters to a search string For example to find all files starting with bea type B E A When you typed the B Match selects the first file name starting with a B When you type E and A the selection will move to the first file starting with BE or BEA respectively Tip The same technique works also for Tree Controls and all other thumbnail windows in IMatch You can also create a selector that searches for similar file names in the active folder only See section Selections Finding Images for more information about this subject Smart Sorting with Sort Presets Smart Sorting with Sort Presets The thumbnail viewer allows you to sort the images based on a variety of criteria and all combinations hereof The local toolbar of the thumbnail viewer contains a combo box with all Sort Presets currently defined When you select an entry from this sort preset combo Match will sort the thumbnails using the selected preset Sort Standard X Standard Smart File Name By Folder and File Name File Size largest first Date and time newest fi Figure 38 The Sort Preset Control IMatch s sorting capabilities are very flexible Instead of being limit by a set of fixed sort types you can create new sort presets that best
567. you want to import the schema information only Even if the XML document contains property records they will not be imported into your database Import with contents This option tells Match to import the schema and the data records contained in the XML document This will automatically populate the imported property sets Image File Mapping When you import an Image property set from a schema file IMatch needs to map the image records contained in the schema file to your current database In the schema file each image property set record contains the full file URI file path file name the media label the media serial number and the 32 Bit CRC checksum of the file This information allows Match to map the image property set records contained in the schema file to the file records contained in your database The fastest method is mapping files via CRC In this case Match takes the CRC checksum and scans your database for images with the matching CRC If such images are found the Image property set in your database is updated with the records from the schema file If you have modified some files in the target database the checksum match will fail If you know that you have manipulated images you can enable the match method that works on URI basis In this case Match loads only image records from the schema file that have a file with a matching URI in the target database Note When you load an schema with an Image property set
568. you want to share information about maker notes or you think that the maker notes of your images are not shown correctly in IMatch contact me via one of the support addresses given here in this online help or via the www photools com web site Supported Maker Note Types IMatch currently supports about 350 maker note fields from different vendors You can see the maker notes for your images in the Match EXIF editor Maker notes are displayed with a different background color IMatch currently supports maker notes from Nikon Canon Minolta Olympus Fuji Casio and some other camera models Not all cameras of each vendor are supported and not all fields have been decoded Maker Note Prefixes To distinguish maker notes from normal standard EXIF fields Match uses prefixes Each camera vendor has got it s own prefix For example for Nikon cameras Match uses the nik prefix Prefix Camera Vendor nik Nikon can Canon canr Canon RAW CRW files oly Olympus fuji Fuji cas Casio mrw Minolta 380 For example the Nikon maker note Focus Mode has the full name nik Focus Mode If you have more information about a maker note field please send your information to exif photools com I will add the maker note field in future releases of IMatch IMatch EXIF iewer Sy i xi YCbCr positioning Maker Notes can AF Point Center can Continuous Drive Mode Single can Contrast Normal can Digital Zoom Off AY Priority Contin
569. your computer Match will open each image in it s own Image Editor window The most frequently used imaging functions are always accessible from the Image Editor toolbar Pointer Drag Zoom Factor Zoom in Zoom Out Delet Lens RER Sas ooO O0 2 1 e s 100 z Navigation Buttons Fit to Window Save as Selection Types Save Figure 115 The Image Editor Toolbar When you open more than one image with the image editor at the same time you can navigate within this image series using the navigation controls in the toolbar You can also use the numeric keypad to navigate within the series lt NumPad 4 gt and lt NumPad 6 gt to move to the previous and next image and lt NumPad 8 gt lt NumPad 2 gt to move to the first and last image in the series Tip IMatch displays the dimensions and the memory usage of the current editor window in the application s status bar If you have opened an image series the status bar also shows the current position the current image for the current series 180 IMatch Tr001 ipg Read Only 101 File Edit Image Colors Selection Options Window Help D Bass ja illo Seo 0 BRE B soooR IE T 001 ipg Read Only 15 x 100 images 229 42 f 640 x 480 True Color 900KB W I T vA Figure 116 An image in the Image Editor Zooming To zoom your image you can use the zoom combo box in the Image Editor toolbar You can choose on pred
570. yright information Photographer Name Credit lines and the like over and over again you can save this information once as a preset and apply it later to any number of images To create a new preset enter the information into the appropriate fields in the IPTC Editor Then select an existing preset from the list of type in a new name Press SAVE to save the preset To apply a preset to the selected image s choose the name of the preset from the list and then press LOAD The IPTC Editor loads the contents of the preset and replaces the IPTC information of the current file s with the IPTC fields from the preset 369 Converting between different Character Sets The IPTC information contained in an image file may have been written using an application running on the Apple Macintosh or another Apple computer If this is the case and the text contains Umlauts or other special characters these characters may not be displayed correctly using the Windows ANSI character set If this is the case you can convert all textual content of your IPTC fields into the Windows character set by pressing the CONVERT TEXT FROM MAC TO WINDOWS BUTTON in the toolbar at the bottom of the IPTC editor If you want to make your IPTC information readable on the Apple Macintosh you can also convert from Windows ANSI to Macintosh character set by pressing the CONVERT TEXT FROM WINDOWS TO MAC BUTTON also in the toolbar Note These commands are only available if y
571. z Confoue For Help press F1 m e G Num la Figure 61 Showing all original images and the result set for the first original image The left part of the result window contains the ORIGINALS VIEW and the DUAL IMAGE VIEW The originals view contains all original images you have selected for your match If you run a selector that does not use original images the result window will not contain an ORIGINALS VIEW The right view of the result window contains a standard thumbnail viewer window To allow you to visually compare the results of your selection the image preview click on the VIEW tab in the result set always shows the current original image at the top and the image currently selected in the thumbnail viewer at the bottom see Figure 62 155 IMatch Results for Find images with similar colors 1 Database Edit Image Search view Result Window Scripting Options os relau 6 Han ao A Results for Fin B e Ola e gt LAEE sort Standard 640 x 480 6467KB 23 09 1998 18 02 30 29 KB 640 x 480 23 09 1998 18 02 D iDatalphotos Meer DY086 JPG DELTA 93 48 640x480 24 30 29 KB 23 09 15 Figure 62 The dual image preview in the result window With the local toolbar of the dual image preview you can zoom your images change the orientation of the split bar or expand the dual image view to take up the entire workspace Figure 63 IMatch Results for Find images wit

Welcome User Manual and Reference

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents